EFTA01225932

SOFTWARE HOUSE From Tyco Security Products C•CURE 9000 Version 2.50 Hardware Configuration Guide REVISION R0 SOFTWARE Hous UM-I30 RO EFTA01225932 C•CURE and Software House are registered trademarks of Tyco Security Products. The trademarks, logos, and service marks displayed on this document are registered in the United States [or other countries]. Any misuse of the trademarks is strictly prohibited and Tyco Security Products will aggressively enforce its intellectual property rights to the fullest extent of the law, including pursuit of criminal prosecution wherever necessary. MI trademarks not owned by Tyco Security Products are the property of their respective owners, and are used with permission or allowed under applicable laws. Product offerings and specifications are subject to change without notice. Actual products may vary from photos. Not all products include all features. Availability varies by region; contact your regional sales manager. C•CURE 9000 version: 250 Document Number: UM-130 Revision: RO Release Date: December 2015 This manual is proprietary information of Software House. Unauthorized reproduction of any portion of this manual is prohibited. The material in this manual is for information purposes only. It is subject to change without notice. Software House assumes no responsibility for incorrect information this manual may contain. 2015 Tyco Security Products. MI rights reserved. EFTA01225933 Table of Contents Preface 15 Finding More Information 16 Conventions 17 Software I louse Customer Support Center 18 Chapter 1 - The Hardware Pane 19 Using the Hardware Pane 20 Partitions 21 Hardware Tree 22 Hardware Tree Objects 22 Hardware Tree Tasks 23 Creating a New Object in the Hardware Tree 23 Deleting an Object in the Hardware Tree 24 Viewing a List of Hardware Tree Objects 24 Add or Remove Reader Card Formats 25 Using Drag and Drop in the Hardware Tree 27 Groups Tab for Hardware Devices 28 Editing a Hardware Device Group 28 Adding a Hardware Device to a Group 28 Hardware Groups Tab Definitions 29 Add a Hardware Device to Group from a Dynamic View 29 Refreshing the Hardware Tree 30 Hardware Folders 31 Controllers and Dependent Objects 31 Creating a New Hardware Folder 32 Creating and Using a New Hardware Folder Template 32 Renaming a Hardware Folder 33 Templates 34 Creating a Template 34 Editing a Template 35 Creating an Object from a Template 36 Using Templates for Controller Inputs, Outputs, and Readers 37 Deleting a Template 38 Viewing a List of Templates 39 Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers 40 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide 3 EFTA01225934 Privileges 41 Important Copy and Paste Process Information 41 Copy & Paste Tasks 41 Renaming Clusters and Controllers 51 Trigger Target Events 54 Chapter 2 - Maintenance Mode 57 Maintenance Mode Dialog Box 58 Maintenance Mode Overview 59 Maintenance Mode Objects Supported 60 Maintenance Mode Configuration Tasks 61 Configuring Privileges to Turn Maintenance Mode On and Off 61 Configuring the Application Layout for Maintenance Mode Filtering 62 Turning Maintenance Mode On and Off 62 STAR Cluster 63 STAR Controller or apC Controller 64 Taking an STAR or apC Controller Out of Maintenance Mode. 64 Viewing Maintenance Mode Objects in the Dynamic View 65 Filtering Partitions and Maintenance Mode Objects in the Dynamic View 65 Chapter 3 - Configuring Dialup 67 iSTAR Dialup 68 Dialup Limitations 68 iSTAR Dialup Configuration Sequence 69 Configuring the iSTAR Comm Port 70 STAR Comm Port State Images Tab 72 Configuring the Host Modem 73 Creating a Cluster for Dialup 76 Chapter 4 - Configuring CCURE iSTAR Clusters 79 Cluster Communications Overview 80 Cluster Configuration and Distributed Management 80 Networked STAR Controllers (Clusters) 81 Establishing Connections Via the Primary Communications Path 83 Setting Up the Primary Communications Path 84 Downloading Cardholder and Configuration Information 84 Maintaining Communications 84 Establishing a Secondary Communications Path 85 Distributed Cluster Management 86 Unassigned Folder 86 Configuring iSTAR Clusters 87 Creating an iSTAR Ouster 88 Creating and Using an iSTAR Ouster Template 89 4 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225935 iSTAR Cluster Editor 91 STAR Cluster Editor Tabs 91 Accessing the STAR Cluster Editor 91 iSTAR Cluster General Tab 93 STAR Cluster General Tab Tasks 93 Adding a Controller to a Cluster 93 Removing a Controller from a Cluster 93 STAR Cluster General Tab Definitions 94 iSTAR Cluster Communications Tab 95 Number of Failed Attempts Before Connection Fails 98 iSTAR Cluster - Cluster Tab 99 iSTAR Cluster Miscellaneous Tab 101 iSTAR Cluster Area Tab 102 Cluster Antipassback Communications Failure Mode 102 Global Antipassback for the Cluster 102 Area Tab Field Definitions 103 iSTAR Cluster Encryption Tab 105 iSTAR Cluster Triggers Tab 107 iSTAR Cluster Dialup Configuration Tab 113 iSTAR Cluster Status Tab 114 iSTAR Cluster State Images Tab 115 Chapter 5 - Configuring C•CURE iSTAR Controllers 117 Understanding C•CURE iSTAR Controllers 118 Configuration Overview for iSTAR Controllers 119 STAR Pro Configuration Summary 119 STAR eX and STAR Edge Configuration Summary 121 STAR Ultra Configuration Summary 122 iSTAR Controller Tasks 124 Creating an STAR Controller 124 Creating a Controller Template 125 Deleting an STAR Controller 126 Editing an STAR Controller 126 Viewing a List of STAR Controllers 127 Using the STAR Controller Context Menu 127 Using Set Property for an STAR Controller 130 Updating STAR Firmware (Ethernet Connections) 130 Updating STAR Firmware (Dial-up Connections) 132 STAR Firmware Updates Using ICU 135 Changing the Time Zone of an STAR Controller 136 iSTAR Controller Editor 137 STAR Classic Controller Editor 137 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Gukie 5 EFTA01225936 STAR Pro Controller Editor 137 STAR eX Controller Editor 138 STAR Edge Controller Editor 139 STAR Ultra Controller Editor 139 iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs 141 Basic Tabs 141 STAR Specific Tabs 141 STAR Controller General Tab 141 STAR Controller Triggers Tab 147 STAR Controller Status Tab 147 STAR Controller User Defined Fields Tab 151 STAR Controller State Images Tab 152 STAR Schlage Wireless PIMs Tab 153 STAR Controller Boards Tab (STAR Classic/Pro) 156 STAR eX and Edge Controller Inputs Tab 159 STAR Edge/eX Controller Outputs Tab 164 STAR Edge COMI/COM2/COM3 Tabs 167 STAR Edge Controller Wiegand Tab 169 STAR eX Controller Wiegand Tab 171 STAR eX COMI/COM2 Tabs 173 iSTAR Ultra Controller Editor Inputs Tab 178 STAR Ultra Controller Boards Tab 179 STAR Ultra Controller IP-ACMs Tab 181 STAR Ultra COMI/COM2 Tabs 181 iSTAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Editor 184 STAR Ultra ACM Board Editor 184 STAR Ultra ACM Board Wiegand Tab 184 STAR Ultra ACM Board RS-485 Tab 186 STAR Ultra ACM RS-485 Device Port Editor 188 STAR Ultra ACM RS-485 Device Port Tabs 189 STAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port Readers Tab 190 STAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port ACM EXT Tab 192 STAR Ultra ACM Board Status Tab 195 iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller ACM Board Editor 197 STAR Classic/Pro ACM Board Editor 197 STAR ACM Board General Tab 197 STAR ACM Board Inputs Tab 198 STAR ACM Board Outputs Tab 199 STAR ACM Board Readers Tab 200 STAR ACM Board ACM Ext Tab 201 iSTAR Input Board Editor 203 Accessing the STAR Input Board Editor 204 Configuring STAR Input Boards 205 STAR Input Board General Tab .206 iSTAR Output Board Editor 208 Accessing the STAR Output Board Editor 208 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225937 Configuring STAR Output Boards .210 STAR Output Board General Tab 210 iSTAR Ultra Wireless Readers 213 Assa Abby AperioTM Hubs and Wireless Readers 213 IR SchlageTM PIMs and Wireless Readers 213 STAR Ultra Schlage Wireless Types of Connections .214 Wireless - PIM400 and PIM400-TD2 214 Summary Tables 215 Readers per Controller/Panel 218 iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor (iSTAR Ultra only) 220 STAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor General Tab .220 STAR Aperio Hub Board Editor Input Tab 222 STAR Aperio Hub Board Editor Input Tab Definitions 223 STAR Aperio Hub Board Editor Readers Tab 223 STAR Aperio RS-485 Board Hub Editor Readers Tab Definitions 224 iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor 226 STAR PIM-485 Board Editor General Tab 226 STAR PIM-485 Board Editor General Tab Definitions 227 STAR PIM-485 Board Editor Input Tab 228 STAR PIM-485 Board Editor Input Tab Definitions 229 STAR PIM-485 Board Editor Readers Tab 229 STAR PIM-485 Board Editor Readers Tab Definitions 230 iSTAR Input Editor .232 Accessing the STAR Input Editor 233 Configuring an STAR Input 235 STAR Input General Tab .236 STAR Input Intrusion Zone Tab 237 STAR Input Triggers Tab 239 STAR Input Status Tab .239 STAR Input State Images Tab 239 iSTAR Output Editor 241 Accessing the STAR Output Editor 242 Configuring an STAR Output 244 STAR Output General Tab 245 STAR Output Status Tab 246 STAR Output State Images Tab .246 iSTAR Reader Editor 248 Accessing the STAR Reader Editor 249 Configuring STAR Readers .250 STAR Reader General Tab 250 STAR Reader I/O Tab 252 STAR Reader Keypad Tab 253 STAR Reader Triggers Tab 255 STAR Reader Status Tab 256 STAR Reader State Images Tab .258 iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Editor 260 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Gukie 7 EFTA01225938 STAR PIM-485 Reader I/O Tab 261 iSTAR Aperio Reader Editor 264 STAR Aperio Reader I/O Tab 266 STAR Aperio Reader Keypad Tab 268 Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices 270 Defining a Trigger for an STAR Device .271 Removing a Trigger .272 STAR Triggers Tab Definitions 272 State Images Tab for iSTAR Devices 274 STAR State Images Tabs Definitions .274 Customizing State Images for an STAR Device 274 Restore a Default State Image 275 Chapter 6 - Configuring the IP-ACM 277 IP-ACM Overview 278 Limitations 278 IP-ACM Offline Mode 279 Stored Credentials 279 Door Configuration 280 IP-ACM Configuration Sequence 280 Configuring the IP-ACM 282 iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor 285 Accessing the STAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor 285 STAR Ultra IP-ACM Outputs Tab 286 STAR Ultra IP-ACM Wiegand Tab 288 STAR Ultra IP-ACM RS-485 Tab 290 STAR Ultra IP-ACM Inputs Tab 291 STAR Ultra IP-ACM Status Tab 293 Chapter 7 - Configuring Advanced Processing Controllers (apC) 295 apC Panel Overview 296 Features of apC Panels 296 Inputs and Alarm Device States 299 Outputs and Readers 299 Optional Boards 300 apC Time Zones .300 Changing the Time Zone of an apC Controller .303 apC Time Zone Reports .303 apC Firmware Update 306 apC Controller Configuration Summary 308 apC Comm Port Editor 310 apC Comm Port Triggers Tab 315 apC Comm Port Status Tab 316 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225939 apC Comm Port State Images Tab .316 apC Controller Editor 318 apC Controller General Tab 319 apC Controller Communications Tab 321 apC Controller Inputs Tab 322 apC Controller Outputs Tab 323 apC Controller Readers Tab 323 apC Controller Add-On Board Tab 324 apC Controller Status Tab 325 apC Controller Triggers Tab 326 apC Controller Holiday Groups Tab .327 Configuring Holiday Groups for an apC Panel 327 apC Controller User Defined Fields Tab 329 apC Controller State Images Tab 330 apC Input Editor 332 apC Input General Tab 332 apC Input Board Triggers Tab 333 apC Input Board - Status Tab 334 apC Inputs State Images Tab 335 apC Output Editor 336 apC Output General Tab 336 apC Output Status Tab 337 apC Output State Images Tab 338 apC Reader Editor 340 apC Reader General Tab 340 apC Reader Input/Output Tab 341 apC Reader Keypad Tab 342 apC Reader Triggers Tab 344 apC Reader Status Tab 344 apC Reader State Images Tab 345 apC Add-on Board Editor 347 apC Add-On Board General Tab 347 apC Add-On Board Input Boards Tab 348 apC Add-On Board Output Boards Tab 349 apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab 354 apC Input Board Editor (132 and 18) 357 apC 132 Input Board General Tab 357 apC 132 Input Board 1-16 Inputs Tab 358 apC 132 Input Board 17-32 Inputs Tab 360 apC 18 Input Board General Tab 362 apC Star Coupler Board Editor 365 Star Coupler Readers Tab 366 Star Coupler Unsupervised Inputs Tab 367 Star Coupler Outputs Tab 367 Triggers Tab for apC Devices 369 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Gulls 9 EFTA01225940 Defining a Trigger for an apC Device 370 apC Triggers Tab Definitions 371 Mini Star Coupler Board Editor 373 Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler Editor 376 Chapter 8 - Configuring RM Reader LCD Messages 381 Reader LCD Message Set Overview 382 Reader LCD Message Set Editor 383 Accessing the Reader LCD Message Set Editor 383 Reader LCD Message Set Tasks 388 Creating a Reader LCD Message Set .388 Creating a Reader LCD Message Set Template 388 Configuring/Modifying a Reader LCD Message Set 389 Viewing a List of Reader LCD Message Sets 389 Deleting a Reader LCD Message Set 391 Using Set Property to Configure Reader LCD Message Sets 392 Changing the Language for the Default RM LCD Messages 393 Chapter 9 - Floors 395 Floors Overview 396 Configuring Floors 397 Creating a Floor .399 Creating a Floor Template 399 Deleting a Floor 400 Modifying a Floor 400 Viewing a List of Floors 400 Using Set Property to Configure Floors 400 Add Floors to a Group 401 Chapter 10 - Doors 403 Door Overview 404 Door Tasks 405 Creating a Door 405 Creating a Door Template 406 Deleting a Door 407 Modifying a Door 407 Viewing a List of Doors 408 Using Set Property to Configure Doors 409 Add a Hardware Device to Group from a Dynamic View 409 apC Door Editor 410 Configuring an apC Door 410 apC Door General Tab 411 apC Door Readers Tab 413 apC Door Timing Tab 415 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225941 apC Door Triggers Tab 416 apC Door Status Tab 416 apC Door State Images Tab 417 apC Door Visitor Management Tab 418 apC Door Definitions 421 apC Door Readers Tab Definitions 421 apC Door Tuning Tab Definitions 422 apC Door Triggers Tab Definitions 423 apC Door Trigger Properties 424 apC Door Groups Tab Definitions 425 apC Door Status Tab Definitions 425 apC Door State Images Tab Fields and Icons 425 iSTAR Door Editor 427 SPAR Door General Tab 427 STAR Door Timing Tab 429 STAR Door Areas & Zones Tab 431 STAR Door Double Swipe Tab 432 STAR Door Conditional Access Tab 436 STAR Door Triggers Tab 438 STAR Door Status Tab 440 iSTAR Door Monitoring Tab 442 STAR Door State Images Tab 442 STAR Door Visitor Management tab 443 iSTAR Door Definitions 446 STAR Door Timing Tab Definitions 447 STAR Door Areas and ZonesTab Definitions 448 STAR Door Double Swipe Tab Definitions 448 STAR Door Conditional Access Tab Definitions 449 STAR Door Triggers Tab Definitions 450 STAR Triggers Properties 451 STAR Triggers Actions 452 STAR Door Groups Tab Definitions 453 STAR Door Status Tab Definitions: 454 STAR Door State Images Tab Definitions: 454 iSTAR Aperio Door Editor 455 Chapter 11 - Configuring Advanced Door Monitoring 457 Understanding Advanced Door Monitoring 458 Features 458 Hardware Requirements 460 Advanced Door Monitoring Definitions 461 New Definitions, Acronyms, and Abbreviations 461 Advanced Door Monitoring Components 463 Lock Sensor Devices 463 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide 11 EFTA01225942 Lock Release Devices 463 Expanded Door Inputs 464 Advanced Door Alarms 465 Expanded Event Actions 466 Advanced Door Monitoring Configurations 467 Multiple RTE Configurations 467 Multiple DSM Configurations 468 DSM Configuration Guidelines 471 Configuration Overview 473 Configuring an Advanced Door 474 Sample Door 474 Configuring RM4-1 and RM4-2 Reader, Inputs, and Output 474 Configuring Lock Releases on the I/8 477 Configuring the Advanced Door 478 Understanding Timing 481 Kinds of Timing Options 481 Grace Time Options 482 Change Time Options 482 Shunt Time Options 484 Special Timing Considerations 484 Monitoring Door Activity 486 Using Monitoring Station Commands 486 Using Journal Reports 486 Understanding Door Alarms 487 Alarms 487 New Activity / Journal Reports 487 Managing Message Traffic 487 Clearing Alarms 491 Door Triggers 491 Privilege Modifications 492 Reports 493 Advanced Door Monitoring Details 495 Door Monitoring Screen 496 Chapter 12 - Configuring Elevators 499 Elevator Configuration Overview 500 Elevator Tasks 501 Creating an Elevator 501 Creating an Elevator Template 501 Deleting an Elevator 502 Modifying an Elevator 502 Viewing a List of Elevators .502 Using Set Property for Elevators .503 Adding Elevators to a Group 503 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225943 iSTAR Elevators 505 Configuring a Floor for an STAR Elevator 505 STAR Elevator General Tab 506 STAR Elevator Buttons Tab .510 STAR Elevator Status Tab 511 STAR Elevator Triggers Tab 512 STAR Elevator State Images Tab 513 STAR Elevator Definitions 514 apC Elevators 519 Configuring a Floor for an apC Elevator 519 apC Elevator General Tab .520 apC Elevator Buttons Tab 522 apC Elevator Status Tab .524 apC Elevator Triggers Tab 525 apC Elevator State Images Tab 525 apC Elevator Definitions 526 Index 531 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration GukM 13 EFTA01225944 14 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225945 Preface This C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide is designed for new and experienced security system users. The manual describes the various hardware objects in the C•CURE 9000 application program and presents procedures for configuring and using them. The manual assumes that you have already installed C•CURE 9000 and have familiarized yourself with the basic C•CURE 9000 information provided in the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide. In this preface Finding More Information 16 Conventions 17 Software House Customer Support Center 18 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Preface 15 EFTA01225946 Finding More Information Finding More Information You can access C•CURE 9000 manuals and online Help for more information about C•CURE 9000. Manuals C•CURE 9000 software manuals are available in Adobe PDF format on the C•CURE 9000 DVD. You can access the manuals if you copy the appropriate PDF files from the C•CURE 9000 Installation DVD English \ Manuals folder. The available C• CURE 9000 and Software House manuals are listed in the C• CURE 9000 Installation and Upgrade Guide, and appear as hyperlinks in the online.pdf file on the C•CURE 9000 DVD English \ Manuals folder. These manuals are also available from the Software House Member Center website Online Help You can access C•CURE 9000 Help by pressing Fl or clicking Help from the menu bar in the Administration/Monitoring Station applications. 18 Preface C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225947 Conventions Conventions This manual uses the f Aiming text formats and symbols. Convention Meaning Bold This font indicates screen elements, and also indicateswhen you should take a direct action in a procedure. Bold font describes one of the following items: • A command or character to type, or • A button or option on the screen to press, or • A keyon the keyboard to press • A screen element or name blue color text Indicates a hyperlink to a URL. or a cross-reference to a figure. table. or section in this guide. Regularitakfonf Indicates a new term. <text> Indicates a variable. The following items are used to indicate important information. Indicates a note. Notes call attention to any item of information that may be of special importance. NOTE Indicates an alternate method of performing a task. TIP Indicates a caution. A caution contains information essential to avoid damage to the system. A caution can pertain to hardware or software. Indicates a warning. A warning contains information that advises users that failure to avoid a specific action could result in physical harm to the user or to the hardware. STOP Indicates a danger. A danger contains information that users must know to avoid death or serious injury. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Preface 17 EFTA01225948 Software House Customer Support Center Software House Customer Support Center Telephone Technical Support During the period of the Agreement, the following guidelines apply: • Software House accepts service calls only from employees of the Systems integrator of Record for the installation associated with the support inquiry. Before Calling Ensure that you: • Are the Dealer of record for this account. • Are certified by Software House for this product. • Have a valid license and current Software Support Agreement (SSA) for the system. • Have your system serial number available. • Have your certification number available. Hours Normal Support Hours Monday through F riday. 8:00IMI. to 8:00 . EST. Except holidays. Emergency Support Hours 24 hours/day, seven days a week. 365 days/year. Requires Enhanced SW? x2r Standby Telephone Support (emergency) provided to Certified Technicians. For allother customers. billable on time and materials basis. Minimum charges apply- See MSRP. Phone For telephone support contact numbers for all regions. see 18 Preface C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225949 The Hardware Pane This chapter explains how to use the C•CURE 9000 Hardware pane to configure and manage the hardware components that are connected to the C•CURE 9000 server. In this chapter Using the Hardware Pane 20 Hardware Tree 22 Groups Tab for Hardware Devices 28 Hardware Folders 31 Templates 34 Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers 40 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter1 19 EFTA01225950 Using the Hardware Pane Using the Hardware Pane The Hardware pane displays a tree structure that shows how you have configured the hardware on the C•CURE 9000 system. For example, the hardware tree shows you which readers, inputs, and outputs are configured for each controller. You can use the Hardware Tree to navigate to hardware components you want to view or edit, or to create new hardware components, such as a reader you want to add to a controller. The Hardware Tree displays, by default, folders for Digital Certificates, Floors, Reader LCD Message Sets, and a Hardware Folder called Company Name. The folder called Company Name is the default container for apC Comm Ports and the Controllers, Readers, Doors, Elevators, Inputs, and Outputs. This folder is re-namable so that you can customize the C•CURE 9000 Hardware Tree to your site's needs. You can create additional Hardware Folders as needed. You can click on the E to the left of a folder or object to expand the tree. When you select a folder or object in the tree, you can right-click to display a context menu that shows the objects you can create under the selected folder or object. Example: If you right-click on the Company Name folder, the context menu shows that you can create a wide variety of Hardware Tree objects in this folder. Figure 1: Hardware Tree Context Menu • iKw we Lti • lienct•we i4nEwe Tree DL> 081W L caravv CK-14 ,inctaos Ede :ea dune( le 1. X blew LI unnoired fMnhdl 1.09 CORE rtbk eo< Com•Port IFC AMI New aoC Controls Terwtab The following topics provide more information about using the Hardware pane. • Partitions on Page 21 • Hardware Tree on Page 22 • Hardware Tree Objects on Page 22 • Hardware Tree Tasks on Page 23 20 Chapter! C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225951 Using the Hardware Pane Partitions If you partition the C•CURE 9000, a new Hardware folder is created for each Partition you create, and given the same name as the Partition. You can also create additional Hardware folders to contain hardware devices if you need to separately group hardware to reflect, for example, a multi-tenant building, a campus, or a multi-site company. You can use Partitioning and Privileges to control Operator access to each tenant's hardware folder(s) if you don't want one tenant to be able to view another tenant's security access hardware and personnel. The New Object Partition setting in the Administration Workstation determines the Partition in which an Operator can create objects, in addition to Hardware Tree objects such as Floors that reside at the root of the Hardware Tree. You can use the Privilege Editor to grant or deny an Operator access to a Partition, which affects whether they can view or create objects in that Partition. For example, you could create a privilege that has no access to the Partition (and Hardware folder) called Company A, but with full access to Company B, and assign it to Operators from Company B, so that they can view their configuration but not the configuration for Company A. See the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information about the Privilege Editor. You can also drag and drop objects to move them in the Hardware Tree. For example, you can move C•CURE Mobile objects from one Hardware folder to another. See Using Drag and Drop in the Hardware Tree on Page 27 for more information. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter! 21 EFTA01225952 Hardware Tree Hardware Tree The Hardware pane displays a tree structure that shows how you have configured the hardware on the C•CURE 9000 system. For example, the hardware tree shows you which readers, inputs, and outputs are configured for each controller. You can use the Hardware Tree to navigate to hardware components you want to view or edit, or to create new hardware components, such as a reader you want to add to a controller. The Hardware Tree displays, by default, folders for Floors, Digital Certificates, and a Hardware Folder called Company Name. The folder called Company Name is the container for your Comm Ports, Controllers, Readers, Doors, Elevators, Inputs, and Outputs. This folder is re-namable so that you can customize the C•CURE 9000 Hardware Tree to your site's needs. You can click on the a to the left of a folder or object to expand the tree. When you select a folder or object in the tree, you can right-click to display a context menu that shows the objects you can create under the selected folder or object. For example, if you right-click on the Company Name folder, the context menu shows that you can create a wide variety of Hardware Tree objects in this folder. If you Partition your C•CURE 9000, a new Hardware folder is created for each Partition you create. This hardware folder is given the same name as the Partition. You can also create additional Hardware folders to contain hardware devices if you need to separately group hardware to reflect, for example, a multi-tenant building, a campus, or a multi-site company. You can use Partitioning and Privileges to control Operator access to each tenant's hardware folder(s) if you don't want one tenant to be able to view another tenant's security access hardware and personnel. For example, you could create a privilege that has no access to the Partition (and Hardware folder) called Company A, but with full access to Company B, so that Operators from Company B can view their configuration but not the configuration for Company A. You can also drag and drop objects to move them in the Hardware Tree. For example, you can move C•CURE Mobile objects from one Hardware folder to another. See Using Drag and Drop in the Hardware Tree on Page 27 for more information. ■ Hardware Tree Objects on Page 22 ■ Hardware Tree Tasks on Page 23 Hardware Tree Objects Table 1 on Page 23 shows the types of objects (and objects that reside under them as child objects) in the Hardware Tree. 22 Chapter1 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225953 Hardware Tree Table 1: Hardware Tree Objects Object Description Hardware Folder See Hardware Folders on Page 31. Digital Certificate These objects reside in the Hardware Tree but they are aeated using Encryption Options from the Options& Tools pane. See the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide for more information. Floor See Floors Overview on Page 396. Reader LCD See Reader LCD Message Set Overview on Page 382 Message Set apC Comm Port See apC Comm Port Editor on Page 310. CCURE Mobile These objects reside in the Hardware Tree but they are documented in the C• CURE Mobile HandheldReader User device Guide. NOTE: C•CURE Mobile cannot be used in UL applications. STAR Cluster See Configuring iSTAR Clusterson Page 87. apC Controller See apC Panel Overview on Page 296. Hardware Tree Tasks ■ Creating a New Object in the Hardware Tree on Page 23 ■ Deleting an Object in the Hardware Tree on Page 24 ■ Viewing a List of Hardware Tree Objects on Page 24 ■ Using Drag and Drop in the Hardware Tree on Page 27 ■ Refreshing the Hardware Tree on Page 30 ■ Creating a New Hardware Folder on Page 32 ■ Creating and Using a New Hardware Folder Template on Page 32 ■ Creating a New Hardware Folder on Page 32 ■ Renaming a Hardware Folder on Page 33 Creating a New Object in the Hardware Tree Most objects in the Hardware Tree support a right-click Context Menu that shows you the actions you can perform on that object. The right-click Context Menu for an object has selections for objects that you can create under that object. For example, if you want to create an iSTAR Cluster in a Hardware Folder, right-click on the Hardware Folder and select iSTAR Ouster from the menu. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter! 23 EFTA01225954 Hardware Tree To Create a New Object in the Hardware Tree 1. Select the Folder or Object that will contain the object you want to create. 2. Right-click on the object and you should see in the Context menu a list of the objects that you can create. 3. Select the object you wish to create and select New from the menu. 4. The Editor for the object opens and you can configure the object. Deleting an Object in the Hardware Tree You can delete objects from the Hardware Tree if they are no longer needed. If you delete an object that has a child object (such as a Door or Reader) below it, those objects are also deleted. To Delete an Object in the Hardware Tree 1. Select the Folder or Object that you wish to delete. 2. Right-click on the object and select Delete. 3. A confirmation dialog box appears to confirm that you want to delete the object. Click Yes to delete the object, or No to cancel the deletion. 4. A dialog box appears to confirm the deletion. You can click: • OK to close the dialog box. • Print to print the deletion message. • Email to send the deletion message to the email address you have configured in the Customer Support section of the C•CURE 9000 System Variables. Viewing a List of Hardware Tree Objects You can view a list of any type of Hardware Tree object. To View a List of Hardware Tree Objects 1. Click the Hardware button in the Navigation Pane to open the Hardware Tree. 2. Use the drop-down list in the Hardware pane to select the object type that you want to list. 3. Click pa and a Dynamic View listing the object type appears in the content area. 4. You can filter, sort, group, and add columns to the list. See the C•CURE 9000 Data Views User Guide chapter on Dynamic Views for more information. The Dynamic View for an object type includes a column that displays the Time Zone in which the object resides. This can be useful in determining when an Event or Trigger is activated for an object in a different Time Zone than the C•CURE 90000 Server. If you right-click a row in the Dynamic View, a context menu is displayed. This menu contains a number of standard selections, as well as selections that are specific for different object types. See Using the Object List Context Menu in the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide for more information about the object context menu. 24 Chapter 1 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225955 Hardware Tree The context menu for iSTAR, apC, ASSA ABLOY, Connected Program readers allows you to select one or more readers and Add or Remove Cards formats. See Add or Remove Reader Card Formats on Page 25 for more information. Add or Remove Reader Card Formats 'the context menu for for apC, ASSA ABLOY, and Connected Program readers allows you to select one or more readers and add or remove Cards formats. For iSTAR, the APERIO, Schlage Wireless, Direct Connect Wiegand, and RM readers offer this selection. The context menu actions are equivalent to opening each of the selected readers and adding/removing the card format from each reader. The limits for card formats allowed for apC (8 per reader) and iSTAR (10 per reader) are enforced when using these menu actions. If the selected Card Formats cannot be added or removed from the selected readers, the confirmation dialog box for the Add/Remove displays "Already has card format" or or "Nothing to remove...". Errors that occur are shown in the confirmation dialog box as well. To Add or Remove Card Formats from a Reader via a Dynamic View 1. From the Hardware pane, use the drop-down menu to select the type of Reader you want to display in a dynamic View, and click giai. Example: If you select iSTAR Reader, the Dynamic View displays multiple types of iSTAR Reader. If you select iSTAR Aperio Reader, only that type of reader is displayed. 2. Select one or more readers from the list (you can use multiple selection keystrokes such as CTRL+Left-click and SHIFT+Left-click to select more than one reader). 3. Right-click the selected readers to display the context menu. X Debts a Ex psrt selectices.. 9terAssecietcns Itnitor Add teedFormat Remove C&d FOrrnbt Enable Keypad Gormands— Deg& Keypad Cunmands... Sec...text,* Keypad Coward causes Stew Ceara.Flter Causes 4. Select Add Card Format or Remove Card Format from the menu. 5. The Card Format Name Selection dialog box appears. Select (0) each Card Format that you want to add or remove from the readers, then click OK. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 1 25 EFTA01225956 Hardware Tree Otesd Sam Seabee had Fcaml Hem *ma I mp~Y Cng co nnt Gum hylwe 41 Nem 1I PaelkoNane I Demote • A I Oa AID Gamete 10:0 Dela& HO Capal0:0St4 lone llIDNemxd Caul Sabo 1•1Kemal deka It. HID SealGael DMA SealGael 36 tiWiemd WAN Said /Mb Dela& DMA 32 SHORE Cod Ft. 5-ea law426 DMA 26 blWaamdma SaMoobeaf aka Siva 35 IS Ward pcme-• Sere* Cad SalNu US NW • bi ad note SAWNHowe37 DOM Same Rose rat how r. SteardWand 2 Oat SwardWaved 26t* lona. r r ar 6. If you added readers, a confirmation dialog box appears, showing the formats added: Added cad bat to STAR Readerfla 1 Added cad keret Sake Woad 26 (Ddeut) Added cad facet Same Have 37 [DMA :71 Added cad keel to 67AR Aped° Reake141•7•S 465 Pal kal 2222 - Added cad lora Sawa Mcleod 26 (Dthoulti Added cad lash: Selate Rae 37 Pela• 7L-} Added cad foist to C01416TAR Realed•• t Added mauls.: Sinc•abegar4 26 [NW) Added cad toms: Son**. Howe 37 (RSA 7. If you removed readers, a confirmation dialog box appears, show the formats removed: • Ramon.d cad fame MO Seam Greed 36 (chit .±J - Ronyfed cad tame: Item rear 16TAR FIM416Reeder2f1MIC0142•• Removed cad kern* 'Same House 37 pdadr Removed cad Sent 'HID Service Gael 36 [Default e Raved cad leas hem reeds SSTAR FIM485 Reeda341M1113142-uthe 1' Removed cad last HID Sicr0cc Rowel 36 Peladf Aswer•esd iedIMIS 110M teak. WAR PIM4E6Readea•micomu• Reeved cad sweet MID Sinkre Gamed 36 NWT 2 Nand 0,0 koMWS11001(6,401 iSTAR FIM-485ReadiSPN1COMNAa Rimovoi cad Iota MID sins Gerd 36 B•180I O Raved cad tame: la ado %STAR PIM.405R•444:1/114:0•24re Removed cad kat 'HID Sitar Gad 36 (Waif Hothig to remove ham leS2I STAR FW.4 Recale0•141COM2tthe I' roc I II ! I Fold 8. Click OK to complete the Add/Remove. 26 Chapter 1 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225957 Hardware Tree Using Drag and Drop in the Hardware Tree (,11 can drag and drop objects to move them in the Hardware Tree, within certain restrictions. ■ You cannot move Root level objects such as Folders and Floors. ■ You cannot move objects in Hardware Folders to the Root level. ■ You cannot move objects that are Folders, such as a folder named C•CURE Mobile (but you can move their contents to another C•CURE Mobile folder). ■ You cannot move child objects of one Controller to another Controller. Some objects cannot be moved to another partition via drag and drop. For example, you cannot move NOTE an iSTAR Controller to a different Partition via drag and drop, nor can you move a non-partitionable object. Also, you cannot move an iSTAR Ouster to a different Partition if the Cluster is Enabled. To determine if you can drag and drop an object, click on the object and then drag to the right with the mouse. If the cursor appears, you can drag and drop the object. If you try to drop the object in an invalid location, the object instead remains in its original location. For example, if you tried to drop an apC Comm Port in an iSTAR Ouster, the object is not be moved, and an error message "Invalid Hardware Folder" appears. To Drag and Drop an Object in the Hardware Tree 1. Click the Hardware button in the Navigation Pane to open the Hardware Tree. 2. Click on an object to select it (the object will be highlighted when selected). 3. Drag to the right with the mouse. The drag and drop cursor lig appears. (If it does not appear, you cannot drag and drop the object.) 4. Drag the object to the location you want and release the mouse button. If you have chosen a valid location for the object, it then appears in the new location. Example If you drag an apC Controller to a different Hardware Folder, the apC and all its child objects are moved to that Hardware Folder. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter! 27 EFTA01225958 Groups Tab for Hardware Devices Groups Tab for Hardware Devices The Groups tab for a Hardware device lists all of the Groups to which the Hardware device currently being edited belongs. The Groups in the list are lists of Hardware devices of the same type (such as Inputs, Readers, and so on). Figure 2 on Page 28 shows the Groups tab for an iSTAR Input, which is typical for a Hardware device. Flgure 2: Typical iSTAR Group Tab -]here and Cb:e Name: Tanpertyo4 aelaiOixr Entle4 Pisan Deka 1%“•••• I Matti CimiemleiffilMinmem. ••••• •• • IL:=1/1• ••• ••••li Groups Y, Cart 1 Como column: to grout) b/ ham Nam• D•wirAon Hardware Groups Tab Definitions on Page 29 provides definitions for the fields and buttons on an iSTAR Device Group tab. Editing a Hardware Device Group You can edit any of the Groups in the list on the Groups tab by double.clicking on the Group's name in the list of Groups. Adding a Hardware Device to a Group To add a Hardware device to a Group, you need to either: ■ Edit the Group by opening the Configuration pane and using the Group Editor. Or ■ Display a list of devices of that type and use the context menu Add to Group selection. You cannot add the Hardware device to a Group from the Groups tab (the device is already a member of every Group that is listed here). See Add a Hardware Device to Group from a Dynamic View on Page 409 for more information. 28 Chapter 1 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225959 Groups Tab for Hardware Devices Hardware Groups Tab Definitions Table 2 on Page 29 provides definitions of the fields and buttons on the Groups tab for a Hardware pane device. Table 2: Groups Tab Definitions FlekUButton Icon Description Card View it i Displays the list of Groups in Card View. Print a l. Prints the list of Groups. /4— ± /. Group It i Click to enable Grouping of theist. You can drag a column heading to the area labeled Drag columns to group by here to group theist by that heading. Fite( Click to display the (her bar. See the C.CURE 9000 Data Views Guide for more information about filtering V a Dynamic View fist. Row Selector • Click to sektcla row in the table. Count This field displays the number of Groups in the list. Name This column lists the names of the Groups of which this device is a member. Description This column lists the descriptions of the Groups of which this device is a member. Add a Hardware Device to Group from a Dynamic View When you select a I lardware device from a Dynamic View and then right-click for the context menu, Add to group appears as a menu selection. This function enables you to add the object(s) to a Group. More more information about the Group function see Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 28. To Add a Hardware Device To a Group 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select a Hardware device from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click mai to open a Dynamic View showing all objects of that type. 4. Right-click on the object that you want to add to a Group and select Add To Group. A list of Groups is displayed. 5. Select the Group from the list, and the object is added to that group. 6. Click OK to confirm your choice. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 1 29 EFTA01225960 Groups Tab for Hardware Devices Refreshing the Hardware Tree To make sure that all the folders and objects in the Hardware Tree are accurately displayed on the screen, you can Rtfivsh the Hardware Tree. To Refresh the Hardware Tree 1. Click the Hardware button in the Navigation Pane to open the Hardware Tree. 2. Right-click on Hardware and select Refresh Tree from the context menu. The Hardware Tree is updated. 30 Chapter1 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225961 Hardware Folders Hardware Folders You can create additional Hardware Folders if you need to organize the Controllers and access hardware into separate folders. When you create a new Partition, a new Hardware Folder is automatically created to contain objects that reside in that Partition. A Hardware Folder pane displays a tree structure that shows how you have configured the hardware on the C•CURE 9000 system. For example, the hardware tree shows you which readers, inputs, and outputs are configured for each controller. You can use the Hardware Tree to navigate to hardware components you want to view or edit, or to create new hardware components, such as a reader you want to add to a controller. The following topics provide more information about Hardware folders. ■ Controllers and Dependent Objects on Page 31 ■ Creating a New Hardware Folder on Page 32 ■ Creating and Using a New Hardware Folder Template on Page 32 ■ Renaming a Hardware Folder on Page 33 Controllers and Dependent Objects Dependent (child) objects that are managed under iSTAR and apC controllers include inputs, outputs, readers, boards, elevators, floors and doors. Controllers are parent objects to thee and are created first. The parent objects are created within the company name folder in the hardware tree and must be created before the child objects in their respective classes, such as apC and iSTAR. For iSTAR controllers, a cluster object encompasses a system of one or more iSTAR controllers, determining communications between individual controllers. To configure an iSTAR controller in the C• CURE 9000 system, you must first create a cluster. Each cluster is configured as either Non-encrypted (iSTAR Classic/Pro and Ultra) or Encrypted (iSTAR eX/Edge and Ultra) controllers. The cluster must have a controller that is the primary communication path to the host and may have an optional secondary communication path. The secondary communication path can be set to the same controller as the primary path. In the instance of apC controllers, a communications port must be set up before these controllers and their dependent objects can be configured. Elevators are similar to doors, but have many exit points which are determined by the floor objects. Floors are created independently but are added into the system through the selection of elevator buttons. Elevators also require readers, inputs, and outputs. The inputs are used to determine at which floor the cardholder exited and the outputs are used to control the elevator buttons. Elevators (configured on iSTAR or apC controllers) have not been evaluated by UL. NOTE Doors which are configured as part of an apC or iSTAR controller have properties that are unique to each controller, whereas a Door object is a base class that recognizes only those properties which are common to all controllers. Accordingly, door objects are created last because each door object requires the controller-specific dependent objects to C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter! 31 EFTA01225962 Hardware Folders exist for the door. Doors typically require readers, inputs and outputs. The inputs are used for door state monitors and exit devices. The outputs are used for locks and automatic door openers. Example: C•CURE 9000 dependent object hierarchy examples: ■ iSTAR Cluster>iSTAR Controller>Readers, Inputs, Outputs> iSTAR Doors ■ apC Comm Port>apC Controller>Readers, Inputs, Outputs>apC Doors Creating a New Hardware Folder Perform the following steps to create a new Hardware Folder. To Create a New Hardware Folder 1. Click the Hardware button in the Navigation Pane to open the Hardware Tree. 2. Right-click on Hardware in the tree and select Hardware Folder>New from the context menu. The Hardware Folder dialog box opens. 3. Type the name for the new folder into the Name field. 4. Optionally type a description for the new folder into the Description field. 5. Click Save and Close to save the new folder. 6. Right-click on Hardware and select Refresh Tree from the context menu. The Hardware Tree is updated to display the new folder. Creating and Using a New Hardware Folder Template You can create a Hardware Folder Template that you can use as a basis for creating additional Hardware Folders. In a template, you can fill in field values that will have the same values for all Hardware Folders, and then use the template when you are creating new Hardware Folders. To Create a New Hardware Folder Template 1. Click the Hardware button in the Navigation Pane to open the Hardware Tree. 2. Right-click on Hardware in the tree and select Hardware Folder>New Template from the context menu. The Hardware Folder dialog box opens. 3. Type the name for the new folder into the Name field. 4. Optionally type a description for the new folder into the Description field. 5. Click Save and Close to save the new folder template. To Use a Hardware Folder Template to Create New Hardware Folders 1. Click the Hardware button in the Navigation Pane to open the Hardware Tree. 32 Chapter 1 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225963 Hardware Folders 2. Right-click on Hardware in the tree and select Hardware Folder from the context menu. The next level menu appears listing the Hardware Folder Templates you have previously created under the — Templates category. 3. Click on the name of the Hardware Folder Template you wish to use as the basis for the new Hardware Folder. 4. Type the name for the new folder into the Name field. 5. Optionally type a description for the new folder into the Description field. 6. Click Save and Close to save the new folder. 7. Right-click on Hardware and select Refresh Tree from the context menu. The Hardware Tree is updated to display the new folder. Renaming a Hardware Folder You can rename a I lardware Folder to customize it to your site's needs. Typically, you will want to rename the default folder, Company Name, with a more suitable name. To Rename a Hardware Folder 1. Click the Hardware button in the Navigation Pane to open the Hardware Tree. 2. Right-click on the folder that you want to rename, and select Edit from the context menu. The Hardware Folder Editor dialog box opens. 3. Type the new name for the folder into the Name field. 4. Optionally type a description for the folder into the Description field. 5. Click Save and Close to save the renamed folder. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter! 33 EFTA01225964 Templates Templates The C•CURE 9000 Hardware pane supports the concept of Templates for almost all objects in the Hardware Tree. A Template is a re-usable object you can create and configure with settings that you would like to use when creating other objects. For example, if all of the iSTAR Readers are the same reader type, using the same card format, you could create a Reader Template that contained those settings, and apply that Template to any iSTAR Reader object that you create, to make Reader configuration faster and more consistent. The Template objects you create do not appear in the Hardware Tree, but they are available to be applied when you create an object of the same type as the Template. The following topics provide more information about using the Hardware Templates. ■ Creating a Template on Page 34 ■ Editing a Template on Page 35 ■ Creating an Object from a Template on Page 36 ■ Using Templates for Controller Inputs, Outputs, and Readers on Page 37 ■ Viewing a List of Templates on Page 39 ■ Deleting a Template on Page 38 Creating a Template To create a new Template for an object, it is necessary to create an instance of the parent object for the object so that the object type for the Template appears in the Hardware Tree. For example, to create a Template for the iSTAR eX Controller object type, you need to create an iSTAR Cluster that can contain iSTAR eX Controllers first, then create the iSTAR eX Controller Template. "MI To Create a Template 1. In the Navigation pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Navigate to the Hardware folder that contains the object type for which you want to create a new Template. Example: If you want to create a Template for an iSTAR eX Controller, navigate to a folder that contains an iSTAR Cluster for iSTAR eX Controllers. 3. Select the parent object type (in this case, iSTAR Cluster) and right-click to display the context menu. 4. Select the object type for the Template from the context menu, then select New Template. See the example in Figure 3 on Page 35. 34 Chapter 1 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225965 Templates Figure 3: Creating a New Controller Template ° A ID New Redeem Fade( t epC ComrePoite CCURE Mobile ha ape ill ❑ • ej Eck Delete Se property Add to gap Eyed selection.. Fed in Audt loo.. 21 Doom Fed inJoumat.. _ __, Data VieW 'STAR Contiolei • IJ ronfigurallon New Template video contrelei template 5. The editor for the object opens the new Template. 6. Configure any settings you want to include in the Template. 7. To save the new Template, click Save and Close. The new template appears under — Templates in that object type's context menu drop-down list in the Hardware tree. For example, in Figure 3 on Page 35, an iSTAR Controller Template named controller template appears in the context menu. Editing a Template If you have created a Template and need to make changes to it, you need to locate the Template to edit it. Because you cannot view Templates in the Hardware Tree, and most default Dynamic Views do not list Templates, you may need to create a new Dynamic View that shows the Templates you have created. This section will use Inputs as an example, and show you how to create a Dynamic View that lists the Input Templates along with the Controller Inputs. Note that you can create a Dynamic View that shows only apC Inputs or iSTAR Inputs by choosing that object type, or you can create a View that lists all Input (or Door or Reader) objects, then filter that view to show only the Inputs (or Doors or Readers) of a particular type. To View Templates in a Dynamic View 1. Navigate to Data Views and choose Dynamic View from the Data Views drop-down list. 2. Click New. The Dynamic View editor opens. 3. Type a name for your Dynamic View in the Name field. Include 'with Templates' in the name of the Dynamic View so that you can find the view again easily. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter! 35 EFTA01225966 Templates Example: Inputs Dynamic View (with Templates) 4. Type a description of the view in the Description field. 5. Click 0 in the View Type field. A dialog box appears listing the object types you can choose for your Dynamic View. 6. Click on 'Click here to filter data' and type the first letter of the name of the object type for which you wish to create a Dynamic View. The list of object types is filtered to show only the types that begin with that letter. Example: To create a list of Inputs, type 'r then click on Input 7. Click Add to add a column to the Dynamic View. 8. Click 0 in Column Property, then click Name to add the Name Property to display in the column. 9. Click Add to add a column to the Dynamic View. 10. Click 0 in Column Property, then click Template to add the Template Property to display in the column. 11. You can click Add again to add more columns as needed. 12. Click Save and Close to save the Dynamic View. 13. In the Data Views pane, click ea t to display a list of your Dynamic Views. 14. Double-click on the Dynamic View you just created. When it appears, it will list all of the objects of the object type you specified, and the Template column identifies which objects are Templates. 15. Find the Template you wish to edit, and double-click it to open the editor to edit the Template. 16. When you have completed making changes to the Template, click Save and Close to save your changes. Creating an Object from a Template You can create objects such as Controllers, Doors, and Elevators from Templates. To Create an Object from a Template 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Navigate to the Hardware folder that contains the parent object in which you want to create the new object from a Template. 3. Select the parent object and right-click to display the context menu. 4. Select the object type and click the Template you want to use from the context menu. Example: In Figure 3 on Page 35, you could select controller template to create an iSTAR Controller from a Template. 5. The Editor for the object opens so that you can edit the new object. The settings from your Template are already configured. 6. Configure any additional settings. 38 Chapter1 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225967 Templates 7. '1'o save the new object, click Save and Close. Using Templates for Controller Inputs, Outputs, and Readers You can use templates as the basis for objects that you create while configuring Controllers in C•CURE 9000. For example, if you are configuring an iSTAR Controller that has an 1/8 board, you can create an Input template and use that template as the basis for one or more iSTAR Inputs on that 1/8 board. Typically, you create these objects from a tab within the Controller editor. The tab where you create such an object contains a table that includes a Template column for you to identify a Template to use as a basis for the objects you create. Example: The apC Controller editor has tabs for Inputs, Outputs, and Readers. On each of these tabs, there is a Template column that lets you select a Template to use for creating new objects. Figure 4 on Page 37 shows an example of an apC Outputs tab with an apC Template selected in the Template column. Figure 4: apC Outputs Template ' et. Carman • meal jriSen•rdOut E.ad Pon. Dwst COT.M.3C" Ifpit Ou:ds Rea*, 4,310, Stn i SWsa Syeaw)ei CluleASOkipis _ OgivomDips Index Cakand m.. O O et 0•Serape .pc ciao tens. ID O I itC Del -al IOCINN Tana,. ID n mccup...scri at Oa/ iferOde ID S O at Illturncil SCOW. Tonle.. ID 16 • .tasSect IOC la w Tenn. ID o _s•ccvon<ix CC 7nWe ID ,RC CUD/ • ID - 4 halo Palm - CIO In tan ckes 4, &*E hecia DAY en* nin By default, when you select a Template for one object in the list, the same Template is added as the basis for each object. You can use more than one Template by configuring the objects for which you want to use one Template, then choosing one or more different Templates for the remaining objects. To Use Templates for Controller Inputs, Outputs, or Readers 1. From the Hardware pane, open the Controller Editor for the Controller you want to configure. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter! 37 EFTA01225968 Templates 2. Click the tab in the Controller Editor for the objects you want to configure. Example: In the apC Editor, click the Outputs tab to configure Outputs on this apC. 3. To specify a Template for an object you want to configure, click in the Template column of an object that is not yet configured (Configured column value is D. 4. Click 0 to select a Template. A dialog box opens listing the available Templates. See Figure 4 on Page 37 for an example. 5. Click on a Template in the list to select it. That Template is added to every object in the table that is not already configured. 6. Select the Configured column 2 for each object you want to configure with the selected Template. 7. If you want to select a different Template for any of the remaining objects in the table that you have not yet configured (Configured column value is 0): a. Click in the Template column of that object, then click 0 to select a Template. A dialog box opens listing the available Templates. b. Click on a Template in the list to select it. That Template is added to every object in the table that is not already configured. c. Select the Configured column 2 for each object you want to configure with the selected Template. 8. Repeat Step 7 for any additional objects for which you want to choose a different Template. 9. To edit any of the objects, click 0 in the Edit column for that object. The editor for that object opens. The fields that were configured in the Template are already configured in the object you are editing. 10. When you have completed configuring an object from the Template, click Save and Close in the object editor to save the object. 11. Click Save and Close in the Controller editor to save the your changes to the Controller. Deleting a Template You can delete a template that you have created by using the right-click context menu in a Dynamic View. To Delete a Template 1. In the Navigation pane, select the type of object you want to delete from the drop-down list. (For example, in the Hardware pane, choose apC Comm Port from the drop-down list.) 2. Click the Search pane. 3. Select the Template check box 4. Click 0 to display a list of the objects that includes the Templates you have defined. 5. Select the Template(s) from the list that you wish to delete. 6. Right-click on a selected Template to bring up the context menu for the object. 7. Select Delete from the menu to delete the Template. 38 Chapter1 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225969 Templates Viewing a List of Templates You can include Templates in a list of objects of a type. Typically the Dynamic View for an object type does not include Template objects. You can use the Template check box to cause the Dynamic View to list all the Templates you have created. To View a List of Templates 1. In the Navigation pane, select the type of object you wish to view from the drop-down list. (For example, in the Hardware pane, choose apC Comm Port from the drop-down list.) 2. Click the Search pane. 3. Select the Template check box 4. Click 0 to display a list of the objects that includes the Templates you have defined. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter! 39 EFTA01225970 Copying. Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers The C•CURE 9000 supports the ability to duplicate an existing configured iSTAR Cluster with all of its included Security Objects - Controllers, Boards, Inputs, Outputs, Readers, Doors, Elevators, Triggers (plus associated Events). ■ The Copy & Paste context menu selection can be used to make a duplicate of a Ouster and its Child Objects on the same partition on the same system. ■ The Copy To context menu selection can be used to make a duplicate of a Ouster and its Child Objects on a different partition on the same system, using Paste From. ■ With a flash drive or other portable memory device or shared drive, the Copy To and Paste From context menu selections can be used to duplicate the Ouster and Children on another system. ■ The Rename context menu selection is used to give these duplicated Objects new names. ■ If you are extensively using the Copy & Paste and Rename features, it is good practice to establish a naming convention for the site and then rename based on that convention. Example: Create the new Clusters and Controllers with -Bldg appended to all of the objects. While Copying and Pasting you can use Search and Replace to change -BLDG-Copy-datelime to -BLDG-A. See Using Search and Replace on Page 43. The Export and Import of Clusters does not include all the doors, elevators and events (configured via NOTE triggers). Copy & Paste includes all of those objects. When an iSTAR Cluster is selected and Copy & Paste is used, the following objects that belong to that cluster are copied and pasted: ■ All configured Controllers plus the following components of each Controller: • Boards (all the boards including GCM, ACMs, Aperio Hubs or Schlage PIMs, etc.) • Inputs (including I/8s, I/8-CSIs) • Outputs (including R/8s) • Readers (all types) • Doors • Elevators • Triggers, including their associated Events and actions When an iSTAR Controller is selected and Copy & Paste is used, the following objects that belong to that Controller are copied and pasted: ■ Boards (all the boards including GCM, ACMs, Aperio Hubs or Schlage PIMs, etc.) ■ Inputs (including I/8s, I/8-CSIs) ■ Outputs (including R/8s) ■ Readers (all types) ■ Doors ■ Elevators ■ Triggers, including their associated Events and actions 40 Chapter 1 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225971 Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers Privileges To use the Copy & Paste, Copy To, Copy From and Rename features, you must be an Administrator or an operator that has a Privilege with those Permissions granted for iSTAR Controller and iSTAR Cluster. The iSTAR Controller and iSTAR Cluster Privilege Permission features are located in the Privileges dialog box Defaults tab. Click on the Hardware>Controllers>iSTAR. Locate the iSTAR Controller and iSTAR Cluster for the Permissions for the Privilege. See the C•CURE 9000 Software Corifiguration Guide Privileges' chapter for more information. Important Copy and Paste Process Information ■ All the child objects that are copied and pasted follow the same naming convention (i.e., Copy [date-time] will be appended to their original names.) ■ If copying and pasting on the same system, the objects are pasted in the same partition as the source objects. If you are pasting on another system, the pasted objects will have the same partition as the object or folder on which user right-clicked and selected Paste From. ■ MI the export files are .xml files. ■ During import, the secondary objects must exist on the destination system. If not, then the import of object that refers to secondary object will be aborted. For example, Event A is configured to activate Event B. Here Event B is the secondary object and it must already exist otherwise the import will be aborted. ■ Copy & Paste copies all triggers assigned to the object, including the events and event actions, but not all of the event action targets, such as a sound object. ■ When copying a panel which has panel events associated with it, the panel events are copied but not assigned to the panel. The panel must be assigned manually after the copy is complete and host events must be reconfigured. Copy & Paste Tasks When you copy a Controller, or a Controller in a Cluster, the MAC address is also copied. 0 The copied Controller MAC address must be changed to a unique MAC address before the unit can be enabled. You can perform the following tasks using Copy & Paste: ■ Copying and Pasting on the Same System on Page 41 ■ Copying to a Mapped Drive or Another System Using a Flash Drive on Page 45 ■ Copying and Pasting from Partition to Partition on Page 49 The same procedures can be used to copy and paste individual Controller configurations. NOTE Copying and Pasting on the Same System The following procedure is used to create a copy of the following. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter! 41 EFTA01225972 Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers • A Ouster, plus all the objects within that Ouster with the same names as the existing ones with -Copy [date- lime] appended to their names. • A Controller with -Copy [date-time] appended to its name, plus all the objects within that Controller. Example: For a Cluster named Ouster5, the new cluster's name will be Cluster5-Copy [date-time], and if the Ouster has a Controller named Controller/, the new name will be Controller/-Copy [date-time]. For a Controller named Controlleth, the new name will be Controller6-Copy [date-time]. To Create a Copy of an Existing Cluster or Controller on the Same System 1. Right-click on an existing Ouster, or Controller, in the Hardware tree and select Copy & Paste from the context menu. Figure 5 on Page 42 shows selecting to copy and paste a Ouster. Figure S: Copy& Paste Context Menu Selection C'CURE 9000 Administration Station Operator Help Hardware it! • lam ante zJ - Hiram' Tree 1 Seed. • Hardware El Digdal Certificates Li CompanyName • Lj ISTAR Container • j-j Cluster- Eck . E E X Delete tie set property LJ Unassigned rx Add to gray Feint stem— Fnd ii keit Log... FSIn mum4... Options It Took -• Tum Maintenance Mode On Video ,j ) Card Fomwts a Rename 1.O configuration STAR Edge Controler Data News 1'1 6TARe%CantroIe ill' Hardware i STAR Lida Contr0ler The Search and Replace dialog box, as shown in Figure 6 on Page 43, appears. 42 Chapter! C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225973 Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers Figure 6: Search and Replace Dialog Box an. ,49.1.2_41 Oared berg coped Chafer-1 Search For. Replace web OK Cancel Using Search and Replace Prior to the paste operation, the system provides the ability to replace a particular string in the names of objects being copied in the objects being pasted. Normally, the pasted objects will have the string -Copy [date-time] appended to the names. The Search and Replace dialog box allows you to replace the name. - Any string can be entered in the Search for field, and the string that it will replace in the Replace with field. - Objects in conflict will have -Copy [date-time] appended to their names - Partial matches are considered. For example, if Door is entered in the search field and Dr in the replace field with an object named FrontDoorReader then it is renamed as FrontDrReader. Selecting the Cancel button will abort the Paste operation. - If both the Search for and Replace with fields are left blank, the object names are appended with -Copy [date-time" - Both Search for and Replace with fields must have a string entered or both fields must be blank. Leaving one field blank is not allowed by the C•CURE 9000 software. If the Copy & Paste operation is stopped before it completes, the entire operation is NOTE canceled. 2. Click OK. If you selected to search and replace, the system searches for the string and performs the replace while copying the Cluster or Controller. The Copying Status Window, shown in Figure 7 on Page 44, appears. The time required depends on the complexity of the Cluster or Controller. The time is 10 to 60 seconds for most Clusters. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapterl 43 EFTA01225974 Copying. Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers Figure 7: Copying StatusWindow 3. Click OK when the object is displayed as copied, as shown in Copying Status Window on Page 44. Figure 8: Copying Status Window - Complete When the copy is complete, shown side-by-side in Figure 9 on Page 45, all Readers, Inputs, Outputs, Doors, etc. have -Copy [date-limel appended to their names. 44 Chapter! CCURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225975 Copying. Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers Figure 9: Hardware Tree - Copy Complete • [3 CompanyName • ]1 Clusterl • Cluster4 • n Edge1 • C] Edge1-Copy-2014-11-07-15-23-55 • rift Doors • Doors • doorl door1-Copy-2014-11-07-15-23-55 • ED Inputs • it Inputs • iSTAR Inputl-Edge1 L iSTAR Input1-Edge1-Copy-2014-11-07-15-23-55 • Tamper-Edge1 0 E Tamper-Edge1-Copy-2014-11-07-15-23-55 • C yY Outputs • Outputs • Output1-Edge1 Output1-Edge1-Copy-2014-11-07-15-23-55 • Output2-Edge1 )10.) Output2-Edge1-Copy-2014-11-07-15-23-55 • La Readers • IA Readers N STAR Reader1-Edge1 N STAR Reader1-Edge1-Copy-2014-11-07-15-23-55 N COM1-Edge1 N Egg COM1-Edge1-Copy-2014-11-07-15-23-55 N COM2-Edge1 COM2-Edge1-Copy-2014-11-07-15-23-55 gig COM3-Edge1 COM3-Edge1-Copy-2014-11-07-15-23-55 agg GCMain-Edge1 N GCMain-Edge1-Copy-2014-11-07-15-23-55 Copying to a Mapped Drive or Another System Using a Flash Drive To Copy a Cluster or a Controller to a Mapped Drive or Another System 1. Right-click on the Cluster and select Copy to. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 1 45 EFTA01225976 Copying. Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Contraliars Figure 10: Copy To Menu Selection DU • iSTAR Cluster vla • Hardware Tree l Search • Hardware N Ej Digital Certificates N Floor • IM CompanyName - Clusterl - Cluster2 - Cluster3 - CI - Clu a Edit Clu X Delete Unassi Set property Sri Add to group Export selection... Find in Audit Log... Find in Journal... Turn Maintenance Mode On Copy & Paste... Copy To... la Rename The Export Window, shown in Figure 11 on Page 47, opens. 2. Select the Flash Drive (or the mapped drive), and edit the He name if desired. 48 Chapter 1 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225977 Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers Figure 11: Copyto Flash Drive er4 to XML or C tl r This PC r Removable Disk IF:) Search Removable Disk Rl P Organize New folder - • Name Date mocifted Type This PC I boot 6/24/2014 1226PM File folder m Dattop I eh 6/21/2014 1226PM File folder Documents I sources 6/24/20141243 PM File folder . Downloads Music • Ja support 6/24/20141244 PM File folder - pictures Videos Local Disk (C:) DATAPART I (D ISRemovable Disk } Techpubs (Warp • File name STAR Chaster Cluctra Save as type MIL lie Caen° Hide FNders Save Cancel 3. Click Save. The Copy To Status Window, shown in Figure 12 on Page 47, appears. Figure 12: Copy To StatusWindow to the file 'STAR Cluster C oX Bin LOP 4. Click OK when the object is displayed as copied. 5. Insert the Rash drive into the system where you want to copy the objects. Or, browse to the mapped drive on the system. In this example, a simulated hardware folder is representing the other system. 6. Right-click on the target folder in the new system's Hardware tree and select 'STAR Cluster>Paste From. 7. Select the Flash Drive (or the mapped drive), the .xml file, and click Open as shown in Figure 13 on Page 48Figure 13 on Page 48 C•CURE9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 1 47 EFTA01225978 Copying. Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers Figure 13: Paste From Window r II* PC r Removable Mine v C. Search Removable Dick (DI ATI Organize - New folder - EJI • yes Techpubs OxilprlOISIsaredl Name Date modified L boot 6/24,20141126 PM :U Dm PC 6/24/20141L26 Ph• • Dattop SOU/CH 6/24/20141L43 PM j Documents A. support 6/24/20141L44 PM • Download: re Music j. Pictures ■ I /5)MR Chute. Clusteribri4 I 11/20/2014 3415PM j Videos ♦V Local Disk (Cl/ DATAPARTI di Removable Disk IL) Y Techpubs f‘(lideelODShared) (Pd Freeiconfig fl‘bos2dtwood\ TED\2/10.Hal • fide name iSTAR Citrate Cluster/am! XML Ides (•amp Canter The Search and Replace dialog box appears. For information about Search and Replace, see Using Search and Replace on Page 43 8. Click OK in the Search and Replace dialog box. If you selected to search and replace, the system searches for the string and performs the replace while copying the objects. The Pasting Status Window, shown in Figure 14 on Page 48, appears. Figure 14: Pasting Status Window 1ST CopyPaste-2014.11-20.1S•19.12xml OK Pnat Co 9. Click OK in the Pasting Status Window when the object is displayed as pasted. The copied Cluster appears under the simulated folder in the Hardware tree on the system. 48 Chapter! C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225979 Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers Copying and Pasting from Partition to Partition To Copy and Paste for a Partition to a Partition 1. Right-click on the Cluster or Controller and select Copy To. The Export Window appears. 2. Select a folder on the system to save the .xml file, and click Save, as shown in Figure 15 on Page 49. Figure 15: EXp0etWindOW Jr; 44 Local Disk (C) a foidte_for_copy_paste Search folder for. Organize f• New folder • i s Local Disk (C) Name Date modified Type ,ja 9000 Projects 0k American Dyne No dems match your search. o ja del I des k Cj foldufoccom 0 J. HP Universal Pr js ICU inetpub 0j KtyCodePacka 0 LicenseGenerai MSOC ache v < File named 'STAR Cluster Oustedma Save as type MI files Caen° Hide Folders 3. Select the other partition where you want to copy the object. 4. Right-click on the Hardware folder in the partition and select iSTAR Cluster>Paste from, as shown in Figure 16 on Page 50Figure 16 on Page 50 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 1 49 EFTA01225980 Copying. Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers Figure 16: Partition Selection Operator Help Server Options Partttba xL Views • Filter r e i gen Obiect Partition: office A_partition Drag columns b grot Nan lit Hardware Folder V C Default Hardware Tree Search • Hardware Li Digital Certificates Floor • Li CompanyName Clusterl Clsku2 Cluster3 ay Clustet4 ay Ouster6 ausierScoprke-tildp-C ~ mo dkoAfter-yt. . PJ simulate_anc Edit Li Unassigned X Delete ra, Export selection... Find in Audit log... A Options • Tools Find in Journal... 4,^deo apC Comm Port di k Hardware • STAR Cluster New Paste From— ri P AnNtit and Tames The Paste From Window appears. 5. Browse to the .xml file you saved on the system. 6. Select the .xml file and click Open. The Search and Replace dialog box appears. For information about Search and Replace, see Using Search and Replace on Page 43 7. Click OK in the Search and Replace dialog box. If you selected to search and replace, the system searches for the string and performs the replace while copying the objects. The Pasting Status Window appears. 8. Click OK in the Pasting Status Window when the object is displayed as pasted. The copied object appears in the Partition. 50 Chapter 1 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225981 Copying. Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers Renaming Clusters and Controllers If you did nut use the Search and Replace option in the Copy & Paste procedure, you can use the Rename selection on the Context menu. The following procedure renames -Copy Ida te-timej that was appended to the end of a Cluster and its objects during Copy & Paste to -Bldg-C. To Rename Clusters and Controllers I . Right-click on the object and select Rename, as shown in Figure 1 on Page 51. Figure 1: RenameCluster Cluster4 Cluster6 a Edit X Delete • Set property j Add to group t. Export selection... 7-47 Find in Audit Log... Find in Journal... Turn Maintenance Mode On 7 • 0-12- Copy & Paste... Copy To... Itra6- • Rename Itra6- iSTAR Edge Controller ► Itra6- Itra6- iSTAR eX Controller ► iSTAR Ukra Controller ► Cop Outputl-iSTAR Ultra ACM1-Ultra6-Copy The Renaming dialog box appears. 2. Click Search and Replace to open the Search and Replace dialog box, as shown in Figure 2 on Page 52. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 1 51 EFTA01225982 Copying. Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers Figure 2: Cluster Renaming (STAR Cluster Renaming - Cluster6-Copy-2014-11-20-12-57-4 I a Save and Close Name Cloae4 -Carg-2014-11- -5747 Swab iepr40141140424747 Raplaaelt 46;4 g, um, am w inn tango T•ires ac 3. Enter the new name in the Replace with field (in this example it's -Bldg-C). 4. Optional selections • Click on the Match case check box to match the case entered. • Click in the Ignore Trigger Targets check box to ignore Trigger target events. Use caution if renaming original Events. The Events may be linked to other objects. Use the Show Association feature to determine if they are. See the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide for information about using Show Association. 5. Click OK. An informational dialog box appears displaying all the objects that were modified with the new name. 52 Chapter 1 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225983 Copying. Pasting. and Renaming Clusters and Controllers Figure 3: Rename Results Search and Replace X 1 0 The following objects were modified: (1) iStarController. (1) iStarGCBoard. (5) iStarInput. (3) iStarComBoard. (2) iStarAperioHubBoard. (1) iSTARAperioReader. (1) iStarUltraACMBoard. (1) iStarinputBoard. (1) iStarOutputBoard. (2) iStarReader. (4) Output. (1) iStarDoor. (1) Elevator. OK 6. Click OK. 7. Verify that the rename changes are complete. Click on the tabs in Renaming dialog box. Because Ignore Trigger Targets was selected in the Search and Replace dialog box, the NOTE original Trigger Target Events were not renamed, but another copy of the Events exist with the -Copy [date-lime] appended to the end. Rename Results The next series of graphics illustrate the effect of the Rename operation. Figure 4: Controller Tab and Input Tab NMI ClateaStoPytad¢C ni Matson GCMarvitraGa:19-C Ttope•iitnitachre UlnE•Bklg-C Mi Motes on COtli.USBIOL Gabran6-Bit< ivies cellublaS 4185 Pon 1-libabillS}C • INCO011irberrEalg-C hiPiats OA C01121.26-816K ▪ 13 4.614RS 185 Pon laa6-131:1,C / • kW. ced401.0.5 485 Poi 241•1441,44 • i C0182-LbseG-Eldg-C A III Urea CV1 STAR Ulna ACM1krise64.4-C I3 /461A5 CZ Pat 24.1frafrelcirC Lt STAR InP41.61014 Ube ACIAlandad9C • i STAR Ur, ACMI•barrEelgt STAR InPANSAA Ube ACM14.**640{ I. STAR Dace Patl.STAR UlnACMI-Ulent6444-C a STAR 10043-41AR We ACM witra6404 MI STARInn Sown-STAR Dew* PatlISTAR Ur, ACMI•AraGalg-C a STAR Ime441014 lb. XM14111,46-el®-C OM STAR Gaut SaardhSTAR Demos F1/441.67AR lib% ACMI•Utre.-81:1}C ▪ InOS cm STAR Urn Porll•STAIR Via ACIII4Ate6-B1094 ▪ WPM ce STAR leout Beardl-g5174‘ Demo Pall-ISTAR W. ACIII-Ubtek4C ▪ ce STAR CUM sachnoa (*ice PerthS-TAR Uln ACIII4ftfre6a9C C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 1 53 EFTA01225984 Copying. Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers Figure 5: Outputs Taband Readers Tab Convokes l Inpuni Outputs Reeds, I Dora Bova° I Trelno I I Caftan DOOM Ebro,. Was on GO4on-Ulta6-810g-C it Readers on GCMon-UNIa6-B1:1K a Cuoas m comtasSeme-C e Ratans on CC.41-Utre6-81dg-C IM Damn on HublaS 485 Pon 1110444:4C • IQ Radon on 1-1.011:$ 485 PC•114/4/46-810O{ Oaos on C0112-Ultia61314-C I STAR Agno R•Eloil+kt.1425 485 Pat 1-UW41-146K In Q.Von on Hubl-R5 4E6 Pon 2-Uta6-Eldg{ Readers on 03142-Utro6434-C • Nab* on STAR UNta ACMI-Vitnealo-C III Realms on lit I-RS 485 Pat 2411n6-B1AK 0.44•14$TAR ACM14.4016-EWC • MI Rados on WARM. AC141-L1n5-81do-C t 04p424STAR IN* ACI4I-UtaGE44-C STAR Reedr1STARVbe ACM14.1tra6-8142-C t OupasEkSTAR Utra ACM14.11webairC • a Radon on STAR Dna Poen .STAR Den ACAII-Uloa6462-C 004,4104STAR IIee ACM1-1.1ba6-Eldg-C STAR ReaderneSTAR Donne Pont STAR Uba 4041-UtreGairC I. Das* on STAR Dow. PcollISTAR Se A041-1.0146-140g-C Oa* on STAR Oita S000lliSTAA DOW* nixtuSTARI.40 A0/1•Ukc•64:309-C Figure 6: Doors Taband Elevators Tab &OS= I Mow I Was I Rookies Don lEknoloto frown Catalan I Int I Oulptto I Reads, I Dom • ti Donn*, UlOa6-162C • aerators on lAsa6-Elth,C • GI ckoiG416pC • la aleton4-1,O24 Irtand Roeder STAR Anew Rooderl-HublaS 485 Pon 1-UOn6.14:loC Inband Roadie STAR Roadul -STAR Is. ACMnUbsialcipC a Dow Sava Wooed STAR wsd4TAR Mrs AC/11•Ultadg-C a Door Lock Roby QµWiWSTAR Ube ACM1-1.16a6-146,C Figure 7: Triggers Tab Ccattolsrs hrouts I OutPitsj Readers I-Doors IElevatca rning ess Source Pieleny Value Action Dead Utra6-Bldg-C OnlmeStatus Offline AavateEve cootraler_nactive-Coor2014-11-20-12-57-t7) doc.6-8Idg•C AlarmStateStatus Forced AcbvateEve Dosr_foroed-Copt2014.11.20-12-57-47 docr6-Eklg-C AlarmStateStatus Ask/Open AdrvateEve Door_Keld-Copy-2014.11.20-12.57.47 Trigger Target Events Notice that the original Trigger Target Events were not renamed, but another copy of the Events exists with the [- Copy-date-lintel stamp. The date-lime stamped ones can be further renamed and used as desired. 0 Use caution if renaming original Events. The Events may be linked to other objects. Use the Show Association feature to determine if they are. See the C• CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide for information about using Show Association. 54 Chapter 1 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225985 Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers Figure 8: Trigger Targets Battery Low Journal Trigger Event The default Inactive Mned Battery Low Journal Trigger event Intrusion Zone Error Journal Trigger The default Inactive Mned Event Intrusion Zone Error Journal Trigger event Tamper Inactive Mned Door_Held Inactive Armed Door forced Inactive Aimed controller_inactive Inactive Armed controller_inactive-Copy-2014-11-20- Inactive Armed 12-57-47 Door forced-Copy-2014-11-20-12-57- Inactive Mned 47 Door_Held-Copy-2014-11-20-12-57- Inactive Mned 47 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 1 SS EFTA01225986 Copying. Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers 56 Chapter 1 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225987 2 Maintenance Mode This chapter describes how to configure and use Maintenance Mode. In this chapter: Maintenance Mode Dialog Box 58 Maintenance Mode Overview 59 Maintenance Mode Objects Supported 60 Maintenance Mode Configuration Tasks 61 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 2 57 EFTA01225988 Maintenance Mode Dialog Box Maintenance Mode Dialog Box The Maintenance Mode dialog box, shown in Figure 1 on Page 58, opens when Maintenance Mode is selected or deselected. See the following for more information: ■ Maintenance Mode Overview on Page 59 ■ Maintenance Mode Objects Supported on Page 60 ■ Maintenance Mode Configuration Tasks on Page 61 Figure 1: Maintenance Mode Dialog Box (Cluster) id Saw aro, Owe Cheek to otgects b te :laced m Martenrce Mae Untied' P. atom to be Veen o CM:ffittaYee Mc* SOW al 0weint NI ?STAR Edge p GPew g •Poem Felum-STAREdoeil p Teneg4TAR Ethpe p &tonal Baby LconSTAR Edges plIEFAJ MenenSTAR Ete tl p 6TC.R hvANSTAR Edge SI p osef.se. P .STAR ires3-STAP (*en • lajamikewistait UP 11 g FA, Reby CasbokSTAII Edge tt r.7 FN Had , KertSTAR Edge II • kernel Peery CaA.STAREcte gl p cvo.i.sTAR Edossi liettp424STAR Edge tl :J 58 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225989 Maintenance Mode Overview Maintenance Mode Overview Maintenance Mode is used to limit information about an object displayed on the Monitoring Station. Maintenance Mode only affects what is reported at the Monitoring Station. Some examples for using Maintenance Mode: ■ To Not display information about: • Parts of the system being installed by an integrator • Hardware being serviced, requiring maintenance, or being tested. ■ To only monitor information about hardware being serviced, requiring maintenance, or being tested. ■ To view information about all objects, including those tagged Maintenance Mode. Placing an object into Maintenance Mode does not prevent actions from occurring. For example, if an event assigned to an intrusion zone in Maintenance Mode activates an output that turns on the building-wide evacuation alarm, the activation of the output will still occur. Arming and disarming of inputs and events do not affect what is reported when the object is activated. In other words, arming of an event by an event assigned to a Maintenance Mode intrusion zone will be reported as activity. Maintenance Mode is only reported in Journal messages when an object is tagged Maintenance Mode. When the object is taken out of Maintenance Mode it is not reported in a Journal message. Operator Privilege and Application Layout Filtering assignments determine whether or not an object in Maintenance Mode is viewable as being in Maintenance Mode on the Monitoring Station. Only Monitoring Station operators with the correct privilege and Application Layout Filtering can view objects in Maintenance Mode. See the following for more information: ■ Maintenance Mode Objects Supported on Page 60 ■ Maintenance Mode Configuration Tasks on Page 61 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 2 59 EFTA01225990 Maintenance Mode Objects Supported Maintenance Mode Objects Supported The following objects are supported in Maintenance Mode: ■ apC Comm Ports ■ Events ■ iSTAR PIM-185 Readers ■ apC Controllers ■ Floors ■ iSTAR Schlage Readers ■ apC Add-On Boards ■ Intrusion Zones ■ iSTAR Schlage Doors ■ apC 132 Input Boards ■ Keypad Commands ■ iSTAR Device Ports ■ apC 18 Input Boards ■ iSTAR Clusters ■ iSTAR ACM Boards ■ apC R48 Output Boards ■ iSTAR Controllers ■ iSTAR GCM Boards ■ apC R8 Output Boards ■ iSTAR Doors ■ iSTAR Input Boards ■ apC Inputs ■ iSTAR Inputs ■ iSTAR Output Boards ■ apC Readers ■ iSTAR Readers ■ iSTAR Ultra ACMs ■ apC Doors ■ iSTAR Aperio Hub ■ Outputs ■ Areas ■ iSTAR Aperio Readers ■ Star Coupler Ministar ■ C•CURE Mobile ■ iSTAR Aperio Doors ■ Star Coupler Star ■ Elevators ■ iSTAR Comm Ports ■ Star Coupler WPSC 80 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225991 Maintenance Mode Configuration Tasks Maintenance Mode Configuration Tasks Operator privileges and application layout assignments must be configured to use, view, or filter objects in maintenance mode. The following tasks are described: ■ Configuring Privileges to Turn Maintenance Mode On and Off on Page 61 ■ Configuring the Application Layout for Maintenance Mode Filtering on Page 62 ■ Turning Maintenance Mode On and Off on Page 62 ■ Viewing Maintenance Mode Objects in the Dynamic View on Page 65 ■ Filtering Partitions and Maintenance Mode Objects in the Dynamic View on Page 65 Configuring Privileges to Turn Maintenance Mode On and Off Only operators who have the Turn Maintenance Mode On and/or Turn Maintenance Mode Off privilege assigned to them can put an object into Maintenance Mode and take an object out of Maintenance Mode. The following procedure describes how to configure the privilege to include Maintenance Mode. To Configure the Privilege 1. Click the Configuration pane. 2. Select Privilege from the Configuration drop-down menu to open the Privileges dialog box. 3. Click the Defaults tab. 4. Under Classes, click an object to view the permissions for that object. 5. Scroll down to locate Turn Maintenance Mode On and Turn Maintenance Mode Off. 6. Click in the Grant column next to Turn Maintenance Mode On and/or Turn Maintenance Mode Off to enable the permission(s) for this Privilege configuration. 7. See the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for complete Privilege configuration information. 8. Click Save and Close when done with the configuration. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 2 81 EFTA01225992 Maintenance Mode Configuration Tasks Configuring the Application Layout for Maintenance Mode Filtering Application layouts can be configured to allow operators to filter objects in Maintenance Mode in the Monitoring Station and the Administration application Dynamic Views. The following procedure describes how to configure the application layout to allow Maintenance Mode filtering. The Operator must have the correct privileges to use filtering. See Configuring Privileges to Turn Maintenance Mode On and Off on Page 61. See the C• CURE 9000 Data Views Guide for more information about configuring the application layout. To Configure Maintenance Mode Filtering in the Application Layout 1. Click the Data Views pane. 2. Select Application Layout from the Data Views drop-down menu. 3. Edit or add an Application Layout. 4. Click the Filtering tab. 5. See the C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide "Application Layout chapter" for information about the Filtering tab fields. 6. Click Save and Close when done with the configuration. Turning Maintenance Mode On and Off To use Maintenance Mode, operators must have the correct privilege permissions NOTE assigned to them. See Configuring Privileges to Turn Maintenance Mode On and Off on Page 61 There are several ways to turn Maintenance Mode on and off: ■ Right-click on an object in the object tree and select Turn Maintenance Mode On or Turn Maintenance Mode Off. ■ Right-click on an object in the Dynamic View and select Turn Maintenance Mode On or Turn Maintenance Mode Off. ■ Click in the Maintenance Mode column check box in the Dynamic View. 82 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225993 Maintenance Mode Configuration Tasks ■ Open the object editor and select the Maintenance Mode check box. Deselect the check box to turn it off. iSTAR Cluster To Put a Cluster Into Maintenance Mode 1. Click the Hardware pane. 2. Locate the Ouster in the Hardware nee, or in the Dynamic View. 3. Right-click on the Ouster name and select Turn Maintenance Mode On to open the Maintenance Mode dialog box. 4. The Maintenance Mode dialog box opens with the Ouster and all of its components/objects selected. 5. Click Save and Close. To Take a Cluster Out of Maintenance Mode 1. Click the Hardware pane. 2. In the Hardware tree, or in the Dynamic View, right-click on the Ouster and select Turn Maintenance Mode Off to open the Maintenance Mode dialog box. 3. Click Deselect All. 4. Click Save and Close. To Add an iSTAR to a Cluster in Maintenance Mode 1. Right-click on the Ouster name and select Turn Maintenance Mode Off to open the Maintenance Mode dialog box. 2. Select the check box next to the iSTAR name. 3. Click Save and Close. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 2 63 EFTA01225994 Maintenance Mode Configuration Tasks iSTAR Controller or apC Controller To Put iSTAR or apC Components/Objects into Maintenance Mode 1. Click the Hardware pane. 2. Locate the controller in the Hardware tree or in the Dynamic View. 3. Right-click on the iSTAR or apC, controller and select Turn Maintenance Mode On to open the Maintenance Mode dialog box. 4. Click the iSTAR or apC, controller name, or click Select All to select all components and objects belonging to the controller. Or, click on the separate components and/objects that you want to put into Maintenance Mode. 5. Click Save and Close. Taking an iSTAR or apC Controller Out of Maintenance Mode. To Take an iSTAR or apC Components/Objects Out of Maintenance Mode 1. Click the Hardware pane. 2. In the Hardware tree, click on the Cluster where the iSTAR, or apC, controller belongs. 3. Right-click on the controller and select Turn Maintenance Mode Off to open the Maintenance Mode dialog box. 4. Deselect the controller, components and/or objects. 5. Click Save and Close. Putting Objects (Doors, Readers, Events, Elevators, etc.) into Maintenance Mode To Put Objects into Maintenance Mode 1. Click the Hardware pane. 2. Locate the object, right-click on it and select Turn Maintenance Mode On. To turn off Maintenance Mode, right-click on the object and select Turn Maintenance Mode Off. 64 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225995 Maintenance Mo0e Configuration Tasks Viewing Maintenance Mode Objects in the Dynamic View The Dynamic View can be customized to display objects that are in Maintenance Mode. See the C• CURE 9000 Data Views User Guide for information about adding the Maintenance Mode column to the Dynamic View. Filtering Partitions and Maintenance Mode Objects in the Dynamic View Application Layout Filtering configuration allows Operators to filter a Dynamic View to show only selected partitions and/or to view objects that are in Maintenance Mode in the Administration application and in the Monitoring Station. Only Operators with the correct privilege and Application Layout assigned to them are allowed to use filtering. See Configuring Privileges to Turn Maintenance Mode On and Off on Page 61 and Configuring the Application Layout for Maintenance Mode Filtering on Page 62 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 2 65 EFTA01225996 Maintenance Mode Configuration Tasks 66 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225997 3 Configuring Dialup This chapter explains how to configure dial up for use with the iSTAR Pro and the iSTAR Ultra SE (Pro Mode only). In this chapter iSTAR Dialup 68 iSTAR Dialup Configuration Sequence 69 Configuring the iSTAR Comm Port 70 Configuring the Host Modem 73 Creating a Cluster for Dialup 76 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 3 67 EFTA01225998 STAR Dialup iSTAR Dialup Dialup enables you to connect the C•CURE 9000 to the iSTAR Pro (with a 56K PCMCIA modem card) and iSTAR Ultra SE (in Pro Mode with a USB-based modem card) controllers at remote locations using modems and standard telephone lines. The C•CURE host and iSTAR phone line/modem connection is based primarily on Windows standard telephony communications and Routing and Remote Access Service (RRAS). ■ The lowest level of the communications, which deals with modem states, is handled by the Microsoft Windows Telephony Application Programming Interface (TAN). TAPI supports the use of any type of standard modem on the host. ■ The higher level of the communications, which deals with the transmission of C•CURE relevant data, is handled by Microsoft RRAS. RRAS treats dial-up connections as if they were network connections. Consequently, the C•CURE host views the connection established between the iSTAR and itself via a phone line and modem as any other network connection. ■ Serial port-based dialup modems and USB port based modems are supported. Dialup Limitations ■ Dialup is only supported on Windows Server 2008 R2, 2012, and 2012 R2. ■ Dialup is not supported in configurations using redundancy. ■ Dialup can be used only as the primary connection method or the secondary communication method, not as both. Example: - Dialup is used as the primary communication method and there is no secondary communication method. - TCP/IP is used as the primary communication method and Dialup is used as the secondary communication method. ■ A cluster used for dialup can only contain one iSTAR controller. ■ Fast Personnel download is not supported. ■ Dialup is not supported on a separate RRAS server. 68 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01225999 STAR Dialup Configuration Sequence iSTAR Dialup Configuration Sequence The configuration information in this section only applies to the C•CURE 9000, and assumes that NOTE you completed the operating system setup as described in the Operating System Setup for Dial up Guide. This guide is located in the C•CURE 9000 Installation DVD English \ Manuals folder. The dialup configuration sequence is described in Table 3 on Page 69. Table 3: STAR Dialup Configuration Sequence Step Task See... 1 Configure the Comm ports to which the host modems are attached in C•CURE 9000 Configuring the STAR Comm using the STAR Comm Port Editor. Port on Page 70 2 Configure the host modems in C•CURE 9000 using the Host Modem editor. Configuring the Host Modem on Page 73 3 Create an STAR Cluster. Click the Dlalup tab to configure dialup settings. Creating a Cluster for Dialup on Page 76 4 Configure the STAR controller. STAR Pro Controller Editor on Page 137 5 1. Open the STAR Cluster you created in Step 3. Configuring iSTAR 2. Click the Communications tab. Clusters on Page 87 3. Add the controller you configured in Step 4. 4. Configure the communication with the host. 6 Configure/Grant Privileges for the STAR Controller dialup permissions using the C•CURE 9000 Software Privilege editor. Configuration Guide 7 Configure Events to download to the controller and select the dial up conditions using the C•CURE 9000 Software Event editor. Configuration Guide Select the Dialup settings from the Event Editor General tab. 8 Configure the System Variables Dlalup settings (dial-up user name. password. domain. C•CURE 9000 System grace seconds. cycle seconds) to use RRAS. Maintenance Guide C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 3 69 EFTA01226000 Configuring the STAR Comm Port Configuring the iSTAR Comm Port Use the iSTAR Comm Port dialog box, shown in Figure 17 on Page 70, to communicate with a serial port connection. See Table 4 on Page 70 for descriptions of the fields on the Comm Port editor General Tab. • The iSTAR Comm Port only supports a serial port. NOTE • Triggers are not supported. Figure 17: STAR Comm Port Editor Dialog Box Name Desamtion A r &Sod Petition. Defect r- Simenance Mode General I Grows I Ste maps I —Communications Type 6' Sent{Pat Pat Settings Pon Timeout Delay Time (1110 sec) lo ii Quist) Pon. ICOM2 Table 4: STAR Comm Port Field Definitions Field Description Name The Name field will reflect the Comm Port you select. Description Enter a textualcomment about the controller, such as its location or purpose. This text is for information onty. 70 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226001 Configuring the STAR Comm Port STAR Comm Port Field Definitions (continued) Field Description Enabled This setting determines whether or not the STAR Comm Port is able to providecommunication between the STAR Controller and the C•CURE 9000 Server. Select Enabled to set the Comm Port online. To take the Comm Port offline, clear the Enabled selection. If the STAR Comm Port is currentty in use by STAR controllers, you must disable all the controllers before you attempt to take the Comm Port offline. If any STAR controllers are enabled when you attempt to take the STAR Comm Port offline, an error message isdisplayed -'Port cannot be disabled with enabled controllers. Please disable controllers first. When the controllers are re-enabled they willdo a full personneldownload' The message explains that when you re-enable the STAR Comm Port and then re-enable the STAR controllers, each controller will perform a full personnel download. NOTE: Fast Personnel Download is not supported. Maintenance Click to put the STAR Comm Port into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 2: Maintenance Mode for more information. Mode Partition This read-onty field identifies the Partition. Communica ions Type Serial Port Selected bydefault. Port Settings Port Timeout The Port Tlmoout Delay Time is the extra interval that the host waits for a response from the STAR panel after sending a Delay Time message to the panel. If the host does not receive a response in the specified time, the host re-transmits the message or declares (1/10 sec) a communications failure. This field allows you to set the timeout delay for all panels that use a specific port. Software House recommends that you set this period to 20 (2 seconds). However, d you require additionaldelay time because STAR controllers run on a Digiboard, Equinox board, or over a network, you may need to increase this value. Keep this value as small as possible, or system performance may be affected. If your panelgoes into communications failure often, try setting this value between 30 (3 seconds) and 50 (5 seconds). Range: 0 through 99. Default: 0. Comm Port Select the Communications Serial Port from the drop-down list. The Name field will reflect the port number that you select. The range is COM1 to COM256. To Configure the iSTAR Comm Port 1. Open the C•CURE 9000 Administration Hardware Pane, select the Hardware Folder in which you want the iSTAR Comm Port to reside. 2. Right-click the folder to display the context menu, click iSTAR Comm Port and, then click New. The iSTAR Comm Port editor appears. You may also choose New Template. For further information about creating Templates, see Creating a Template on Page 34. 3. Enter a unique Host Communications Port name in the Name field (required). 4. Enter a textual description of the Comm Port (optional) in the Description field. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 3 71 EFTA01226002 Configuring the ISTAR Comm Port 5. You can set a Port Timeout Delay Time in tenths of a second units by entering it in the field or by using the up/down mows. 6. Select the Comm Port from the drop-down list. 7. Select the Enabled check box to put the Comm Port online after you have completed the configuration procedure. 8. Click Save and Close. 9. Go to Configuring the Host Modem on Page 73. iSTAR Comm Port State Images Tab The State images tab, shown in Figure 1 on Page 72, provides a means to change the default images used to indicate communication port states. These images appear on the Monitoring Station and change according to the state of the object that they represent. Figure 1: ISTAR Comm Port State Images Tab To Change a State Image 1. Double-click the existing image. A Windows Open dialog box appears allowing you to browse for a folder in which you have placed replacement images. 2. When you locate the replacement image, select it and click Open to add it to the image listing. 3. If you are done editing the iSTAR Comm Port, click Save and Close to save the Comm Port's configuration. Alternatively, if you want to save the Comm Port and create a new one, click Save and New. The Comm Port Editor remains open to allow you to create a new Comm Port. To Restore to the Default Image ■ Right-click on the new image and select Restore Default 72 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226003 Configuring the Host Modem Configuring the Host Modem The Host Modem dialog box, shown in Figure 18 on Page 73, lets you specify the communication port, the dialing direction, and the phone numbers the i51'AR Pro/SE Pro Mode can use. Hyphens, parentheses, and spaces are not allowed in phone numbers. NOTE The Host Modem dialog box definitions are described in Table 5 on Page 73. Figure 18: Host Modem Dialog Box a Mom Modem 0,11In Modem "Raven:1Om 'ine end Net an = encrao, EPObbi . MINIIMICCO Mg* Gerd Corny-air Pen fcm C0M2 Dreeta OM Rio* El PM P/ma40Wmt Flute vein ea moth - roan •!. add P.M. ? • &mem Dam, Table 5: Host Modem Dialog Box Definitions Field Description Name Enter a unique name for the host modem configuration. Description A textuaIcomment for information only. Enabled Select Enabled to set the host modem online. To take the host modem offline, clear the Enabled selection. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 3 73 EFTA01226004 Configuring the Host Modem Table 5: Host Modem Dialog Box Definitions (continued) Field Description Maintenance Mode Click to put the STAR Comm Port into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 2: Maintenance Mode for more information. Partition This read-only field dentifies the Partition in which this Controller resdes. Communication Port Click 0 to open the Name Selection dialog to select the STAR Comm Port. NOTE: The iSTAR communication ports must already be configured. See Configuring the STAR Comm Port on Page 70 Direction Dial out only Select this option to specify that this modem is used onty for dialing out to panelstoontrollers Dial In only Select this option to specify that this modem is used only for dialing into the host. Dial In and Dial out Select this option to specify that this modem is used for both incoming and outgoing calls. Phone numbers that Displays the list of phone numbers that reach this host modem. Use the buttons to the reach this modem right of the list to modify the numbers in the list. • The phone number can be up to 35 characters long. • Hyphens. parentheses, and spaces are not allowed in phone numbers. • If Dial out only is selected in the Direction box. this box and the Add Dial In. and Remove buttons are unavailable. To Configure Modems for the Host 1. Ensure that the iSTAR communication ports are configured. See Configuring the iSTAR Comm Port on Page 70. 2. Open the C•CURE 9000 Administration Hardware Pane, select the Hardware Folder in which you want the iSTAR modem configuration to reside. 3. Right-click the folder to display the context menu, click Host Modem, and then click New. The Host Modem dialog box, shown in Figure 18 on Page 73, appears. 4. Enter a unique Host Modem name in the Name field (required). 5. Enter a textual description (optional) of the Host Modem configuration in the Description field. 6. Click Ei in the Port field to open the Name selection dialog box and click the iSTAR Comm Port you want to use. 7. Select the dial Direction: Dial out only, Dial in only, or Dial in and Dial out. 8. In the Phone numbers that reach this modem box: a. Click Add Dial In to add a new row. b. Click in the new row and enter a phone number. c. Repeat step a and step b for each phone number you want to add. 74 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226005 Configuring the Host Modem 9. Click Enabled to put the Host Modem online. 10. Optional. Click on the State Images tab to change the default images used to indicate communication port states on the Monitoring Station. 11. Click Save and Close. 12. Go to Creating a Cluster for Dialup on Page 76. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 3 75 EFTA01226006 Creating a Cluster for Dialup Creating a Cluster for Dialup This section describes how to create a cluster to use dial-up on the iSTAR Pro or Ultra SE Pro Mode controller. The Dialup Configuration tab in the iSTAR Cluster Editor dialog box, shown in Figure 2 on Page 76, lets you select pre-configured host modems and specify other dial-up configurations. This tab is only available for unencrypted clusters and for use with the iSTAR Pro or iSTAR Ultra SE in Pro Mode. • You can only have one controller in a cluster that uses dialup. NOTE • To enable a cluster, a dial-in and a dial-out phone number must be configured. • Alternate master is not supported. Figure 2: STAR Cluster Dialup Configuration Tab tie 41ARCAs - Wimp Oust Lye and One NNW Oda Oa t9 Irate. Node CMS -Can o.. 1.30•••• 01•C•41-ala halid liana 449a. 'osi• toadsI so* Hod Won v...on be awattip.114 to mini TAN.. !goat Yin -loam 0, Dar tk.d.. Met. eft... teen, egiel tenon., 1 : There are three tabs under Configuration: • Dial In lets you select host modems that the controller can call when dialing the host. • Dial Out lets you select host modems that the controller can use to dial out. • Periodic lets you specify a controller to periodically upload activity to the host, receive download configuration changes, and cardholder information from the host at that time. 78 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226007 Creating a Cluster for Dialup Table 1: STAR Cluster Dialup Configuration Tab Definitions Field Description Dial In Tab Host Modem/Host Click to Add to open the Name Selection dialog box host to select the host modems and host phone numbers that the Phone Number host can use to contact thiscontroller. • The host calls the modems in the order that they are listed. • A modem/phone combination can be listed more than once, but you cannot enter more than 8 modem/phone combinations. Number of times to try Specify the number of times the controller dials each telephone number in the list when the controller cannot contact connections the host. Example: If 2 is entered in this field, the controller dials each telephone number in the list two times. If the requisite connection attempts with all the phone numbers in the list fail, the controller is considered to be in Comm fail.The system will use the Retry interval during communication failure value to set the timing of communication attempts. Defautt: 2 Range: 0-99 Dial Out Tab Host Modems! Remote Click Add to add host modems and remote phone numbers that the host can use to dialout. Phone Number • The host calls the modems in the order that they are listed. • A modem/phone combination can be listed more than once, but you cannot enter more than 8 modem/phone combinations. Automaticalty initiate Specify the time to automaticalty download configuration changes to the dial-up controller. Then, click on the check box connection when to enable the download time. configuration changes Example: after hh:mm Cardholder additions and deletions. NOTE: - Leaving this unselected means that configuration changeswill not be downloaded until the next normal connection with the controller. - Selected with a time of 00.00 indicates immediate download. - Changes to the controller, such as change to an object's name or description, do not cause a download to the controller. Range: 0 to 23 hours 59 minutes. Periodic Tab NOTE: To make changes to the Periodic tab you must uncheck Enabled. click Save and Close and then reopen the Cluster editor. Redialintervalduring Specify the intervalof time the host waits to redal the controller when there is a communication failure. Enter the time in communications failure hh:mm format. • Default: 30 minutes. • Range: 0 minutes to 24 hours 59 minutes. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 3 77 EFTA01226008 Creating a Cluster for Dialup Table 1: STAR Cluster Dialup Configuration Tab Definitions (continued) Field Description Schedule Click Q to open the Name Selection dialog box to select a non-recurring schedule for periodicdialing. irld downloading configuration changes and cardholder information. NOTE: If the predefined 'Always' schedule is selected. the controlie, will onty use the time interval specified by Dial Interval outside of schedule.The Dial Interval during schedule setting will be ignored. Dial intentalduring Specify the frequency that the host dials the controller when the time specification is in effect. schedule • Enter the time in hh:mm format. • Range: 0 to 24:00 hours. Dial interval outside Specify the frequency that the host dials the controller when the time specification is not in effect. schedule • Enter the gins lo hh:mm format. • Range: 01024:00 hours. To Configure a Cluster for Dialup 1. Click on the Dialup Configuration tab in the iSTAR Ouster Editor dialog box. 2. See Table 1 on Page 77 for Dial In, Dial Out, and Periodic tab configuration information. 3. Click Save and Close when done. 4. Go to iSTAR Pro Controller Editor on Page 137 to configure the controller. 78 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Con figuration Guide EFTA01226009 4 Configuring C•CURE iSTAR Clusters This chapter explains how to configure iSTAR Clusters in the C•CURE 9000 system. In this chapter Ouster Communications Overview 80 Configuring iSTAR Ousters 87 Creating an iSTAR Ouster 88 Creating and Using an iSTAR Cluster Template 89 iSTAR Ouster Editor 91 iSTAR Ouster General Tab 93 iSTAR Ouster Communications Tab 95 iSTAR Ouster - Cluster Tab 99 iSTAR Ouster Miscellaneous Tab 101 iSTAR Ouster Area Tab 102 iSTAR Ouster Encryption Tab 105 iSTAR Ouster Triggers Tab 107 iSTAR Ouster Dialup Configuration Tab 113 iSTAR Ouster Status Tab 114 iSTAR Ouster State Images Tab 115 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter.. 79 EFTA01226010 Cluster CommunicationsOverview Cluster Communications Overview iSTAR controllers are organized for network communications into user-defined, logical groups called Clusters. Clusters contain one or more iSTAR controllers. A C•CURE 9000 server (host) can be connected to multiple iSTAR clusters. An iSTAR Controller must belong to a Cluster. A Ouster can have a maximum of 16 controllers. NOTE ■ Cluster Configuration and Distributed Management on Page 80 ■ Networked iSTAR Controllers (Clusters) on Page 81 ■ Establishing Connections Via the Primary Communications Path on Page 83 ■ Setting Up the Primary Communications Path on Page 84 ■ Downloading Cardholder and Configuration Information on Page 84 ■ Maintaining Communications on Page 84 ■ Establishing a Secondary Communications Path on Page 85 ■ Distributed Cluster Management on Page 86 ■ Unassigned Folder on Page 86 Cluster Configuration and Distributed Management One or more controllers can be configured for communications purposes into user-defined groups called Clusters. Clusters have a primary communication path to the host that use Masters to control communications among cluster members and the host over the network. Clusters also support a backup communications path, the secondary communications path. The cluster can use the secondary path to communicate with the host when a communications failure occurs on the primary path. Secondary paths can only exist on the Master. The Alternate Master capability cannot be configured in newly-created iSTAR clusters in version 2.20 NOTE or later. iSTAR Clusters that already have an Alternate Master, when upgraded to version 2.20 or later, retain the Alternate Master, but if the cluster is edited and the Alternate Master is removed, this change will permanently remove the ability to configure an Alternate Master for this cluster. See the iSTAR Ouster Communications Tab on Page 95 for more information. Secondary communications paths have not been evaluated by UL. NOTE Communications among iSTAR controllers provide distributed functionality at the controller level that is not typically available on security management systems. A cluster can only contain controllers that support compatible methods of encryption (or do not use encryption). ■ You can create a Non-Encrypted Cluster containing iSTAR Classic, iSTAR Pro, or iSTAR Ultra Controllers. ■ You can create an Encrypted Cluster containing iSTAR eX, iSTAR Edge, or iSTAR Ultra Controllers. 80 Chapter < C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226011 Cluster Communications Overview Previously, clusters were categorized by Controller Type rather than Encryption Setting. The NOTE composition of clusters and the models of controllers they contain has not changed. When C•CURE 9000 is upgraded, cluster types are changed to reflect Encryption Settings, but existing controllers remain in the same clusters. This change has the following additional effects: • Existing Reports: ControllerType field is ignored. • Existing Queries: If ControllerType is included, the query cannot run until the Query is edited and ControllerType is removed. • Dynamic Views: ControllerType is replaced by EncryptionSetting. • Existing Imports: ControllerType is marked as an Import Only property and used to set the Encryption Setting value. Master controllers use the primary or secondary communications path to communicate with the C•CURE System host. Establishing and maintaining a connection with the host involves the following administrative actions through the use of iSTAR Clusters: ■ Establishing connections via the primary communications path. You set up a primary communications path for a cluster when configuring controllers and clusters. ■ Downloading cardholder and configuration information from the host to the controller. ■ Maintaining communications via the primary communications path. If a communications failure occurs on the primary communications path, controllers can reestablish communications via a secondary communications path. Networked iSTAR Controllers (Clusters) Controllers are organized for network communications into user-defined or logical groups called Clusters. This section describes the key elements of clusters. Master and Cluster Members Each cluster has one controller that serves as the Master with all other controllers in the cluster acting as Cluster Members. The master manages all communications between the cluster and a host computer. Cluster members can communicate with each other via the master, over an Ethernet network. Cluster members cannot communicate with each other directly. Figure 19 on Page 82 (left) shows how Cluster Member A communicates with the host via the master. The figure (right) shows how Cluster Member A communicates with Cluster Member B via the master. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter< 81 EFTA01226012 Cluster CommunicationsOverview Figure 19: Cluster Members Host Ethernet Ethernet Master Cluste Master Cluster Member B Member B Cluste Cluste Membe A Member A Cluster Member A communicates Cluster Member A communicates with Host via Master with Cluster Member B via Master The Primary Communications Path The Primary Communications Path is the first communications path that master controllers use to establish communications with the host. Controllers communicate with the host directly. The Connection type is TCP/IP over Ethernet. The Master is the one controller in a cluster that is responsible for passing messages between the host and cluster members. Cluster members do not communicate with the host directly; they communicate with the host through the master. Connections are established in the following bottom-to-top order: ■ The Master is responsible for establishing a connection with the host. The host does not establish a connection with the master. ■ Cluster Members are responsible for establishing connections with the master. The master never tries to establish a connection with a cluster member, as shown in Figure 20 on Page 83. 82 Chapter< C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226013 Cluster CommunicationsOverview Figure 20: Cluster Communication Path Hos: Maste e 1, • O Cluster Cluster Member A Member B The Connection type is how the master connects to the host: TCP/IP over Ethernet. Cluster members are connected to the master via Ethernet only. Figure 21 on Page 83 shows the Primary Communications Path for Cluster Member A. The master/host connection type is TCP/IP over Ethernet. Figure 21: PrimaryCommunIcations Path ost - Ethernet Master Cluster Member B Cluster Member A Primary Communications Path for Cluster Member A Establishing Connections Via the Primary Communications Path The primary communications path is comprised of the following connections: ■ The master connects directly to the host using a network connection. ■ Cluster members connect to the master using a network connection. After connections are established, the master manages cluster communications by passing messages between cluster members and the host. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter < 83 EFTA01226014 Cluster CommunicationsOvervlow Connections are established in a bottom-to-top order. Thus, clusters members are responsible for establishing connections with the master, and the master is responsible for establishing a connection with the host. Setting Up the Primary Communications Path Before controllers can establish any connections, you must configure the cluster's primary communications path by performing the following tasks: ■ Use the C•CURE 9000 Administration Application to first configure the cluster and then the iSTAR Controllers. See Configuring iSTAR Clusters on Page 87 and Configuration Overview for iSTAR Controllers on Page 119 for information. ■ Use the iSTAR Configuration Utility (KU) to manually configure the master. After you configure the master, it reboots and then establishes a connection with the C•CURE 9000 Server. The server downloads cardholder and configuration information to the master. After downloading information from the host, the master auto-configures its cluster members. Cluster members then reboot and establish connections with the master. Downloading Cardholder and Configuration Information The following information is downloaded to the master and its cluster members from the host: ■ Cardholder data for personnel with clearances on the controller. ■ Configuration information for inputs, outputs, and readers on the controller. ■ Events that are controlled by the controller. ■ Cluster information that the controller uses to communicate with other cluster members. The C•CURE 9000 Server downloads cardholder and configuration information to the controller NOTE under the following conditions: ■ Initial configuration ■ Each time the controller is powered on ■ Each time the cluster is taken offline/online Changes to personnel, clearances, inputs, outputs, readers, and events are immediately downloaded. Maintaining Communications Although a communications link may be open between two devices, long periods of time can exist when devices do not communicate because of low system activity. In the absence of this type of communications, devices send "keep- alive" messages, called Connection Verification messages, to verify that connections are alive. Example: The master and host send these messages to each other to confirm that the connection between them is open. If the host does not receive a connection verification message from the master in a specified amount of time, the host closes the communications link with the master and waits for a connection attempt from the cluster. When the master does not receive a connection verification message from the host in the specified amount of time, it also declares a communications failure for the primary communications path and then notifies its cluster 84 Chapter < C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226015 Cluster Communications Overview members of the communications failure. At this time, cluster communications revert to the secondary communications path. Use the Communications and Cluster tabs in the C•CURE 9000 Administration Application, iSTAR Cluster dialog box, to configure connection verification messages for the master, host and cluster members. See Configuring iSTAR Clusters on Page 87 for more information. Establishing a Secondary Communications Path if a communications failure occurs on the primary communications path, communications can be re-established via the cluster's secondary communications path. The secondary communications path must be a second connection between the master and the host. The network connection must be one that is not already being used as the primary path. While communicating via the secondary path, the cluster attempts to re-establish communications with the host on the primary communications path. When a connection is re-established on the primary path, communications revert to the primary path and the communications link on the secondary path is closed. Use the Communications tab in the Cluster dialog box in the C•CURE 9000 Administration Application to configure the secondary communications path (see iSTAR Cluster Communications Tab on Page 95). The Secondary Communications Path A Secondary Communications Path is the host communications path that is used by a controller if a communications failure occurs on the primary communications path. The secondary path is activated by the iSTAR Controller's dual network capability. Figure 22 on Page 85 shows an example of a secondary communications path on the host using an Ethernet connection and a secondary communications path on another network card, using an Ethernet connection. Figure 22: Primary and Secondary Communications Path to Host Host Ethernet Switch Primary 4 — Secondary Communications Communications Path Path 'STAR Master Co droller C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 0 85 EFTA01226016 Cluster CommunicationsOverview Distributed Cluster Management Cluster communications allow iSFAR controllers to share information and control actions throughout a cluster without host intervention. Distributed Cluster Management is the distribution of system functionality from the host to cluster members. Distributed cluster management lets a controller perform many actions locally and share information with other cluster members even when the controller is not communicating with the host, during a communications failure for example. Cluster members communicate with each other through the master. Although a communications NOTE failure with the host may not affect cluster communications, a communications failure with the master can cause communications problems in the cluster. Unassigned Folder The Unassigned folder is a repository for iSTAR controllers that have been configured for an iSTAR cluster, in an existing partition, but which have been removed from the iSTAR cluster, or the cluster has been deleted. Such controllers will be listed under the Unassigned folder until they are reassigned to another iSTAR cluster or deleted. 88 Chapter < C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226017 Configuring STAR Clusters Configuring iSTAR Clusters Before you can create and configure iSTAR Controllers, you must create an iSTAR Cluster. The Cluster dialog box lets you configure clusters by performing the following tasks: ■ Add controllers to the cluster. ■ Configure a primary communications path for the cluster. ■ Configure a secondary communications path for the cluster. ■ Configure communications between cluster members and the master. ■ Configure the number of unacknowledged messages for controllers. ■ Set Triggers for the cluster. ■ Evaluate cluster status. ■ Change state images that appear on the Monitoring Station. Figure 23: Hardware Pane- Creation of an iSTAR Cluster C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 4 87 EFTA01226018 Creating an STAR Cluster Creating an iSTAR Cluster You can create an iSTAR Cluster in a Hardware Folder in the Hardware tree. You can either select a folder, then pick iSTAR duster from the Hardware tree drop-down list, or right-click on the folder and select iSTAR duster from the context menu. To Create an iSTAR Cluster 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Expand the Hardware tree and select the folder where you want to create the iSTAR Cluster. 3. Right-click on the folder and select iSTAR Cluster>New to create a cluster for one or more iSTAR controllers. The iSTAR Cluster Editor dialog box opens, as shown in Figure 26 on Page 92. See iSTAR Cluster Editor on Page 91 for instructions on configuring the Cluster. 4. Enter a Name (required) and Description (optional). 5. Select an Encryption Setting ■ Encrypted for a Cluster that will contain iSTAR eX, iSTAR Edge, or iSTAR Ultra controllers that will use an iSTAR encryption method. ■ Non-Encrypted for a Cluster that will contain iSTAR Pro, iSTAR Classic, or iSTAR Ultra controllers that will not use an iSTAR encryption method. This field becomes Read-only once you add iSTAR controllers to the Ouster and save it, because NOTE changing this setting while there are controllers in the cluster would cause problems. If you need to change this setting, you must remove all controllers from the Cluster, change the Encryption Settings on the Ouster Encryption tab (see iSTAR Cluster Encryption Tab on Page 105), then add controllers of the appropriate type. 6. Click Save and Close to save the Cluster. The new iSTAR Cluster icon displays in the tree, one level below the folder that you selected. 88 Chapter < C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226019 Creating and Using an STAR Cluster Template Creating and Using an iSTAR Cluster Template You can create an iSTAR Cluster Template that you can use as the basis for creating new iSTAR Clusters with specific settings that you choose when creating the Template. Example If you want all of your iSTAR Clusters to use 60 seconds instead of the default 10 seconds for the Connection to Host Interval, you can create an iSTAR Cluster Template with Connection to Host Interval set to 60 seconds, and every iSTAR Cluster you create from this Template will inherit that setting. To Create an iSTAR Cluster Template 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Expand the Hardware bee and a hardware folder. 3. Right-click on the folder and select iSTAR Cluster>New Template from the context menu (see Figure 24 on Page 89). Figure 24: New Cluster Template from Hardware Folder Context Menu pc tau 9000 Adm•norshon %/Ace. nn-itt... 4000 Server Options • 11,loare OvisiCeoforin 12 C0, 00, 0bnekParinonC.I.sit • 12 *TAR Comore (Paver tot tof Comm Pees a Host Mocem Paitobcal (Paftdon Parlacl HMOS id RC Catboat, • Page ' , ca. SIR Caren Pal I nag Nada. SOFTWARE HOM n C•ant %kJ* Alternatively, select iSTAR Cluster in the Hardware pane drop-down list, click the down-mow next to the New button, then select iSTAR Cluster>New Template from the menu. The iSTAR Ouster Editor opens a new Template that you can configure and save. 4. Enter a unique name for the Template in the Name field (required) and type a textual description for the Template in the Description field (optional). C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter < 89 EFTA01226020 Creating and Using an STAR Cluster Template 5. Select the Encryption Setting for the Ouster Template. Only controllers of the types supported by this setting can subsequently be added to Clusters created from this Template. (This field becomes read-only after you save the Ouster Template). 6. Navigate to the Communications, Ouster, Miscellaneous, Encryption, Triggers, and State Images tabs and configure any settings that you would like to be included in your Template. See iSTAR Cluster Editor on Page 91 for more information about the iSTAR Ouster Editor tabs. 7. Click Save and Close. The Ouster Template is saved with your settings. You can now use the Template as the basis of new iSTAR Clusters you subsequently create. A Ouster Template is not saved inside of a Hardware folder, and it is not visible in the Hardware NOTE tree. To edit a Ouster Template, select iSTAR Cluster from the Hardware drop-down list and click • to display a Dynamic View listing all iSTAR Clusters, including Ouster Templates. Double-click on a Ouster Template in the Dynamic View to edit it. To Create an iSTAR Cluster from a Template 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Expand the Hardware tree and a hardware folder. 3. Right-click on the folder and select iSTAR Cluster>New from the context menu (see Figure 25 on Page 90). Figure 25: New STAR Cluster from a Template Ed D . (man selectort rediiAudlLoct rnd inJounal. coC CarenPot • Cksttei New • L USCG:Mob • New lenvive CC 0:Cilkit. • —rent: WASFat* • cattlet 44,00 e gio COJRE Mott • Anita tarciate la eX The iSTAR Ouster Editor and you can edit the new Cluster. 4. Enter a unique name for the Ouster in the Name field (required) and type a textual description for the Ouster in the Description field (optional). 5. Select the Encryption Setting for the Ouster Template. Only controllers of the types supported by this setting can subsequently be added to Ousters created from this Template. (This field becomes read-only after you save the Ouster Template). 6. Navigate to the Communications, Ouster, Miscellaneous, Encryption, Triggers, and State Images tabs and configure any settings that you would like to be included in your Ouster. See iSTAR Ouster Editor on Page 91 for more information about the iSTAR Ouster Editor tabs. 7. Click Save and Close. The iSTAR Ouster is saved with your settings. 90 Chapter < C-CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226021 STAR Cluster Editor iSTAR Cluster Editor The iSTAR Cluster Editor is used to configure iSTAR Ousters for your C•CURE 9000 system. All iSTAR Controllers must be contained in an iSTAR Ouster in order to communicate with a C•CURE 9000 Server. You need to create at least one iSTAR Ouster before you can create any iSTAR Controllers. iSTAR Cluster Editor Tabs The iSTAR Ouster Editor includes the following tabs: ■ iSTAR Ouster General Tab on Page 93 ■ iSTAR Ouster Communications Tab on Page 95 ■ iSTAR Ouster - Ouster Tab on Page 99 ■ iSTAR Ouster Miscellaneous Tab on Page 101 ■ iSTAR Ouster Area Tab on Page 102 ■ iSTAR Ouster Encryption Tab on Page 105 ■ iSTAR Ouster Triggers Tab on Page 107 ■ iSTAR Ouster Dialup Configuration Tab on Page 113 ■ iSTAR Ouster Status Tab on Page 114 ■ iSTAR Ouster State Images Tab on Page 115 Accessing the iSTAR Cluster Editor l'ertorm the following steps to access the iSTAR Ouster Editor. To Access the iSTAR Cluster Editor 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane (see Figure 23 on Page 87). 2. Expand the Hardware tree and select the Cluster that you want to configure. 3. Right- click and select iSTAR Cluster>Edit to open the selected Ouster in the iSTAR Ouster Editor (see Figure 26 on Page 92). C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter< 91 EFTA01226022 STAR Cluster Editor Figure 26: STAR Cluster Editor =1_11.1€ Elm I Dosages' r r G". I ConasogeSaa I GoeW I iebalswass I Me I fowl moral snail assos•I Oats Gams. fitanike Set" >.:rn$ zi Cvisas( g 92 Chapter 4 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226023 STAR Cluster General Tab iSTAR Cluster General Tab The iSTAR Cluster General Tab provides an interface to manage controllers that you have configured for a cluster. From the General tab, you can add or remove iSTAR Controllers from a Ouster. An example of an iSTAR Ouster General tab is shown in Figure 26 on Page 92. See iSTAR Ouster General Tab Definitions on Page 94 for definitions of the fields and buttons on the iSTAR Ouster. iSTAR Cluster General Tab Tasks You can perform the following tasks from the iSTAR Ouster General Tab. ■ Adding a Controller to a Ouster on Page 93. ■ Removing a Controller from a Ouster on Page 93. Adding a Controller to a Cluster To Add a Controller to a Cluster 1. Open the iSTAR Ouster editor for the Cluster to which you wish to add a Controller. See To Access the iSTAR Cluster Editor on Page 91. 2. Click Add. The iSTAR Controller selection dialog box opens. This dialog box lists all iSTAR Controllers that can be added to this Ouster. Only iSTAR Controllers with the same Encryption Setting as the Ouster (Encrypted or Non- encrypted) that are currently Unassigned (not currently attached to an iSTAR Ouster) appear in this dialog box. 3. Select one or more iSTAR Controllers from the dialog box. You can use multiple selection keystrokes such as CTRL+Left-click and SHIFT+Left-click to select more than one Controller. 4. Click OK to add the selected iSTAR Controllers to the list of Controllers in the iSTAR Ouster. 5. Click Save and Close to save your changes. Removing a Controller from a Cluster You can remove iSTAR Controllers from an iSTAR Ouster using the iSTAR Cluster General tab. Once you remove a Controller from an iSTAR cluster, the Controller is moved to the Unassigned folder and can subsequently be added to a different iSTAR Ouster with the same Encryption Setting. To Remove a Controller from a Cluster 1. Open the iSTAR Ouster Editor for the Ouster to which you wish to add a Controller. See To Access the iSTAR Cluster Editor on Page 91. 2. From the Controller(s) list on the General tab, select one or more iSTAR Controllers you wish to remove from the Ouster. You can use multiple selection keystrokes such as CTRL+Left-click and SHIFT+Left-click to select more than one Controller. If the Ouster is Enabled, you cannot remove a Controller that is selected on the Communications tab as either the controller having primary communications with the host (C•CURE 9000 Server) or the controller having C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter < 93 EFTA01226024 STAR Cluster General Tab secondary communications with the host. The Remove button becomes unavailable if you select such a controller. 3. Click Remove. The Controllers you selected are deleted from the Controller(s) list of this Cluster. 4. Click Save and Close to save your changes. The Controllers you removed from this Cluster now appear in the Unassigned folder in the Hardware tree, and can be re-assigned to another Cluster with the same Encryption Setting. iSTAR Cluster General Tab Definitions The iSTAR Cluster General tab includes the fields and buttons described in Table 6 on Page 94. Table 6: iSTAR Cluster General Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Name Enter a name (up to 10O characters long) of the STAR Cluster that you are configuring. Description Type a description of the STAR Cluster that you are configuring. Enabled Enabled isgrayed out until: 1. The controller's are configured. See Chapter 5. Configuring C•CURE STAR Controllers 2. A Controller having primary communications with host isselected on the !STAR Cluster Communications tab. 3. Click Enabled to put the cluster online. Maintenance Click to put the Cluster or STARS and/or their components into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 2: Maintenance Mode Mode for more information. Partition This read-onty field identifies the Partition in which this STAR Cluster resides. Select the Encryption Setting for the Cluster Template. Onty controllers of the types supported by this setting can subsequentty be added to Clusters created from this Template. (This field becomes read-onty after you save the Cluster Template). you want to change the Partition of a Cluster, see Using Drag and Drop in the Hardware Tree on Page 27. Encryption A read-onty field displaying the Encryption Setting for the Cluster. Setting Controllers Add To add an STAR Controller to your Cluster, click Add to display the STAR Controller selection dialog box. Select one or more controllers and click OK to add it to the STAR Cluster. Remove To remove an STAR Controller from your Cluster, select the STAR Controller you want to remove in the list. then click Remove. Name column Displays the name of the controller. Description Displays the description text for the controller. column 94 Chapter 4 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226025 STAR Cluster Communications Tab iSTAR Cluster Communications Tab The Communications tab in the iSTAR Cluster dialog box lets you configure communications from the Controllers in a cluster to the C•CURE 9000 Server (Host). Primary and Secondary communications can be configured for an iSTAR controller that has two Onboard Ethernet Adapters. When one adapter is chosen as primary, the other can become the secondary. If you are using iSTAR Pro dialup, the cluster must be configured for dialup communication. For a cluster that existed prior to version 220, you can have one controller configured for the Primary NOTE communications path as a Master controller, and a second, different, controller configured for the Secondary communications path as an Alternate Master. However, if you remove the Alternate Master from the cluster, you will no longer be able to configure an Alternate Master for the cluster. A message box appears when you change Controller having secondary communications with host to None, informing you that the change will remove the Alternate Master. 'kW 4.. If this change is maide, it mil no longer be possible to configure an i.lik Alternate Master controller. Click OK to continue mth change. OK For a new cluster created in version 220 or later, you cannot configure an Alternate Master. If you configure both a Primary and Secondary communications path, you must use the same controller, which must have two onboard Ethernet Adapters. Dialup can be used only as the primary connection method or the secondary communication method, NOTE not as both. Example: ■ Dialup is used as the primary communication method and there is no secondary communication method. ■ TCP/IP is used as the primary communication method and Dialup is used as the secondary communication method. Communications tab definitions are listed in Table 7 on Page 97. Number of Failed Attempts Before Connection Fails on Page 98 explains how to configure the cluster's controllers to attempt to connect to the cluster, and resolve communications failures. Secondary communications paths have not been evaluated by UL. NOTE C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter < 95 EFTA01226026 STAR Cluster Communications Tab To Configure the iSTAR Cluster - Communications Tab 1. From the iSTAR Controller dialog box, click the Communications tab. The Communications tab opens, shown in Figure 27 on Page 96. Figure 27: iSTAR ClusterCommunications Tab Of 41•Aank. • 0.00ap Orly Bye our bin O. Me Clocno. Entati tmenv•ce We* Gess •----Agen [ Hoots& I Pao linw.lTIM= 60•0021•••••• I [ Mumps. NW/ Co•t•A.,..r.pw,,,eraand.kat Vireo met a sui ceranOe *10 Cc"can°00•WO, Wash) 20 •: Nue, el Yid SO. Son examien lob ReconsoIsmo te.<wear Oave (mank) 40 Canceve kw...0mnd Oom!.1 tO Cray tmom, connneatow wk. SY Yes 1./of d onreces browIca. met. Carman nestkoorg occedo 20 Moena/ Wed mina b•ke4 ccen414.1444 I /4011•KIIMerli barrea• att. (Scads) 40 Caoloca, hack.> 01,..11(matos, 10 2. Controllers having primary/secondary communication with host allows you to select the controller in the cluster that has primary or secondary communications with the host (C•CURE 9000 server). Choose a controller using the drop-down selection. 3. Method of communication between host and controller allows a selection of the communication type designated for the iSTAR controller that communicates with the host. Choose the connection type of Onboard Ethernet or Dialup (iSTAR Pro or iSTAR Ultra Pro Mode only) using the drop-down selection. 4. In the Connection to Host Interval entry field, specify the number of seconds that a controller waits between attempts to connect to the host. UL requires a maximum of 200 seconds supervision on the Communications link between the protected premise equipment and the central station. 5. In the Number of failed attempts before connection fails field, specify the number of attempts that a controller makes to first connect to the host before the controller is declared to be in communications failure. See Number of Failed Attempts Before Connection Fails on Page 98 for more information. 6. In the Reconnect Interval after connection failure field, specify the number of seconds that controllers wait between attempts to reconnect to the host. This field sets the rate at which controllers attempt to reconnect or 96 Chapter< C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226027 STAR Cluster Communications Tab connect to the host after a communications failure occurs between the host and the controller. The default interval is 40 seconds. The maximum value is 9999 seconds and the minimum is 1 second. 7. In the Connection Inactivity Interval field, specify the number of seconds that a controller waits between attempts to connect to the host. The default interval is 80 seconds. The possible values are between 15 and 80 seconds. 8. Navigate to the iSTAR Cluster - Cluster Tab on Page 99 or click Save and Close to save the cluster and begin configuring iSTAR Controllers. Table 7: STAR Cluster Communications Tab Definitions Field Description Controllers This field allows you to select the controller that has primary or secondary communicationswith the host. Choose a controller having primary using the drop-down selection. or secondary communication with host Method of This field allows you to select the communication type designated for the iSTAR controllers, PCMCIA Ethernet, Onboard communication Ethernet or [Halal) (iSTAR Pro/iSTAR Ultra SE Pro Mode only). between host and controller Connection to Specify the number of seconds that a controller wads between attempts to connect to the host. Use the Number of failed Host Interval attempts before connection falls field in the Communications tab to specify the number of connection attempts a (seconds) controller makes before a communications failure isdedared for the controller. The maximum value is 9999 seconds and the minimum is 1 second. The default value is 20 seconds. Number of faded Specify the number of attempts that a controller makes to first connect to the host before thecontroller is dedared to ben attempts before communications failure. See Number of Failed Attempts Before Connection Faison Page 98. The default value is 4 attempts. connection fats Reconnect Specify the number of seconds that controllerswait behveen attempts to re-connect to the host. This field sets the rate at Intervalafter which controllers attempt to reconnect or connect to the host after a communications failure occurs behveen the host and the connection controller. T he defautt interval is 40 seconds. The maximum value is 9999 seconds and the minimum is 1 second. faiure [seconds) Connection Specify the number of seconds that a controller waits between attempts to connect to the host. The defautt interval s80 inactivity interval seconds. The possible values are between 15 and 80 seconds. [seconds) C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 4 97 EFTA01226028 STAR Cluster CommunicationsTab Number of Failed Attempts Before Connection Fails The Number of failed attempts before connection fails field in the Communications tab specifies the number of connection attempts a controller makes before a communications failure is declared for the controller. The default is 4 attempts. The maximum is 99 attempts and the minimum is 1 attempt. If a connection is established, the controller and host use connection verification messages to maintain the connection. If a connection is not made in the specified number of attempts, a communications failure is declared for the controller, and the following connections are attempted: ■ If the secondary communications path uses an alternate host, the controller attempts to connect to the alternate host, which passes the controller's messages to the host. At the same time, the controller tries to reestablish a connection with the host at the rate specified in the Reconnect Interval after connection failure field. ■ If the secondary communications path does not use an alternate host, the controller attempts to connect to the host forever, or until a connection is established. The controller attempts to connect to the host at the rate specified in the Reconnect Interval after connection failure field. ■ The controller broadcasts a request across its subnet for the host's IP Address. The host responds to the request. If the host does not respond in a set amount of time and the iSTAR Configuration Utility is configured for auto- response, the utility responds to the controller. See the iSTAR eX Installation and Cm0gumtion Guide for information. If a communications failure occurs, the following connections are attempted simultaneously: ■ If the secondary communications path uses an alternate host, the controller attempts to connect to the alternate host, which passes the controller's messages to the host. At the same time, the controller tries to reestablish a connection with the host at the rate specified in the Reconnect Interval after connection failure field. ■ If the secondary communications path does not use an alternate host, the controller attempts to reconnect to the host forever or until a connection is established. The controller attempts to reconnect to the host at the rate specified in the After connection failure, controller attempts to reconnect every XX seconds field. ■ The controller broadcasts a request across its subnet for the host's IP Address. The host responds to the request. If the host does not respond in a set amount of time and the iSTAR Configuration Utility is configured for auto- response, the utility can respond to the controller. See the STAR eX Installation and ColOgumtion Guide for information. If a connection is established, the controller and host use connection verification messages to maintain the connection. The default is 4 attempts. The maximum is 99 attempts and the minimum is 1 attempt. 98 Chapter < C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226029 STAR Cluster Cluster Tab iSTAR Cluster - Cluster Tab The Cluster tab regulates the connection and reconnection intervals between the primary iSTAR Controller and those controllers which are cluster members. The Cluster tab has not been evaluated by UL. NOTE To Configure the iSTAR Cluster - Cluster Tab 1. From the iSTAR Controller dialog box, click the Cluster tab. The Cluster tab opens, shown in Figure 28 on Page 99. 2. Specify the number of seconds that the primary controller attempts to connect with the host server in the Controllers attempt to connect to cluster master interval entry field. The range is from 1 to 9999 seconds; the default value is 20 seconds. Figure 28: iSTAR Cluster Cluster Tab iel$l.t VC CO'S ti•-• ISl Rase.Canovi lr Clunres remongL4 Pros"- se.. Wag r yonterox. Wee Gran I Covrv-hcercns Cute I lascelre:us I Av. I &cam^ •rod.l Salo I %toms«I Cul« ,c•w(nen se ti (*.nay Ova+ onsw mothseccaOs) hinted Mb: =Ws b <orcrolen to f.mise carecie tblin RO:411•Xl ken. Mp cansttiotlablaft•csail (saws.. IrAchitz atonal(act) n 3. Enter the number of instances after which the primary controller transmits a connection failure in the Number of failed attempts for controllers to declare a connection failure entry field. The range is from 1 to 99; the default value is 4. 4. Specify the number of seconds after which the primary controller attempts to reconnect after a connection failure in the Reconnection Interval after connection failure entry field. The range is from 1 to 9999 seconds; the default value is 40 seconds. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter< 99 EFTA01226030 'STAR Cluster - Cluster Tab 5. Enter the number of seconds after which the primary controller transmits a connection failure if there is no message while it is connected, in the Connection Inactivity Interval entry field. The range is from 15 to 80 seconds; the default value is 80 seconds 6. Navigate to the Miscellaneous tab or Save and Close to save the cluster and begin configuring iSTAR Controllers. 100 Chapter < C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226031 STAR Cluster Miscellaneous Tab iSTAR Cluster Miscellaneous Tab The iSTAR Cluster Miscellaneous tab allows you to set the maximum number of unacknowledged messages that are allowed for each iSTAR Controller To Configure the iSTAR Cluster - Miscellaneous Tab 1. From the iSTAR Controller dialog box, click the Miscellaneous tab. The Miscellaneous tab opens, shown in Figure 29 on Page 101. Figure 29: STAR Cluster MiscellaneousTab as int cow hies )1TAR 3.4e., ClfeA I news. r frakd ha*. So"Wirep r 19.101inte we. Gerbil I Cranctcra lace werAargoA I Ma I Ercnotad 1.0.1I saes l 9.stenson I Unictraslastpd Mr tape Womenlure. (0 ,nacluomieVed messages b wh crvots 2. In the Unacknowledged Messages box specify the maximum number of unacknowledged messages that are allowed for each iSTAR Controller in the Maximum number of unacknowledged messages for each controller field. If you have a network with high latency, you may want to set this value to a higher number; if the network has low latency, the default value (10) should be sufficient. • This setting does not result in lost messages. NOTE • For Proprietary Burglar Alarm applications, the Send state changes to the monitoring station option must be selected. • The range is from 1 to 99 and the default value is 10. For UL applications, set the range to 99. 3. Navigate to the Antipassback tab or Save and Close to save the cluster and begin configuring iSTAR Controllers. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 0 101 EFTA01226032 STAR Cluster Area Tab iSTAR Cluster Area Tab The iSTAR Ouster Area tab allows you to configure the following ■ How Ouster Antipassback works for iSTAR Ouster Areas during a communications failure when the Ouster members lose communication with the Ouster master. ■ Whether or not the Ouster is configured for both Global Antipassback and Ouster Antipassback or solely for Ouster Antipassback. Modifying either of these options can only be done if the Cluster is not Enabled. NOTE You configure how Global Antipassback works during a communications failure through a system variable in the iSTAR Driver section, "iSTAR Global Antipassback Communication Failure Mode. For more information, see the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide. Cluster Antipassback Communications Failure Mode As long as the communication within the Ouster is good, the Ouster members do not store any antipassback information. During communications failure, the Ouster members (the Controllers) begin to enforce antipassback locally, based on the Failure Mode you configure for the Area's Ouster on this tab. For iSTAR Ouster Areas, all Doors and Readers must be within the same iSTAR Ouster. Adjacent Areas can be on any Ouster and can also be Cross-Cluster Areas. Using Antipassback restricts access to Ouster Areas as follows: • Regular antipassback - Personnel cannot exit an Area they are not in, nor re-enter an Area without exiting it first. • Timed antipassback - Personnel cannot re-enter an Area until a specified amount of time has passed. The violation triggered when personnel enter a specified Area is called an entry violation. The violation triggered when personnel exit a specified Area is an exit violation. To ensure that personnel are always appropriately prevented from entering Lockout Areas, make sure NOTE that you configure the Communications Failure Mode for the Area's iSTAR Ouster as No access Mode, instead of Local Mode. Global Antipassback for the Cluster iSTAR Global Antipassback gives a higher level of security, but also means that when a person's card moves from one Ouster to another, the card must be transferred through the Host. Transfer through the Host is slower than within a Ouster and also requires the Ouster to Host network connections to be good. Access within the Ouster is faster since it only relies on the member-to-master network connections. For more information on Areas and Antipassback, see the 0 CURE 9000 Areas and Zones Configuration Guide. To Configure the iSTAR Cluster -Area Tab for Cluster Antipassback Communications Failure Mode I . From thu• iSTAR Cluster dialog box, click the Area tab. The Area tab opens, shown in Figure 30 on Page 103. 102 Chapter 4 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226033 STAR Cluster Area Tab Figure 30: STAR Cluster Area Tab aw.t.sone lima 'STAR Wag C.o. DPICtlebta rfpatkd Panion So. Vey r Hod. Grail I Cooeuwelor IoM I liKelneaa I &a$0. 30 I Tratie I 2a• I 9dowle• I aar Moseick Conn...coon Naar safe r Hosaes 6. Local GIS* Arsgented r etc...STAR Global attosseted a ma a STAR Claassonsbeth 2. In the Cluster Antipassback Communication Failure Mode box, click to select either the No access or Local option. Make sure that you leave the Cluster enforces iSTAR Global antipassback as well as iSTAR Cluster NOTE antipassback check box unselected. To Configure the iSTAR Cluster - Area Tab for both Global Antipassback and Cluster Antipassback 1. From the iSTAR Cluster dialog box, click the Area tab. The Area tab opens, shown in Figure 30 on Page 103. 2. In the Global Antipassback box, click to select the Cluster enforces iSTAR Global antipassback as well as iSTAR Cluster antipassback option. Area Tab Field Definitions Area tab definitions are listed in 'able 8 on Page 104. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 4 103 EFTA01226034 STAR Cluster Area Tab Table 8: Area Tab Definitions Fields Description Cluster Antipassback Communication Failure Mode The options in this box are avertable only if the Cluster enforces !STAR Global antlpassback as well as !STAR Cluster antlpassback option in the Global Antipassback box is not selected. No access (Hard) Select this option to configure No access as the Communications Failure mode for this Cluster. • Access is denied by any member Controller in the Cluster in communications failure. • Member Controllers still in communications with the Master continue to request normal antipassbackdecisions for entry to the Area. • Master Controllers need no communication to make antipassback decisions and always do so regardlessof host or member communication. (In this mode, the person is presumed to be in violation. unless proven otherwise.) Local (Soft) Select this option to configure Local as the Communications Failure mode for this Cluster. • The Controller uses locally available information to grant or deny access. Even if this information is insufficient, the Controller admits the person presenting the card. (In this mode, the person is presumed not-In-violation. unless proven otherwise.) When Local mode is configured, the person is allowed in unless the Controllers making the decision determine beyond doubt that he/she is guilty of an antipassback violation. Global Antipassback Cluster enforces STAR Global Select thischeck box to indicate that this Cluster sharesdata with all the other Clusters that use antipassback aswell as STAR Cluster STAR Global Antipassback. (The default is cleared indicating that the Cluster does not share data antipassback with any other Clusters.) NOTE: When thisoption is selected, the Cluster Antipassback Communication Failure Mode boxoptions become unavailable. 104 Chapter 0 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226035 STAR Cluster Encryption Tab iSTAR Cluster Encryption Tab This tab allows you to configure the encryption mode for an Encrypted Cluster. This tab is Read-only for a Non-encrypted Cluster, and does not apply. Non-encrypted Clusters do not NOTE use 256 bit AES (FIPS 197) encryption. The iSTAR eX, iSTAR Edge, and encrypted iSTAR Ultra controllers always use 256-bit AES (FIPS 197) encryption by default. The Encryption options on the iSTAR Cluster Encryption tab let you choose the FIPS 140-2 method for an Encrypted Cluster. The options on the iSTAR Cluster Encryption tab are only available for iSTAR Encrypted Clusters. The 256 bit AES (FIPS 197) encryption method satisfies the Proprietary Burglar Alarm application NOTE requirements. FIPS 140-2 mode requires a custom certificate key, either host based or controller based. Software House recommends a controller based certificate key. Once you set the cluster to FIPS 140-2 compliant mode, the iSTAR encrypted controllers will be in "dark mode." They will not be visible on the network. Software House recommends that you configure the Tamper Input for a 'dark mode' controller to NOTE trigger an Alarm Event that will be displayed on the Monitoring State if the input changes state. To Configure FIPS 140.2 Encryption for an iSTAR Encrypted Cluster 1. Open the Encryption Options dialog box in the Options and Tools pane and select from the following options: • Controller-Based Encryption Mode • Host-Based Encryption Mode 2. To use FIPS 140-2 mode, Software House recommends that you use the Controller-Based Encryption Mode. Software House recommends Controller-based Encryption for 2 reasons: NOTE 1. Host-based Encryption requires a private key to be transmitted to the controllers non-encrypted. Controller-based Encryption does not. The tradeoff is that the controller-based method requires a signature at the host that recognizes the iSTAR to be valid. 2. The second reason is that it is much easier to recover from a controller-based error situation than to recover from a host-based area. Host based recovery of encryption keys is more difficult. 3. For more information, see the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide and the iSTAR Installation and Configuration Guide. 4. From the iSTAR Cluster dialog box, click the Encryption tab. The Encryption options are shown in Figure 31 on Page 106. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter< 105 EFTA01226036 STAR Cluster Encryption Tab Figure 31: 'STAR Cluster Encryption Tab /SIMONS. • a Yard Ow s-s 2044.0to, 14.1. rye avareien Uwe. Malan, Ira I ' a go.° Ikon I SS I ilsinp. fruxtonCsecn • **VS tO2 rale r. 110$1402yobseuroStr4101•X PIA msb 4TAII rYnTMIIN I- 6TMJlmwbewOS.flVMSby SSTb WS 1102 61M &Inamiss an ma bled %MOWS la Iss my ass rasa whin IST AA a orinlin w ap 1.110•00••••• • 457M taidtioir FPS 20.1.0e,nem; n en7,01.0 sat cane n(kosnoes MAP ea aredissiniti APS IOWANS vet. 5. Select from the available Encryption modes: Non-FIPS 140-2 and FIPS 140-2. 6. Navigate to the Triggers tab or Save and Close to save the cluster and begin configuring iSTAR Controllers. FIPS 140-2 compliant mode has not been evaluated by UL. NOTE 106 Chapter < C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226037 STAR Cluster TriggersTab iSTAR Cluster Triggers Tab C•CURE 9000 uses Triggers, which are configured procedures used for activating security actions. A Trigger automatically executes a specified Action when a particular predefined condition occurs. When a Trigger is defined, the Actions available depend on the property selected. This section illustrates the use of Triggers to monitor a cluster master power failure. The Triggers tab is not available for iSTAR Pro or iSTAR Ultra SE Pro Mode dialup NOTE configurations. To Configure the iSTAR Cluster Triggers Tab 1. Navigate to the Triggers tab, shown in Figure 33 on Page 108. Figure 32: ISTARClusterTriggersTab U.- . *Oa Cercvs QL-4,,coat voregeng — Li r Ws,' Porttne Saner r 21~4,14* MC40 C.reli I Convict." I Coate I eareas I M. I Erna:. IVO. I taus I 'se innes inmost Ropes', 'MA Detwi• This tab provides you with ability to define the activation/deactivation, enable/disable, and arm/disarm, etc. of such objects as: events, inputs, outputs, camera actions, door status changes, etc. Triggers can also be used to launch events which also can be used to launch imports and exports, email and reports, viewer and message displays, personnel ID number state changes, controller downloads, sound activation, communication notifications, etc. 2. Click Add in the Triggers tab to create a new trigger. a. Click within the Property column to display C. When you select this button, the Property browser opens presenting properties available for the controller. b. Click a Property to select it and add it to the column (see Figure 33 on Page 108). C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter< 107 EFTA01226038 STAR Cluster Triggers Tab Figure 33: STAR Cluster Triggers Tab• PropertySelection Enoreerrl Cbck Nis To ilia arla Primer/ C.rv.car4 Pnrwy Oorrmac.40O, Stela of to ,SLR clyM c. Click within the Value column to display a drop-down list of Values associated with the Property that you have selected. Then click on a Value that you want to include as a parameter for the bigger to add it to the column (see Figure 34 on Page 109). 108 Chapter< C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226039 STAR Cluster TriggersTab Figure 34: 'STAR Cluster TriggersTab- Value sILJ asinteeco. tin navy Qtecopeco aspioing %AD tidied ROW e/M r Genteel ICannrsabre I Outhed lbedenewskes 1 Encrpst NW. IRSPA I SWIM,* I Trigor. "" A04 Obtrove Preprb Value Am= Detsls p I Re- 41V Conruncawn nO ' 1 When a Trigger is added, an Action must be configured in the Action column. This is the Action that will occur when the object's selected Property receives the selected Value. d. Click within the column to display a drop-down list of valid actions. Click an Action that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column (see Figure 35 on Page 110). C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter< 109 EFTA01226040 STAR Cluster Triggers Tab F Igu re 35: 'STAR Cluster T riggers Tab -Action s_LJ LI< a;s ,r end Coat Hams OaeA Qescnptal ulinsay ado g ERAS Penton Dial r airteneact Node Ga-es I Conra.ncetcns I One I Mackey).* I Arta I 6-crwan Troro I Sign I Sta. Triggers •" ,t,Reven Prows Voss Amon teats I Prowy Csowuncatal Siam Offie• :ayes Feet As the Action is selected, the lower pane in the Triggers box displays a corresponding entry field, or group of entry fields, specific to the selected Action, such as an Event or Output (see Figure 36 on Page 110). In the case of the Primary Communications Status Property, the available Action is to activate an event. F!gum 36: (STAR Cluster TriggersTab - Action Event Sent end Cost teen CluteA Qescripeco vv.'s,' ado Etaltd Pineon Dela r Wobwrince Mode Gerel I Conn.ncaxer l ri ser I ileceIncus I Atte I &cover, NW, I Stems I State tram I insets Add 'Retch* Privet)* valw Anita I Osais tf I Prey" Contrunicaz4e AmyxEvent eve,' I nal 110 Chapter 4 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226041 STAR Cluster Triggers Tab e. In the Event field, click 0 to select a Event that you want to associate with the trigger (see Figure 37 on Page 111). Events are created in the Configuration Pane. See the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information. Figure 37: STAR Cluster Triggers Tab• Event Selection ,IJ a ssn. end (kis< • nitne l)xe, A P &Sod Pant Doha tiiinl•Wee Me* Garai I Connitealive I PAW I Meeellmes hem 1Enaeeee. TKO= I SSA I Salelese I r Tryon 'AM a•Resort Poor/ Conort.o.tir 9nt paves Ewa c._ Stlectro, SOW lyto Kr. itseta I kea Y a Map colons to co.o‘o by l'<e• Nate I Palen I Goes Click Ws so Alb 044 A. All Ewets Glop Ceba Oefe.lt SI evens crag Revco< Report Re. Waal: TM eonIt obtolaw reptc Awn loAoci up Es Wool, me Cels..li a:1< for back.msni :eon& loser kw Ev Waal Tie defrolt nomel log bam, eve Dence Era Joni T OSA ns Peeea Device Ent" Jame t SystemEno Jared Ott Tte debit SystemEnc.bang T finery Loy Journal Ye US! The &lath eery Low Journal To ke.a Z0O* WO J OSA The *hal hire Zone Enel.:o Dm Oren NISI &heft MIA red NISI Once the field (or group of fields) is completed, the Details column will show information about how the Action has been configured. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 4 111 EFTA01226042 STAR Cluster Triggers Tab Figure 38: STAR Cluster Triggers Tab- Finished o ("—I I now I I I ...<4.1 Vale Cy - S Ey.. 1......v 10«...., To activate or ann iSl'AR Cluster events by a trigger condition, the schedule value is restricted to N OTE Always. 3. To Remove a Trigger, select the row using the LL button and click Remove. A completed Trigger that notifies you of communications failure in the cluster is shown in Figure 38 on Page 112. 4. Navigate to the Status tab or Save and Close to save the cluster and begin configuring iSTAR Controllers. 112 Chapter < C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226043 iSTAR Cluster Dialup Configuration Tab iSTAR Cluster Dialup Configuration Tab The Dialup Configuration tab is used to configure a cluster to use dial-up on the iSTAR Pro or Ultra SE Pro Mode controller. See Chapter 3: Configuring Dialup for the dial-up configuration sequence to follow and configuration information. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter< 113 EFTA01226044 STAR Cluster Status Tab iSTAR Cluster Status Tab The Status tab provides a read-only listing of critical information about the operational status of the iSTAR controllers associated with the cluster. Such information include: • Cluster Name • Comm State • Controller Name • Conn Path • IP Address • Boards State • IP Address 2 • Panel State • Type • Firmware Version • Comm Path • Board Type The Details of the selected controller section displays the same status fields that are displayed on that controller's Status tab. For more information on the status fields that are displayed for each controller type, see the iSTAR Controller Status Tab on Page 147. The Status tab is shown in Figure 39 on Page 114. F ig u re 39: iSTAR Cluster Status Tab Lyn. hmo. Litwin*. >yr...Ty 9-6, &Wed New DOM r a.m.< Mods 001191I COMMOSTO WS I 14“.....0J1I MO I &MOMI "a- Stow how mewl ow Smas Nine I VIA Pew acruiceen 0440t tensectai dala USaysT, - taselon Sus adir Nis I Care, Nast IP Ales IP Alta 2 bt• Conn Ply 0,4 (SW. 'SW Fay in 101011 Memel wirr v.v., Ut Q..• Edw.) 101012 Nab+ .ATten• L.kt CUP.. Ural 101013 11-k O-.A an 10101A irk OS* a the solecled caeca. N.. Iw. IN, Iw1.. :at Penned nab 0 kw. R-rica Wrenn) 0 'cis , -... • Itenr, %CI 0 1.... Prone. Yee, XIII 0 , nts Pant W." rrs) 0 ..e 4trer livre,000 0 'ad R.'s.% ',rot >00 0 II I —. - a Using the Cluster Status Tab 1. The Cluster Status box displays Communications Status values for the iSTAR Cluster. 2. When you select an iSTAR Controller within the Controllers Status list, its status values are displayed in the Details of selected controller box. 3. Navigate to the State Images tab or Save and Close to save the cluster and begin configuring iSTAR Controllers. 114 Chapter < C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226045 'STAR Cluster State Images Tab ISTAR Cluster State Images Tab The State Images tab, shown in Figure 40 on Page 115, provides a means to change the default images used to indicate Cluster states that are displayed in the Monitoring Station. Figure 40: ISTAR Cluster State Images Tab p.15.,•e ..foie -NM DMedollet uvvena Sub* fretikpd PS Non r lade Grell kteartnotans l osl ilsaihraus Pon I G•cncw l 'VW, l Ion Rae nice. I To Change an Image 1. Double-click the existing image. A Wmdows Open dialog box appears allowing you to browse for a folder in which you have placed replacement images. 2. When you locate the replacement image, select it to add it to the image listing. 3. To restore the default image, right-click the new image and select Restore Default 4. Click Save and Close to save changes to the cluster state images. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 4 115 EFTA01226046 STAR Cluster State Images Tab 116 Chapter 4 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Con figuration Guide EFTA01226047 5 Configuring C•CURE iSTAR Controllers The C•CURE iSTAR controller is an intelligent controller for networked security systems. C•CURE iSTAR controllers communicate with the C•CURE 9000 server (acting as a database and journal host) and the system security hardware, providing direct control of events and system activity. This chapter explains how to configure iSTAR controllers, and the devices related to them, in the C•CURE 9000 System. In this chapter Understanding C•CURE iSTAR Controllers 118 Configuration Overview for iSTAR Controllers 119 iSTAR Controller Tasks 124 iSTAR Controller Editor 137 iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs 141 iSTAR Ultra Controller Editor Inputs Tab 178 iSTAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Editor 184 iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller ACM Board Editor 197 iSTAR Input Board Editor 203 iSTAR Output Board Editor 208 iSTAR Ultra Wireless Readers 213 iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor (iSTAR Ultra only) 220 iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor 226 iSTAR Input Editor .232 iSTAR Output Editor 241 iSTAR Reader Editor 248 iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Editor 260 iSTAR Aperio Reader Editor 264 Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices 270 State Images Tab for iSTAR Devices 274 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapters 117 EFTA01226048 Understanding C•CURE iSTAR Controlers Understanding C•CURE iSTAR Controllers The iSTAR controller is an intelligent, network-ready controller for security systems. The heart of the iSTAR controller is the General Controller Module ( GCM) - an embedded microprocessor-based controller card. Add-on Access Control Modules (ACM Boards) provide access control functionality by supporting readers, outputs, and inputs. The iSTAR Ultra, Pro, and eX also support Schlage wireless readers and the Ultra also supports Assa Abloy Aperio wireless readers. To install and configure the controller hardware and its connected devices see the following manuals: • iSTAR Pro Installation and Configuration Guide • iSTAR eX Installation and Configuration Guide • iSTAR Edge Installation and Configuration Guide • iSTAR Ultra Installation and Configuration Guide • iSTAR Ultra SE Installation and Configuration Guide For information on configuring host and panel Events for an iSTAR controller, see the Events chapter in the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide. The following sections provide the information you need to configure the iSTAR Controllers. • iSTAR Controller Tasks on Page 124 • Configuration Overview for iSTAR Controllers on Page 119 • iSTAR Controller Editor on Page 137 118 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226049 Configuration Overview for STAR Controllers Configuration Overview for iSTAR Controllers Configuring the iSTAR controllers involves setting up the hardware and configuring the software components. See the iSTAR Hardware Installation Guides for instructions about setting up controllers and related hardware. Before configuring a controller, make sure you know the MAC address of the controller NIC you are NOTE using. The MAC address is built into the GCM and cannot be changed. You can find a controller's MAC address(es) on a label attached to the GCM. To Configure an iSTAR Controller 1. Create an iSTAR Controller (see Creating an iSTAR Controller on Page 124) or edit an existing iSTAR Controller (see Editing an iSTAR Controller on Page 126. The iSTAR Controller General tab appears, as shown in Figure 47 on Page 142. 2. On the iSTAR Controller General tab, configure the basic communications settings for the Controller, such as the MAC address, the primary and optional secondary network connections, and the Controller Time Zone. 3. Click on each of the tabs for attached devices, such as the Boards tab for iSTAR Classic/Pro Controllers, or the Readers tab for iSTAR eX Controllers, and configure the devices and their settings. • For iSTAR Classic/Pro Controllers, refer to the iSTAR Pro Configuration Summary on Page 119. • For iSTAR eX/Edge Controllers, refer to the iSTAR eX and iSTAR Edge Configuration Summary on Page 121. • For iSTAR Ultra, refer to the iSTAR Ultra Configuration Summary on Page 122. 4. Click on the iSTAR Triggers tab to configure actions that can activate Events, lock or unlock Doors, sound audible alarms, or a wide range of other security functions. 5. Click on the iSTAR State Images tab to customize the images that are displayed on the Monitoring Station to represent the Controllers. 6. Click Save and Close to save your settings. When using a multi-homed 9000 standalone server with multiple network adapters on multiple NOTE networks, use the VINCA IP address of the adapter selected for IP communication to ensure consistent communication with the iSTAR fast personnel download. Set the VINCA IP address as the host address for the iSTAR controllers and in the Options & Tools > System Variables > VINCA IP address field. Then restart the drivers. iSTAR Pro Configuration Summary 'Fable 9 on Page 119 provides a summary of the tasks involved in configuring an iSTAR Pro Controller. Table 9: STAR Pro Configuration Summary Step Task Reference 1. Create and save an STAR Pro Cluster for the Controller. Creating an iSTAR Cluster on Page 88 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 119 EFTA01226050 Configuration Overview for STAR Controllers Table 9: STAR Pro Configuration Summary (continued) Step Task Reference 2. Create an STAR Pro Controller under the STAR Cluster in the Hardware Tree. Creating an STAR Controller on Page 124 3. Use the STAR Controller General tab to configure the basiccommunications STAR Controller General Tab on settings for the Controller and to assign Reader LCD Message Sets. Page 141 4. Use the Boards tab to create and configure Inputs, Outputs, and ACM boards for STAR Controller Boards Tab the Controller. (STAR ClassidPro) on Page 156 5. Open the STAR ACM Board Editor tocreate Inputs, Outputs, and Readers for the STAR Classic/Pro Controller ACM Controller. Board Editor on Page 197 6. Use the ACM Board Inputs tab to create Inputs. 'STAR ACM Board Inputs Tab on Page 198 • Click el to open the STAR Input Editor to configure each Input. STAR Input Editor on Page 232 7. Use the ACM Board Outputs tab to create Outputs. STAR ACM Board Outputs Tab on Page 199 • Click[] to open the STAR Output Editor to configure each Output. STAR Output Editor on Page 241 8. Use the ACM Board Readers tab to create Readers. STAR ACM Board Readers Tab on Page 200 • Click[l to open the STAR Reader Editor to configure each Reader. STAR Reader Editor on Page 248 9. Use the ACM Board ACM EXT tab to create Input and Output Boards. STAR ACM Board ACM Ext Tab on Page 201 10. Use the STAR Input Board Editor to Configure an STAR Input Board. STAR Input Board Editor on Page 203 • Click n to open the STAR Input Editor to configure each Input. STAR Input Editor on Page 232 11. Use the STAR Output Board Editor to Configure an STAR Output Board. STAR Output Board Editor on Page 208 • Click n to open the STAR Output Editor to configure each Output. STAR Output Editor on Page 241 12. If you have Schlage Wireless PIMs and Readers, use the &Wage Wireless PIMs STAR Schlage Wireless PIMs Tab tab to configure these devices. on Page 153 13. From the Hardware Tree. create STAR Door objectsfor the Controller. STAR Door Editor on Page 427 14. From the Hardware Tree, create STAR Elevator objects for the Controller. iSTAR Elevatorson Page 505 15. Use the STAR Triggers tab to create new triggers for the Controller. STAR Controller Triggers Tab on Page 147 16. Use the STAR State Images tab to customize the state images that are displayed STAR Controller State Images on the Monitoring Station for the STAR Controller. Tab on Page 152 120 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Con figuration Guide EFTA01226051 Configuration Overview for STAR Controllers iSTAR eX and iSTAR Edge Configuration Summary 'Fable 10 on Page 121 provides a summary of the tasks involved in configuring an iSTAR eX or iSTAR Edge Controller. Table 10: STAR eX/Edge Configuration Summary Step Task Reference 1. Create and save an STAR eX/Edge Cluster for the Controller. Creating an STAR Cluster on Page 88 2. Create an STAR eX/Edge Controller under the STAR Cluster in the Hardware Tree. Creating an STAR Controller on Page 124 3. Use the STAR Controller General tab to configure the basic communications settings for the STAR Controller General Controller and to assign Reader LCD Message Sets. Tab on Page 141 4. Use the STAR Controller Inputs tab to create the Inputson the Controller. STAR eX and Edge Controller Inputs Tab on Page 159 • Click[] to open the STAR Input Editor to configure each Input. STAR Input Editor on Page 232 5. Use the STAR Controller Outputs tab to create the Outputs on the Controller. STAR Edge/eX Controller Outputs Tab on Page 164 • Click ... to open the STAR Output Editor to configure each Output. STAR Output Editor on Page 241 6. Use the STAR Controller Wiegand tab to create the direct connect Wiegand Readerson the STAR eX Controller Controller. Wiegand Tab on Page 171 • Click ... to open the STAR Reader Editor to configure each Reader. STAR Reader Editor on Page 248 7. Use the STAR Controller tabs to create the Input Boards. Output Boards, and Readers on the STAR eXCOM1/COM2 Controller. Tabs on Page 173 STAR Edge COM1/COM2/COM3 Tabs on Page 167 8. Use the STAR Input Board Editor to Configure an STAR Input Board. STAR Input Board Editor on Page 203 • Click[i to open the STAR Input Editor toconfigure each Input. STAR Input Editor on Page 232 9. Use the STAR Output Board Editor to Configure an STAR Output Board. STAR Output Board Editor on Page 208 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 121 EFTA01226052 Configuration Overview for STAR Controllers Table 10: STAR eX/Edge Configuration Summary (continued) Step Task Reference • Mk into open the STAR Output Editor to configure each Output. STAR Output Editor on Page 241 Click [—Ito open the STAR Reader Editor to configure each Reader. STAR Reader Editor on 10. Page 248 If you have &Maga Wireless PIMs and Readers, open the STAR PIM-485 Board editor to configure STAR PIM-485 Board Editor 11. these devices. on Page 226 From the Hardware Tree, create STAR Door objects for the Controller. STAR Door Editor on Page 12. 427 From the Hardware Tree. create STAR Elevator objects for the Controller. STAR Elevatorson Page 13. 505 Use the STAR Triggers tab to create new triggers for the Controller. iSTAR Controller Triggers 14. Tab on Page 147 Use the STAR State Images tab to change the images that displayon the Monitoring Station for the iSTAR Controller State 15. iSTAR Controller. You can substitute a .JPG image for anyof the default state images. Images Tab on Page 152 iSTAR Ultra Configuration Summary Table 11 on Page 122 provides a summary of the tasks involved in configuring a iSTAR Ultra Controller. Table 11: STAR Ultra Configuration Summary Step Task Reference 1 Create and save an iSTAR Ultra Cluster for the Controller. Creating an STAR Cluster on Page 88 2 Create an STAR Ultra Controller under the STAR Cluster in the Hardware Tree. Creating an STAR Controller on Page 124 3 Use the STAR Controller General tab to <>colligate the basicoommunications settings for STAR Controller General Tab on Page 141 the Controller and to assign Reader LCD Message Sets. 4 Use the Boards tab to create and configure Inputs, Outputs, and ACM boards for the STAR Controller Boards Tab (STAR Controller. Classic/Pro) on Page 156 5 Open the STAR ACM Board Editor to create Inputs. Outputs. and Readers for the STAR Classic/Pro Controller ACM Board Controller. Editor on Page 197 6 Use the ACM Board Inputs tab to create Inputs. STAR ACM Board Inputs Tab on Page 198 7 Click [—I to open the STAR Input Editor to configure each Input. STAR Input Editor on Page 232 8 Use the ACM Board Outputs tab to create Outputs. STAR ACM Board Outputs Tab on Page 199 9 Click [ ... 1to open the STAR Output Editor to configure each Output. STAR Output Editor on Page 241 122 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226053 Configuration Overview for STAR Controllers Table 11: STAR Ultra Configuration Summary (continued) Step Task Reference 10 Use the ACM Wiegand tab to create Wiegand-connected Readers. STAR Ultra ACM Board Wiegand Tab on Page 184 11 Click[i to open the STAR Reader Editor to configure each Reader. STAR Reader Editor on Page 248 12 Use the ACM Board RS-485 tab to create RS-485 Ports for Readers. STAR Ultra ACM Board RS-485 Tab on Page 186 13 Click ri to open the STAR Device Port Editor to configure each RS-485 Reader and STAR Ultra ACM RS-485 Device Port related Inputs. Editor on Page 188 14 Use the ACM Board RS-485 Device Port Reader tab to configure RS-485 Readers. STAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port Readers Tab on Page 190 15 Use the ACM Board RS-485 Device Port ACM Ext tab to configure Input and Output STAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port ACM EXT Boards. Tab on Page 192 16 Use the STAR Input Board Editor to Configure an STAR Input Board. STAR Input Board Editor on Page 203 17 Click ritoopen the STAR Input Editor to configure each Input. STAR Input Editor on Page 232 18 Use the STAR Output Board Editor to Configure an STAR Output Board. STAR Output Board Editor on Page 208 19 Click n to open the STAR Output Editor toconfigure each Output. STAR Output Editor on Page 241 20 Click the Com1 and Com2 tab to configure Aperio Hubs STAR Ultra COM1/COM2 Tabson Page 181 ClidC toopen the STAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board editor to configure the STAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor Communications Fail Input and STAR Aperio Readers. (STAR Ultra only) on Page 220 Click[i to open the STAR Aperio Reader editor to configure STAR Aperio readers. iSTAR Aetna Reader Editor on Page 264 From the Hardware Tree. create iSTAR Door objects for your Controller. STAR Door Editor on Page 427 From the Hardware Tree. create STAR Elevator objects for your Controller. STAR Elevatorson Page 505 Use the STAR Triggers tab to create new triggers for your Controller. STAR Controller Triggers Tab on Page 147 Use the STAR State Images tab to customize the state images that are displayed on the STAR Controller State Images Tab on Monitoring Station for your STAR Controller. Page 152 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Con flgutation Guide Chapter 5 123 EFTA01226054 STAR Controller Tasks iSTAR Controller Tasks You can perform the following tasks to manage iSTAR Controllers. ■ Creating an iSTAR Controller on Page 124 ■ Creating a Controller Template on Page 125 ■ Deleting an iSTAR Controller on Page 126 ■ Editing an iSTAR Controller on Page 126 ■ Viewing a List of iSTAR Controllers on Page 127 ■ Using Set Property for an iSTAR Controller on Page 130 ■ Add a Hardware Device to Group from a Dynamic View on Page 409 Creating an iSTAR Controller You can create a new iSTAR Controller only within an iSTAR Cluster of the appropriate type. The iSTAR Ultra S1-1 encryption switch enables FIPS 197 AES 256-bit encryption. The switch setting NOTE must match the software configuration of the cluster and the controller. See the iSTAR Ultra Installation and Configuration Guide for more information. To Create a iSTAR Controller 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Navigate to the Hardware folder that contains the iSTAR Cluster in which you want to create the new Controller. 3. Select the iSTAR Cluster and right-click to display the context menu. 4. Select the controller you wish to create: For an iSTAR Ultra SE in Pro Mode, select iSTAR Pro Controller. NOTE ■ For an Encrypted Ouster, you can select: • iSTAR Edge Controller>New • iSTAR eX Controller>New • iSTAR Ultra Controller>New ■ For a Non-encrypted Cluster, you can select: • iSTAR Classic Controller>New • iSTAR Pro Controller>New • iSTAR Ultra Controller>New The iSTAR Controller Editor opens to allow you to configure the Controller (see iSTAR Controller General Tab on Page 141). 5. Type a unique name for the controller in the Name field. 6. Type a textual description (optional) in the Description field. 124 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226055 ISTARControier Tasks 7. Enter the MAC Address of the iSTAR Controller in the MAC Address field (if you do not, you will receive an error when you try to save the Controller). 8. To save the new iSTAR controller, click Save and Close. Creating a Controller Template You can create a template for an iSTAR Controller. A Controller Template saves you time because you can save the configuration settings and re-use the template to create new Controller objects with the those settings pre-defined. To Create a Controller Template 1. In the Navigation pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Navigate to the Hardware folder that contains the iSTAR Cluster in which you want to create the new Controller Template. 3. Select the iSTAR Cluster and right-click to display the context menu. 4. Select the iSTAR controller you wish to create a template for: ■ iSTAR Edge Controller>New Template. ■ iSTAR eX Controller>New Template. ■ iSTAR Classic Controller>New Template. ■ iSTAR Pro Controller>New Template. ■ iSTAR Ultra Controller>New Template. 5. The iSTAR Controller Editor opens a new Template. 6. Configure any settings you want to include in the Template. 7. To save the new iSTAR Controller Template, click Save and Close. The new Controller template appears under — Templates in the iSTAR Controller context menu drop-down list in the Hardware tree. To Create an iSTAR Controller from a Template 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Navigate to the Hardware folder that contains the iSTAR Cluster in which you want to create the new Controller. 3. Select the iSTAR Cluster and right-click to display the context menu. 4. Select iSTAR Controller and click the Template you want to use from the context menu. 5. The iSTAR Controller Editor opens so that you can edit the new Controller. The settings from your Template are already configured. 6. Configure any additional settings. See Configuration Overview for iSTAR Controllers on Page 119 for more information. 7. To save the new iSTAR Controller, click Save and Close. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 125 EFTA01226056 STAR Controller Tasks Deleting an iSTAR Controller You can delete an iSTAR Controller from the Hardware tree, or one or more iSTAR Controllers from a Dynamic View. To Delete an iSTAR Controller from the Hardware Tree 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Navigate to the iSTAR Cluster that contains the Controller that you want to delete. 3. Right-click on the iSTAR Controller that you want to delete and select Delete from the context menu. 4. Click Yes in the "Are you sure you want to delete the selected iSTAR Controller object?" message box. A dialog box appears showing the progress of the deletion. 5. When the object has been deleted, click one of the following buttons: • OK to close the dialog box. • Print to print the deletion message. • Email to send the deletion message to the email address you have configured in the Customer Support section of the C•CURE 9000 System Variables. To Delete iSTAR Controllers from a Dynamic View 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select iSTAR Controller from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click L i to open a Dynamic View showing all iSTAR Controller objects. 4. Select one or more iSTAR controllers from the Dynamic View list of iSTAR Controllers. 5. Right-click one of the Controllers in the list that you want to delete and select Delete from the context menu. 6. Click Yes in the "Are you sure you want to delete the selected iSTAR Controller object(s)?" message box. A dialog box appears showing the progress of the deletion(s). 7. When the object(s) have been deleted, click one of the following buttons: • OK to close the dialog box. • Print to print the deletion message. • Email to send the deletion message to the email address you have configured in the Customer Support section of the C•CURE 9000 System Variables. Editing an iSTAR Controller You can edit an iSTAR Controller to change settings or add new Input, Output, or Reader objects to the Controller. To Edit an Controller or Board 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select iSTAR Controller from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 126 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226057 'STAR Controls( Tasks 3. Click i s to open a Dynamic View showing all iSTAR Controller objects. 4. Double-click the Controller in the list that you want to modify and select Edit from the context menu. The iSTAR Controller editor opens (see iSTAR Controller Editor on Page 137). 5. See Configuration Overview for iSTAR Controllers on Page 119 for information about how to use the iSTAR Controller Editor to configure your iSTAR Controller. Viewing a List of iSTAR Controllers You can view a list of iSTAR Controllers in a Dynamic View. To View a List of iSTAR Controllers 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select iSTAR Controller from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click i s to open a Dynamic View showing all iSTAR Controller objects 4. You can filter, group, and print the list of iSTAR Controllers in the Dynamic View. See the C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide for more information about using the features provided by Dynamic Views. 5. You can select one or more Controllers in the list (using CTRL+Left-click or SHIFf+Left-click for multiple selection) and right-click to display a context menu (see Viewing a List of iSTAR Controllers on Page 127). Using the iSTAR Controller Context Menu To access the controller context menu, right-click on a controller in the Hardware tree or in the Dynamic View. The selections described in Table 1 on Page 127 are not available for all controllers. Table 1: 'STAR Controls( Context Menu Selection Description Edit Click this menu selection to edit the selected iSTAR Controller. The iSTAR Controller editor opens. You can rename the iSTAR Controller, change its description, and any other attributes. Delete Click this menu selection to delete the selected iSTAR Controller(s). A prompt appears asking you to confirm that you want to delete the iSTAR Controller. Click Yes to delete the Input or No to cancel the deletion. When you delete an iSTAR Controller, allot the child objects you have defined for the Controller are also deleted. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 127 EFTA01226058 STAR Controller Tasks Table 1: STAR Controller Context Menu (continued) .... Selection Description Set Property Click this menu selection to change the value of a property in the selected controller(s). A dialog box appears asking you to select a property to change. Click ri to open a selection list and click the property you wish to change. You can change the value of the following STAR Controller properties: • Description - You can change the textual description of the STAR Controller(s) by selecting this property and typing in a new value. • Enabled - You can determine whether or not the STAR Controller(s) are enabled to communicate to the Administration or Monitoring Station by selecting this property and selecting/clearing the value check box. • Power Suppression -Allows you to select or clear this value for the selected controller. See Using Set Property for an iSTAR Controller on Page 130. Add to Group Click this menu selection to add the STAR Controller to a Group.A dialog boxlisting the STAR Controller Groups in the system appears. Click on a Group in the list to add the STAR Controller(s) to that Group. See Add a Hardware Device to Group from a DynamicView on Page 409. Export Selection Opens an Export dialog box from which you can export one or more records dispLayed in a Dynamic View to either an XML or a CSV file. This allows you to quickly and easitycreate XML/CSV reportson selected C•CURE 9000 data. NOTE: Although XML is the initial default file type, once you choose a type in the Save as type field. whether XML or CSV, that becomes the default the next time this dialog box opens. CSV-formatted exports cannot be imported. If you require importing functionality, export to XML. • When you export to an XML file, all available data for the selected object(s), whether displayed in the Dynamic View or not—aswellasallthechild objects of the selected record(s), is exported. • When you export to a CSV file, ontydata in the oalumnsdisplaying in the DynamicView is exported, and in the order displayed. This allows you to both select and arrange data fields for your report. In addition, exporting to a CSV file allows you to view the exported data in an Excel spreadsheet and further manipulate it for your use. NOTE: When you click Export Selection, you are running the export on the client computer. Consequently, the system does not use the Default Export Directory Path—which is on the server. It opens a directory on the client, reverting to the last directory used. You can navigate to the default export server directory, if you wish. Or to avoid confusion or use the same destination folder for both client and server computers, you can use UNC (Universal Naming Convention) paths. Example: \\Computer Name1Program Files1Software House1SWHouse1SWHSystem1Export. Find in Audit Log Opens a Query Parameters diabg boxy which you can enter prompts and/or modify the query criteria to search for entries in the Audit Log that reference the selected STAR Controller. The results display in a separate Dynamic View. This selection is not available if you select multiple Controllers. Update Firmware Updates the firmware for an STAR controller. See Updating STAR Firmware (Ethernet Connections) on Page 130 and Updating STAR Firmware (Dial-up Connections) on Page 132. NOTE: If you are using dial-up to update the firmware, you must manualtyoonnect to the STAR before Update Firmware is visible in the context menu. 128 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226059 STAR Controller Tasks Table 1: STAR Controller Context Menu (continued) Selection Description Find in Journal Opens a Query Parameters dialog box in which you can enter prompts and/or modify the query criteria to search for entries in the Journal that reference the selected STAR Controller. The resuttsdisplay in a separate Dynamic View. This selection is not available if you select multiple Controllers. Perform Full Downloads configuration and personnel records appropriate to the controller. Controller Download Diagnostics Opens the STAR Diagnostics System web page for this Controller, providing you with the controller's status. This selection is not available d you select multiple Controllers. Turn Opens the Maintenance Mode dialog box to put the STAR Controller and/or its oomponents into Maintenance Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 2: Maintenance Mode for more information. Mode On Turn Opens the Maintenance Mode dialog box to take the STAR Controller and/or its components out of Maintenance Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 2: Maintenance Mode for more information. Mode Off Copy & Paste Used to make a duplicate of a Cluster and its Child Objects on the same partition on the same system. See Copying. Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers on Page 40. Copy To Used to make a duplicate of a Cluster and its Child Objects on a different partition on the same system. using Pasta From. See Copying. Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllerson Page40. Paste From The Copy To and Pasta Fromcontext menu selectionscan be used to duplicate Clusters and Children on another system. See Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllerson Page 40. Monitor Click this menu selection to view activity for the selected STAR Controller(s). and any Add-on Board. Door. Elevator, Input. Output. Reader, and Trigger-with-target-Event children, on an Admin Monitor Activity Viewer. NOTE: Which Add-on Boards display on the Monitor—as well as which of their Input, Output, Reader. and Trigger-with-target-Event children—Depends on the Controller type and what is turned on. For more information, see 'Monitoring an Object from the Administration Station' in the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide. Connect Dialup This menu selection is only available for an STAR using dialup (Pro/Ultra SE Pro Mode). Panel Click to open the Manual Action dialog box to enter a starting time. ending time, and priority to connect using dialup. It is recommended that you set the Start and End time to maintain a connection for a minimum of two hours. Reset Dial-up This menu selection is only avaiLable on an STAR Master using dialup (Pro/Uttra SE Pro Mode). Panel Click to reboot the STAR controller. Reset All IP-ACM Resets all IP-ACMs configured on the controller. Panels Hardware Tree Only: C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 129 EFTA01226060 STAR Controller Tasks Table 1: STAR Controller Context Menu (continued) Selection Description STAR Door Click t000nfigure a new door or a door template. Elevator Click to configure a new elevator or an elevator template. iSTAR Input Click to configure a new input or an input template. Output Click toconfigure a new output or an output template. iSTAR Reader Click to configure a new reader or a reader template. Using Set Property for an iSTAR Controller You can use Set Property to quickly set a property for a Controller without opening the iSTAR Controller Editor. Set Property allows you to select multiple Controllers in a Dynamic View and right-click to set a specific property for all of them. So, for example, if you wanted to change a setting for 20 Controllers, you could select all of them and do it in one step. To Set a Property for an iSTAR Controller 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select iSTAR Controller from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click mai to open a Dynamic View showing all iSTAR Controller objects. 4. Select the iSTAR Controllers in the list for which you want to set a property, using multiple selection (CTRL+Left- click to select more than one Controller, or SHIFT+Left-click to select a range of Controllers) as needed. 5. Right-click a selected iSTAR Controller and select Set Property from the context menu. 6. Click 0 in the Property field to open a selection dialog box and select the property you want to set. 7. Enter the value for the property in the Value field and click OK. Updating iSTAR Firmware (Ethernet Connections) You can update the iSTAR firmware on iSTAR panels using Ethernet connections from either the Administration Client or the Monitoring Station client. You can initiate a firmware update by right-clicking on the iSTAR controller: ■ In the Hardware Tree ■ In a Dynamic View in the Administration Client ■ In the Status List - Controller in the Monitoring Station 130 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226061 STAR Contro!er Tasks To Update Firmware on an iSTAR Controller Right-click on the controller and select Update Firmware from the context menu as shown in Figure 41 on Page ?I . Figure 41: 'STAR Context Menu Edit x Delete Set property Add to group D. Export selection... Find in Audit log... And in Journal... Perform Full Controller Download Update Firmware... Diagnostics... Turn Maintenance Mode On Copy and Paste... Copy To... Monitor Connect Dialup Panel— Reset Di*, Panel Show Associations Update Firmware will not appear on the context menu if the iSTAR is not Enabled or is off-line. NOTE The Firmware Download dialog box, shown in Figure 42 on Page 132, opens. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 131 EFTA01226062 STAR Controller Tasks Figure 42: Firmware Download Dialog Box Firmware Doamioad Controller Herne real real ear CurrentVersion: 5.1.3.1910534 Avalable Won 5.1O19007A 5.1.3,1910534 5.1.5.19109N 5.1.6.1911034 5.1.7.19201)4 5.1.8.1930234 5.1519403)4 5201960234 52.1.1970534 •l Sattirmwara doveload 2. Select the firmware version that you want to download from the list in the dia og box. 3. Click Start firmware download. A progress bar shows you when the download is completed. 4. When the download has completed, click Close to close the dialog box. Updating iSTAR Firmware (Dial-up Connections) You can update the iSTAR firmware on iSTAR Pro and iSTAR Ultra SE Pro Mode panels using dial-up from either the Administration Client or the Monitoring Station client. You can initiate a firmware update by right-clicking on the iSTAR controller: ■ In the Hardware Tree ■ In a Dynamic View in the Administration Client ■ In the Status List - Controller in the Monitoring Station To Update Firmware on an iSTAR Controller I. Manually connect to the dial-up iSTAR controller. Right-click on the dial-up iSTAR controller and select Connect Dialup Panel as shown in Figure 43 on Page 133. 132 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226063 STAR Controller Tasks Figure 43: STAR Context Menu• Dialup Connection Edit Delete Set property Add to group Exact seleclicc... And it Audit log... And in Journal... Perform Full Contraer Dowrioad Diagnostic... Turn Maintenance Mode On Copy and Paste... Copy To... Monitor Connect Dialup Panel... I Reset DIalup Panel The Manual Actions dialog box, shown in Figure 44 on Page 133, opens. Figure 44: ManualAction Dialog Box di:nein:Moue wt itini)15 1233PM End I n1320150 33PM nary Torre ;w I inoucbcns 2. Ensure that the Start and End Time is set to a minimum of two hours. 3. Click Save and Close. 4. After the connection is established, right-click on the controller and select Update Firmware as shown in Figure 45 on Page 134. Update Firmware will not appear on the context menu if the iSTAR is not Enabled or is off-line. NOTE C•CURE 9000 Hardware Con figutation Guide Chapter 5 133 EFTA01226064 STAR Controller Tasks F igu re 45: STAR Context Menu - Update Firmware Edit X Delete Fif Set property Add to group 0. Export selection... Find in Audit Log... Find in Journal... Perform Full Controller Download Update Firmware... Diagnostics... Turn Maintenance Mode On Copy and Paste... Copy To... Monitor Connect Dialup Panel... Reset Dialup Panel Show Associations The Firmware Download dialog box, shown in Figure 46 on Page 134, opens. Figure 48: Firmware Download Ayala* *mons 5.1019007A 5.1.3.19105A 5.1.5.19109A 5.1.6.19110A 5.1.7.19101a 5.1819002i 5.1.9.19403t4 2 0 19602A 5 2 1 19705,4 5. Select the firmware version that you want to download from the list in the dialog box. 6. Click Start firmware download. A progress bar shows you when the download is completed. 7. When the download has completed, click Close to close the dialog box. 134 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226065 STAR Controller Tasks iSTAR Firmware Updates Using ICU You can use the ICU (iS'FAR Configuration Utility) to quickly download firmware updates to one or more controllers. Copy the new firmware file to C:\Program Files (x86) TycoWrossHre \ ServerComponents istar \ICU \Firmware (the default folder location) before starting the download process. Before starting the firmware download, note the following: • If you moved the ICU folder, then you must go back to the Controller dialog box and change the Server Root Directory to match that path. See the ICU help for information about changing the Server Root Directory. • If the default Server HTTP Port (9701) that is used for firmware downloads is in use by another application, you have to specify another port to use for firmware downloads. See the ICU help for information about changing the Server Root Directory. These procedures use default passwords. If you changed the default passwords, then you must use NOTE those. To Download Firmware to the Controller Using the ICU If you are downloading firmware to a controller using dialup, perform the following steps before you NOTE download the firmware: 1. Right-click on the controller an select Connect to Controller. 2. Monitor the connection in the Monitoring Station. Once complete, proceed to Step 1 below. 1. Click the Options & Tools pane. 2. Click ICU. 3. Enter the ICU password and click OK. The default password is manager. The ICU starts and the main window opens. 4. Select the controller(s) that you want to update. You can select multiple controllers by pressing the Ctrl key while you are selecting them. 5. After selecting the controller(s), right-click in the ICU window and select Download Firmware from the context menu. 6. You are prompted for a password if the iSTAR controller is an Ultra or Ultra SE. Enter iSTAR, the default password and click OK. 7. Click Browse and navigate to C:\Program Files (x86) Tyco \ CrossHre ServerComponents \istar \ICU \Firmware (the default folder location) . 8. Select the firmware image file and click Open. The selected file is displayed in the Firmware Image File to Download box. 6. Click Start Download to initiate the download to all controllers in the Download Firmware list. The firmware is downloaded simultaneously to all controllers in the list. The Progress bar on each line indicates when the download is complete for each controller. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 135 EFTA01226066 STAR Controller Tasks The controller may reboot more than once during the upgrade process. NOTE • To cancel a download, select the controller and right-click to select Cancel Download from the context menu. • If a Controller returns a Download Failed message, you can select the controller and right-click to select Retry from the context menu to restart the firmware download. 9. When all of the downloads have completed, click Exit to close the Firmware Download dialog box. Changing the Time Zone of an iSTAR Controller You can change the value of the iSTAR controller Time Zone field only when the iSTAR Controller is not enabled (Enabled field is blankO). You must edit the controller, clear the Enabled field, save the controller, then re-open it to change the Time Zone. If you change the Time Zone of the iSTAR controller, the Time Zone settings of all child objects of that iSTAR controller are changed as well. A warning message appears if you change the Time Zone and any Events or Triggers have controller-based actions on this iSTAR controller and the Event is configured to use a different Time Zone than this iSTAR controller. Host-based actions with Schedules respect the controller Time Zone: a host-based Event that unlocks doors according to a Schedule uses the controller Time Zone to determine when the Schedule is active for devices on that controller. However, if a Time Zone is assigned to the host-based Event itself, the Event actions will activate on the Schedule based on the host Time Zone. Example: With a C•CURE 9000 Server in the Eastern US Time Zone (GMT -5:00) and an iSTAR controller in the Central US Time Zone (GMT -6:00): ■ A host Event that does not include an Event Time Zone unlocks specific Doors by Schedule on an iSTAR controller according to the controller Time Zone. ■ A host Event that includes an Event Time Zone unlocks specific doors by Schedule on an iSTAR controller according to the C•CURE 9000 Server Time Zone. To Change the Time Zone of an iSTAR Controller 1. From the Hardware pane, select the iSTAR controller you wish to change. Right-click and select Edit 2. Clear the Enabled field (change ❑p to E. 3. Click Save and Close to save the change. 4. From the Hardware pane, select the iSTAR controller again. Right-click and select Edit 5. When the iSTAR controller editor opens, the Time Zone field can be changed. 6. Click Save and Close to save the change. 138 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226067 STAR Controller Editor iSTAR Controller Editor The iSTAR Controller editor dialog box allows you to configure an iSTAR Controller and its attached devices. You use the iSTAR Controller editor to configure the Controller settings and specify the Inputs, Outputs, and Readers that are connected to the Controller. For information about the iSTAR Controller editor for a specific iSTAR model, see: ■ iSTAR Classic Controller Editor on Page 137 ■ iSTAR Pro Controller Editor on Page 137 ■ iSTAR eX Controller Editor on Page 138 ■ iSTAR Edge Controller Editor on Page 139 ■ iSTAR Ultra Controller Editor on Page 139 iSTAR Classic Controller Editor On iSTAR Classic Controllers, you can configure the GCM and any installed ACM Boards. Two ACM Boards can be installed on an iSTAR Classic Controller. The iSTAR Classic Controller Editor has the tabs listed in Table 12 on Page 137. Table 12: STAR Classic Controller Editor Tabs Tab See... General Tab STAR Controller General Ta b on Page 141 Boards Tab STAR Controller Boards Tab (STAR ClassidPro) on Page 156 &Maga Wireless PIMs Tab STAR Schlage Wireless PIMs Tab on Page 153 Triggers Tab STAR Controller Triggers Tab on Page 147 Groups Tab Groups Tab for Hardware Devices Oil Page 28 Status Tab STAR Controller Status Tab on Page 147 User Defined Fields Tab STAR Controller User Defined Fields Tab on Page 151 State Images Tab STAR Controller State Images Tab on Page 152 iSTAR Pro Controller Editor On iSTAR Pro Controllers, you can configure the GCM and any installed ACM Boards. Two ACM Boards can be installed on an iSTAR Pro Controller. The iSTAR Pro Controller Editor has the tabs listed in Table 13 on Page 138. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 137 EFTA01226068 STAR Controller Editor Table 13: STAR Pro Controller Editor Tabs Tab See... General Tab STAR Controller General Tab on Page 141 Boards Tab STAR Controller BoardsTab (iSTAR Classic/Pro) on Page 156 &Wage Wireless PIMs Tab STAR &Maga Wireless PIMs Tab on Page 153 Triggers Tab STAR Controller Triggers Tab on Page 147 Groups Tab GroupsTab for Hardware Deviceson Page 28 Status Tab STAR Controller Status Tab on Page 147 User Defined FieldsTab STAR Controller User Defined Fields Tab on Page 151 State Images Tab STAR Controller State Images Tab on Page 152 iSTAR eX Controller Editor On iSTAR eX Controllers, you can configure the GCM and any boards connected to the Power Management Board (PM B). The tabs for the iSTAR eX Controller Editor are listed in Table 14 on Page 138. Table 14: STAR eX Controller Editor Tabs Tab See... General Tab STAR Controller General Tab on Page 141 Inputs Tab STAR eX and Edge Controller Inputs Tab on Page 159 Outputs Tab STAR Edge/eX Controller Outputs Tab on Page 164 Wiegand Tab STAR eX Controller Wiegand Tab on Page 171 COM1 Tab STAR eX COM1/COM2 Tabson Page 173 COM2 Tab STAR eX COM1/COM2 Tabson Page 173 Triggers Tab STAR Controller Triggers Tab on Page 147 Groups Tab Groups Tab for Hardware Deviceson Page 28 Status Tab STAR Controller Status Tab on Page 147 User Defined FieldsTab STAR Controller User Defined Fields Tab on Page 151 State Images Tab STAR Controller State Images Tab on Page 152 138 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226069 STAR Controller Editor iSTAR Edge Controller Editor "lhe tabs for the iSTAR Edge Controller Editor are listed in Table 15 on Page 139. Table 15: iSTAR Edge Controler Editor Tabs Tab Sae... General Tab iSTAR Controler General Tab on Page 141 Inputs Tab iSTAR eX and Edge Controller Inputs Tab on Page 159 Outputs Tab iSTAR Edge/eX Controler Outputs Tab on Page 164 Wiegand Tab iSTAR Edge Controler Wiegand Tab on Page 169 COM1 Tab STAR Edge COM1/COM2/COM3 Tabs on Page 167 COM2 Tab iSTAR Edge COM1/COM2/COM3 Tabs on Page 167 COM3 Tab iSTAR Edge COM1/COM2/COM3 Tabs on Page 167 Triggers Tab iSTAR Controler Triggers Tab on Page 147 Groups Tab Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 28 Status Tab iSTAR Controler Status Tab on Page 147 User Defined Fields Tab STAR Controler User Defined Fields Tab on Page 151 State Images Tab iSTAR Controller State Images Tab on Page 152 iSTAR Ultra Controller Editor The tabs for the iSTAR Ultra Controller Editor tabs are listed in Table 16 on Page 139. Table 16: STAR Ultra Controler Editor Tabs Tab General Tab iSTAR Controler General Tab on Page 141 Inputs STAR Ultra Controller Editor Inputs Tab on Page 178 Boards Tab iSTAR Ultra Controller Boards Tab on Page 179 IP ACM's Tab STAR Ultra Controller IP-ACMs Tab on Page 181 COM1 Tab iSTAR Ultra COM1/COM2 Tabs on Page 181 COM2 Tab iSTAR Ultra COM1/COM2 Tabs on Page 181 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 139 EFTA01226070 STAR Controller Editor STAR Ultra Controller Editor Tabs (continued) Tab See... Triggers Tab iSTAR Controller Triggers Tab on Page 147 Groups Tab GroupsTab for Hardware Deviceson Page 28 Status Tab STAR Controller Status Tab on Page 147 User Defined Fields Tab STAR Controller User Defined Fields Tab on Page 151 State Images Tab STAR Controller State Images Tab on Page 152 140 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226071 STAR Controller Editor Tabs iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs The iSTAR Controller editor tabs available depend on the iSTAR Controller type. The iSTAR Controller editor basic tabs and iSTAR specific tabs are listed below. Basic Tabs ■ iSTAR Controller General Tab on Page 141 ■ iSTAR Controller Boards Tab (iSTAR Classic/Pro) on Page 156 ■ iSTAR Controller Triggers Tab on Page 147 ■ iSTAR Controller Status Tab on Page 147 ■ iSTAR Controller State Images Tab on Page 152 ■ iSTAR Controller User Defined Fields Tab on Page 151 iSTAR Specific Tabs ■ iSTAR Schlage Wireless PIMs Tab on Page 153 ■ iSTAR eX and Edge Controller Inputs Tab on Page 159 ■ iSTAR Edge/eX Controller Outputs Tab on Page 164 ■ iSTAR Edge COM1/COM2/COM3 Tabs on Page 167 ■ iSTAR Edge Controller Wiegand Tab on Page 169 ■ iSTAR eX Controller Wiegand Tab on Page 171 ■ iSTAR eX COM1/COM2 Tabs on Page 173 ■ iSTAR Ultra Controller Editor Inputs Tab on Page 178 ■ iSTAR Ultra COM1/COM2 Tabs on Page 181 ■ iSTAR Ultra Controller IP-ACMs Tab on Page 181 iSTAR Controller General Tab The iSTAR Controller General tab provides a means to set the controller's Onboard and PCMCIA Ethernet adapters, MAC address, RM LCD Messages, and Time Zone. PCMCIA Ethernet adapters have not been evaluated by UL. NOTE C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 141 EFTA01226072 STAR Controller Editor Tabs Figure 47: 'STAR Controller General Tab MUIR *X COMMIS Gann! Tab CAA lags Contraasr oe.n Tab 5 CPA Catnap • • Jel Coe0.44 • almiCapOssla•I uf Ira .MOM In Ca1•P eY C tot$dm • IFr tVAR file:tweet." Yazara, DWAMO. bale Claus .7 Noss's*. rilinon.bee s..:.. Tynan G.." Ye" I OM" %Wend 10:4111 1.1 Timm 'Gala Owl1bielfslalkimmie"1 GeV Was I Iliad i COS i ON9 Tyr..own_ %%oh.Domrathapempt sea Gera Caell• Typ. .1.4v .m CMS rot CaR b.' Aeon 10t01 -S NEM el KZ Nessop. Os_ fN 0.0 maaas IJ T.. bar rail cbaata.a. N • calaiLL (00.50aEaba ab us taaiajl • *Yoe el Oboe &we fosses tp lama rai- :or- • Cftemil gifting Maw* Mm. 'roar aD)Coes eMeni LI Lao LECoMIXO host., Cs.Conn T.Erin Pao Paeans MD(OOP iheflutElaY"..1 Sir imam. earato. Oillstanis liwproon woe, ,••••••.. NaMo.fiblit Cseraral.fts Can••••••• • c•• Mw Rwn Same Cyan artreavelCioatilbil Caranit ham OfIlitke 40 4.b.MDents% 142 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226073 STAR Controller Editor Tabs 'STAR Utr• COntro•of General rob lin int.. ben,. ' r DOW r toes r r •S•Ireceitse rwerot 01,0046 IP tern Inv; iterkt iancotattweran:154C.4341 head I•my. togoethsoni.l Tonsil Oat.' Saha I the De•wl.nl SalaamI tad I Von I impel Me I Mt?' f earn Emes I lanai P. D41. 0 . 1•1iPmen I I • - • • tlie *Aka IvaSena. A . M let Arum itt dlnaem.I =LJ Irnaw $tsii AS te0MominelAst...n., I I GesseCilai P IL•DWP Ts, no I P 1.1.00 PISOIOnt r G t. lE14)1.0 I r u. a niFeCwooten44.0. anal. Csansops IatalP10•001.00141. _tu r kludipPommaawd Mae •Paraillhosibap Cassaaps"fit • INIA•noik CoduoWAccos r 104/PeoWe41100.4 MM. •Powt0004:•• To Configure the iSTAR Controller General Tab 1. Create or edit an iSTAR Controller. See either: • Creating an iSTAR Controller on Page 124 • Editing an iSTAR Controller on Page 126. 2. Enter a unique controller name in the Name field at the top of the iSTAR Controller dialog box. 3. Enter a textual description (optional) in the Description field. 4. Enter the last six hexadecimal characters after the vendor portion of the address in the MAC Address entry field for the controller. The first six characters of a controller's MAC address are set at 00-50-F9. The last six characters of a controller's MAC address must be within the range of hexadecimal values (i.e., 0-9 and a-f). 5. To select a particular customized set of LCD messages for the RM Readers, click El to display a Reader LCD Message Set selection list. If you leave this field blank (the default), the Readers use the default messages. See Reader LCD Message Set Overview on Page 382 for more information. 6. If you are configuring iSTAR controllers that are located in different time zones, you can use the Time Zone entry field. Click El to display a time zone selection. Greenwich Mean Time is equivalent to Zulu or Universal Time. If you leave the Time Zone field blank, the iSTAR is considered to be in the C•CURE 9000 server's Time Zone. You can only change the Time Zone setting for the iSTAR controller when the controller is not Enabled (0). See Changing the Time Zone of an iSTAR Controller on Page 136. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 143 EFTA01226074 STAR Controls( Editor Tabs 7. You can type an IP Address in the Onboard Ethernet IP Address field, although it is recommended that you select Use DCHP to use the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) option to automatically assign an IP address to the Controller. 8. For an iSTAR eX Controller, you can enter an IP Address for the Onboard Ethernet Adapter #2. Alternatively, you can select Use DHCP. The DHCP Server has not been evaluated by UL. NOTE 9. For an iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller: a. If you have a PCMCIA Ethernet Adapter, select Adapter Installed. b. You can either enter an IP Address for the PCMCIA adapter or select Use DHCP. c. If you are using the PCMCIA Ethernet Adapter as the primary connection to the host, select Use as Primary Communications Adapter. 10. If you are configuring an iSTAR eX or iSTAR Edge Controller, you need to select the supervising resistor configuration for the GCM Inputs. The default setting is NO/NC Double EOL 1K. See Table 17 on Page 145 for more information. The supervision method for Inputs on the iSTAR Ultra is configured for each separate Input on the NOTE Input Editor. 11. If any Doors on this controller need to be configured for Conditional Access, select the Include Personnel Without Clearance in Personnel Downloads option in the Conditional Access box. The Conditional Access tab is available on the iSTAR Doors Editor only if this option is selected. See iSTAR Door Conditional Access Tab on Page 436. Since selecting this option causes a full Personnel download to the controller (including all NOTE credentials except for Lost, Stolen Not Active, and Expired), a warning displays about the 250,000- record-download limit. 12. You can optionally click other tabs on the iSTAR Controller Editor to configure other settings prior to saving the Controller. 13. Click the Enabled check box to put the controller online when you are finished configuring the iSTAR Controller General Tab. You must have entered a valid MAC Address and a setting for the IP Address before enabling the Controller or you will receive an error message if you try to save the Controller settings with Enabled selected. 14. Click Save and Close to save your settings for the Controller and close the iSTAR Controller Editor. iSTAR Controller General Tab Definitions Table 17 on Page 145 includes further information for fields in the Controller Editor General tab. The fields available differ by controller type, as indicated in this table. 144 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226075 STAR Controller Editor Tabs Table 17: STAR Controller Editor General Tab Fields Field Description Name Enter a unique name up to 50 characters long for the controller. If you enter the name of an existing object, the system returns an error message indicating there is a conflict. Description Enter a textual comment about the controller. such as its location or purpose. This text is for information only. Enabled Click the Enabled check box to put the Controller online. You must specify the MAC address and IP address for the Controller prior to selecting Enabled or you will receive an error message when you save the Controller. Maintenance Click to put the STAR Controller and/or its components into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 2: Maintenance Mode for more Mode information. Partition This read-only field identifies the Partition in which this Controller resides. If you are creating a new Controller, the Partition that iscurrentty the New Object Partition for your Operator account is automatically assigned to each Controller you create. If you want to change the Partition of a Controller, you must move the Cluster in which the Controller resides. See Using Drag and Drop in the Hardware Tree on Page 27. General (All Controller Types) Controller Type This field displays the controller type: !STAR Classlc/Pro. (STAR Edge. (STAR eX. or (STAR Ultra. The Controller Type is determined when you initially create the controller object. When you save the controller object, this field becomes read-only for all subsequent editing sessions. Hardware Enter the Hardware MAC address for the controller. The MAC address is built into the GCM and cannot be changed. You can (MAC) Address find a controller's MAC addresson a label attached to the GCM or view the address using the STAR Configuration Utility. The first six nibbles (or characters) of a controller's MAC address are set at 00-50-F9. The last six nibbles (or characters) of a controller's MAC address must hexadecimal numbers between 0-9 and A-F. RM LCD If you want customized LCD messages to display on the RM Readers, specify a Reader LCD Message Set. Click ri to Messages display a Reader LCD Message Set selection list. Bydefautt, this field is blank indicating that the Readers are use the default messages. For more information, see Reader LCD Message Set Cnerview on Page 382. Time Zone If you are managing controllers in different time zones. specify a time zone for the controller. Click [- I to display a time zone selection. The following objects are associated with the controller's time zone: • Inputs, outputs, and readers on the controller. • Doors and door groups with inputs, outputs, or readers on the controller. • Elevators and elevator groups with inputs, outputs, or readers on the controller. NOTE: Only Schedules and clearances that use the same time zone as the controller are downloaded to the controller. If you change the controller's time zone after a Schedule or clearance has been downloaded to the controller, a matching violation occurs. The time zone isdownloaded to the controller, and the clearance isdeleted from the controller. See the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information. Onboard Ethernet Adapter #1 (All Controller Types) IP Address Enter the unique IP address for Onboard Ethernet #1 a54 numbers behveen 0 and 255. separated by periods, such as 100.10.10.1. Use DHCP Select this check box to obtain an IP Address from a DHCP Server for the STAR Controller's Onboard Ethernet #1 Adapter. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 145 EFTA01226076 STAR Controller Editor Tabs Table 17: STAR Controller Editor General Tab F ields (continued) Field Description Onboard Ethernet Adapter #2 (iSTAR eX and ISTAR Ultra only) IP Address Enter the unique IP address for Onboard Ethernet 62 as 4 numbers behveen 0 and 255, separated by periods, such as 100.10.10.1. Use DHCP Select this check box to obtain an IP Address (roma DHCP Server for the STAR Controller'sOnboard Ethernet #2 Adapter. PCMCIA Ethernet (iSTAR Classic/Pro only) Adapter Installed Select thischeck box to indicate that an PCMCIA Ethernet adapter is installed. IP Address Enter the unique IP address for the PCMCIA Ethernet Adapter as 4 integers between 0 and 255, separated by periods, such as 100.10.10.1. Use DHCP Select this check box to obtain an IP Address from a DHCP Server for the PCMCIA Ethernet Adapter. Use as Primary Select this check box to indicate that the PCMCIA Ethernet Adaptor is to be used as the Primary Ethernet Adapter. Ethernet Adapter Suppress Power / LED Control (iSTAR Edge and iSTAR Ultra only) Turn off LEDs You can to configure the LCD backlight and various status LEDs to ahvays be off by selecting (0), regardless of tamper state. and LCD Selecting this option does not affect the Power LED or the bright white external power indicator. backlight Onboard reader Specify the method used on this controller to drive the direct connect reader LEDs: LED control • 3-wire (Red, Green. Yellow) • External Bi-Color (2-wire Red, Green) • 1-wire (A, B, C) Option Common To Entire Panel (iSTAR eX and iSTAR Edge only) Supervising All STAR eX GCM Inputs and STAR Edge inputs must be wired in the same way and use the same supervision method. All resistor supervised settings assume either one or two end of line (EOL) resistors. You can use the Reverse Sense option if you need configuration a particular Input to differ from the selected setting (for example, if you choose a NO setting here, but you need a door switch monitor Input to be NC, you can set that Input for Reverse Sense in the STAR Input Editor (see STAR Input Editor on Page 232 for more information). • NO= Normalty Open • NC = Normalty Closed • EOL = End of Line Select one of the resistor values in the drop-down list. NO/NC Double EOL 1K is the default, and the traditional Software House method 146 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226077 STAR Controller Editor Tabs Table 17: STAR Controller Editor General Tab Fields (continued) Field Description Cluster Info (All Controller Types) Cluster Info These reackonty fields display the Communications Path and the name of the iSTAR Cluster through which this controller Communications oommunicates with the C•CURE 9000 Server. Path Conditional Access (All Controller Types) Include If you want toenable ocinditionalaccess for Doorson this Controller—allow entry to Personnelwithout Clearances, click to Personnel select this option. The Conditional Access tab is availa ble on the STAR Doors Editor only if this option is selected. For Without information, see STAR Door Conditional Access Tab on Page 436. Clearance in NOTE: Since selecting thisoption causesa ful Personneldownload to the controller (including all credentialsexcept for Lost, Personnel Stolen Not Active, and Expired), a warning displays about the 250,000-record download limit. Downloads iSTAR Controller Triggers Tab C•CURE 9000 uses Triggers, which are configured procedures used for activating security actions. A Trigger automatically executes a specified Action when a particular predefined condition occurs. When a Trigger is defined, the Actions available depend on the property selected. The Triggers are usually used to activate an Event which can activate numerous actions. See Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 270 for information on creating Triggers for an iSTAR device. iSTAR Controller Status Tab The Status tab, as shown in Figure 48 on Page 149 provides a read-only listing of critical information about the operational status of the selected iSTAR controller. Such information includes: • Online Status - indicates whether the controller has been enabled (see the General tab). • Firmware Version - the version of the firmware used by the controller. • Boot Time - the last time the controller was restarted (GMT or Zulu time). • Memory Usage for the controller's microprocessors: • Free and Total Program Memory • Free and Total Storage Memory • Free and Total Physical Memory • Reader Security Key Status (for iSTAR eX). • PoE Board Installed - True or False (for the iSTAR Edge/Ultra) • Edge Model Status -1-door, 2-door or 4-door (for the iSTAR Edge) • Encryption Setting Status The definitions for the Status tab for various controller types are: • iSTAR Controller Status Tab Definitions on Page 149 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 147 EFTA01226078 STAR Controller Editor Tabs ■ iSTAR Edge Controller Status Tab Definitions on Page 150 ■ iSTAR Ultra Controller Status Tab Definitions on Page 151 148 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226079 STAR Controller Editor Tabs Figure 48: iSTAR Controller Status Tab iSTAR eX Controller Status Tab iSTAR Edge Controller Status Tab ALIA 4 Pew 'fen. au DOS Pa dal r r 01/1•95t.S.1.718C•WO 1"...2••• OWirantolvo (1.•• I 100104a C081 “:.Leah.. Yr lem,00•Pal lidansmi I 00•100.... I can101•211.... I 6.. 1110 Iii•00•Pal a.-. be. proestaa t•flOs ft •VPIT ✓ wI •••••••••yr r unown••••• r • .WIII•S•••• r • • • • ..440. 'Sao* IP &be.• ISTAR Pro Controller Status Tab iSTAR Ultra Controller Status Tab ••• N., * Cisons see. 4 PO0 Ins. NW P oar rms. Oda r 2••••••• r Cantela team 10014C00., 1-.01a Cle.••••• worn glean .6.0 Om. I 101. Far 0Thl tr...10... tow lu•tkbp.SII iss I 8.0aI can caul Immo 6.0. ••••• 1... 0••••••••12.••••• I a.-.r Grails& Oselln• Oasevwwo (to a I ea p f••••••.. p Nalio~1.4erev,in II • Inno..10.0a4 170-0 0 %•• fro ••• ISTAR Controller Status Tab Definitions Table 18 on Page 150 provides definitions of the fields and buttons on the iSTAR Controller Status tab. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 149 EFTA01226080 STAR Controller Editor Tabs Table 18: STAR Controller Status Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Online Status Indicates whether the controller has been Enabled (see the General tab). Firmware The version of the firmware currently in use by the controller. Version Boot Time The last date/time the controller was restarted (GMT or Zulu time) Free Program Unused program memory in the controller's microprocessor. in kilobytes. Memory Total Program Total storage memory in the controller's microprocessor, in kilobytes. Memory Free Storage Unused storage memory in the controller's microprocessor, in kilobytes. Memory Total Storage Total storage memory in the controller's microprocessor, in kilobytes. Memory Free Physical Unused physical memory in the controller's microprocessor, in kilobytes. Memory Total Physical Total physical memory in the controller's microprocessor, in kilobytes. Memory Reader This field appliesonty to iSTAR eXcontrollers. It displayswhether or not the eX 8-Reader Security Key is in place. Possible status Security Key values are: Status Detected - the key is plugged in and 8 readers are operational on the iSTAR eX. (eXonty) NotDetected - the key isnot plugged in, and onty four Readers will be operational. Unknown - the key statuscannot be determined (for example, the status is Unknown if the controller isout of communication with C•CURE 9000). You can determine the status by observing the LCD on the STAR eX. Encryption A Read-onty field that displays the Encryption Setting. Encryption settings are Encrypted (AES), Unknown, or Not Encrypted. Setting Status (STAR Edge. classic/Pro) iSTAR Edge Controller Status Tab Definitions Fable 19 on Page 150 provides definitions of the fields and buttons unique to the iSTAR Edge Controller Status tab. Table 19: STAR Edge Controller Status Tab Definitions Field/Button Description PoE Board Installed The field displayswhether the Power over Ethernet (PoE) Board is installed. Possible status values are True or False. Edge Model Status The field displays the STAR Edge Model Status, either 2-door or 4-door. 150 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226081 STAR Controller Editor Tabs iSTAR Ultra Controller Status Tab Definitions Table 20 on Page 151 provides definitions of the fields and buttons unique to the iSTAR Ultra Controller Status tab. Table 20: iSTAR Ultra Controller Status Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Free RAM Unused program memory avaiable to the microprocessor in megabytes. Total RAM Total storage memory available to the microprocessor in megabytes. Free Nand Flash Database Unused flash memory in megabytes. Memory Total Nand Flash Database Total flash memory in megabytes. Memory PoE Board Installed The field displays whether the Power over Ethernet (PoE) Board is installed. Possible status values are True or False. iSTAR Controller User Defined Fields Tab The User Defined Fields tab, shown in Figure 1 on Page 152, displays user-defined fields in the system for hardware. User-defined fields are configured in the Configuration pane. If there are no user-defined fields configured, then the tab is empty. See the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 1St EFTA01226082 STAR Controller Editor Tabs Figure 1: iSTAR User Defined Fields Tab iiitowaso.• A (nese Paler. Goa• r tworavevot Gonad I We l Moat CCM I WW2] tigeti I films Sus. UpalNinSF.M. I Shier•P*I (.•d•10 0— k• A Ufa) etnnain iSTAR Controller State Images Tab The State Images tab provides a means to change the default images that are displayed on the C•CURE 9000 Monitoring Station to indicate controller states. See State Images Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 274 for information on using the State Images tab for your iSTAR Controller. iSTAR Controller State Images Tab Definitions Table 21 on Page 152 shows the iSTAR Controller States and the default State Images. Table 21: iSTAR Controller State Images Tab Definitions Icon Description Icon Description Unknown — Download in Progress _ fe. Online IQ Comm Fail 152 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226083 STAR Controller Editor Tabs STAR Controller State Im ges Tab De nrbons (continued) Icon Description Icon Description Disabled Database Back Up Power Faiure — r Fite Alarm Supervision State :I P (Used only by iSTAR Edge) Battery Low Or FAI Relay Control (iSTAR Edge/Ultra) II :OP ul Tamper FAI Key Supervision State (Used only by iSTAR Edge) r ze i 0 Download Error IVO Internal Battery Fault (iSTAR Edge and Ultra) ISTAR Schlage Wireless PIMs Tab This tab allows you to configure up to 16 Schlage Wireless Panel Interface Modules (PIMs) on an iSTAR Classic/Pro. An iSTAR controller can support up to 16 Schlage Wireless readers. The number of PIM boards needed to support your readers can vary, depending upon Reader type and the physical location of the reader/lock hardware. You could connect 16 readers to a single PIM if all readers are within the range/distance specifications for wireless readers. If some readers are farther away, additional PIMs may be needed to place a PIM within wireless range of each reader. You can configure no more than 16 PIMs and 16 Readers per controller. The AD300 series readers have an integrated PIM in the reader/lock hardware - these readers require you to configure an iSTAR PIM board with only that reader attached to the PIM. Support for the following Schlage features requires C•CURE 9000 2.10 R2 Patch 1 or later, and iSTAR NOTE firmware 52.1 or later. • Wake on Radio • Keypad support • Manual Lock Override • Push Button PIM and Reader Addresses Each PIM has an address between 0 (zero) and 15. On an iSTAR, boards are numbered starling at 1, not 0. As a result, a PIM with address 0 is configured on the iSTAR as PIM #1. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 153 EFTA01226084 ISTAR Controller Editor Tabs Each Reader has a reader address between 0 (zero) and 15. On an iSTAR, readers are numbered starting at 1, not 0. As a result, a reader with address 0 is configured on the iSTAR as reader #1. Example If you have PIMs with addresses of 4, 8, 12, and 15, you should configure these PIMs on the iSTAR as PIM5, PIM9, PIM13, and PIM16. If you have readers with addresses 0 through 5, you should configure these readers on the iSTAR as iSTAR PIM 485 Readerl through iSTAR PIM 485 Reader6. Once you have assigned a reader address to one PIM, that reader address will be unavailable on all other PIM boards on the iSTAR. Example You configure Reader address #1 on PIM Board #1. On every other PIM Board you configure on this iSTAR, Reader address #1 is unavailable (grayed out). The address ranges for readers connected to PIMs cannot overlap. If you set up your PIM hardware so that a specific PIM controls reader addresses 0 through 5, you cannot assign a different PIM to control any of the addresses in between. Example You have two PIMs. You set one to control Reader addresses 0 through 5 (readers 1 through 6 on the iSTAR). You other PIM must be setup to control readers outside this range, such as Reader addresses 8 through 11 (Readers 9 through 12 on the iSTAR). If you add another PIM, that PIM cannot be assigned to control any of the already assigned addresses, even if the address are not in use at this time by one of the two existing PIMs. The new PIM could only be assigned Reader addresses 6 and 7 (Readers 7 and 8) and/or Reader addresses 12 through 15 (Readers 13 through 16) Figure 49 on Page 155 shows the iSTAR Schlage Wireless PIM tab. 154 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226085 STAR Controller Editor Tabs Figure 49: STAR Schlage Wireless PIMs Tab aLJ -x dr..h.mh I .k Din. Mein Wel r Hanna Mado Tn Zan Gilt<15EQ Caton t2se NS1O>n) GI eo.d. S.656 MeinIn I Loa l GRhel 92ius I In 0nd Folds I Stange I Sal.,. 566462 Rib I Ct. Ann nts NPR, WI Pow *And In . l it r PIN' Po 41 r p...w..in r Pimin 01 r Pnn al r Pitnewl r p.s...o, r Pwan, r FNan 51 r Niemen o r p.4.1/4..1 I r nillAnl 2 r PalI no All 3 r 100341011 a r PSIMPoll 5 r 0116154,11 6 r nemwol • than.> or.e ne nee enn 2,51 onn iSTAR Schlage Wireless PIMs Tab Definitions The fields and buttons on the iSTAR Schlage Wireless PIMs tab are described in Table 22 on Page 155. Table 22: STAR Schlage Wireless PIM Tab Field/Button Description Create All Click to create al116 PiMs. When you click Create An PiMs the Configured column check boxes are selected. and you can click PiMs ri in the Edit column to open the STAR PIM-485 Board Editor to oonfigure a PiMs. Delete All When you click Delete An PiMs. the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all 16 PiMs, and all 16 PIM boards PiMs are immediatetydeleted (any settings you have configured are lost). Edit column Click® in the Edit column to open the STAR PIM-485 Board Editor to configure a PIM. See STAR PIM-485 Board Editor on Page 226. PIM index Thisoolumn displays the number of each PIM Board. column Configured Click in thisoolumn to create a PIM Board (make it available to be edited). column C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 155 EFTA01226086 STAR Controller Editor Tabs Field/Button Description Name column Displays the name for this PIM Board The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in this field. Save and Click to save your configuration changes and dose the iSTAR Controller editor. Close iSTAR Controller Boards Tab (iSTAR Classic/Pro) The Boards tab is available for iSTAR Classic and iSTAR Pro Controllers only. The Boards tab in the iSTAR Controller Editor lets you configure the following inputs, outputs, and ACM boards. ■ Main Board Inputs on the GCM. • Tamper - this input activates when the controller cabinet is opened. • Power Failure - this input monitors for AC power failure of the apS or UPS supplying power to the controller. When this alarm input activates, it specifies that the GCM has lost its primary power source, and is operating on batteries. • External Battery Low (iSTAR Ultra/Classic/Pro) - this input activates when the external emergency battery (from the apS or UPS) is running low on power. • Internal Battery Fault (iSTAR Ultra only) - this is a logical input that reports the state of the onboard battery. • General (iSTAR Ultra only) - this input is a general purpose Supervised Input on the GCM. ■ Main Board Output on the GCM (iSTAR Classic only). ■ ACM 1 and ACM 2 Boards for the Controller (iSTAR Classic/Pro only). Add-on Access Control Modules (ACM Boards) provide access control functionality by supporting readers, outputs and inputs. ■ ACM 1 and ACM 2 Boards on SPI port 1 (iSTAR Ultra only) - used to configure Inputs, Outputs, and Readers on an iSTAR ACM Board attached to SPI port 1 on an iSTAR Ultra Controller. ■ ACM 1 and ACM 2 Boards on SPI port 2 (iSTAR Ultra only) - used to configure Inputs, Outputs, and Readers on an iSTAR ACM Board attached to SPI port 2 on an iSTAR Ultra Controller. The iSTAR Controller Boards tab is shown in Figure 50 on Page 157. 158 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226087 STAR Controller Editor Tabs Figure 50: STAR Controller Editor Boards Tab id Sort ird ten iht fivelse P. OSA r Einlamo Yale r.. u. Gln[03 DM fawn meet,IOrai GINS %IS I SCIII•011W•011011P108 I NOP* I Gas I sans I UN. Nero, Fetid Are [rye [ 1ton Bon Povb r Croce W,00 Oen Ai /an Ed. l[ol ter • Ten.. ht [re ran ✓ Pars Ern,r1844,4 ✓ bons Ihney to.-ne so Vas Bard alkali Cwt• _0411110 AOAr I. Create or &Oft Woe This output is only available on the iSTAR Classic. To Configure the iSTAR Controller Boards Tab 1. From the iSTAR Controller editor, click the Boards tab. 2. Create the Main Board Inputs that you need by clicking Create All Inputs or by selecting the Configured check box for only the Inputs you wish to create. 3. To use an existing Input Template to create one or more of the Main Board Inputs, click in the Template Column, then click 0. A list of available iSTAR Input Templates appears. Click on the Template you wish to use. See Using Templates for Controller Inputs, Outputs, and Readers on Page 37 for more detailed information about using Templates to create Controller Inputs. 4. Click 0 in the Edit column to configure individual Main Board Inputs. See the definitions of the Main Board Inputs in Table 23 on Page 158. 5. Create the Main Board Output if needed by clicking Create Output or by selecting the Configured check box for the Main Board Output. 6. Click 0 in the Edit column to configure the Main Board Output. See the definition of the Main Board Output in Table 23 on Page 158 and see iSTAR Output Editor on Page 241 for configuration instructions. 7. Create the ACM Boards that you need by clicking Create All ACMs or by selecting the Configured check box for only the ACMs you wish to create. 8. Click in the Edit column to configure an ACM. See iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller ACM Board Editor on Page 197 for configuration instructions. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 157 EFTA01226088 STAR Controller Editor Tabs 9. Click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured on the iSTAR Controller Boards tab, or click another tab in the iSTAR Controller Editor to perform additional configuration. iSTAR Controller Boards Tab Definitions The iSIAR Controller Boards tab includes the fields and buttons described in Table 23 on Page 158. Table 23: STAR Controller Boards Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Main Board Inputs Create All Inputs Click to create the three Main Board Inputs. When you click Create All Inputs the Configured column check boxes are selected. and you can dial ... ] in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Editor to configure an Input. Delete All Inputs When you click Delete All Inputs. the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all three Main Board Inputs, and all three Inputs are immediatety deleted (any settings you have configured are lost). Tamper The Tamper input activates when the controller cabinet is opened or removed from its mounting surface. NOTE: For UL applications, this field must be enabled. Select the check box in the Configured column and dick ri located in the Edit column to open the STAR Input Editor General tab to configure the Tamper input. From the Input Editor you can configure the Options, Triggers, Groups, Status and State Images that are associated with the Tamper Input. The Template column shows the template name chosen if you selected a Template prior to creating the Input. Power Failure The AC power faiureinput monitors the AC power failure output of a battery backup unit, such as the Advanced Power System (apS). When this alarm input activates, it specifies that the GCM has lost its primary power source, and is operating on batteries. NOTE: For UL applications. this field must be enabled. Select the check box in the Configured column and dick n located in the Edit column to open the STAR Input Editor General tab to configure the AC Power Fail Input. From the Input Editor you can configure the Options, Triggers, Groups, Status and State Images that are associated with the AC Power Fail Input. The Template column shows the template name chosen if you selected a Template prior to creating the Input. External Battery Low The External Battery Low input activates when the emergency battery is running low on power. (STAR Classic/Pro) NOTE: For UL applications, thisfield must be enabled. NOTE: This field for STAR Pro and Classic is on the Boards Tab. For STAR eX and Edge, this field is on the Inputs Tab. External Battery Low Select the check box in the C onfig ured column and dick[] located in the Edit column to (STAR open the STAR Input Editor General tab to configure the Options, Triggers, Groups. Status and eX/Edge/Ultra) State Images that are associated with the Battery Low Input. The Template column shows the template name chosen if you selected a Template prior to creating the Input. 158 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226089 STAR Controller Editor Tabs Table 23: STAR Controller Boards Tab Definitions (continued) FielcUButton Description Internal Battery Fault A logical input that reports the state of the onboard battery. This Input is configured (e) by (STAR Uttra) default when thecontroller isaeated. General A physical input that can be used to monitor a condition. particutarty useful for Ultra (STAR Ultra) configurations that are GCM on y. Main Board Output Classic and Ultra only) Create Click toccata the Main Board Output. When you clickCreate the Configured column check box is selected, and you can click el in the Edit column to open the STAR Output Editor to configure the Output. Delete When you click Delete, the check box in the Configured column is cleared for the Main Board (STAR Classic/Uttra) Output, and the Output is immediatety deleted (any settings you haveconfigured are lost). 1 Select the check boxy the Configured column and click[ located in the Edit column to open the STAR Output Editor General tab to configure the Options, Groups, Status and State Images that are associated with the Main Board Output. The Template column shows the template name chosen if you selected a Template prior to creating the Output. AC Ms Create AllACMs Click toccata all the ACM Boards. When you dick Create All ACMs the Configured column (STAR Classic/Pro check boxes are selected, and you can dick(] in the Editcolumn to open the STAR ACM onty) Board Editor to configure an ACM Board. Delete AllACMs When you click Delete All ACMs. the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for (STAR Classic/Pro both Main Board ACM Boards. and both ACM Boards are immediatety deleted (any settings you onty) haveconfigured are lost). Boardl Select the check boxy the Configured column and dick[ located in the Edit column to open the STAR ACM Editor General tab to configure the Inputs, Outputs, and Readers that are associated with the first ACM board. Board2 Select the check boxy the Configured column and dick[ located in the Edit column to open the STAR ACM Editor General tab to configure the Inputs, Outputs, and Readers that are associated with the second ACM board. iSTAR eX and Edge Controller Inputs Tab The iSTAR Controller Inputs tab is available only on the iSTAR eX Controller editor and the i51'AR Edge Controller editor. The Inputs tab (shown in Figure 51 on Page 162) lets you define the Special Purpose and General Purpose Inputs for the Controller. All of the inputs support event triggers based on their active or inactive states. These triggers can activate alarms, send emails, run a Roll Call Report, etc. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 159 EFTA01226090 STAR Controller Editor Tabs ISTAR eX Controller Inputs Special Purpose Inputs ■ Tamper input - Activates when the controller cabinet is opened. ■ Power Failure input - Monitors the AC power failure output of the PMB. When this alarm input activates, it indicates that the PMB has had an AC Power Failure and is now supplying battery power to the controller. Similarly, if the eX is the NPS (No Power Supply) version, the Power Fail output of the UPS or apS is monitored with the same result. ■ External Battery Low input - Activates when the battery connected to the PMB emergency battery has reached a yellow warning level. This will be followed, after some further use, with a Backup Now condition (Battery really low) which will backup the configuration and data and then shut down the controller. If the eX is the NPS (No Power Supply) version, the Battery Low output of the UPS or apS is monitored and will signal low battery. It is recommended to shut down the unit being powered by the low battery. Tamper, AC power fail, and Low battery inputs must be programmed for UL applications. NOTE General Purpose Inputs ■ iSTAR eX provides 16 general purpose inputs. ISTAR Edge Controller Inputs Special Purpose Inputs ■ Tamper input - Activates when the controller cabinet is opened. ■ Power Failure input - Monitors the AC power failure output of the UPS (Un-interruptible Power Supply) or apS and indicates an AC Power Failure resulting in the UPS or apS supplying battery power to the controller. ■ Battery Low input - Activates when the UPS or apS emergency battery has reached a yellow warning level. It is recommended to shut down the unit being powered by the low battery. Do not confuse this input with Onboard Battery Low. Tamper, AC power fail, and Low battery inputs must be programmed for UL applications. NOTE ■ Onboard Battery Low input - This input activates when the voltage of all four onboard AA alkaline batteries in series reaches 4.6 volts, or if a battery is missing or disconnected. The following Fire Mann Interface (FM) features are only supported on these iSTAR Edge models: NOTE ■ 0312-5010-02 ■ 0312,5010-04 ■ FM Supervision State input - This input represents the F (Fire) Input State - the state of the F (Fire) input coming into J40 of the iSTAR Edge. In other words, this is the fire alarm. The Fire Mann Interface activates the relays on the iSTAR Edge when the F input goes True. This input is supervised as NC (Normally Closed). ■ FM Relay Control input - The FM relay control is a pseudo input that indicates the state of the Relay Drive signal that activates or latches the selected relays when the F (Fire) input is True. 160 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226091 ISTAR Controller Editor Tabs ■ FM Key Supervision Stateinput - This input represents the K (Key) Input State. The K input is used to unlatch the latched relays, which removes the relay drive signal, once it is clear that the fire emergency is over. The K (Key) input is usually a momentary contact key switch. The K input is supervised as NO (Normally Open). General Purpose Inputs ■ iSTAR Edge provides eight general purpose inputs. Fire Alarm Interface FM (Fire Alarm Interface) is a hardware feature on the iSTAR Edge that is typically used to perform the following tasks when a fire alarm signal is present. ■ Unlock all doors when fire is present. ■ Remove power from various devices when fire is present. All three of the FM Inputs support Event triggers based on their active or inactive states. These Event triggers can be configured to activate alarms, send emails, run a Roll Call Report, etc based on the state changes of the three FM inputs. FAI Modes There are two basic FM modes that can be configured at the controller. ■ FM without Latch - This method requires the F (Fire) input (NC) of J40 plus the individual enable switches for each relay (SW2 through SW5). ■ FM with Latch and subsequent Unlatch - This method requires the F (Fire) input of J40 plus the individual enable switches for each relay (SW2 through SW5), plus SW6 to enable the Latch and J40 K (Key) input (NO) to reset the Latch. The Key input is usually a key switch that momentarily closes when the key is inserted and rotated. The FM mode chosen at the controller will determine how you might want to use the Triggers and Actions available in the software to provide notification of a fire alarm and related actions. See the iSTAR Edge Installation and Configuration Guide for detailed information about wiring the FM inputs. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 161 EFTA01226092 STAR Controller Editor Tabs Figure 51: STAR eX and STAR Edge Controller Editor Inputs Tab Wes P /Se 0•••• r Neseasent ^LI Teas OISPIOONRISISIONS SW Se 1P.+Irwl COMICS) Ts 10s11Lis I ISSinali I 90.”-ea. ir ft. LIPP., PS — SOO • Os MS M..".- i. orre.i_Mt ...an P POW PIS OS IP SS."' r now/moo tinarmr CY141106.sylroat SI/ Se OS PTIIWIPI WPl low l —I SI USISSI SS • as el he. Ceee•Mbouli Sel Nes IS/AteeSessels Iv M SO 0.e. • S S• Is Gat Se MSS IS ‘‘. VnePpalevel TS Se• c_ IS Sile P VIA iewiekti Is II Tsai , twig sieLlri es rar. P lo. raiadMA IS. in r VS Seal GsSyle• P Essilsw salIFII Ape, . Yee iteleni • MS IA SOU/1000 el cild Moll r r a PrigesidrStyr n . . ."•A MAW,. .a n . 1 r ik•SS SITS* Pi r cm...wan se GeSse i r *oral.. 'autos &on !".. Steam • GesIfs Se !nee lifell/iern w Gus ass Salm • Ia Wm CS.. OP • Vie SU.. al 9 6/MI SOW S. r P OW IeSSOP P IP 67IFI•WW•Atripal rnIrcat.WAtifpal r 47rm.o.rfan.....; . r .4tMonOWA woo r af I •••:%Srlettd.r. r elm won* taro To Configure the iSTAR eX/Edge Controller Inputs Tab 1. From the iSTAR Ex/Edge Controller Editor, click the Inputs tab. 2. Create the Special Purpose Inputs that you need by clicking Create All Inputs or by selecting the Configured check box for only the Inputs you wish to create. 3. Click [J in the Edit column to configure individual Special Purpose Inputs. See the definitions of the Special Purpose Inputs in Table 24 on Page 163 and see iSTAR Input Editor on Page 232 for configuration instructions. 4. Create the General Purpose Inputs that you need by clicking Create All Inputs or by selecting the Configured check box for only the Inputs you wish to create. 5. Click [J in the Edit column to configure individual General Purpose Inputs. See the definitions of the General Purpose Inputs in Table 24 on Page 163 and see iSTAR Input Editor on Page 232. 6. Click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured on the iSTAR Controller Inputs tab, or click another tab in the iSTAR Controller Editor to perform additional configuration. iSTAR eX/Edge Controller Inputs Tab Definitions The iSTAR eX and iSTAR Edge Inputs tabs include the fields and buttons detailed in Table 24 on Page 163. 162 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226093 STAR Controller Editor Tabs Table 24: STAR eX and STAR Edge lnputsTab Definitions Field/Button Description Special Purpose Inputs Create All Inputs Click to create all the Special Purpose inputs. When you click Create All Inputs the Configured column check boxes are selected. and you candid( ri in the Edit column to open the 'STAR Input Editor to configure an Input. Delete All inputs When you click Delete All Inputs, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Special Purpose inputs. and all these Inputs are immedLatety deleted (any settings you have configured are lost). You will need to confirm each deletion. Edit column Clicks in the Edit column to open the STAR Input Editor to configure a Special Purpose Input. See STAR input Editor on Page 232. Input Type Thiscolumn displays the type of each Special Purpose Input. column Configured Click in this column to create an input (make it available to be edited). column Name column Displays the name for this Input. The name is system-generated by defeat but you can edit this name by clicking in this field. Template oolumn Click in thiscolumn. then click[] to select an input template to use for aeating this input from the list of available input tempLates.You can only select a Template prior to creating the input. Tamper The Tamper nput activates when the controller cabinet is opened or removed from its mounting surface. Select the check box in the Configured column and click ri in the Edit column to open the STAR Input Editor. From the Input Editor you can configure the settings and link to events through triggers. Power Failure The Power Failure input monitors the AC power failure output of a battery backup unit, such as the Advanced Power System (a pS). When this alarm input activates, it specifies that the GCM has lust its primary power source, and is operating on batteries. Battery Low The Battery Low input activates when the emergency DC battery is running low on power. FAI Supervision ('STAR Edge onty) - This is the F (Fire) input State. Indicatesthe state of the F (Fire) input coming into J40 of the STAR State Edge. In other words, this is the fire alarm. FAI Key ('STAR Edge onty) - This is the K (Key) input state. Indicatesthe state of the K (Key) switch at J40 of the STAR Edge. Supervision State FAI Relay Control (iSTAR Edge onty) - This pseudo input indicates the state of the Relay Dave signal that activates or latches the selected relayswhen the F (Fire) input is true. Onboard Battery The Onboard Battery Low aclivates when the voltage of all four onboard AA alkaline batteries in series reaches 4.6 volts, Low (STAR Edge or if a battery is missing or disconnected. only) Upon loss of externalor PoE power to the Edge, data is written to onboard flash. Four onboard non-rechargeable alkaline AA batteries provide power for the backup process and maintaining the clock afterwards. Backup is vabd for the period the onboard batteries ca n maintain the clock. The period has been tested for >3days. but should reasonably last for 2 weeks. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 163 EFTA01226094 STAR Controller Editor Tabs STAR eX and STAR Edge InputsTab Definitions (continued) FlekUButton Description General Purpose Inputs Create All Inputs Cbck tocreateallthe General Purpose Inputs. When you dick Create All Inputs the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you can click n in the Edit column to open the STAR Input Editor to configure an Input. Delete All Inputs When you click Delete All inputs. the check boxes in the Configured column are Geared for all General Purpose Inputs. and all these Inputsare immedlately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost). Edit column Click[] in the Edit column to open the STAR Input Editor to configure a General Purpose Input. See STAR Input Editor on Page 232. Indexcolumn This column displays the number of each General Purpose Input. Configured Click n thiscolumn to create an input (make it available to be edited). column Name column Displays the name for this Input. The name is system-generated by defa ult. but you can edit this name byclicking in click in this field. Template column Click in this column, then dick® to select an input template to use for creating this Input from the list of available Input templates.You can onty select a Template prior to creating the input. Index 1 - 8 (STAR The General Purpose Inputscan be configured in an STAR Door as door switch monitor or request to exit inputs. Edge) Select the check boxy the Configured column and click ri in the Edit column to open the STAR Input Editor. From the Index 1-16 editor you can configure the settings for a General Purpose Input. (iSTAR eX) iSTAR Edge/eX Controller Outputs Tab The iSTAR Controller Outputs tab is available only on the iSTAR eX Controller editor and the iSTAR Edge Controller editor. The Outputs tab in the iSTAR Controller Editor lets you define four Relay Outputs and four Open Collector Outputs (on the iSTAR eX only). The iSTAR ex and iSTAR Edge Outputs tabs are shown in Figure 52 on Page 165. 164 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226095 STAR Controller Editor Tabs Figure 52: STAR eX and STAR Edge Controller Editor Outputs Tab limead QM, 0" I"' F— PAL 01•11 r inesrowt triesicanemitnea 0••• Iv•rdlailalaimITis.jesoli smosno 0.0•00.4 wimp mew Al [v. P D'ael p._ 'IL CI yea &Sind r. r Illnravelht ✓ fiseWel Ye &we tall10“06morr. Uf ICes r .01•4491111 t/feed kiwi sae fly.I ✓ 41100.001 Clba W.W.I OW I WWI COMI I...itC.4o I foal w ✓ Nano., wows. OuseCailimls Or (rale stedati _MtkalPfilitt fi• Ir I bleak I r 0.i.voie• r 0,AVJ'ell r 0.9velso To Configure the iSTAR eX/Edge Outputs Tab 1. From the iSTAR Ex/Edge Controller Editor, click the Outputs tab. 2. Create the Relay Outputs that you need by clicking Create All Outputs or by selecting the Configured check box for only the Outputs you wish to create. 3. Click 0 in the Edit column to configure individual Relay Outputs. See the definitions of the Relay Outputs in Table 25 on Page 166 and see iSTAR Output Editor on Page 241 for configuration instructions. 4. On an iSTAR eX, create the Open Collector Outputs that you need by clicking Create All Outputs or by selecting the Configured check box for only the Outputs you wish to create. 5. Click 0 in the Edit column to configure individual Open Collector Outputs. See the definitions of the Open Collector Outputs in Table 25 on Page 166 and see iSTAR Output Editor on Page 241 for configuration instructions. 6. Click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured on the iSTAR Controller Outputs tab, or click another tab in the iSTAR Controller Editor to perform additional configuration. iSTAR eX/Edge Controller Outputs Tab Definitions The iSTAR eX and iSTAR Edge Outputs tab includes the fields and buttons detailed in Table 25 on Page 166. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 165 EFTA01226096 STAR Controller Editor Tabs Table 25: STAR eX and STAR Edge Outputs Tab Definitions Box Description Relay Outputs (iSTAR ex and iSTAR Edge) Create All Click to create all the Relay Outputs. When you click Create All Outputs the Configured column check boxes are selected. and Outputs you can click [ ... 1 in the Edit column to open the STAR Output Editor to configure an Output. DeleteAll When you click Delete All Outputs. the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Relay Outputs. and all these inputs Outputs are immediatetydeleted (any settings you haveconfigured are lost). Edit column Click [—lin the Edit column to open the STAR Output Editor to configure a Relay Output. See STAR Output Editor on Page 241. Indexcolumn This column displays the number of each Relay Output. Configured Click in this column to create an Output (make it available to be edited). column Name column Displays the name for this Output. The name is system-generated by dela utt, but you can edit this name by clicking in thisfield. Template Click in this column. then click [ ] to select an Output template to use for creating this Output from the list of available Output column templates.You can onty select a Template prior to creating the Output. Relay Outputs Select the check boxy the Configured column and click ...] located in the Editcolumn to open the STAR Output Editor. From 1- 4 the editor you can configure the settings for the Relay Output. Open Collector Outputs (iSTAR eX Only) Create All Click to create all the Open Collector Outputs. When you click Create All Outputs the Configured column check boxes are Outputs selected. and you can click ...1in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Output Editor to configure an Output. Delete All When you click Delete All Outputs, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Open Collector Outputs, and Outputs all these Outputs are immediatety deleted (any settings you have configured are lost). Editcolumn Click® in the Edit column to open the STAR Output Editor to oonfigure an Open Collector Output. See STAR Output Editor on Page 241. Indexcolumn This column displays the type of each Open Collector Output. Configured ClickEl in this column to create an Output (make it available to be edited). column Name column Displays the name for this Output. The name is system-generated by defa utt. but you can edit this name by clicking in thisfield. Template Click in this column, then click® to select an Output template to use for creating this Output from the list of available Output column templates.You can onty select a Template prior tocreating the Output. Open Select the check box in the Configured column and click rilocated in the Edit column to open the STAR Output Editor. From Collector the editor you can configure the settings for an Open Collector Output. Outputs 5 - 8 166 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226097 STAR Controler Editor Tabs iSTAR Edge COM1/COM2/COM3 Tabs The COM1, COM2, and COM3 tabs in the iSTAR Edge Controller Editor let you define security objects that are connected to the COM1, COM2, and COM3 ports. RM readers, I/8s, and R/8s can be connected to the COMx ports. Figure 53: STAR Edge Controler COM Tabs am If fop 0' P Eratie4 Finn. DIY r binureo. Notre Tins Zen 0005 OT Eagan ron, MSC.** Gad I *pia l Oats I Waged CC COIO COM I Nor. I Cm.c. Dow 5.4. I Mou Sera (BosS. Min d arthale ke244e.teretisi .. Ora* 417u1O.'S Z... M IDA balk a Se Oripat New r :-.01.15MA !go Ind I iSTAR fir m r COSMOS, Ins Beed.NSTAR Etia• SI --, r 1C0111STAR ITO goi.04STAR ala Ill I r ICOM1STNI liu lawASTAR few NI . 0ipt Iwo. fonts St ail amiable kr Mad. meld .. Cr.c. xi . .4....t neat _O** al Oatutharra Ede Sac Gripe.; MAND r 036114 TM Os. bed14Thill alp II r COPII6TMIOJtvi Bard267AR Et* II — r .00.41.50/40.1“1BaTINSIM UV 51 r CON IS TM Oun Brnit,STIA Eepo II -I Prows 0>••••• la an to ....1thle ke Mat, nail) 1, tda 0,14.."1 Nee Tinale I r 0014‘STAR litaderl STAR Fell 2 r 0)14fST AA Par.ket.S WISPin P OD•115tAA lissel.5 TAR Ed,. PI • P 10314UTAR ReadeftSTIR ECe 1.1 The iSTAR Edge can support either two or four Readers, depending on the model. These Readers can be configured on either the Readers tab or on the COM1, COM2, or COM3 tabs in any combination, as long as the total number of Readers does not exceed the maximum allowed. The number of 1/8 and R/8 bus modules that are supported on the COMx ports depend upon the model: • Four 1/8 s and four R/8s are supported on the two-reader model. ■ Eight 1/8 s and eight R/8s are supported on the four-reader model. To Configure the iSTAR Edge C0M1, C0M2, or COM3 Tab 1. From the iSTAR Edge Controller Editor, click the COMx tab. 2. In the Input Boards table, create the Input Boards that you need by clicking Create All Input Boards or by selecting the Configured check box for only the Input Boards you wish to create. 3. Click 0 in the Edit column to configure individual Input Boards. See the definitions of the Input Boards in Table 29 on Page 176 and see iSTAR Input Board Editor on Page 203 for configuration instructions. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 167 EFTA01226098 STAR Controller Editor Tabs 4. In the Output Boards table, create the Output Boards that you need by clicking Create All Outputs or by selecting the Configured check box for only the Output boards you wish to create. 5. Click 0 in the Edit column to configure individual Output Boards. See the definitions of the Output Boards in Table 29 on Page 176 and see iSTAR Output Board Editor on Page 208 for configuration instructions. 6. In the Reader Boards table, create the Readers that you need by clicking Create All Readers or by selecting the Configured check box for only the Reader you wish to create. 7. Click 0 in the Edit column to configure individual Readers. See the definitions of the Readers in Table 29 on Page 176 and see iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 248 for configuration instructions. 8. Click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured on the iSTAR Controller COM tabs, or click another tab in the iSTAR Controller Editor to perform additional configuration. iSTAR Edge COM Tabs Definitions Table 26: STAR Edge COM Tabs Definitions Box Description Input Boards Create All Chet( to create al the Input Boards. When you dick Create All Input Boards the Configured column check boxes are selected. Input and you can did<El In the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Board Editor to confgure an Input Board. Boards Delete Al When you dick Delete All Input Boards, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Input Boards, and al these Inputs Input Boards are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost). Boards Edit column Clid<El Wi the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Board Editor to configure an Input Board. See iSTAR Input Board Editor on Page 203. Index This column displays the number of each Input Board. column Configured Cid< in thlscolumn to create an Input Board (make it avalable to be edited). column Name Displays the name for this Input Board. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by decking Wi this field. column Input Select the check box in the Configured column and didClin the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Board Editor. From the Boards 1 - editor you can configure the settings for the Input Board. 8 Output Boa ds Create Al I Click to create al the Output Boards. When you dick Create All Output Boards the Configured column check boxes are selected, Output and you can did< 0 in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Output Board Editor to configure an Output Board. Boards 168 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226099 STAR Controller Editor Tabs Table 26: STAR Edge COM Tabs Definitions (continued) Box Description Delete All When you click Delete All Output Boards. the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Output Boards, and all Output these Output Boards are immedlately deleted (any settings you have confgured are lost). Boards Output Select the check box in the Configured column and click ... in the EdIt column to open the STAR Output Board Editor. From the Boards 1 - editor you can confgure the settings for the Output Board. 8 Readers Create All Click to create all the Readers. When you clickCreate All Readers the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you Readers can click ri in the Edit column to open the STAR Reader Editor to configure a Reader. Delete All When you click Delete All Readers. the check boxes in the Conflgured column are cleared for all Readers. and all these Readers Readers are immedlately deleted (any settings you have confgured are lost). Readers1 - Select the check boxy the ConfIgured column and cbck n in the Edit column to open the STAR Reader Editor. From the 4 editor you can configure the settings for the Reader. You can create up to four Readers in this table for an STAR Edge, but if your STAR Edge is not a 4-reader model, Readers 3 - 4 will not function. The Template column shows the template name if you selected a Template prior to creating the Reader. iSTAR Edge Controller Wiegand Tab The iSTAR Edge Controller Editor Wiegand tab, shown in Figure 54 on Page 170, allows you to configure direct connect Reader devices. Readers that are not connected directly are configured on the COM1, COM2, or COM3 tabs. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 169 EFTA01226100 STAR Controller Editor Tabs Figure 54: STAR Edge Controller Editor Wiegand and COM1 Tabs ISICZCar j•••• tve r failMa r Ihsew•Moa way use 6 . 0l b6... I CO. " I COQ COW %Ws Ca. I tral I Om Onvera I . 4••••••• •• cf. strewn. )Xt••••••••• Ise r Onoweast C•••••••• Din is:do• • ••••• ••••046c titer 1.0.1 rut *We Z, r 6,7 • Geed I MS i Oul•SI lig.210:01 1•MMISIMMI Isemaal ealiSMeilor ..••••••••••••,•••••• _111•1•••••••••••• Oolong ✓ .(niftevouliegn•P*64 ✓ -crostersiweinatp , ✓ rartriftly••••0•PAP Lice r •••••••••••••••••1441•0••••r 04••••••••••••••••••••••••••:•••••••••••••• I. Palla Gonli • ••••••• Palm 1•••••••••••••••••)••••••••••••) amps.. Pin ✓ COMM ...SUMP fen ✓ CtindWIIIISSENtimp • =inn* The Readers can be configured on either the Wiegand tab or on the COM1, COM2, or COM3 tab in any combination, as long as the total number of Readers does not exceed the maximum allowed. The iSTAR Edge supports a maximum of either two readers or four readers depending on the model. You can configure up to two Readers on the Wiegand tab, and the remaining Readers, in any combination, on the COM1, COM2, and COM3 tabs. See the iSTAR Edge Installation and Configuration Guide for more information about the two models. Example: If you configure two Readers on the iSTAR Edge Wiegand tab, the iSTAR Edge Controller Editor makes the Reader 1 - 2 objects on the COM1 and COM2 tabs unavailable (shaded gray) leaving Reader 3 - 4 objects available. To Configure the iSTAR Edge Wiegand Tab 1. From the iSTAR Edge Controller Editor, click the Wiegand tab. 2. Create the Readers that you need by clicking Create All Readers or by selecting the Configured check box for only the Readers you wish to create. 3. Click 0 in the Edit column to configure individual Readers. See the definitions of the Readers in Table 27 on Page 171 and see iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 248 for configuration instructions. 4. Click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured on the iSTAR Controller Wiegand tab, or click another tab in the iSTAR Controller Editor to perform additional configuration. 170 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226101 iSTAR Controler Editor Tabs (STAR Edge Controller Wiegand Tab Definitions The iSTAR Edge Wiegand tab includes the fields and buttons detailed in Table 27 on Page 171. Table 27: iSTAR Edge Wiegand Tab Definitions Box Description Create Al Click to aeate al the Readers. When you dick Create All Readers, the Configured column died( boxes are selected, and you Readers can didc0 in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Reader Editor to configure a Reader. Delete Al When you dick Delete All Readers, the died< boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Readers, and all these Readers Readers are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost). Edit Click =I in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Reader Editor toconfigure a Reader. See STAR Reader Editor on Page 248. column Index This column displays the number for each reader. This number is the physical port number for a Direct Connect Wiegand reader. column Configured Click❑ in this column to create a reader (make it available to be edited). column Name Displays the name for this Reader. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by decking in this field. column Template Click in this column prior to creating the Reader, then did< 0 to select a Reader template from the fist of avaiable Reader column templates. The Template column shows the template name chosen if you selected a Template prior to creating the Reader. Readers 1 Select the check box in the Configured column for a Reader and did< 0 located in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Reader •2 Editor General tab to configure the Options, Triggers, Groups, Status and State Images that are associated with a Reader. See iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 248 for detaied instructions for configuring iSTAR Readers. If the row in this table for a particular reader is unavaiable for selection (shaded gray) it indicates that this reader number is configured on one of the COM tabs in the iSTAR Controler Editor. The Name column displaysa name comprised of the Reader Type and the iSTAR Controler name. You can dick in thiscolumn to edit the Reader name. iSTAR eX Controller Wiegand Tab The iSTAR eX Wiegand tab, shown in Figure 55 on Page 172, allows you to configure direct connect Reader devices. Readers that are not connected directly are configured on the COM1 or COM2 tabs. The iSTAR eX can support up to a total of eight Readers if an iSTAR eX Security Key is installed, or four Readers without the Security Key. These Readers can be configured on either the Readers tab or on the COM1 or COM2 tabs in any combination, as long as the total number of Readers does not exceed the maximum allowed. For iSTAR eX, you can configure up to four of these Readers on the iSTAR eX Wiegand tab, and the remaining Readers, in any combination, on the COM1 and COM2 tabs. See the iSTAR eX Installation and Configuration Guide for more information about the iSTAR eX Security Key. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 171 EFTA01226102 STAR Controller Editor Tabs Example: If you configure Readers 1 and 2 on the iSTAR eX Wiegand tab, the iSTAR eX Controller Editor makes the Reader 1 and 2 objects on the COM1 and COM2 tabs unavailable (shaded gray). Conversely, when you add Readers 3 and 4 to one of the COMx tabs, the corresponding readers on the Wiegand tab are unavailable. Figure SS: iSTAR eXWiegandand COMx Tabs j.te -r la Wm 0.40ec Oasis has OS& tra r 198••••••••• reata On4•11000.11.•000•001 ‘10~ Owed I h. 10.8 Mo, RAW Timm Che I ;MOW rrl Iswel PONS POSS. MOM DIU . C.•••••41••••••• _D•b4•011am.• r rose. sonfrIllimmaraOliCndil Cowl i VOA l 0••• *NIS ain IC0.01Tiani01.0•11.0•I Yalta.••••••••••••1 r 431, 1 1••••),I, Peal na r r figs owe m sua Kee _ pet • FeAbir• H :ce.try' 'ow tosi.ave :conga rimIssigan ittepra istsitin MOO &Os V Z,•••• 040••••••• ,..801.40.8111••• GS I••• [Wes is. r fplaelMNOVINNISPal r / =7•Atro: Ana Civial Sr* &sans 14.174.•10minli e imocin I.8 bole Caws L an r OW?* gitiOrtOsl r mann* •iim•ame r To Configure the iSTAR eX Wiegand Tab 1. From the iSTAR eX Controller Editor, click the Wiegand tab. 2. Create the Readers that you need by clicking Create All Readers or by selecting the Configured check box for only the Readers you wish to create. 3. Click 0 in the Edit column to configure individual Readers. See the definitions of the Readers in Table 28 on Page 173 and see iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 248 for configuration instructions. 4. Click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured on the iSTAR Controller Wiegand tab, or click another tab in the iSTAR Controller Editor to perform additional configuration. iSTAR eX Controller Wiegand Tab Definitions The iSTAR eX Wiegand tab includes the fields and buttons detailed in Table 28 on Page 173. 172 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226103 STAR Controller Editor Tabs Table 28: STAR eX Wiegand Tab Definitions Box Description Create All Readers Click to create all the Readers. When you click Create All Readers. the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you can click ri in the Edit column to open the STAR Reader Editor to configure a Reader. Delete All Readers When you click Delete All Readers. the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Readers. and all these Readers are immediateII,de toted (any settings you have configured are lost). Edit column Click n in the Edit column to open the STAR Reader Editor to configure a Reader. See STAR Reader Editor on Page 248. indexocilumn This column displays the number for each reader. This number is the physical port number for a Direct Connect Wiegand reader. Configured column Click n this column to create a reader (make it available to be edited). Name column Displays the name for this Reader. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in thisfield. Template column Click in thisoolumn prior to creating the Reader, then click[ to select a Reader template from the list of available Reader templates. The Template column shows the template name chosen if you selected a Template prior to creating the Reader. Readers 1 - 8 Select the check box in the Configured column for a Reader and click [- I located in the Edit oakum to open the Readers 5 - 8 are only STAR Reader Editor General tab to configure the Options, Triggers, Groups, Status and State Images that are available if the 8 reader associated with a Reader. See STAR Reader Editor on Page 248 for detailed instructions for configuring STAR USB key is present in Readers. the GCM. If the row in this table for a particular reader is unavailable for selection (shaded gray) it indicates that this reader number isocinfigured on one of the COM tabs in the STAR Controller Editor. In Figure 55 on Page 172, for example, Reader #4 isocinfigured on another tab. The Name column displaysa name comprised of the Reader Type and the STAR Controller name. You can click in this column to edit the Reader name. iSTAR eX COM1/COM2 Tabs The COM1 and COM2 tabs in the iSTAR eX Controller Editor, let you define security objects that are connected to the COM1 and COM2 ports. The iSTAR eX Contoller COM1 and COM2 tabs have a Protocol drop-down list that lets you choose the type of serial communications board is connected to the controller: • COM1 or COM2 Schlage Wireless PIM on Page 173 • COM1 or COM2 RM Communications on Page 174 The options available on the COM1 or COM2 tab depend upon which Serial Communications option you select. COM1 or COM2 Schlage Wireless PIM If you select Schlage Wireless from the Protocol drop-down list, the COM1 or COM2 tab displays 16 possible PIM Boards that you can configure. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 173 EFTA01226104 STAR Controller Editor Tabs See Figure 56 on Page 174, which shows the COM1 and COM2 tabs for an iSTAR eX. Figure ISTAR eX Controller COM Tab with Schlage PIM Boards ten kx•2 .:J P Remo, on. F Sinentrce VON "ay :we Gr" I Jr" Ciao r"."2 CC*I IC0.221 Tw6.l Oda I Sea I Os Diked roe I Rae nem I Sod Coarricakto Paccd Satyr Men ScIlepMsels r. °wenn, _ Wet AIM; 60 Me I ermared le••• r 1.1M1.1112 r PVINXII2 r fl ee r 141000.12 r PIM56.X•2 6 r PIII6a)(12 7 r 611/70(62 • r • r "see •• r 61216082 r PIN110111 12 r .1102•7012 13 r PVIINX112 r imus•x•2 r If r 1.11164.X.Q • Tte Met•cmara••••665016661,4 Yee To Configure the iSTAR eX COM1 or COM2 Tab for Schlage Wireless PIMs 1. From the iSTAR Ex Controller Editor, click one of the COM tabs. 2. Select Schlage Wireless from the Protocol drop-down list. 3. In the Schlage Wireles PIMs table that appears, create the PIMs that you need by clicking Create All PIMs or by selecting the Configured check box for only the PIMs you wish to create. 4. Click 0 in the Edit column to configure individual PIMs. See: • iSTAR Schlage Wireless PIMs Tab Definitions on Page 155 for definitions for the PIM board fields and buttons. • iSTAR PIM-485 Reader I/O Tab on Page 261 for configuration instructions. 5. Click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured on the iSTAR Controller COM tabs. COM1 or COM2 RM Communications If you select the RM option from the Protocol drop-down list, the COM1 or COM2 tab displays 4 Input Boards, 4 Output Boards, and up to 8 RM Readers that you can configure. Figure 57 on Page 175 shows the COM1 and COM2 tabs for an iSTAR eX. 174 Chapters C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226105 STAR Controller Editor Tabs Figure 57: STAR eXControDer COM Tabs a rili ei≥3•4 arq O,,c Sr. I., r: Elsaloco I J ;LI I:, Eprekd Nato, Odal r &we.* Mae Tune Zr. Gad I l'aAK I OAKKI I *Cad Call ICI Timed I Gaps I adke I Us Odnal link% I Stimigle I siva Cedynuntakent Prated Padael IRN • *den M ova, AI 'nut Bove Mkt Al trout Scads Edt It I Cortgadi —1I 2 r COMISTAR hat Beed2eXtd 3 r coMUM Pp! BealleX re ... 4 4 r MUM= Chita Bee* + 0 Ofte KJ01W Dwds Odra al 0,,ta.: Owes Eck Mix Cody:and _ tine I r cOMISTARGatEbardleXt2 ,- 1 f r !COM/STAR Cupd Eteataa N2 r CatISTARMw Elattnad2 . Rabin (Doak, Sievert Kay R4011ffidloe StOSTM allowed .V. Grata Al Rtadcrs Woe AI Riede Ea Inds , CadOdd Ito. 1 Marna I r COW liSTAR Roe:W.0X tI2 —. 2 r COMIISTM Reedtr2e,X 12 3 r COMIISTMI ReedeleX 12 The iSTAR eX can support up to four Readers, and an additional four Readers if equipped with an iSTAR eX Security Key. These Readers can be configured on either the Readers tab or on the COM1 or COM2 tabs, in any combination, as long as the total number of Readers does not exceed the maximum allowed. Example: If you configure two Readers on the iSTAR eX Controller Readers tab and two Readers on the COM1 tab, the Editor makes the remaining Reader connections on the Reader, COM1, and COM2 tabs unavailable. Sections of the COM tab are shaded gray (unavailable) to signify that these devices are configured on another tab. If you select the RM option from the Protocol drop-down list, COM1 and COM2 are configured to support RM bus readers. The iSTAR eX can support up to four RM reader devices (or eight Readers if the iSTAR eX Security Key is installed). A total of eight 1/8 and eight R/8 devices can also be configured on the iSTAR eX on COM1 and/or COM2. However you configure iSTAR eX Readers, they must match the setting of the S1 switch on the PMB. NOTE The S1 switches define which COM port the RM ports are connected to in the hardware. See the iSTAR eX Installation and Configuration Guide. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 175 EFTA01226106 STAR Controller Editor Tabs To Configure the iSTAR eX COM1 or COM2 Tab 1. From the iSTAR Ex Controller Editor, click one of the COM tabs. 2. Select RM from the Protocol drop-down list. 3. In the Input Boards table, create the Input Boards that you need by clicking Create All Input Boards or by selecting the Configured check box for only the Input Boards you wish to create. 4. Click O in the Edit column to configure individual Input Boards. See the definitions of the Input Boards in Table 29 on Page 176 and see iSTAR Input Board Editor on Page 203 for configuration instructions. 5. In the Output Boards table, create the Output Boards that you need by clicking Create All Outputs or by selecting the Configured check box for only the Output boards you wish to create. 6. Click GJ in the Edit column to configure individual Output Boards. See the definitions of the Output Boards in Table 29 on Page 176 and see iSTAR Output Board Editor on Page 208 for configuration instructions. 7. In the Readers Boards table, create the Readers that you need by clicking Create All Readers or by selecting the Configured check box for only the Reader you wish to create. 8. Click O in the Edit column to configure individual Readers. See the definitions of the Readers in Table 29 on Page 176 and see iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 248 for configuration instructions. 9. Click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured on the iSTAR Controller COM tabs, or click another tab in the iSTAR Controller Editor to perform additional configuration. 'STAR eX COM Tabs Definitions Table 29 on Page 176 contains definitions for the fields and buttons on the iSTAR eX COM tabs. Table 29: iSTAR eX COM Tabs Definitions Box Description Input Boards Create Al Click tocreate all the Input Boards. When you dick Create All Input Boards the Configured column check boxes are selected. Input and you can did< Oin the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Board Editor to configure an Input Board. Boards Delete Al When you dick Delete All Input Boards, the chedthoxes In the Configured column are cleared focal Input Boards, and all these Inputs Input Boardsare immediatelydeleted (any settingsyou have configured are lost). Boards Edit column Click El in the EdIt column to open the iSTAR Input Board Editor to configure an Input Board. See iSTAR Input Board Editor on Page 203. Index Thiscolumndisplaysthe number of each Input Board. column Configured CbckO in this column to create an Input Board (make it available to be edited). c:olumn 176 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226107 STAR Controller Editor Tabs Table 29: STAR eX COM Tabs Definitions (continued) Box Description Name Displays the name for this Input Board. The name is system-generated by dela utt. but you can edit this name byclicking in this field. column Input Select the check box in the Configured column and click [—I in the EdIt column to open the STAR Input Board Editor. From the Boards 1 - 8 editor you can configure the settings for the Input Board. Output Boards Create All Click to create all the Output Boards. When you click Create All Output Boards the Configured column check boxes are selected. Output and you can click ...din the Edit column to open the STAR Output Board Editor to configure an Output Board. Boards Delete All When you click Delete All Output Boards, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Output Boards, and all Output these Output Boards are immedLate ty deleted (any settings you have configured are lost). Boards Output Select the check box in the Configured column and click [ ... lin the Edlt column to open the 'STAR Output Board Editor. From the Boards 1 - 8 editor you can configure the settings for the Output Board. Readers Create All Click to create all the Readers. When you clickCreate All Readers the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you Readers can click[- I in the EdIt oplumn to open the STAR Reader Editor to configure a Reader. Delete All When you click Delete All Readers. the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Readers, and all these Readers Readers are immedlately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost). Readersl- Select the check boxy the Configured column and click[i in the Edlt oplumn to open the STAR Reader Editor. From the 8 editor you can configure the settings for the Reader. You can create up to eight Readers in this table for an STAR eX, but if your STAR eXdoes not have an STAR eX Security key. Readers 5-8 will not function. The Template column shows the template name if you selected a Template prior to creating the Reader. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 177 EFTA01226108 STAR Ultra Controller Editor Inputs Tab iSTAR Ultra Controller Editor Inputs Tab The Inputs tab (shown in Figure 2 on Page 178) lets you define the Main Board (GCM) inputs for the Controller. All of the inputs support event triggers based on their active or inactive states. These triggers can activate alarms, send emails, run a Roll Call Report, etc. The Input tab fields and buttons are described in Table 2 on Page 178. Figure 2: InputsTab .LJx We sal Ora tiow Dews., r paw Pane*. OAS WA. Tmaate• Gred •Isa Barth I FJCI. I Will I COW [ Croa 19r. [ 1.Yor weal ;Tics' 9aa nape I W. Geed les. Otare :CMOs !JettaInt% Inapt 11r. • Time Nue ✓ rawer tab." Fronvi ealt•InOt • (SeaSW Int- iv! pme Shea RS 165Pai P Pot Powe RSOS ' Po. Power SOARS al Pe 2 ✓ PMP.rUVRSµ,2- Ain P GNI Ma- Table 2: Ultra Inputs Tab Definitions FiekUButton Description Main Board Inputs Create Al Click to create al the Main Board Inputs. When you dick Create All Inputs the Configured column cteck boxes are selected, Inputs and you can dick[] in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Editor to configure an Input. Delete Al When you dick Delete All Inputs, the check boxes in the Configured column are Geared for al Main Board Inputs, and al Inputs these Inputs are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost). You will need to confirm each deletion. 178 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226109 STAR Ultra Controller Editor Inputs Tab Ultra Inputs Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Edit column Click [ i in the Edit column to open the STAR Input Editor to configure a Main Board Input. See STAR Input Editor on Page 232. Input Type This column displaysthe type of each Main Board Input. column Configured Click in this column to create an input (make it available to be edited). column Namecolumn Displays the name for this Input. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in this field. Template Click in this column, then click ...] to select an Input template to use for creating this input from the list of available Input column templates.You can only select a Template prior to creating the input. Input Type Tamper Activates when the controller cabinet is opened or removed from its mounting surface. Select the check box in the Configured column and dick Q in the Edit column to open the STAR Input Editor. From the Input Editor you can configure the settings and link to events through triggers. Power Failure Monitors the AC power failure output of a battery backup unit. When this alarm input activates, it specifies that the GCM has lust its primary power source, and is operating on batteries. External Activates when the emergency DC battery is running low on power. Battery Low Port Power Activates if there is a problem with the power on the port. RS485 Port 1/2 CPNI Alarm Activates if the CPNI (Centre for the Protection of National Infrastructure) switch S1-2 is changed. Tamper, AC power fail, and Low battery inputs must be programmed for UL applications. NOTE iSTAR Ultra Controller Boards Tab Use the iSTAR Controller Editor Boards tab, shown in Figure 3 on Page 180, to select the ACM type and to open the iSTAR ACM Board editor to configure readers, outputs and inputs. You must select the correct ACM type used by the controller: NOTE ■ iSTAR Ultra - select iSTAR Ultra ACM. ■ iSTAR Ultra SE - select iSTAR Ultra SE ACM. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 179 EFTA01226110 STAR Ultra Controller Editor Inputs Tab Figure 3: STARController Boards Tab x try. l 0.•cm•er. Leafed Snpinrcs .1/40. inwiere Ewa' PX* I coil' I COW imp... I <mad Sint u. DenS^#4. 9a.4I :CM AO/ Typi, r °tote ACA Dora ES Its Calcusd Nem I To Configure the 'STAR Controller Boards Tab 1. From the iSTAR Controller editor, click the Boards tab. 2. Select the iSTAR ACM type from the ACM Type drop-down menu. • iSTAR Ultra - select iSTAR Ultra ACM. • iSTAR Ultra SE - select iSTAR Ultra SE ACM. 3. Create the ACM Boards that you need by clicking Create All ACMs, or by selecting the Configured check box for only the ACMs you wish to create. 4. Click 0 in the Edit column to configure an ACM. See iSTAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Editor on Page 184 5. Click Save and Close. 180 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226111 iSTAR Ultra Controler Editor Inputs Tab Table 3: iSTAR Controler Boards Tab Definitions Field/Button Description ACM Type Select the STAR ACM type from the ACM Type drop-down menu. • 'STAR Ultra- select ISTAR Ultra ACM. • STAR Ultra SE - select ISTAR Ultra SE ACM Create ACM When you dick Create ACM the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you can dick 0 in the EdIt column to open the iSTAR Ultra ACM Editor to configure the ACM. Delete ACM When you dick Delete ACM, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared focal ACMs, and are deleted (alconfiguration settings are lost). Index Select the cteck box in the Configured column and dick 0 located in the EdIt column to open the iSTAR Ultra ACM Editor to configure the Inputs, Outputs, and Readers that are associated with the ACM board. ISTAR Ultra Controller IP-ACMs Tab The IP-ACMs tab is used to configure the IP-ACM Offline Mode, readers, inputs, outputs, and triggers. See Chapter 6, Configuring the IP-ACM for information about configuring the IP-ACM. ISTAR Ultra COM1/COM2 Tabs The COM1 and COM2 tabs in the ISTAR Ultra Controller Editor let you define security objects that are connected to the COM1 and COM2 ports. Aperio Hubs and Schlage PIMs can be configured for the COM1 and COM2 ports. Figure 58: iSTAR Ultra Controler COM Tabs faSay car Not IL Omani* Pi DSO Once or. 01/••••••• Mat lOsiel IIMMlria.l lensI SasI weer asI asweal INs.IGemI steal us wantslialamal ROSS •—• Leirs 10.•• SNcie Mae His °Sault Neal Mobs y Cigar MI POW Cola At III1* N ram cast IYt 6• ▪ CrOwn• vivo WICOWILIBI 110401414.1.1 SOCOSILel a 0 a ❑ ❑ I a ❑ a NOM ailha NMI w1:43 416.0 Mal mei la aMt 2USsi H M ❑ ❑ ❑ 2 0 i•• UPS tiSPN RIM _ ❑ I 0 Ninfit; MOW Meal ❑ si a nasiASaSNI2+1.1 ❑ If 0 Re tion 45•a RIM ❑ a C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 181 EFTA01226112 'STAR Ultra Controller Editor Inputs Tab The iSTAR Ultra can support up to 32 Readers. There can be up to 16 ACM Readers and up to 32 Aperio Readers or Schlage Readers, but the total number of readers cannot exceed 32. If you try to configure any additional readers, an error message appears. The iSTAR Ultra supports either Aperio or Schlage Wireless Readers. There cannot be a mixture of the two readers on one iSTAR Ultra. The ACM Readers can be configured as Wiegand direct connect or RM bus as long as the total number of Readers does not exceed eight per ACM or sixteen per iSTAR Ultra. The Aperio Readers can be configured on any of the possible 30 Hubs, in any combination, as long as the total number of Readers does not exceed 32. There can be up to 15 Aperio Hubs per COMx port, allowing for a total of 30 Hubs per iSTAR Ultra. Each Hub can support up to 8, or 1, Assa Abloy Readers with a maximum of 16 readers per COMx port. This provides for a maximum of 32 readers per iSTAR Ultra. If using a 1 Reader Hub, the maximum is 30 Aperio Readers (i.e., 1 Reader per Hub). NOTE To Configure the iSTAR Ultra COM1 or COM2 Tab for Aperio 1. From the iSTAR Ultra Controller Editor, click the COMx tab. 2. Select Aperio in the Protocol field. This will also select Aperio in the other COMx tab. 3. In the Aperio Hubs table, create the Aperio Hubs that you need by by selecting the Configured check box for only the Hubs you wish to create. 4. Click [J in the Edit column to configure individual Hubs. See the definitions of the Hubs in iSTAR Ultra COM Tabs Definitions on Page 183 and see iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor (iSTAR Ultra only) on Page 220 for configuration instructions. 5. Click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured on the iSTAR Controller COM tabs, or click another tab in the iSTAR Controller Editor to perform additional configurations. a To Configure the iSTAR Ultra COM1 or COM2 Tab for Schlage 1. From the iSTAR Ultra Controller Editor, click the COMx tab. 2. Select Schlage in the Protocol field. This will also select Schlage in the other COMx tab. 3. In the Schlage Wireless PIMs table, create the Schlage PIMs that you need by by selecting the Configured check box for only the PIMs you wish to create. 4. Click GJ in the Edit column to configure individual PIMS. 5. Click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured on the iSTAR Controller COM tabs, or click another tab in the iSTAR Controller Editor to perform additional configurations. 182 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226113 STAR Ultra Controller Editor Inputs Tab iSTAR Ultra COM Tabs Definitions Table 30: STAR Ultra COM Tabs Definitions Box Description Aperio Hubs Create All Click to create all the Aperio Hubs. When you dick Create All Hubs the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you Hubs candid El in the Edit column to open the STAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor to configuse an Aperio Hub. Delete All When you dick Delete All Hubs. the check boxes in the Configured column are dewed for all Hubs, and all these Hubs are deleted Hubs after you confirm each deletion (any settings you haveconfigured are lost). Protocol Select Aperio. Edit Click[] in the Edit column to open the STAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor to configure an Aperio Hub. See STAR Aperio column RS-485 Hub Board Editor (iSTAR Ultra only) on Page 220. Index This column displays the number of each Hub (from 1 to 15). column Configured Click in this column to create an Aperio Hub (make it available to be edited). column Name Displays the name for this Aperio Hub. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name byclicking in this fieId. column Hubs 1 - 15 Select the check box in the Configured column and dicks in the Edit column to open the 'STAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board editor. From the editor you can configure the settings for the Hub. Schlage PIMs Create All Click to create all the Schlage PiMs. When you click Create All PIMs the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you PIMs can dick[[ in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Schlage RS-485 PIM Board Editor to configure a Schlage PIM. Delete All When you dick Delete All PIMs, the check boxes in the Configured column are Geared for all PiMs, and all these PiMs are PIMs deleted after you confirm each deletion (any settings you have configured are lost). Edit Chain in the Edit column to open the STAR Schlage RS-485 PIM Board Editor to oonfigure a Schlage PIM. column index This column displays the number of each PIM (from 1 to 16). column Configured Click in this oplumn to create a Schlage PIM (make it available to be edited). column Name Displays the name for this Schlage PIM. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name byeliding in this field. column PiMs 1-16 Select the check box in the Configured column and click in the Edit column to open the STAR Schlage RS-485 PIM Board editor. From the editor you can configure the settings for the PIM. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 183 EFTA01226114 STAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Editor iSTAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Editor Add-on Access Control Modules (ACM Boards) provide access control functionality by supporting readers, outputs and inputs. The iSTAR Ultra ACM Board dialog box is accessed from the iSTAR Controller editor Boards tab. iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Editor The iSTAR Ultra ACM Board editor allows you to define and configure inputs, outputs and readers for an ACM Board. The ACM Wiegand tab allows you to configure Wiegand readers, while the ACM RS-485 tab lets you configure RS-485-connected devices. The iSTAR Ultra ACM Board editor has six tabs: ■ iSTAR ACM Board General Tab on Page 197 ■ iSTAR ACM Board Inputs Tab on Page 198 ■ iSTAR ACM Board Outputs Tab on Page 199 ■ iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Wiegand Tab on Page 184 ■ iSTAR Ultra ACM Board RS-485 Tab on Page 186 ■ iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Status Tab on Page 195 For more information see the iSTAR Ultra Installation and Configuration Guide. iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Wiegand Tab The iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Wiegand tab, shown in Figure 59 on Page 185, provides configuration for Wiegand readers connected to the iSTAR Ultra ACM Board. 184 Chapter 5 CCURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226115 STAR Uttra Controller ACM Board Editor Figure 59: STAR Uttra ACM Board Wiegand Tab A:929 id ard due Mn (STAR tin ACM! Via Parma DafaA r Sinleferce Kale Teo Zr. GMT050:0 Eamon, Tea VS I Ca) Ginn, I Ircidd One, NIePMM l RS-4151 Shia. Create Al Roden Ode* Al Readers a Ma Cc dead Teerotate ✓ ISAR RettSTAR las ACM t ✓ ISTAR Meadet6TMuln,CM1Urn I ✓ STAR RoolorNSTAR Urn /Om 1.tra 1 ✓ GTAR FloodoWAR Vb., ACM 1.1.1fre• 1 _ 5 ✓ GTAR Rx6r5CAR Ulm SCIA1.1in 1 ✓ ISTAR Ateder661AR lbe AC/Alan,' ✓ STAR lindS7SIAR Lira IC/41 lin 1 ✓ 4TAR ReaderiSTAR lin ACM1lb iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Wiegand Tab Definitions Table 31 on Page 185 provides definitions of the fields and buttons on the iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Wiegand Tab. Table 31: STAR Uttra ACM Board Wiegand Tab.Definitions Box Description Create All Click to create all the Readers. When you dick Create An Readers. the Configured column check boxes are selected. and you Readers can click® in the Edit column to open the STAR Reader Editor to oonfigure a direct connect Wiegand Reader. Delete All When you dick Delete All Readers. the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Readers, and all these Readers Readers are immediatety deleted (any settings you have configured are lost). Edit Click El in the Edit column to open the STAR Reader Editor to configure a Reader. See STAR Reader Editor on Page 248. column Index This column displays the number for each reader. This number is the physical port number for a Direct Connect Wiegand reader. column C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 185 EFTA01226116 STAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Editor Table 31: STAR Ultra ACM Board Wiegand Tab.Definitions (continued) Box Description Configured Click in this column to create a reader (make it available to be edited). column Name Displaysthe name for this Reader. The name is system-generated by default. but you can edit this name by clicking in this field. column Template Click in this column prior to creating the Reader, then clicki — I to select a Reader template from the list of available Reader column templates. The Template column shows the template name chosen if you selected a Template prior to creating the Reader. Readers 1 Select the check box in the Configured column for a Reader and click ri located in the Edit column to open the STAR Reader -8 Editor General tab to configure the Keypad, Triggers, Groups, Status and State Images that are associated with a Reader. See iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 248 for detailed instructions for configuring STAR Readers. The Name column displays a name comprised of the Reader Type and the STAR Controller name. You can click in this column to edit the Reader name. iSTAR Ultra ACM Board RS-485 Tab The iSTAR Ultra ACM Board RS-485 tab, shown in Figure 60 on Page 187,provides configuration for RS-485 devices connected to the iS1'AR Ultra ACM Board. 186 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226117 STAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Editor Figure 60: STAR Ultra ACM Board RS-485 Tab -__ Mono ISTAA tin AC141,Jt-> DOeferAga Paraca DeiaA r ..flignrcoAce. Tire Zoe* 01474:60:6 tam Toe 0.15 &Canada) Gal I kW* ICI Ward A5455 (SUS FG415 Flab Creme Al POI aloe Al Foes a ES I hist Woad Nan a 'STAR Orme Pot14TAR Ube /0114.11•1 2 r STAR Ora PorSiSTAR Len /0414.5rfrl 3 r .STAR 0***PeiNSTAR It.t 1410•1 r isrm Otannat44TAR Ube a bllis.1 s r STAR Demo PaikSTAR Ube /011-Ubikl 6 r 'STAR NomPot‘STNI lab. /04141rfrl r iSTMDornPeeMTAR Ora 10114-tra I 5 r 15TH D.C.KAMMUn/OII.IAn.I aer iSTAR Ultra ACM Board RS-485 Tab Definitions Table 32 on Page 187 provides definitions of the fields and buttons on the iSTAR Ultra ACM Board RS-485 Tab. Table 32: STAR Ultra ACM Board RS-485 Tab Definitions Field/Button Description RS-485 Ports Create All Click to create the RS-485 Ports. When you click Create All Ports the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you Ports can click[] in the Edit column to open the STAR Device Port Editor to configure an RS-485 Port. Delete All When you click Delete All Ports. the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Ports. and &Ports are Ports immediately deleted (any settings you haveconfigured are bst). Editcolumn Click n in the Editcolumn to open the STAR Device Port Editor to configure Device Ports for the STAR Ultra. See STAR Reader Editor on Page 248. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 187 EFTA01226118 STAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Editor Table 32: STAR Ultra ACM Board RS-485 Tab Definitions (continued) FiekUButton Description Index column T his oolumn displays the number for each Device Port. Configured Click in this oolumn to create a Device Port (make it available to be edited). column Name column Displays the name for this Device Port. The name is system-generated by default. but you can edit this name by clicking in click in thisfield. Device Ports 1 Select the check box in the Configured column for a Device Port and click ri located in the Edit column to open the STAR -8 Device Port Editor General ta b to configure the Readers and ACM extensions that are associated with the Device Port. See STAR Reader Editor on Page 248 for detailed instructions for configuring STAR Device Ports. The Name column displays a name comprised of the Device Port and the STAR Controller name. You can dick in this column to edit the Device Port name. iSTAR Ultra ACM RS-485 Device Port Editor The iSl'AR Ultra ACM RS-485 Device Port Editor lets you create and configure RM Readers, BLE readers, and direct- connect Wiegand Readers. 188 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226119 STAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Editor F igure 61: STAR Ultra ACM RS-485 Device Port Editor iSTAR Ultra ACM RS-485 Device Port Tabs ■ iSTAR Ultra ACM/IP-ACM RS-485 Device Port General Tab on Page 189 ■ iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port Readers Tab on Page 190 ■ iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port ACM EXT Tab on Page 192 iSTAR Ultra ACM/IP-ACM RS-485 Device Port General Tab The iSFAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port General tab displays three Read-only fields that identify the Controller, Port Number, and Protocol for the RM reader and Wiegand Reader Device Port. Table 33 on Page 190 describes the fields on this tab. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 189 EFTA01226120 STAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Editor Table 33: STAR Ultra ACM RS-485 Device Port General Tab Definitions Field Description Controller This field identifies the controller for this ACM RS-485 Device Port. Port Number This field dentifies the index number of the Device Port on the ACM for the Readers. Protocol Clickon the drop-down menu to select the Protocol type. • RM (Software House Reader Protocol) • BLE (Bluetooth Low Energy), • OSDP (Open Supervised Device Protocol) Default: RM iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port Readers Tab The iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port Readers tab lets you create and configure the Readers that are attached to an RS- 485 port on the iSTAR Ultra. 190 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226121 STAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Editor Figure 62: iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port Readers Tab Sr& STAR Osvc• Pon1STAR Ube /041-Ual QtlalPICfg Partocet DefetA Martenance Mat Tee Dm. OIT-05 DO) Erten Trne & Canada) 9oseni Readers I /01es Roasts Create Al Reader: Ocktc N React: ET hiex Carivred New • :STAR Recckri.STAR Devoe P006 ✓ 'SPA Ree6sr24TAR Dews Patli5 ✓ STAR lisedeeliSTARDSte Pot 1.5 ✓ .$10A Rimdet467AR twice Poi1.S ✓ .STAAAali•SESAROvia Pot t S ✓ STAR RudstEASTARDrip Pot 1.S 7 ✓ iSTAR Flaseat7iSTARNVIC• held ✓ iSTAR ReaderNSTAROrace PaitliS You can use an existing Reader Template to create one or more of the RS-485 Readers. Click in the Template Column, then click El. A list of available iSTAR Reader Templates appears. Click on the Template you wish to use. See Using Templates for Controller Inputs, Outputs, and Readers on Page 37 for more detailed information about using Templates to create Readers. iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port Readers Tab Definitions Table 34 on Page 191 provides definitions for the buttons and fields on the iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port Readers tab. Table 34: STAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port Readers Tab Definitions Field/Button Description C•cate A Click to create allIns readers. When you dic*Create All Readers the Configured column check boxes are selected. and you keade.s can dick el in the Editcolumn toedit that reader. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 191 EFTA01226122 STAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Editor STAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port Readers Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Delete All When you click Delete All Readers, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all readers, and all these readers Readers are immedLatety deleted (a ny settings you have oonfigured are lost). Edit column Click I ...) in the Edit column to open the STAR Reader Editor to configure an Reader. See STAR Reader Editor on Page 248. Index column This column displays the number of each Reader. Configured Click in this column to create a Reader (make it available to be edited). column Name column Displays the name for this Reader. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in click in this field. Template The Template column shows the template name if you selected a Template prior to creating the Readers. column Clicks thiscolumn, then click n to select a Reader template to use for creating this Reader from the list of available Reader templates.You can onty select a Template prior to creating the Reader. iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port ACM EXT Tab The iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port ACM Ext tab lets you create and configure the Input boards and Output boards that are attached to this iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port. 192 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226123 STAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Edrtor Figure 63: STAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port ACM EA Tab iJJ arc Otre Nara STAR Dowa. Por1141AR Ube 1O41 .1 Q . Patten NEPA thettenance Mae Tyre Zeno (641T-05 Oc Eastern Tee NS d Grad.) Gonwai I R•40•4 X34 EX PPR &orb Create Al Dowels L: Delete Al lords 611 We GASPS NM i I A 6TM 4p4 Boadt4TAR Draw Pc.04STNI 2 r ;STAR Ws 34441243AR Down PatI4STAR r STAR WA 0444034TAR Dram 3.414SIAR r STAR Iva Bew044TAR Dr*, Poll4STAX $ r 41AR Fide..t STAR Dela ftelleSTAR r STAR Vat (144064STAR Date FS:414TM r 6TAR hat BoathSTAR Down Pot1437412 1 r 'STAR Fps Boardt4STAR Demos Pc4367/42 OS tads 2 awe ace* Wet Meoerds FA Me 04,10440 Nam • r STAR Oat Boadl4STAR Diva PceliSTA. r WARW.( Boxd24STAR Dram PatI4STA 3 r WAR Otis 34446345TM4 Draw PatI4STA 4 r 6TAROAxlece444STAR Dina Poll4SA $ r 67M0.4841344034TAR Donn PoIl4STA c r SPAWN Be4464ThA Drag Pe414314 7 r iSTAROxpx Bow074TAR DrAc• PretleSTA B r STAR Oat Boxa34STAR Dec. Pal 4STA Configuring the iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port ACM Ext Tab When you configure the iSTAR Ultra 16-485 Device Port ACM Ext tab, you are defining the Input boards and Output boards that are attached to the port. You can then click to open the Input Boards Editor to configure individual Input Boards, or open the Output Boards Editor to configure individual Output Boards. To Configure the iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port ACM Ext Tab 1. From the iSTAR Ultra Boards tab, create an ACM on either SPI Port 1 or SPI Port 2 by clicking in the Configure column. 2. Click 0 to open the iSTAR Ultra ACM Board editor. Access the Input Board Editor for the Input Board you wish to edit (see iSTAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Editor on Page 184). 3. Click the RS-485 tab. 4. Create an RS-485 port by clicking in the Configure column, then click 0 to open the iSTAR Ultra Device Port editor. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 193 EFTA01226124 STAR Uttra Controller ACM Board Editor 5. Click the ACM Ext tab. 6. Create an Input board by clicking in the Configure column for one of the Input Boards (1.8), then click ri to open the iSTAR Input Board editor. See the iSl'AR Input Board Editor on Page 203 for configuration instructions. 7. Create an Output board by clicking in the Configure column for one of the Output Boards (1.8), then click ri.to open the iSl'AR Output Board editor. See the iSTAR Output Board Editor on Page 208 for configuration instructions. 8. When you have finished configuring the Inputs on the iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port ACM Ext tab, click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured. iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port ACM Ext tab Definitions Table 42 on Page 202 provides definitions for the buttons and fields on the iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port ACM Ext tab. Table 35: iSTAR Uttra RS-485 Device Port ACM Ext Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Input Boards Create All Click to create all the Input Boards. When you click Create All Boards the Configured column check boxes are selected, and Boards you can clickri in the Edit column to edit that Input Board. Delete All When you click Delete All Boards. the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Input Boards. and all these Boards Input Boards a re immedlate ty de toted (a ny settings you have configured are lost). Edit column Click ... I in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Board Editor. See STAR Input Board Editor on Page 203. Index column This column displays the number of each Input Board. Configured Click in this column to create an Input Board (make it available to be edited). column Name column Displays the name for this Input board. The name is system-generated by defa uIt. but you can edit this name by clicking in click in this field. Output Boards Create All Clicktocreate all the Output Boards. When you clickCreate All Boards the Configured column check boxes a re selected. and Boards you can click ... I in the Edit column to edit that Output Board. Delete All When you click Deists All Boards, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Output Boards, and all these Boards Output Boards are immediatety deleted (any settings you haveconfigured are lost). Edit column Click ri in the Edit column to open the STAR Output Board Editor. See STAR Output Board Editor on Page 208. Index column This column displays the number of each Output Board. Configured Click n this column to create an Output Board (make it available to be edited). column Name column Displays the name for this Output board. The name is system-generated by dela utt. but you can edit this name by clicking in click in this field. 194 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Con flgutation Guide EFTA01226125 STAR Uttra Controller ACM Board Editor iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Status Tab The iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Status tab, shown in Figure 64 on Page 195,provides a read-only listing of information about the operational status of the selected iSTAR Ultra ACM Board. Figure 64: STAR Uttra ACM Board Status Tab JAI re cow So* lupeLaa KMI 44,1 Paler, DOS r Szwienerceible Irma Zone 41414:6 CC) &sum Tao NS &Camila) Grind bats I oat* I ffi•pnd I Rs4s5 21.'1 threw Stew PICCOB101 1 Cananciece Suns luw Recast°, 2 Car...swages Stu.. Itfrino,,, Peccessa 7 Femme* Veywn Promsa 2 F 'tinware Venga F41 Kai Lan, Enabled Smus Lock I POW Vt La* 2 Pew Yore Roo* Pa I Vots FM Oapas Enoblol laec Dyke:et() Can 10 node ;re 10 iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Status Tab Definitions Table 36 on Page 195 provides definitions of the fields and buttons on the iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Status tab. Table 36: STAR Uttra ACM Board Status Tab Defmaions Field/Button Description Processor 1 Communications Status Offline or Online. Processor 2 Communications Status Offline or Online. Processor 1 Firmware Version Processor firmware. such as 00.00.36.00008 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 195 EFTA01226126 STAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Editor Table 36. iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Status Tab Definitions (continued) Fieldeutton Description Processor 2 Firmware Version Processor firmware, such as 00.00.36.00008 FAI Key Latch Enabled Status Enabled or disabled. Lock 1 Power (Volts) Lock power in Volts. Possible vales are: 0.0V, 12.0V, 24.0V. Lock 2 Power (Volts) Lock power in Volts. Possible vales are: 0.0V. 12.0V, 24.0V. Reader Power Voltage reported for Readers. Reader power is the basic power to the GCM and ACMs. Typically reads about 13.8V. FAI Outputs Enabled List of Outputswith FAl enabled. 196 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226127 STAR Classic/Pro Controller ACM Board Editor iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller ACM Board Editor Add-on Access Control Modules (ACM Boards) provide access control functionality by supporting readers, outputs and inputs. The ACM Board dialog box is accessed from the iSTAR Controller editor Boards tab. iSTAR Classic/Pro ACM Board Editor the iSTAR Classic/Pro ACM Board editor allows you to define and configure inputs, outputs and readers for the ACM Board. The ACM Extension (ACM Ext) tab allows you to configure the 1/8 input and R/8 output boards connected to the ACM Board. The iSTAR Classic/Pro ACM Board editor has five tabs: ■ iSTAR ACM Board General Tab on Page 197 ■ iSTAR ACM Board Inputs Tab on Page 198 ■ iSTAR ACM Board Outputs Tab on Page 199 ■ iSTAR ACM Board Readers Tab on Page 200 ■ iSTAR ACM Board ACM Ext Tab on Page 201 For more information see the iSTAR Pro Installation and Configuration Guide. iSTAR ACM Board General Tab The ACM Board General tab identifies the ACM Board. The fields on this tab are read-only. iSTAR ACM Board General Tab Definitions Table 37 on Page 197 provides definitions for the fields on the iSTAR ACM Board General tab. Table 37: iSTAR ACM Board General Ta b Definitions Field/Button Description Name Displays the name for this ACM board. The name is system generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in this field. Description Enter a textual comment about the ACM board. such as its location or purpose. This text is for information only. Maintenance Mode Chola° put the iSTAR ACM board into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 2: Maintenance Mode for more information. Par than This read-only field identifies the Partition in which the iSTAR Controller for this ACM Board resides. Board Location C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 197 EFTA01226128 STAR Classic/Pro Controller ACM Board Editor STAR ACM Board General Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Controller This read-only field identifies the Controller to which this board is attached. ACM Number This read-onty field displays the number of the ACM board. Board Type This read-on ty field displays the STAR ACM type. iSTAR ACM Board Inputs Tab The ACM Board Inputs tab lets you create and configure the Inputs that are attached to this ACM Board. You can use an existing Input Template to create one or more of the ACM Board Inputs. Click in the Template Column, then click El A list of available iSTAR Input Templates appears. Click on the Template you wish to use. See Using Templates for Controller Inputs, Outputs, and Readers on Page 37 for more detailed information about using Templates to create Inputs. iSTAR ACM Board Inputs Tab Definitions • Table 38 on Page 198 provides definitions for the buttons and fields on the ACM Board Inputs tab. • Table 39 on Page 199 provides definitions for the iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Inputs tab. Table 38: STAR Pro/ClassicACM Board Inputs Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Create All Inputs Click to create all the Inputs. When you clickCreate All Inputs the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you can click Q in the Edit column to edit that Input. Delete All Inputs When you click Delete All Inputs. the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Inputs. and all these Inputs are immediatety deleted (any settings you have configured are lost). Edit column Click ... in the Edit column to open the STAR Input Editor to oonfigure an Input. See STAR Input Editor on Page 232. Indexcolumn T his column displays the number of each Input. Configured column Click in thisoolumn to create an Input (make it available to be edited). Name column Displays the name for this Input. The name is system-generated by defautt, but you can edit this name byclicking in this field. Template column T he Template column shows the template name if you selected a Template prior to creating the Input. Click in this column, then click ri to select an Input template to use for creating this Input from the list of available Input templates.You can only select a Template prior to creating the input. Inputs 1 through 16 These standard general purpose supervised inputs are available on STAR Pro ACM boards. 198 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226129 iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller ACM Board Editor iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Inputs Tab Definitions Table 39 on Page 199 provides definitions for the buttons and fields on the iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Inputs tab. Table 39: STAR Ultra ACM Board Inputs Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Special Purpose Inputs (iSTAR Ultra only) Tamper The Tamper input activates when the controller cabinet is opened or removed from its mounting surface. NOTE: For UL applications, this field must be enabled. Select the check box in the Configured column and click located in the Edlt column to la open the iSTAR Input Editor General tab to configure the Tamper input. From the Input Editor you can configure the Options, Triggers, Groups, Status and State Images that are associated with the Tamper Input. The Template column shows the template name chosen if you selected a Template prior to creating the Input. Comm Fad Processor A logical unsupervised input that reflects the state of the communication between the GCM 1 board and Processor-Aon thisACM board. Comm Fad Processor A logical unsupervised input that reflects the state of the communication between the GCM 2 board and Processor-Bon this ACM board. FAI Alarm This is the Fire Alarm Input signal. It is NC supervised. FAI Relay Control FAI Relay Control. When the FAI signal is true, the HW drives all selected relays to activate. Each relay has a switch indicating whether it is selected to behave in this way. FAI Interlock Key The FAI K input is usualty a key switch. It is supervised as NO. It is used in conjunction with Latch mode. If latching is enabled, the F signal will turn on all selected outputs. They will stay that way until the Fire Chief inserts the key in the key switch and announces &Wear. Port 1 Power Status Power indicator input for each RM port. through Port 8 Power Status General Purpose Inputs (iSTAR Ultra only) Inputs 1 through 24 These standard general purpose supervised inputs are available on STAR Ultra ACM (Ultra) boards. Inputs 1 though 16 Ultra SE (Uttra Mode) iSTAR ACM Board Outputs Tab The ACM Board Outputs tab lets you create and configure the Outputs that are attached to this ACM Board. You can use an existing Output Template to create one or more of the ACM Board Outputs. Click in the Template Column, then click Q. A list of available iSTAR Output Templates appears. Click on the Template you wish to use. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 199 EFTA01226130 STAR Classic/Pro Controller ACM Board Editor See Using Templates for Controller Inputs, Outputs, and Readers on Page 37 for more detailed information about using Templates to create Outputs. iSTAR ACM Board Outputs Tab Definitions Table 40 on Page 200 provides definitions for the buttons and fields on the iSTAR ACM Board Outputs tab. Table 40: STAR ACM Board Outputs Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Create All Click to create all the outputs. When you dick Create All Outputs the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you Outputs can click ... I in the Edit column to edit that output. Delete All When you click Delete All Outputs. the check boxes in the Configured column are Geared for alloutputs. and all these outputs Outputs are immedLatety de kited (any settings you have configured are lost). Edit column Click® in the Edit column to open the STAR Output Editor to configure an Output. See STAR Output Editor on Page 241. Index column This column displays the number of each Output. Configured Click in thiscolumn tocreate an Output (make it available to be edited). column Name column Displays the name for this Output. The name is system-generated bydefautt, but you can edit this name byclicking in thisfield. Template The Template column shows the template name if you selected a Template prior to creating the Outputs. column Click in thiscolumn, then dick (—1to select an Output template to use for creating this Output from the list of available Output templates.You can only select a Template prior to creating the Output. Primary Relay Outputs Outputs 1 These outputs can be used for a Fire Alarm Interface (FAI). They are rated at 5 Amps, and are socket mounted. through 8 Click in the Con(Igure column, then dick® in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Output Editor to configure a Primary Output. See iSTAR Output Board Editor on Page 208 Secondary Relay Outputs Outputs 1 These outputs cannot be used for a Fire Alarm Interface (FAI). They are rated at 0.75 or 1Amp, and are permanentty soldered through 8 to the ACM. Click in the ConfIgure column, then dick la in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Output Editor to configure a Secondary Output. See STAR Output Board Editor on Page 208 iSTAR ACM Board Readers Tab The ACM Board Readers tab lets you create and configure the Readers that are attached to this ACM Board. You can use an existing Reader Template to create one or more of the ACM Board Readers. Click in the Template Column, then click Q. A list of available iSTAR Reader Templates appears. Click on the Template you wish to use. See Using Templates for Controller Inputs, Outputs, and Readers on Page 37 for more detailed information about using Templates to create Readers. 200 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226131 STAR Classic/Pro Controller ACM Board Editor iSTAR ACM Board Readers Tab Definitions Table 41 on Page 201 provides definitions for the buttons and fields on the iSTAR ACM Board Readers tab. Table 41: STAR ACM Board Readers Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Create Al Cliddocreate all the readers. When you dick Create All Readers the Configured column died( boxesare selected, and you Readers can didC in the Editcolumn to edit that reader. Delete All When you dick Delete All Readers, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all readers, and all these readers Readers are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost). Edit column Cfick 0 in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Reader Editor to configure an Reader. See STAR Reader Editor on Page 248. Index column This column displays the number of each Reader. Configured Click in this column to create a Reader (make it available to be edited). column Name column Displays the name for this Reader. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by decking in this field. Template The Template column shows the template name if you selected a Template prior to creating the Readers. column Click in this column, then dick 0 to select a Reader template to use for creating this Reader from the fist of avaiable Reader templates.You can only select a Template prior to creating the Reader. iSTAR ACM Board ACM Ext Tab The ACM Board ACM Ext tab lets you create and configure the Input boards and Output boards that are attached to this ACM Board. Configuring the ISTAR ACM Board ACM Ext Tab When you configure the iSTAR ACM Board ACM Ext tab, you are defining the Input boards and Output boards that are attached to the ACM. You can then click to open the Input Boards Editor to configure individual Input Boards, or open the Output Boards Editor to configure individual Output Boards. To Configure the iSTAR ACM Board ACM EXT Tab 1. From the iSTAR controller Boards tab, create an ACM and click 0 to access the iSTAR ACM Board Editor. 2. Click the ACM EXT tab. 3. Create the Input Boards that you need by clicking Create All Boards or by selecting the Configured check box for only the Input Boards you wish to create. 4. Click 0 in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Board editor to configure individual Inputs. See the iSTAR Input Board Editor on Page 203 for configuration instructions. 5. Create the Output Boards that you need by clicking Create All Boards or by selecting the Configured check box for only the Output Boards you wish to create. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 201 EFTA01226132 STAR Classic/Pro Controller ACM Board Editor 6. Click Q in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Output Board editor to configure individual Outputs. See the iSTAR Output Board Editor on Page 208 for configuration instructions. 7. When you have finished configuring the Input Boards and Output Boards, click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured. iSTAR ACM Board ACM Ext Tab Definitions Table 42 on Page 202 provides definitions for the buttons and fields on the iSTAR ACM Board ACM Ext tab. Table 42: STAR ACM Board ACM Ext Tab Definitions FieldMutton Description Input Boards Create All Click to create all the Input Boards. When you did< Create All Boards the Configured column check boxes are selected, and Boards you can click n in the Edit column to edit that Input Board. Delete All When you dick Delete All Boards, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for alInput Boards, and al these Boards Input Boards are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost). Editcolumn Click ILI in the EdIt column to open the iSTAR Input Board Editor. See iSTAR Input Board Editor on Page 203. Index column Thiscolumn displays the number of each Input Board. Configured Click in this column to create an Input Board (make it avalable to be edited). column Name column Displays the name for this Input board. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by didting in this field. Output Boards Create Al C'tido create al the Output Boards. When you dick Create All Boards the Configured column check boxes are selected, and Boards you can dick 0 in the Edit column to edit that Output Board. Delete Al When you click Delete All Boards, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for al Output Boards, and al these Boards Output Boards are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost). Edit column Click El in the EdIt column to open the iSTAR Output Board Editor. See iSTAR Output Board Editor on Page 208. Index column Thiscolumn displays the number of each Output Board. Configured Click in this column to create an Output Board (make it available to be edited). column Name column Displays the name for this Output board. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by decking in this field. 202 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226133 STAR Input Board Editor iSTAR Input Board Editor The iSTAR Input Board editor lets you configure an iSTAR Input Board that you created on the iSTAR Classic/Pro ACM Board ACM Ext tab or the iSTAR eX and iSTAR Edge COM1, COM2, and COM3 tabs. The iSTAR Input Board editor (see Figure 65 on Page 203) has the following tabs: ■ iSTAR Input Board General Tab Lists the Inputs and Status Inputs on an 1/8 board that is connected to an iSTAR Classic/Pro, iSTAR eX, or iSTAR Edge. See iSTAR Input Board General Tab on Page 206. ■ iSTAR Input Board Group Tab If you have created a Group containing iSTAR Input Boards and added this Input Board to it, the iSTAR Input Board editor also displays a Group tab. This tab lists the Input Board groups to which this Input Board belongs. See Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 28 for information on using the Group tab for the iSTAR Input board. ISTAR Input Board editor Tasks: ■ Accessing the iSTAR Input Board Editor on Page 204 ■ Configuring iSTAR Input Boards on Page 205 Figure 65: iSTAR Input Board Editor CONISTAR IrpitBoeidleal Patiocn Oeladl I ocibm rartage: sm load 'Calla PI 82ertiIndex Ctes•Alirput DeleNAI Maas CS index Coe6psed Wine Tertptve 1 6TAR frOullailISTARItano001 J 2 STAR Wa2C01116TARIrpue Bowl I LJ 3 ❑ STAR bpil3COLIISTARImiteurdl = 1 ❑ STAR bp.A4011161AR Input 8cacrl 5 ❑ ISTAR Irvi5COM16TARIrtut Spero 6 ❑ STAA Mpa6CON16TMMpaeoaal 7 ❑ STAR IntaCCOM16TARIrouteorecrl O MM bp1BCON16TMIrpa8oadl Gnat Al [roues A:keenlydi EN MW pre Ccetwed Nane Tend*, El larpecOHlsIM bpi Bowel, COINItriOgoll ComunkalcmFaCONlSTMIn.. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 203 EFTA01226134 STAR Input Board Editor Accessing the iSTAR Input Board Editor You can access the iSTAR Input Board Editor in three ways: • To Access the iSTAR Input Board Editor (iSTAR eX/Edge Controller) on Page 204 • To Access the iSTAR Input Board Editor (iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller) on Page 204 • To Access the iSTAR Input Board Editor from the Hardware Tree on Page 204 To Access the iSTAR Input Board Editor (iSTAR eX/Edge Controller) 1. From the iSTAR Controller Editor, click on the appropriate COM tab (COM1, COM2, or COM3). 2. In the Input Boards table on this tab, click 0 in the Edit column for the Input board you want to Edit. 3. The iSTAR Input Board Editor opens. To Access the iSTAR Input Board Editor (iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller) 1. From the iSTAR Controller Editor, click on the Boards tab. 2. In the ACMs table on this tab, click 0 in the Edit column for the ACM that contains the Input board you want to Edit. The ACM Board Editor opens. 3. Click the ACM Ext tab. 4. In the Input Boards table on this tab, click ri in the Edit column for the Input board you want to Edit. 5. The iSTAR Input Board Editor opens. To Access the iSTAR Input Board Editor from the Hardware Tree 1. Navigate from your iSTAR Controller in the Hardware Tree to the appropriate COM Board (on an iSTAR eX or iSTAR Edge Controller) or ACM Board (iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller). 2. Click on Input Boards, as shown in Figure 66 on Page 205. This figure shows the hardware tree for an iSTAR eX on the left and an iSTAR Pro on the right. 204 Chapter 5 CCURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226135 STAR Input Board Editor Figure 66: STAR Input Board in the Hardware Tree • STAR IronsBona ••• sit &Wilma Bond Hadatar bee Hadar' bee ess ant* C' essC Co.•Pdds cOp pf C CURE wee Cy ex III Done O eese isrieco m m ade ", Eladas Doors Incas Eltaias Dopats frogh ly OdP41 Readout 4 Paden C OM COMI as NI Ina4 Bonds 0 .1 Adloso 4 COMISMA broa Boa/las in O n IVA DOI* COMIMAR Iva &swat III Caguakzels Readen I : STAR bp/ Down ALM anal 02I bah STAR eora Boatadallvo 4 MEI COm2.4 m Id Ma Bowls 3. Double-click on the Input Board you wish to edit. The STAR Input Board Editor opens. Configuring iSTAR Input Boards When you configure an iSTAR Input Board, you are defining the Inputs that are attached to a particular 1/8 board. You can then click to open the Inputs Editor to configure individual Inputs. To Configure an iSTAR Input Board Tab 1. Access the Input Board Editor for the Input Board you wish to edit (see Accessing the iSTAR Input Board Editor on Page 204). 2. If you wish to use an Input Template to configure one or more of the 1/8 board Inputs, click in the Template column, then click 0 to open a dialog box listing the available Input Templates. See Using Templates for Controller Inputs, Outputs, and Readers on Page 37 for more information. 3. Create the Inputs that you need by clicking Create All Inputs or by selecting the Configured check box for only the Inputs you wish to create. 4. Click GJ in the Edit column to open the STAR Input Editor to configure individual Inputs. See the STAR Input Editor on Page 232 for configuration instructions. 5. If you wish to use an Input Template to configure one or more of the 1/8 board Status Inputs, click in the Template column, then click to open a dialog box listing the available Input Templates. See Using Templates for Controller Inputs, Outputs, and Readers on Page 37 for more information. 6. Create the Status Inputs that you need by clicking Create All Inputs or by selecting the Configured check box for only the Inputs you wish to create. 7. Click GJ in the Edit column to configure individual Status Inputs. See the definitions of the Status Inputs in Table 43 on Page 206 and see STAR Input Editor on Page 232. 8. When you have finished configuring the Inputs on the Input Board Editor General tab, click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured on the iSTAR Input Board editor. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 205 EFTA01226136 STAR Input Board Editor iSTAR Input Board General Tab The iSTAR Input Board General tab allows you to configure the Inputs on an 1/8 board attached to your iSTAR Controller, as well as the Status Inputs for Tamper and Communications Failure. iSTAR Input Board General Tab Definitions Table 43 on Page 206 lists the fields and buttons that appear on the iSTAR Input Board General tab. Table 43: STAR Input Board General Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Identification Name Displays the name for this Input board. The name is system-generated by dela utt. but you can edit this name by choking in this field. Description Enter a textual comment about the Input Board. such as its location or purpose. This text is for information only. Maintenance Click to put the Input Board into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 2: Maintenance Mode for more information. Mode Partition This read-only field identifies the Partition in which this Input board resides. Controller This read-onty field identifies the STAR Controller to which this Input board is attached. Location Board This read-only field identifies the STAR Controller board to which this Input board is attached. Board Index This read-only field dentifies the board index (which represents the SW1 address switch setting on the l/8 board) for this Input board. Inputs Create All Click to create all eight Inputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to V. Inputs Delete All Click to delete all eight Inputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to Inputs Edit column Click ... in this column to open the STAR Input Editor to edit this Input. Index oolumn This read-onty field identifies the position of each Input (P1 - P8) on the l/8 board. Configured V indicates that the Input has been configured. column El indicates that the Input has not been configured. Name column Displaysthe system-generated name for this Input. You can edit this name by clicking in the field. 206 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226137 STAR Input Board Editor Table 43: STAR Input Board General Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Template Displays the Template used for creating this Input. If the Input isnot yet configured, you can click in thisoolumn, then click to select column an Input TempLate. If the Configured column displays Q, thisfield cannot be edited. Status Inputs Create All Click to a eate the Tamper and Communications Fail Inputs. The check boxes in the ConfIgured column are set to 2. Inputs Delete All Chck to delete the Tamper and Communications Fail Inputs. The check boxes in the Conflc;ured column are set to Inputs Edit column Click[] in this column to open the STAR Input Editor to edit this Input. Input Type The Input Type Column displays: column Tamper - Represents the Tamper Input on then board. NOTE: For UL applications, the Tamper Input on the STAR Input Board General tab must be enabled. Communications Fall - Represents the Communications Fail input on the 1/8 board. NOTE: For UL applications, the Communications Failure Input on the STAR Input Board General tab must be enabled. Configured V indicates that the Input has been configured. column indicates that the Input has not been configured. Na me oolumn Displays the system-generated name for this Input. You can edit this name by clicking in the field. Template Displays the Template used for creating this Input. If the Input isnot yet configured. you can click in this column. then click to select column an Input Template. If the Configured column displays V thisfield cannot be edited. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 207 EFTA01226138 STAR Output Board Editor iSTAR Output Board Editor The iSTAR Output Board editor lets you configure an iSTAR Output Board that you created on the iSTAR Classic/Pro ACM Board ACM Ext tab or the iSTAR eX and iSTAR Edge COM1, COM2, and COM3 tabs. The iSTAR Output Board editor (see Figure 67 on Page 208) has the following tabs: • iSTAR Output Board General Tab Lists the Outputs and Status Inputs on an R/8 board that is connected to an iSTAR Classic/Pro, iSTAR eX, or iSTAR Edge. See iSTAR Output Board General Tab on Page 210. • iSTAR Output Board Group Tab If you have created a Group containing iSTAR Output Boards and added this Output Board to it, the iSTAR Output Board editor also displays a Group tab. This tab lists the Output Board groups to which this Output Board belongs. See Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 28 for information on using the Group tab for the iSTAR Output Board. Figure 67: iSTAR Output Board Edit& ▪ Osni•STAROupa S1M0.. ✓ 0m342•STMICups ilmoiS1M O.. ✓ om3.334TAROLaxt BardliSlia 0 ✓ Osea4STAROted BoardltSTM O. ✓ 0..454TAROucte 'Mediated:I o.. ✓ CupakSTAROrnat liemll•STAR 0 ✓ O s 4TMO. u kse,4TMo ✓ 0a3.034TAACupi ksW4STM0 . Temse•STMIOsco ltutal.s- r COVAXIC46}, rakSTAROap.. Accessing the iSTAR Output Board Editor You can access the iSTAR Output Board Editor in three ways: • To Access the iSTAR Output Board Editor (iSTAR eX/ Edge Controller) on Page 209 208 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226139 STAR Output Board Editor • To Access the iSTAR Output Board Editor (iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller) on Page 209 • To Access the iSTAR Output Board Editor from the Hardware Tree on Page 209 To Access the iSTAR Output Board Editor (iSTAR eX/Edge Controller) 1. From the iSTAR Controller Editor, click on the appropriate COM tab (COM1, COM2, or COM3). 2. In the Output Boards table on this tab, click 0 in the Edit column for the Output board you want to Edit. 3. The iSTAR Output Board Editor opens (see iSTAR Output Board Editor on Page 208). To Access the iSTAR Output Board Editor (iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller) 1. From the iSTAR Controller Editor, click on the Boards tab. 2. In the ACMs table on this tab, click 0 in the Edit column for the ACM that contains the Output board you want to Edit. The ACM Board Editor opens. 3. Click the ACM Ext tab. 4. In the Output Boards table on this tab, click 0 in the Edit column for the Output board you want to Edit. 5. The iSTAR Output Board Editor opens (see iSTAR Output Board Editor on Page 208). To Access the iSTAR Output Board Editor from the Hardware Tree 1. Navigate from your iSTAR Controller in the Hardware Tree to the appropriate COM Board (on an iSTAR eX or iSTAR Edge Controller) or ACM Board (iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller). 2. Click on Output Boards, as shown in Figure 68 on Page 209. This figure shows the hardware tree for an iSTAR eX on the left and an iSTAR Pro on the right. Figure 68: STAR Output Board on the Hardware Tree Hardware Hardware • 6TAR Cave Board • 6TAR0uloulBeed Madaare bee Coach Haden Tees seeds E won dessem anis 01dune 6TARD,.. o edge is Dcas o ija n a. 111 a E*tsa: Deal LIR Iran Dean 0tipas ISIIe4 41Ratko 0ters sa Readers O a M ACMIyoa IanBart C OD C0ml ex es Ism) Inas leosva agues OUPA 8oadt 0ups Boma IM STAR War RosecaACUIceas ap C0MI OTAR 0siput Boasted is e 0Uaas Readers Lit Readers MI C0M2acIll *Cm2sxo 3. Double-click on the Output Board you wish to edit. The iSTAR Output Board Editor opens (see iSTAR Output Board Editor on Page 208). C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 209 EFTA01226140 STAR Output Board Editor Configuring iSTAR Output Boards When you configure an iSTAR Output Board, you are defining the Outputs that are attached to a particular R/8 board. You can then click to open the Outputs Editor to configure individual Outputs. To Configure an iSTAR Output Board 1. Access the Output Board Editor for the Output Board you wish to edit (see Accessing the iSTAR Output Board Editor on Page 208). 2. If you wish to use an Output Template to configure one or more of the R/8 board Outputs, click in the Template column, then click El to open a dialog box listing the available Output Templates. See Using Templates for Controller Inputs, Outputs, and Readers on Page 37 for more information. 3. Create the Outputs that you need by clicking Create All Outputs or by selecting the Configured check box for only the Outputs you wish to create. 4. Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Output Editor to configure individual Outputs. See the iSTAR Output Editor on Page 241 for configuration instructions. 5. If you wish to use an Output Template to configure one or more of the R/8 board Status Inputs, click in the Template column, then click to open a dialog box listing the available Input Templates. See Using Templates for Controller Inputs, Outputs, and Readers on Page 37 for more information. 6. Create the Status Inputs that you need by clicking Create All Inputs or by selecting the Configured check box for only the Inputs you wish to create. 7. Click GJ in the Edit column to configure individual Status Inputs. See the definitions of the Status Inputs in Table 44 on Page 210 and see iSTAR Input Editor on Page 232. 8. When you have finished configuring these Outputs and Inputs on the Output Board Editor General tab, click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured on the iSTAR Output Board editor. iSTAR Output Board General Tab The iSTAR Output Board General tab allows you to configure the Outputs on an R/8 board attached to your iSTAR Controller, as well as the Status Inputs for Tamper and Communications Failure. iSTAR Output Board General Tab Definitions Table 44 on Page 210 lists the fields and buttons that appear on the iSTAR Output Board General tab. Table 44: STAR Output Board General Tab Definitions RekUButton Description Identification Name Displays the name for this Output board. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking this field. 210 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226141 STAR Output Board Editor Table 44: STAR Output Board General Tab Definitions (continued) FiekUButton Description Description Enter a textual oomment about the Output board, such as its location or purpose. This text is for information onty. Maintenance Click to put the STAR Outboard Board into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 2: Maintenance Mode for more information. Mode Partition This read-on ty field identifies the Partition in which this Output board resdes. Location Controller T his read-onty field identifies the STAR Controller to which this Output board is attached. Board This read-onty field identifies the STAR Controller board to which this Output board is attached. Board Index This read-onty field identifies the board index (which represents the SW1 address switch setting on the R/8 board) for this Output board. Outputs Create All Click to create a II e ight Outputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set toe. Outputs Delete All Click to delete all eight Outputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to Outputs Edit column Click fl in thiscolumn to open the STAR Output Editor to edit this Output. Index oolumn This read-onty field identifies the position of each Output (P1 - P8) on the R/8 board. Configured indicates that the Output has been configured. column indicates that the Output has not been configured. Name column Displays the system-generated name for this Output. You can edit this name by choking in the field. Template Displays the Template used for creating this Output. If the Output is not yet configured. you can click in this column. then click to column select an Output Template. If the Configured column displays V this field cannot be edited. Status Inputs Create All Click to aeate the Tamper and Communications Fail Inputs. The check boxes in the ConfIgured column are set to V. Inputs Delete All Click to delete the Tamper and Communications Fad Inputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to Inputs Edit column Click( ... lin this column to open the STAR Input Editor to edit this Input. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 211 EFTA01226142 STAR Output Board Editor Table 44: STAR Output Board General Tab Definitions (continued) FieKennon Description Indexcolumn The Input Type Column displays: Tamper- Represents the Tamper Input on the R/8 board. NOTE: For UL applications, the Tamper input on the STAR Output Board General tab must be enabled. Communications Fall - Represents the Communications Fail input on the R/8 board. NOTE: For UL applications, the Communications Failure Input on the STAR Output Board General tab must be enabled. Configured V indicates that the input has been configured. column indicates that the input has not been configured. Name column Displays the system-generated name for this input. You can edit this name byclicking in the field. Template Displays the Template used for creating this input. If the input isnot yet configured, you can click in this column, then click to select column an Input Template. If the Configured column displays V this field cannot be edited. 212 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Con figuration Guide EFTA01226143 STAR Ultra Wireless Readers iSTAR Ultra Wireless Readers The iSTAR Ultra supports either Assa Abloy Aperio or IR Schlage wireless readers. The interface is through the RS- 485 ports on the Ultra GCM board. The default setting is Aperio, with Schlage as the only other option currently. Both ports must use the protocol, and they are synchronized so that both ports change whenever the protocol changes on either of them. The protocol cannot be changed while any Schlage PIM or Aperio Hub exists. NOTE Assa Abloy Aperio Hubs and Wireless Readers ■ Each RS-485 port (i.e., GCM Porn, Port2) supports up to 15 Hubs. The iSTAR Ultra supports up to 32 readers paired to any of the 30 Hubs. ■ If there are fewer than 32 Aperio readers, there can be up to 16 usual (RM bus or direct Wiegand) readers on the iSTAR Ultra. If only Aperio readers are used, there is no need for an ACM on the Ultra. ■ Either 8 Port or 1 Port Hubs can be used, but usually 8 Port Hubs are configured. ■ There are 11, plus a generic, types of locks that can be configured on the Ultra GCM. IR Schlagen?' PIMs and Wireless Readers ■ Each RS-485 port (i.e., GCM Porn, Port2) supports up to 16 PIMs. The iSTAR Ultra supports up to 32 readers connected to any of the 32 PIMs. Schlage use a proprietary protocol named RS-485 RSI for communication on the bus. ■ If there are fewer than 32 Schlage readers, there can be up to 16 usual (RM bus or direct Wiegand) readers on the iSTAR Ultra. If only Schlage readers are used, there is no need for an ACM on the Ultra. ■ When assigning reader numbers, it is best practice to use sequential numbers, If you configure reader 1 and reader 5, Schlage will not use readers 2, 3, and 4. Although, those reader numbers are available for the up to 16 ACM RM or Wiegand readers. Schlage addresses are one less than the C•CURE index. For example, if you setup a reader on Schlage NOTE address 1, then it's C•CURE index 2. ■ There are 3 types of PIMs that can be connected to Port 1 or Port 2. • PIM400-485 (AD-400 Series Locks) • AD-300 (AD-300 Series Locks) • PIM-485 (WA Series Locks) The iSTAR eX and iSTAR Pro support the same PIMs and Locks through the RS-485 ports on the Pro NOTE GCM and the eX PMB board. The RM ports on the eX PMB are multiplexed to the COM1 and COM2 ports that are visible in the C•CURE 9000 software. Figure 4 on Page 214 shows Schlage wireless connection methods. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 213 EFTA01226144 STAR Ultra Wireless Readers Figure 4: Schlage Wireless Connection Methods ISTAR RS-485 RSI Ultra, Pro or eX MEW gi= WA Series AD Series PIM-495 r , PIM400-485 or • * P "•t Ito 0 pill !/r 0 C WA-Series Vrirekes AD-3C0 Wok Hardwired recess (predecessor to Schlage) iSTAR Ultra Schlage Wireless Types of Connections The Schlage Readers interface to C•CURE hardware using one of seven basic methods: 1. PIM400-485 (AD400 Wireless to Ultra GCM, Pro GCM and eX PMB) 2. PIM400-485 TD2 (AD400 Wireless to all iSTARs and all apCs) (Can use Wiegand or Magnetic signaling) 3. AD300 Built-in PIM (AD300 Wired to Ultra, Pro and eX) 4. AD300 PIB300 (AD300 Wired to all iSTARs and all apCs) 5. PIM485 (Wyreless Wireless to Ultra GCM, Pro GCM and eX PMB) 6. PIM TD2 (Wyreless Wireless to all iSTARs and all apCs) (2 Reader - Can use Wiegand or Magnetic signaling) 7. PIM TD4 (Wyreless Wireless to all iSTARs and all apCs) (4 reader - Can use Wiegand or Magnetic signaling) Each of the first four methods are repeated for FIPS-201: 1. PIM401-485 (AD400 Wireless to Ultra, Pro and eX) 2. PIM401-485 TD2 (AD400 Wireless to all iSTARs and all apCs) 3. AD301 Built-in PIM (AD300 Wired to Ultra, Pro and eX) 4. AD301 PIB301 (AD301 Wired to all iSTARs and all apCs) Wireless - PIM400 and PIM400-TD2 • Up to 16 AD400 wireless readers can be associated with 1 PIM400. Up to 2 AD400 wireless readers can be associated with 1 PIM400-TD2. 214 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226145 STAR Ultra Wireless Readers • The PIM400 interfaces with iSTAR Ultra, Pro and eX using RS-485 RSI. • The PIM400-TD2 interfaces with either Wiegand signaling or Clock/Data Magnetic ABA2 signaling. The method is determined by the type of reader. • A magnetic card reader (swipe or insertion) will use Clock and Data which will be passed through the TD2 to the C•CURE hardware. The magnetic signaling must be connected to an RM4/4E and then to an RM port. • A Wiegand signaling reader will use Data 1 and Data 0 which will also be passed through the TD2. the Wiegand signaling can be connected to any direct Wiegand port or to an RM4/4E. • In addition to AD400 Readers, the PIM400-485 can also communicate with WRI400, WPR400, and TK400 devices. Summary Tables The tables in this section provides a matrix of the possible connections between Schlage devices and i51'ARs and apCs. AD400 Wireless Table 4: AD400 Series Controller/Panel Locks RS485 RSI Wiegand Signal (DO/D1) to Magnetic Signal (CLK/DATA) to Supported Chain Panel Panel iSTAR Ultra AD400 (All slytes) PIM400-485 PIM400-TD2 toACM Wiegand PIM400-T D2 to RM4xtoACM RM iSTAR Pro RSI to GCM PIM400-TD2 to RM4xtoACM STAR Classic RM iSTAR eX AD400 (All slytes) PIM400-485 PIM400-TD2 to GCM Wiegand PIM400-T D2 to Rhil4x to PMB RM RSI to PMB PIM400-TD2 to R1/1444x to PMB RM iSTAR Edge AD400 (All styles) PIM400-TD2 to Edge Wiegand PIM400-TD2 to R1/1444x to Edge RM PIM400-TD2 to RM4x to Edge RM apC/8X AD400 (Al styles) PIM400-TD2 toWPSC Wiegand PIM400-TD2 to RM4x to apC RM PIM400-TD2 to RM4xtoapC RM apC/L AD400 (Al styles) PIM400-TD2 to RM4xtoapC/L PIM400-TD2 to RM4xtoapC/L RM RM AD401 Wireless (FIPS-201) The AD401 (FIPS-201) configuration only supports a Multi-technology reader with Keypad and NOTE Wiegand signaling. The reader appears as a standard Wiegand reader connected to: • iSTAR ACM Wiegand Port C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 215 EFTA01226146 STAR Ultra Wireless Readers • iSTAR eX GCM Wiegand Port • iSTAR Edge Wiegand Port • apC/8X WPSC Wiegand Port • RM4 or RM4E to any RM Port on iSTAR or apC. The P1B401402 is used for all connections. Table 5: AD401 Series Controller/Panel Locks Supported RS485 RSI Wiegand Signal (DO/D1) Magnetic Signal (CLK/DATA) Chain to Panel to Panel STAR Ultra AD401 N/A PIM401-TD2 to ACM N/A STAR Pro (Mufti-Technologywith Wiegand STAR Classic keypad only) PIM401-T D2 to RM4x to ACM RM iSTAR eX AD401 N/A PIM401-T D2 to GCM N/A (Mufti-Technologywith Wiegand keypad only) PIM401-T D2 to RM4x to PMB RM STAR Edge AD401 PIM401-T D2 to Edge N/A (Mufti-Technologywith Wiegand keypad only) PIM401-T D2 to RM4x to Edge RM apC/8X AD401 PIM401-TD2 to WPSC N/A (Mufti-Technologywith Wiegand keypad only) PIM401-T D2 to RM4x to apC RM apC/L AD401 PIM401-T D2 to RM4x to N/A (Mutti-Technologywith apC/L RM keypad only) AD300 Hard Wired Table 6: AD300 Series Controller/Panel Locks Wiegand Signal (DO/D1) Magnetic Signal (CLK/DATA) RS485 RSI Chain Supported to Panel to Panel STAR Ultra AD300 DV Suitt in PIM400-485 RSI PIB300-TD2 to ACM Wiegand PIB300-TD2 to RM4x to ACM RM STAR Pro styles) to GCM PIB300-TD2 to RM4x to ACM STAR Classic RM STAR eX AD300 (All Built in PIM400-485 RSI PIB300-TD2 to GCM Wiegand PIB300-TD2 to RM4x to PMB RM styles) to PMB PIB300-TD2 to RM4x to PMB RM 216 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226147 STAR Ultra Wireless Readers Table 6: AD300 Series (continued) Controller/Panel Locks Wiegand Signal (DO/D1) Magnetic Signal (C LK/DATA) RS485 RSI Chain Supported to Panel to Panel :SEAR L-i- AD300 i A PIB300-TD2 to Edge Wiegand PIB300- T D2 to Rttilttlx to Edge RM styles) PIB300-TD2 to RM4x to Edge RM ,,,,C, _x AUs7J A PIB300-TD2toWPSC PIB300- T D2 to Rttilaz to apC RIO ,ty _ , i Wiegand PI13300-TD2 to RM4x toapC RM apC/L AD300 (All PIB300-TD2 to RM4xtoapC/L PIB300-TD2 to RM4xtoapC/L RM styles) RM AD301 Hard Wired FIPS-201 The AD301 (FIPS-201) configuration only supports a Multi-technology reader with Keypad and NOTE Wiegand signaling. The reader appears as a standard Wiegand reader connected to: • iSTAR ACM Wiegand Port • iSTAR eX CCM Wiegand Port • iSTAR Edge Wiegand Port • apC/8X WPSC Wiegand Port • RM4 or RM4E to any RM Port on iSTAR or apC The PIB301-TD2 is used for all connections. Table 7: AD301 Series Controller/Panel Locks Supported RS485 RSI Wiegand Signal (DO/D1) Magnetic Signal (C LK/DATA) Chain to Panel to Panel STAR Ultra AD301 N/A PIB301- T D2 to ACM N/A STAR Pro trvluit-Technologywith Wiegand STAR Classic cypad only) PIB301-T D2 to RAil4x to ACM RM iSTAReX AU301 N/A PIB301-TD2 to GCM N/A I tvlult-Tecnnologywith Wiegand keypad only) PIB301-TD2 to RM4x to PMB RM C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 217 EFTA01226148 STAR Ultra Wireless Readers Table 7: AD301 Series (continued) Controller/Panel Locks Supported RS485 RSI Wiegand Signal (DO/D 1) Magnetic Signal (CLK/DATA) Chain to Panel to Panel STAR Edge AD301 PIB301-7D2 to Edge N/A (Mufti-Technologywith Wiegand keypad only) PIB301-7D2 to RM4x to Edge RM apC/8X AD301 PIB301-TD2 to WPSC N/A (Multi-Technologywith Wiegand keypad only) PIB301-TD2 to RM4x to apC RM az.)::. L AD301 PIB301-7D2 to RM4x to N/A (Mufti-Technologywith apC/L RM keypad only) Readers per Controller/Panel Aperio Wireless Readers Table 8: Aperio Wireless Readers Controller/Panel Max # of Max # of Non- Max # of Max # of Interface Aperio Aperio Aperio both Notes Device Hubs Readers Readers Combined iSTAR Ultra Aperio Hub 33 15 32 32 iSTAR Ultra is the onty iSTAR (8 Port or 1 15 per RS that supportsWvelessAperio Port) 485 Porl Hubs. Schlage Wireless Readers Table 9: Readers per Controller/Panel- including Schlage Readers Controller/Panel Max # of Non- Max # of Max # of Interface Device Schlage Schlage both Notes Readers Readers Combined STAR Ultra PIM. AD300 to GCM 16 32 32 bilaxof 32 PIM(s) and 32 Readers iSTAR Pre PIM.AD300 to GCM 16 1E-3 16 Maxof 16 PIM(s) and 16 Readers STAR eX4 door PIM. AD300 to PMB 4 16 16 16, but non-Schlage readers must be numbered 1-4 218 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226149 STAR Ultra Wireless Readers Table 9: Readers per Controller/Panel- including Schlags Readers (continued) Controller/Panel Max # of Non- Max # of Max # of Interface Device Schlags Schlege both Notes Readers Readers Combined iSTAR eX 8 door PIM, AD300 to PMB 8 16 16 16. but non-Schlage Readers must be numbered 1-8 STAR Pro Direct TD2. PIB to ACM 16 16 16 2 Readers per TD2 or PIB iSTAR eX4 door TD2. PIB to GCM or 4 4 4 2 Readers per TD2 or PIB Direct PMB 'STAR eX 8 door TD2. PIB to GCM or 8 8 8 Requires USB key Direct PMB 2 Readers per TD2 or PIB 'STAR Edge 1door TD2. PIB to Edge 1 1 1 2 Readers per TD2 or PIB Direct board STAR Edge 2 door TD2. PIB to Edge 2 2 2 2 Readers per TD2 or PIB Direct board iSTAR Edge 4 door TD2. PIB to Edge 4 4 4 2 Readers per TD2 or PIG Direct board apC/8X Direct TD2. PIB to apC. 8 8 8 2 Readers per TD2 or PIB WPSC. or Star Coupler apC/L Direct TD2. PIB to apC/L 2 2 2 2 Readers per TD2 or PIB C•CURE 9000 Hardware Con figuration Guide Chapter 5 219 EFTA01226150 STAR Apeno RS-485 Hub Board Edrtor (STAR Ultra onty) iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor (iSTAR Ultra only) The iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board editor allows you to configure wireless Aperio Readers on the Hub. The Hub supports either one or eight Aperio wireless readers. The iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor has three tabs: ■ General tab - see iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor General Tab on Page 220 ■ Inputs tab - see iSTAR Aperio Hub Board Editor Input Tab on Page 222 ■ Readers tab - see iSTAR Aperio Hub Board Editor Readers Tab on Page 223 iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor General Tab The iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board editor General tab lets you specify the Aperio RS-485 Hub on which you can create Aperio readers. You select the type of Hub you want to configure by choosing a type from the HUB Type drop-down list. That selection determines the options that are available on the other tabs. To access the iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board editor General tab, click on the COM 1 or COM 2 tab in the iSTAR Controller editor dialog box. Then, click on Edit in the row name of the RS-485 Port that you want to edit. Figure 69 on Page 221 shows the iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board General tab. 220 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226151 STAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor (STAR Ultra only) Figure 69: STAR Aped° RS-485 Hub Board General Tab rd mn• Qe•Corbart A r Moriame Sea Go-Asko Ike:ell HUB Iritomobra NM bpi 18 4aro, Hushing. Boast wool I </MR'S %FAS I iSTAR Aperio Hub Board Editor General Tab Definitions The fields and buttons on the iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Board editor General tab are described in Table 45 on Page 221. Table 45: STAR Apera RS-485 Board Editor General Tab Field/Button Description Name This field displays the name of the Aperio Hub Description You can enter a textual description of the Aperio Board in the Description field. Maintenance Mode Click to put the Aperio RS-485 Hub Board into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 2: Maintenance Mode for more information. Controller The name of the STAR Ultra controller: this is a read-onty field. HUB Type T his drop-down list a lbws you to select the type of Aperio board you are configuring. The default selection is 8 Port Hub HUB Number This read-onty field contains the HUB number - the same HUB Index number as shown on the STAR Ultra COM1/COM2 Tabson Page 181. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 221 EFTA01226152 STAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor (STAR Ultra only) STAR Aperio RS-485 Board Editor General Tab (continued) Field/Button Description Product Version Displays the Product Version. For example, 2.0.0. Firmware Version Displays the Firmware Version. For example: 6.2.28176. Communication This read-only field displays whether the controlier is in Online. Offline or Unknown state. Status Save and Close Click to save your configuration changesand dose the iSTARAperio Hub Board editor. iSTAR Aperio Hub Board Editor Input Tab This tab allows you to configure a Communications Fail input for the Aperio Hub board. Figure 70 on Page 222 shows the iSTAR Aperio Hub Board Input tab. Figure 70: iSTAR Aperio Hub Board Input Tab arhiAl Err I i-Lol RS £35 Pat 1 Llys 1 snow r SOMling•Mode ore* b. I Finnen I Ocege Al Troia Celt MPPM 411 law. I °sow Iis I Coweancatai FS J Cs us wNO3RS 416 ha I We 422 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226153 STAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor (STAR Ultra only) iSTAR Aperio Hub Board Editor Input Tab Definitions The fields and buttons on the iSTAR Aperio Board editor Input tab are described in Table 46 on Page 223. Table 46: STAR Aperio RS-485 Board Editor Field/Button Description Create All Click to create the Communication Fad Input. When you dick Create All Inputs. the Configured column check box is selected, Inputs and you can click ri in the Edit column to open the STAR Input editor (see iSTAR Input Editor on Page 232. Delete All When you click Delete Input. the check box in the Configured column isdeared for the Communications Fail Input, and the Inputs Input is deleted (a ny settings you have oonfigured are lost). Edit column Click in in the Edit column to open the Input Editor to configure the Communications Fail Input. See STAR Input Editor on Page 232. Input type This column displays the input type (Communications Fad). column Configured Click in thiscolumn to create the Communications Fad Input (make it available to be edited). column Name column Displays the name for this Input. The name is system-generated. but you can edit the name. Save and Click to save your configuration changes and close the Aperio Hub Board editor. Close iSTAR Aperio Hub Board Editor Readers Tab The iSTAR Aperio lub Board editor Readers tab allows you to identify the readers you want to configure, and to access the iSTAR Aperio Reader editor to configure the readers. The following Aperio Reader types can be configured: O100, E100, L100, PR100, IN100, A100, K100, M100, KS100, 8100, AS100, and Generic types. Figure 71 on Page 224 shows the iSTAR Aperio Hub Board Readers tab. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 223 EFTA01226154 STAR Aped() RS-485 Hub Board Editor (STAR Ultra only) Figure 71: iSTAR Aperio Hub Board Readers Tab Ede — Caltesel Has TN4 Mule Fleatletl+Lb3R5 435 Pot 5.4 TM Ape Rettl.244.3R5 '35 Pat I UP iSTAlikee Ftp•Yr344.11IRS 435 Pet I 1* 457M Apra Peittlet44104135 435 Pet 1Ur r iSTM Mr., ree4.5444,3435 435 Pal I IN r EST AA ice, Pewerb.lif)13$ 45 Pal la 7 r 151.13 *Al nestat744.6314S 4.5 Pot Kit a r ISTM $SG Paida404b3145 f Pad RIP iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Board Hub Editor Readers Tab Definitions The fields and buttons on the iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Board editor Readers tab are described in Table 47 on Page 224. Table 47: STAR Apero RS-485 Board Editor Readers Tab Field/Button Description Create All Click to create all8 readers. When you click Create All Readers the Configured column died< boxes are selected, and you can Readers click — in the EdIt column to open the iSTAR Aperio Reader Editor to configure a Reader. See iSTAR Apart. Reader Editor on Page 264. Delete All When you click Delete All Readers, the died( boxes in the Configured column are cleared for a II 8 Readers. and all8 Readers Readers are deleted (any settings you have configured are lost). NOTE: If you Delete all Readers on this tab, the Apart. Door objects that were created automatically for these readersare also deleted. Edit column Clain in the Edlt column to open the iSTAR Aperio Reader editor to configure a Reader. See STAR Aperio Reader Editor on Page 264. 224 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226155 STAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor (STAR Ultra only) STAR Aperio RS-485 Board Editor Readers Tab (continued) Field/Button Description Reader Index Thisoolumn displays the number of each Reader. column Configured Click in this column to create a Reader (make it available to be edited). column Clearing thischeck boxdeletesthisAperio Reader, and any automaticaltyaeated Aperio Door associated with this Reader, after you click Yes to confirm the deletion in the Warning box that appears. Na me °Diumn Displays the name for this Reader. The name is system-generated. and the Name field is editable. Save and Click to save your configuration changes and close the STAR Aperio Hub Board editor. Close C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 225 EFTA01226156 STAR PIM-485 Board Editor iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor The iSTAR PIM-485 Board editor on iSTAR Pro or iSTAR eX allows you to configure Schlage Wireless Readers that are connected to a PIM-485 Panel Interface Module (PIM). This board supports up to 16 wireless readers connected via RS-485. The following PIMs are supported: ■ PIM400-485 (AD400 Series Locks) ■ AD300 (AD300 Series Locks) ■ PIM-485 (WA Series Locks) The iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor has three tabs: ■ General tab - see iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor General Tab on Page 226 ■ Inputs tab - see iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor Input Tab on Page 228 ■ Readers tab - see iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor Readers Tab on Page 229 iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor General Tab "the iSIAR Iv1-185 Board editor General tab lets you specify the type of PIM Board to which you can configure Schlage Wireless readers. You select the type of PIM you want to configure by choosing a type from the PIM Type drop-down list. That selection determines the options that are available on the other tabs. If you choose the AD300 (AD300 Series Locks), the Input tab is removed, because the AD300 does not support a Tamper Input. Figure 72 on Page 227 shows the iSTAR PIM-485 Board General tab. 226 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226157 STAR PIM-485 Board Editor Figure 72: STAR PIM-485 Board General Tab alga...10os* try MIME izewm. Gas hp I tat bawl Ithevolic• Lynn [n.fa MDT* I P ivg0 45,10400 tad. I kids 0. Asia r 'non Note sae Mn Is V* Wag AMINO iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor General Tab Definitions The fields and buttons on the iSTAR PIM-485 Board editor General tab are described in Table 48 on Page 227. Table 48: STAR PIM-485 Board Editor General Tab Field/Button Description Name This field displays the name of the PIM Board Description You can enter a textual description of the PIM Board in the Description field. Maintenance Click to put the STAR PIM-485 Board into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 2: Maintenance Mode for more information. Mode Controller The name of the controller; this is a read-onty field. PIM Type Thisdrop-down list allows you to select the type of PIM board you areconfiguring. • PIM400-485 (AD400 Series Locks) • AD300 (AD300 Series Locks) • PIM-485 (WA Series Locks) C•CURE 9000 Hardware Con figuration Guide Chap by 5 227 EFTA01226158 STAR PIM-485 Board Editor STAR PIM-485 Board Editor General Tab (continued) FielcilButton Description PIM Number This read-only field contains the PIM number - the same PIM Index number as shown on the STAR Schlage Wireless PIMs Tab on Page 153 or the STAR eX COM1/COM2 Tabs on Page 173. Wake on Wake on Radio allows a battery-powered lock device to receive an immediate oommand from the STAR panel that is out of Radio sequence with the regular heartbeat communications between the panel and the lock (the default heartbeat interval is 10 minutes). The Wake on Radio interval is 10 seconds. Enabling this feature allows the reader and lock to respond more quickly (within ten seconds rather than within ten minutes) to manual actions. Typically the command from the STAR panel to the device will be for a lock or unlock. Save and Click to save your configuration changes and close the STAR PIM-485 Board editor. Close iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor Input Tab This tab allows you to configure a Tamper input for the P1M400-485 and PIM-485. If you select the AD300 series lock in the PIM Type Drop-down list on the General tab, the Input tab is removed because the AD300 series does not have a Tamper Input. Figure 73 on Page 228 shows the i51'AR PIM-485 Board Input tab. Figure 73: STAR PIM-485 Board Input Tab Sr.. eV Oose Uwe tenons, Posen Deal r lberrvec• Mos (Jinni h.. I Parabrij a. v• Clerk VIM Deng kat halloo Unload Nils FRO* 228 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226159 STAR PIM-485 Board Editor iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor Input Tab Definitions [he fields and buttons on the iSTAR PIM-485 Board editor Input tab are described in Table 49 on Page 229. Table 49: STAR PIM-485 Board Editor Field/Button Description Create Input Click to create the Tamper input. When you dick Create input, the Configured column check box is selected. and you can click ri in the Edit column to open the STAR input editor (see iSTAR input Editor on Page 232. Delete input When you click Delete input, the check box in the Configured column is cleared for the Tamper input, and the Tamper input is immediatetydeleted (any settings you have oonfigured are lost). Edit column Click(- 1in the Edit column to open the input Editor to configure the Tamper input. See STAR input Editor on Page 232. Input type This column displays the input type (Tamper). column Configured Click in thiscolumn to create the Tamper input (make it available to be edited). column Name column Displays the name for this input. The name is system-generated and is read-onty. Template Displays the Template used for creating this input. If the input isnot yet configured, you can dick in this column, then dick to select Column an input Template. If the Configured column displays V this field cannot be edited. Save and Click to save your configuration changes and close the STAR PIM-485 Board editor. Close iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor Readers Tab The iSTAR PIM-485 Board editor Readers tab allows you to identify the readers you want to configure, and to access the iSTAR PIM-485 Reader editor to configure the readers. Figure 74 on Page 230 shows the iSTAR PIM-485 Board Readers tab. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 229 EFTA01226160 STAR PIM-485 Board Editor Figure 74: iSTAR PIM-485 Board Readers Tab drama-do:sr an poi, .4t Qescncan Loon Dealt r 81•411ex• lkdo Gov. I VOA aseles 11•40os v Wm* 4110441•61 bay 411140304 I aill It fail*..d Illia I :4 'STAR P•4485Flowler1441114. 01 r SWIM* anW442-44.141/2411 r erpermesamo)...twcan r eSTM1nee Arke441•1111•111 ll J r STAR me 11•414611011414111 r coaremesaasesnann r 4111114111415R4/0/474114.41•4111 r 45M/11111411511444444411141011 r isuarakissammoosormin wi r 30411044161teraHall4Wart it r STAR PONS n ll.Wlas.l la r 4TM11411445ResWIN4114Pee SI 4 r 4LVIPS-146144444414411a,mail 14 r iSTMposoartnerimmon n r um pontanaransonimoin r 'STAR Mae R446/16111111414. al li r iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor Readers Tab Definitions The fields and buttons on the iSTAR PIM-485 Board editor Readers tab are described in Table 50 on Page 230. Table 50: iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor Readers Tab Field/Button Description Create Al Gilatocreate al16 readers. When you dick Create All Readers the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you Readers can dick 0 in the EdIt column to open the iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor to configure a Reader. See iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Editor on Page 260. Delete All When you dick Delete All Readers. the check boxes in the Configured column are deared focal 16 Readers. and all 16 Readers Readers are immediately deMed (any settings you haveconfigured are lost). Edit column Cfick 0 in the EdIt column to open the iSTAR PIM-485 reader Editor to configure a Reader. See STAR PIM-485 Reader Editor on Page 260. Reader Index This column displays the number of each Reader. column 230 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226161 STAR PIM-485 Board Editor STAR PIM-485 Board Editor Readers Tab (continued) Field/Button Description Configured Cid( n this column to create a Reader (make it available to be edited). column Na me column Displays the name for this Reader. The name is system-generated. and the field is read-only. Save and Click to save your configuration changes and close the STAR PIM-485 Board editor. Close C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 231 EFTA01226162 STAR Input Editor iSTAR Input Editor The iSTAR Input editor lets you configure an iSTAR Input that you created on an iSTAR Input Board. The iSTAR Input editor (see Figure 75 on Page 233) has the following tabs: ■ iSTAR Input General Tab on Page 236 Identifies the Controller and Board this Input is configured on, the type of the Input (such as Door Switch), and the object the Input is assigned to, such as a Door. ■ iSTAR Input Intrusion Zone Tab on Page 237 This tab appears only if you have included this iSTAR Controller in an Intrusion Zone and added this Input as a Controlled Input. ■ iSTAR Input Triggers Tab on Page 239 This tab lets you define Triggers that can activate C•CURE 9000 Events and activate outputs. See Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 270 for information on creating Triggers for an iSTAR device. ■ Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 28 If you have created a Group containing iSTAR Inputs and added this Input to it, the iSTAR Input editor also displays a Group tab. This tab lists the Input groups to which this Input belongs. for information on using the Group tab for your iSTAR Input. ■ iSTAR Input Status Tab on Page 239 This tab displays several read-only fields that report the Active, Armed, Hardware, and Supervision status of the Input. ■ iSTAR Input State Images Tab on Page 239 This tab shows the images that are displayed in the Monitoring Station to represent this input. You can change the image used for any of the Input states. 232 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226163 iSTAR Input Editor Figure 75: iSTAR Input Editor lint GTAEI "tall ADAI dial:MOM Ceeenieax Nation Oeleut r iteelearcellcde Time Wm SIT45011 Elden Tine f1.61Cenods) Genesi I 'bum Zeno IN.= I Gm.' I 9as I law Bind RS, I 2 golaft, I klereeeabm rpretair gam }3O4analical ;se Noire Fel e'as.en*, Ivo/ 1 CCOC.5 Deteirce ihrisle14 onono P Sere met datges to nano:erg nice r Benne wee r Act ote Cr Sukempon Eno, Deaut Sias, Armed Accessing the iSTAR Input Editor You can access the iSTAR Input Editor in several ways: • To Access the iSTAR Input Editor (iSTAR eX/Edge Controller) on Page 233. • To Edit a Main Board Input (iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller) on Page 234. • To Edit an ACM Board Input (iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller) on Page 234. ■ To Edit an Input on an ACM Ext 1/8 Board (iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller) on Page 234. ■ To Edit a Main Board Input from the Hardware Tree on Page 234. ■ To Edit a COM1/COM2/COM3 or ACM Input from the Hardware Tree on Page 235 To Access the iSTAR Input Editor (iSTAR eX/Edge Controller) 1. From the iSTAR Controller Editor, click on the appropriate tab (Inputs, COM1, COM2, or COM3). 2. Click in the Configured column to create a Main Board or General Purpose Input. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 233 EFTA01226164 ISTAR Input Editor 3. Click the Edit button 0 for the Input you want to edit. • To edit a Main Board or General Purpose Input from the Inputs tab, click 0 in the Edit column for the Input you want to edit. • To edit 1/8 Inputs from the COM1/COM2/COM3 tab, click 0 in the Edit column for the Input Board containing the Input you want to Edit. The iSTAR Input Board Editor opens. Click 0 in the Edit column for the Input you want to edit. The iSTAR Input Editor opens (see iSTAR Input Editor on Page 232). To Edit a Main Board Input (iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller) 1. From the iSTAR Controller Editor, click on the Boards tab. 2. Click 0 in the Edit column for the Input you want to edit. The 'STAR Input Editor opens (see iSTAR Input Editor on Page 232). S To Edit an ACM Board Input (iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller) 1. From the iSTAR Controller Editor, click on the Boards tab. 2. Click 0 in the Edit column for the ACM that contains the Input you want to Edit. The ACM Board Editor opens. 3. Click the Inputs tab. 4. Click 0 in the Edit column for the Input you want to edit. The iSTAR Input Editor opens (see iSTAR Input Editor on Page 232). To Edit an Input on an ACM Ext 1/8 Board (iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller) 1. From the iSTAR Controller Editor, click on the Boards tab. 2. Click 0 in the Edit column for the ACM that contains the Input you want to Edit. The ACM Board Editor opens. 3. Click the ACM Ext tab. 4. Click 0 in the Edit column for the Input board that contains the Input. 5. In the Inputs table on this tab, click 0 in the Edit column for the Input you want to Edit. The iSTAR Input Editor opens (see iSTAR Input Editor on Page 232). To Edit a Main Board Input from the Hardware Tree 1. Navigate to your iSTAR Controller in the Hardware Tree and click l> . 2. Click the Inputs folder. 3. Double-click on the Input you want to edit. The iSTAR Input Editor opens (see iSTAR Input Editor on Page 232). 234 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226165 STAR Input Editor To Edit a C0M1/COM2/COM3 or ACM Input from the Hardware Tree 1. Navigate from your iSTAR Controller in the Hardware Tree to the appropriate COM Board (on an iSTAR eX or iSTAR Edge Controller) or ACM Board (on an iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller). 2. Click l> on Input Boards, as shown in Figure 68 on Page 209. Figure 76: STAR Input Boards in the Hardware Tree Hardware Hardware TM 6TAFI IrcotOcei goad ••• it Hagrae TIN Holtman Tice e.<MM CCa Pak 5 <dr Ill ,ac CURE Mobile cp expl , aincdProckakt ▪ ▪ Dcat flevalm e ti 6TAA co, 04 C DOM ivA DreMn 0tlatz fraud : ta Realm °Jon C0MI *al 11 Realm O a IWO*** Aallao 4 MI C0MISTAR Ifpa Bann a. al CalbSTAR kat DoevRa. M O A 1.4I8_& 6TOR legmBoallaDilfgo ovivovves MAIR InnBoact2AO.19o1 Roo** ja Iraat C0112a11 autosBoa* V 3. Click l> on the Input board that contains the Input you wish to edit. 4. Click l> on Inputs under that board. 5. Double-click on the Input you wish to edit. The iSTAR Input Editor opens. Configuring an iSTAR Input When you configure an iSTAR Input, you use the Input Editor tabs to define the Options, Default State, Triggers, and State Images for the Input. To Configure an iSTAR Input 1. Access the Input Editor for the Input you wish to edit (see Accessing the iSTAR Input Editor on Page 233). 2. Click the Input General tab: • Modify the name of the Input in the Name field, if desired. • Add a textual description of the Input to the Description field. • Enable the Input by clicking the Enabled field. • Modify the Options settings for the Input. See the definitions for the Options fields in on Page 236. • Set the Default State for the Input to Armed (J) or not Armed U. 3. Click the Intrusion Zone tab (if available) to view the name of the Intrusion Zone this Input is part of, and the Display Name used by the Intrusion Zone for this Input. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 235 EFTA01226166 STAR Input Editor 4. Click the Input Triggers tab. iSl'AR Input Triggers Tab on Page 239 defines the Input Properties you can use in triggers. Configure the triggers you need for this Input by following the steps in Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 270. 5. Click the Input Status tab to view the Active, Armed, Hardware, and Supervision status of the Input. 6. Click the Input State Images tab to view the state images for this Input. If you wish to customize the state images for this Input, follow the steps in State Images Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 274. 7. When you have finished configuring this Input in the Input Editor, click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured. iSTAR Input General Tab The iSl'AR Input General tab displays information that identifies the Input and allows you to configure the Options and Default State for the input.Figure 75 on Page 233 shows the iSTAR Input General tab. iSTAR Input General Tab Definitions Table 51 on Page 236 lists the fields and buttons that appear on the iSTAR Input General tab. Table 51: iSTAR Input General Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Name Displays the name for this Input. The name is system-generated by default. but you can edit this name by clicking in this field. Description Enter a textuaIcomment about the Input. such as its location or purpose. This text is for information only. Enabled Click cg to enable the Input. Maintenance Mode Click to put the iSTAR Input into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 2: Maintenance Mode for more information. Partition This read-only field identifies the Partition in which this Input resides. Identification Controller This read-only field identifies the iSTAR Controller to which this Input is attached. Board This read-only field identifies the iSTAR Controller board to which this Input is attached. Type Reflects whether the Input has been assigned to a Door or other object. These include: • General • Door Switch • Request to Exit • Elevator Assigned to Displays the Elevator or Door object name with which this Input is configured. Connection Identifies the Input number on the hardware board to which this Input is connected. 236 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226167 STAR Input Editor Table 51: STAR Input General Tab Definitions (continued) FielcUButton Description Options Debounce Threshold in this field, enter the time that an input must be in a particular state before it is reported as a state change. It is used to (1/10 sec) fitter out spurious changes. The units range from 0- 60 seconds. the defautt is 0. NOTE: For Proprietary Burglar Alarm applications, the Debounee Threshold field must be programmed for a maximum of 90 seconds. Supervised This field indicates that the inputs on the board are Supervised. This is a read-onty field. NOTE: For Proprietary Burglar Alarm applications. the Supervised check box must be selected. Send state changes to To have a notification of changes in state of the input sent to the guard station, select the Send state changes to the monitoring station monitoring station check box. NOTE: For Proprietary Burglar Alarm applications, the Send state changes to the monitoring station option must be selected. Send state change to To have a notification of changes in state of the input sent to the journal, select the Send state changes to Journal journal check box. This option will be selected by dela utt. Reverse sense When this option is selected. the interpretation of the board's Supervised Resistors is reversed. Activate on Supervision When this option is selected. the input will be activated on a Supervision error. Error Default State Armed I When this option is selected. the input is armed by default. This is useful if you are not providing arming via an event. iSTAR Input Intrusion Zone Tab The iSTAR Input Intrusion Zone tab appears only if the iSTAR Input is included in an Intrusion Zone. Figure 77 on Page 238 shows the iSTAR Input Intrusion Zone tab. An Input assigned as an iSTAR Intrusion Zone Controlled or Protected Input displays read-only assignment information on the Intrusion Zone tab of the Input Editor. This tab only displays when the Input is assigned to a zone. At the same time, the value in the Type field on the Input General tab changes from 'General' to 'Intrusion Zone. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 237 EFTA01226168 STAR Input Editor Figure 77: STAR Input Intrusion Zone Tab Gi Save zed COSI BMW AR 1w DIWit•CM. P • • Pear DOM r Martian.",Mode Tim* allT06,00) Ewan Tone VS &Canada) Gre s Yampa+ Bre I Turn I Grow I Siam I UmDA'S SS I State laba“ %typo Ices Iretswei Zeno wow Nan I The iSl'AR Input Intrusion Zone tab displays read-only fields that give Intrusion Zone assignment information for this Input. Table 52: STAR Input Intrusion Zone Tab Definitions Fieid/Button Description Intrusion Zone Name of STAR Intrusion Zone this Input is assigned to Display Name Displays the name you entered for this Input on the STAR Intrusion Zones Editor Inputs tab in the Controlled Inputs table. NOTE: This is the unique LCD display name for this Input that is used whenever the Intrusion Zone needs to display this door as an 'offnormal' point on the Reader LCD. The Dynamic View for iSTAR Inputs also allows you to add a column that identifies the Intrusion NOTE Zone to which the Inputs belong. 238 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226169 'STAR Input Editor iSTAR Input Triggers Tab You can create iSTAR Input Triggers for the properties shown in Table 53 on Page 239. For iSTAR Main Board and Special Purpose Inputs such as Tamper, Power Failure, and Battery Low, you can only create Triggers for the Active Status property. Table 53: STAR Input Trigger Properties Property Description Active Status Values that you can use for Triggers are"Active" and "Inactive". Armed Status Values that you can use for Triggersare"Armed" and "No Error. Supervision Error Status Values that you can use for Triggersare 'Error' and "No Error". See Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 270 for information on creating Triggers for an iSTAR device. iSTAR Input Status Tab The iSTAR Input Status tab displays several Input properties in read-only fields. Table 54 on Page 239 lists the fields on the iSTAR Input Status tab. Table 54: STAR Input Status Tab Definitions FiekUButton Description Active Status Displays whether the Input is Active or Inactive. Armed Status Displays whether the Input is Armed or Disarmed. Hardware Status Displays the Hardware Status value for the Input. Possible values are Secure, Active, Open Loop, Shorted Loop, Fault, or Ground. Supervision Displays the Supervision Status value for the Input. Possible values are: Status • Unknown - the host has not received the input status reported from the panel yet. • Uninitiabzed - the panel reports no error on the input. • Error - the input is in error state, and the detail can be seen in the Hardware Status field. iSTAR Input State Images Tab The iSTAR Input State Images tab provides a means to change the default images that are displayed on the C•CURE 9000 Monitoring Station to indicate iSTAR Input states. See State Images Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 274 for information on using the State Images tab for an iSTAR Input. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 239 EFTA01226170 STAR Input Editor iSTAR input State images Tab Definitions Table 55 on Page 240 shows the iSTAR Input States and the default State Images. Table 55: STAR Input State Images Tab Definitions Icon Description Unknown tO Active illa . Armed Enabled . h. fill Disarmed Enabled Supervision Error ii ii Disabled Ii Update Disabled 240 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Iiiitdmite Conligutation Guide EFTA01226171 STAR Output Editor iSTAR Output Editor The iSTAR Output editor lets you configure an iSTAR Output that you created on an iSTAR Output Board. The iSTAR Output editor (see on Page 241) has the following tabs: • ISTAR Output General tab Identifies the Controller and Board this Output is configured on, the type of the Output (such as Alternate Shunt Relay), and the object the Input is assigned to, such as a Door. See iSTAR Output General Tab on Page 245. • ISTAR Output Groups tab If you have created a Group containing iSTAR Outputs and added this Output to it, the iSTAR Output editor also displays a Group tab. This tab lists the Output groups to which this Output belongs. See Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 28 for information on using the Group tab for the iSTAR Output. • iSTAR Output Status tab This tab displays several read-only fields that report the Active, Armed, Hardware, and Supervision status of the Output. See iSTAR Output Status Tab on Page 246. • ISTAR Output State Images tab See iSTAR Output State Images Tab on Page 246. Figure 78: "STAR Output Edda' AS to CO“ ... 77.7813MEMIflIT Erebied Pennon CdeA Mvrteranct Mode I Gertenl Stabs I LW MindFields I Sine imp- I Outut Mediae caeoller Kba-I &ant STAR lira KMI.Uba.1 Tyr 'General &semi:red b. Cyan= pal OtAcns ea. duration (1/10 sec) IV r llarsy tetrozed P Seed stet hsµs to crsortnn; stet*, C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 241 EFTA01226172 .5 I AR O..it;flit L.d tuf Accessing the iSTAR Output Editor You can access the iSTAR Output Editor in several ways: ■ To Access the iSTAR Output Editor (iSTAR eX/Edge Outputs Tab) on Page 242. ■ To Access the iSTAR Output Editor (iSTAR eX/Edge COM Tabs) on Page 242. ■ To Edit a Main Board Output (iSTAR Classic/Pro Boards Tab) on Page 242. ■ To Access the iSTAR Output Editor (iSTAR Classic/Pro ACM Board Outputs Tab) on Page 242 ■ To Access the iSTAR Output Editor (iSTAR Classic/Pro ACM Board ACM Ext Tab) on Page 243 ■ To Edit a Main Board Output from the Hardware Tree on Page 243. ■ To Edit a COM1/COM2/COM3 or ACM Output from the Hardware Tree on Page 243 To Access the iSTAR Output Editor (iSTAR eX/Edge Outputs Tab) 1. From the iSTAR Controller Editor, click on the Outputs tab. 2. Click in the Configured column to create a Relay Output or an Open Collector Output. 3. Click the Edit button 0 for the Output you want to edit. The iSTAR Output Editor opens (see iSTAR Output Editor on Page 241). To Access the iSTAR Output Editor (iSTAR eX/Edge COM Tabs) 1. From the iSTAR Controller Editor, click on the COM1, COM2, or COM3 (iSTAR Edge only) tab. 2. Click in the Configured column of the Output Boards table to create an Output Board. 3. Click in the Edit column for the Output board you want to edit. The iSTAR Output Board Editor opens (see iSTAR Output Board Editor on Page 208). 4. Click in the Configured column of the Outputs table to create an Output. 5. Click the Edit button 0 for the Output you want to edit. The iSTAR Output Editor opens (see iSTAR Output Editor on Page 241). To Edit a Main Board Output (iSTAR Classic/Pro Boards Tab) 1. From the iSTAR Controller Editor, click on the Boards tab. 2. Click in the Configured column to create a Main Board Output. 3. Click 0 in the Edit column for the Main Board Output. The iSTAR Output Editor opens (see iSTAR Output Editor on Page 241). S To Access the iSTAR Output Editor (iSTAR Classic/Pro ACM Board Outputs Tab) 1. From the iSTAR Controller Editor, click on the Boards tab. 2. Click in the Configured column of the ACMs table to create an ACM Board. 242 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226173 STAR Output Edrtor 3. Click 0 in the Edit column for the ACM Board that contains the Input you want to Edit. The ACM Board Editor opens. 4. Click the Outputs tab on the ACM Board Editor. 5. Click in the Configured column to create an Output. 6. In the Outputs table on this tab, click 0 in the Edit column for the Output you want to Edit. The iSTAR Output Editor opens (see iSTAR Output Editor on Page 241). To Access the iSTAR Output Editor (iSTAR Classic/Pro ACM Board ACM Ext Tab) 1. From the iSTAR Controller Editor, click on the Boards tab. 2. Click in the Configured column of the ACMs table to create an ACM Board. 3. Click 0 in the Edit column for the ACM Board that contains the Input you want to Edit. The ACM Board Editor opens. 4. Click the ACM Ext tab on the ACM Board Editor. 5. Click in the Configured column of the Output Boards table to create an Output Board. 6. In the Output Boards table on this tab, click 0 in the Edit column for the Output Board you want to Edit. The iSTAR Output Board Editor opens (see iSTAR Output Board Editor on Page 208). 7. Click in the Configured column of the Outputs table to create an Output . 8. In the Output Boards table on this tab, click 0 in the Edit column for the Output Board you want to Edit. The iSTAR Output Editor opens (see Figure 78 on Page 241). To Edit a Main Board Output from the Hardware Tree 1. Navigate to your iSTAR Controller in the Hardware Tree and click r> . 2. Click the Outputs folder. 3. Double-click on the Output you want to edit. The iSTAR Output Editor opens (see iSTAR Output Editor on Page 241). To Edit a COM1/COM2/COM3 or ACM Output from the Hardware Tree 1. Navigate from your iSTAR Controller in the Hardware Tree to the appropriate COM Board (on an iSTAR eX or iSTAR Edge Controller) or ACM Board (on an iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller). 2. Click I> on Output Boards, as shown in Figure 79 on Page 244. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 243 EFTA01226174 STAR Output Editor Figure 79: iSTAR Output Boards in the Hardware Tree Hardware Hardware . WARW., Bawl •• CI • • draiR Ira,Coed v Hoeft* Tree Sewh Hades' Nee Seed. Or .; weber. Li Heel • C. eeC Gametes C OJRE Hebb 0 :4 fern rens O . detwRiodaree I(ff:p 6DA pa 04 Dees= El Nat a! row C (*valve 0 °Wert kW; nee*, oop.i. O EI COWIle al Reedy. 0 4 eye eowli CCeeldIAR Irpl Band ea NI C alalto 4 Inpfloods COMISIAR kw,/ Romp. al 6T0.9 lope BoaawC111iaoI jal Owa lloaW : t(86TM Bood2ACIII weI 4 Ruda* Cla 'rah 1:0112•011 Outwit Flab 3. Click C> on the Outpu board that contains the Input you wish to edit. 4. Click C> on Outputs under that board. 5. Double-click on the Output you wish to edit. The iSTAR Output Editor opens (see iSTAR Output Editor on Page 241). Configuring an iSTAR Output When you configure an iSTAR Output, you use the Output Editor tabs to define the Options and State Images for the Output. To Configure an iSTAR Output 1. Access the Output Editor for the Output you wish to edit (see Accessing the iSTAR Output Editor on Page 242). 2. Click the Output General tab: • Modify the name of the Output in the Name field, if desired. • Add a textual description of the Output to the Description field. • Enable the Output by clicking the Enabled field. • Modify the Options settings for the Output. See the definitions for the Options fields in Table 56 on Page 245. 3. Click the Output Status tab to view the Active Status of the Output. 4. Click the Output State Images tab to view the state images for this Output. If you wish to customize the state images for this Output, follow the steps in State Images Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 274. 5. When you have finished configuring this Output in the Output Editor, click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured. 244 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226175 STAR Output Editor iSTAR Output General Tab The iSTAR Output General tab displays information that identifies the Output and allows you to configure the Options for the Output. Figure 78 on Page 241 shows the iSTAR Output General tab. iSTAR Output General Tab Definitions Table 56 on Page 245 lists the fields and buttons that appear on the iSTAR Output General tab. Table 56: STAR Output General Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Identification Name Displays the name for this Output. The name is system-generated bydefault. but you can edit this name byclicking in click in this field. Description Enter a textual comment about the Output. such as its location or purpose. This text is for information onty. Enabled Click 4., to enable the Output. Maintenance Click to place the iSTAR Output into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 2: Maintenance Mode for more information. Mode Partition This read-onty field identifies the Partition in which this Output resides. Output Identification Controller This read-onty field identifies the STAR Controller to which this Output is attached. Board This read-onty field identifies the STAR Controller board to which this Output is attached. Type Reflects whether the Output has been assigned to a Door or other object. These include: • General • Door Lock • Shunt Expiration Relay • Alternate Shunt Relay • Elevator Button NOTE: The Elevator output assignment has not been evaluated by UL. Assigned to Displays the Elevator or Door object name with which this Output is configured. Connection Identifies the Input number on the hardware board to which this Output is connected. Options Pulse Duration This is a momentary activation which is entered in second intervals with a default of 0 seconds. (1/10sec) C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 245 EFTA01226176 iSTAR Output Editor Table 56: STAR Output General Tab Definthons (continued) FlekUButton Description Normalty This field is used to specify whether the Output is wised such that current is normally on or not. The default setting (not energized selected) signifies that the Output is wised so that the current is normally off and when the Output is in an On state. the circuit is energded. Send state To have a notification of changes in state of the Output sent to the Monitoring station. select the Send state changes to the changes to monitoring station died< box. monitoring station NOTE: For Proprietary Burglar Alarm applications, the Send state changes to the monitoring station option must be selected. This selection is unavailable for an iSTAR Door Output. State changes fora Door Output are not sent to the Monitoring Station. Send state To have a notification of changes in state of the Output sent to the journal. select Send state changes to journal. This changes to pur nal option is selected by default. This selection is unavailable for an iSTAR Door Output. State changes fora Door Output are not sent to the journal. iSTAR Output Status Tab The iSTAR Output Status tab displays the State of the Output. Table 57: STAR Output Status Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Active Status Displaysthe status of the Output - either Active or Inactive. iSTAR Output State Images Tab The iSTAR Output State Images tab provides a means to change the default images that are displayed on the C•CURE 9000 Monitoring Station to indicate iSTAR Output states. See State Images Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 274 for information on using the State Images tab for an iSTAR Output. iSTAR Output State Images Tab Definitions Table 58 on Page 246 shows the iSTAR Output States and the default State Images. Table 58: iSTAR Outpu State Images Tab Definitions Icon Description Icon Description Unknown Inactive r 248 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226177 STAR Output Editor Table 58. STAR Output S ate Images Tab Definitions(con- tinued) Icon Description Icon Description . .._ Active Disabled 1 , ti Flashing 1p C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 247 EFTA01226178 STAR Reader Editor iSTAR Reader Editor The iSTAR Reader editor lets you configure an iSTAR Reader that you created on an iSTAR Controller. The iSTAR Reader editor (see Figure 80 on Page 249) has the following tabs: ■ iSTAR Reader General tab Lists the Reader name, connections, and card formats for a reader connected to an iSTAR. See iSTAR Reader General Tab on Page 250. ■ iSTAR Reader I/O tab This tab lets you configure the available Inputs and Outputs for the Reader. See iSTAR Reader I/O Tab on Page 252. ■ iSTAR Reader Keypad tab This tab lets you configure the settings and options for the Reader Keypad. See iSTAR Reader Keypad Tab on Page 253. ■ iSTAR Reader Triggers tab See Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 270 for information on creating Triggers for an iSTAR device. ■ iSTAR Reader Groups tab If you have created a Group containing iSTAR readers and added this Reader to it, the iSTAR Reader editor also displays a Group tab. This tab lists the Reader groups to which this Reader belongs. See Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 28 for information on using the Group tab for the iSTAR Reader. ■ iSTAR Reader Status tab This tab displays several read-only fields that report the Communications, PIN Required, and Keypad Command Allow Status of the Reader. See iSTAR Reader Status Tab on Page 256. ■ iSTAR Reader State Images tab This tab displays the default images used to depict this reader in the Monitoring Station. You can use this tab to customize these state images. See iSTAR Reader State Images Tab on Page 258. 248 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226179 STAR Reader Editor Figure 80: STAR Reader Editor Samna-. komuma M1VYrTMW a. Erase PS CS r fleeDr. ST16L Gsla IUS Ski, I **SI a PanIS I u.0..p.ilsa I a I coma. NO.Sap*, flan loan• *sat. Ca Ors) sw• IPP ^Add r. Prom You can add or remove Card Formats from multiple Readers via an iSTAR Reader Dynamic View. See Add or Remove Reader Card Formats on Page 25 for more information. Accessing the iSTAR Reader Editor You can access the iSTAR Reader editor in several ways: • From the iSTAR eX Controller Wiegand Tab on Page 171 or iSTAR Edge Controller Wiegand Tab on Page 169. • From the iSTAR eX COM1/COM2 Tabs on Page 173 or iSTAR Edge COM1/COM2/COM3 Tabs on Page 167 • From the iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller iSTAR ACM Board Readers Tab on Page 200. • From the iSTAR Ultra iSTAR Controller Boards Tab (iSTAR Classic/Pro) on Page 156, iSTAR Ultra Controller IP- ACMs Tab on Page 181, and iSTAR Ultra COM1/COM2 Tabs on Page 181. • From the iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor Readers Tab on Page 229. • From the Hardware Tree, edit a Reader on a COM board or ACM board. In each case, you must select the Configure column to configure 0 the reader, then click E to open the iSTAR Reader editor. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 249 EFTA01226180 STAR Reader Editor Configuring iSTAR Readers When you configure an iSTAR Reader, you use the Reader Editor tabs to define the Options and State Images for the Reader. To Configure an iSTAR Reader 1. Access the Reader Editor for the Reader you wish to edit (see Accessing the iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 249). 2. Click the Reader General tab: • Modify the name of the Reader in the Name field, if desired. • Add a textual description of the Reader to the Description field. • Enable the Reader by clicking the Enabled field. • For some Readers, you need to select the correct Reader type from the drop-down list. • Add the Card Formats that the Reader uses to the Card Format table. See Configuring iSTAR Readers on Page 250. 3. Click the Reader Status tab to view the Active Status of the Reader. 4. Click the Reader State Images tab to view the state images for this Reader. If you wish to customize the state images for this Reader, follow the steps in State Images Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 274. 5. When you have finished configuring this Reader in the Reader Editor, click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured. See the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide for a list of UL approved card formats. NOTE iSTAR Reader General Tab The iSTAR Reader General tab displays information that identifies the Reader and allows you to configure the Options for the Reader. Figure 80 on Page 249 shows the iSTAR Reader General tab. iSTAR Reader General Tab Definitions Table 59 on Page 250 lists the fields and buttons that appear on the iSTAR Reader General tab. Table 59: iSTAR Reader General Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Identification Name Displays the name for this Reader. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by choking in dick in this field. Description Enter a textual comment about the Reader, such as its bcation or purpose. This text is for information only. 250 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226181 STAR Reader Editor STAR Reader General Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Enabled Click V to enable the Reader. Maintenance Click to put the STAR Reader into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 2: Maintenance Mode for more information. Mode Partition This read-onty field identifies the Partition in which this reader resides. Controller This read-onty field identifies the STAR Controller to which this reader is attached. Board This read-onty field identifies the STAR Controller board to which this reader is attached. Assigned to Displays the Elevator or Door object name with which this reader is configured. Connection Identifies the Reader number on the hardware board to which this reader isconnected. Device ID The 15-character ID of the Aperio Reader. (Aperio Reader only.) Reader Type Click on the drop-down menu to select the reader type. • RM (Software House Reader Protocol) • BLE (Bluetooth Low Energy) • OSDP (Open Supervised Device Protocol) Default: RM Authentication Only available for BLE readers. Required Click to enable authentication. You will need to be logged into the BLE application on your mobile device for access. Default: Disabled - does not require authorization. Card Format Add Click Add to add a Card Format. If the card format you desire isnot in the Name Selection dialog box list, dick 0 in the Select Type field to select a card format. Remove Click the row selector ' to select one or more Card Format rows (hold down SHIFT or Ctrl to select multiple rows), then click Remove to delete the row(s) for this field. Name Displays the Name of each Card Format you have chosen for this Reader. Description Displaysthe Description for the Card Format. This field is read-only. iSTAR General Tab Definitions for iSTAR Ultra Wiegand Readers The iSTAR Reader General tab for readers defined on the Wiegand tab of the iSTAR Ultra ACM Board has additional fields that allow you to configure Reader Options. Table 60 on Page 252 lists the additional fields and buttons that appear on the iSTAR Reader General tab for iSTAR Ultra Wiegand Readers. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 251 EFTA01226182 STAR Reader Editor Table 60: iSTAR Ultra Wiegand Reader General Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Reader Options LED Control You can select the LED control setting that corresponds with the wiring method used to control the reader LEDs: • 3-wire (Red, Yellow, Green) • External Bi-color (2-wire Red, Green) • 1.wire(A,B, CO) Beep on Card Read Click to configure the reader to beep when a Card Read occurs. iSTAR Reader I/O Tab The iSTAR Reader I/O tab displays information that identifies the Reader and allows you to configure the Options for the Reader. Figure 81 on Page 252 shows the iSTAR Reader I/O tab. Figure 81: STAR Reader I/O Tab Wier< wean kom rho Rms.)4 tom tare, EfetMe PS DOM TeeUr. 0114401Es T. MICErsW C.M. ‘0 aims liwor I lama I Cpmas i Sas Ipar Dens ti l SINInn.' • Mr a a. Colosed 11,111180 7 TA/low I COVIdliallsish Send] ✓ STAR ros • 2.001061). As.). r... ✓ .T•••• COWISVAliselehiTAA 1 ✓ Canneeta •COltbSINI Ant ew YagW :ere t Coars Sgin i 10. 861 ✓ Cups • .03MYSTM Amoltitk ✓ CS. 2.constamr.laTA iSTAR Reader I/O Tab Definitions Definitions for the fields and buttons on the Reader 1/O tab are described in 'liable 61 on Page 253. 252 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226183 STAR Reader Editor Definitions for the Inputs on the iSTAR Aperio Reader I/O Tab are described in iSTAR Aperio Reader I/O Tab on Page 266. The fields on this tab vary depending upon the type of Reader you are configuring. For example, a Direct Connect Wiegand Reader displays only the Communications Fail Input on the I/O tab. Table et STAR Reader I/O Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Inputs Create Al Inputs Click to create all eight Inputs. The dieck boxes in the Config ured column are set to V. Delete Al Inputs Click to delete all eight Inputs. The check boxes h the Configured column are set to Edit Click El in this column to open the iSTAR Input Editor to edit this Input. Connection This read-only field identifies the position of each input on the I/O tab. Configured V indicates that the input has been configured. indicates that the input has not been configured. Name Displays the system-generated name for this Input. You can edit this name by clicking in the field. Template Displays the Template used for aeating this Input. If the input is not yet configured, you can dick in thisoolumn, then diddo select an input Template. If the Configured column displays V , this field cannot be edited. Supervised 1 Represents Supervised Input #1 on iSTAR Readers. Not avaiable on direct connect Wiegand Readers. Supervised 2 Represents Supervised Input #2 on iSTAR Readers. Not avaiable on diced connect Wiegand Readers. Tamper Represents the Tamper input on iSTAR Readers. Not available on diced connect Wiegand Readers. Communications Represents the Communications Failure Input on iSTAR Readers. Fail Outputs Create Al Click to create all Outputs. The clued( boxes in the Configured column are set to V. Outputs Delete Al Click to delete all Outputs. The du:id( boxes in the Configured column are set to Outputs 1 Represents Output #1 on iSTAR Readers. Represents Output #2 on iSTAR Readers. Not available On direct connect Wiegand Readersand MRM Readers. iSTAR Reader Keypad Tab The iSTAR Reader Keypad tab allows you to configure settings for the keypad on the Reader. You can specify how the Reader accepts PIN entries, and whether the Reader accepts Keypad Commands. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 253 EFTA01226184 iSTAR Reader Editor Figure 82: iSTAR Reader Keypad Tab gineMS • Mil NSW•0.0•COOrel• 411 WiasseCia *se 3/MAsaNuassCasaa rause, Esas Peas Das "^". PM _W. n OPIft•IpEn lua•••••••••I Ei MI•1to. Arnold* ass anna Mend '003.41.• MOW Cowards am* IO.J iSTAR Reader Keypad Tab Definitions Table 62: STAR Reader Keypad Tab Definitions Field/Button Description PIN is not required if selected, onty a card swipe is required for successful access to the door connected to this reader. PIN onty if selected. this reader can be used for PIN-Onty access. NOTE: PIN only cannot be used as a Query filter value for the PIN Required Status field. Card and PIN if selected. this reader requires both a card swipe and a PIN entry at the keypad for access. required Schedule If Card and PIN Required isselected, you can select a Schedule object to determine when Card and PIN Required is enforced. When the Schedule is active, both Card and PIN are required for access. When the Schedule is inactive, onty a card swipe is required. Allow PIN Exempt If Card and PIN Required isselected, Personnel recordsoonfigured with PIN Exempt (ADA) are exempt from having to (ADA) enter a PIN for access. 254 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226185 STAR Reader Editor Table 62: STAR Reader Keypad Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Allow card If you have selected PIN Is not required or Card and PIN required. you can enable Allow card numbers to be numbers to be entered from the keypad by selecting the ched< box. If you chose PIN Only. this option is unavailable (because the entered from Keypad must be used to enter a PIN). keypad Use PIN+1 as If you have selected PIN Is not required or Card and PIN required, you can enable Use PIN+1 as duress code by duresscode selecting the check box. If you chose PIN Only. this option is unavatable. Keypad Indicates whether or not Keypad Commands can be entered on this Reader's Keypad and when. Select one of the Commands following options from the drop-down fist. The default is Not Allowed. Allowed • Not Allowed— Keypad Commandscannot be used at the Reader • Always Allowed— Keypad Commandscan always be used at the Reader • Allowed during specified schedule— Keypad Commands can be used at the Reader during the period specified in the following field. (When you select thisoption. the Schedule for Keypad Commands field becomes evadable.) Schedule for Select a Schedule from the fist to specify when Keypad Commands can be used at this Reader. When the Schedule is Keypad active. Keypad Commands can be used. When the Schedule is inactive. Keypad Commands cannot be used. Commands iSTAR Reader Triggers Tab The iSTAR Reader Triggers tab allows you to configure triggers for the Reader. You can set up triggers based on Communication Status, PIN Required Status, and Tamper Status. Figure 83 on Page 255 shows the iSTAR Reader Triggers tab. F Igure 83: STAR Reader Triggers Tab 11•••••) rvistin. I • .). JAHOSZOinfit0 I is Staid es•A rote.' I* rrRnl “)}. I cum SwF ',up. Jaw ben ILA 1.1.114. See Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 270 for information on creating Triggers for an iSTAR device. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 255 EFTA01226186 STAR Reader Editor For iSTAR Readers you can create Triggers for the properties shown in Table 63 on Page 256. Table 83: 'STAR Reader Trigger Properties Property Description Communication Possible values are Normal or Comm Fall. Status PIN Required Status Possible values are Not Required or Card and PIN Required. based on the setting for PIN Requirements on the Keypad tab. Tamper Status Boolean value; True if the Tamper input has been activated, or False if the Tamper Input has not been activated. iSTAR Reader Status Tab The iSTAR Reader Status tab displays read-only status fields that allow you to see the current status of the Reader. The type of reader determine the fields displayed on this tab. • iSTAR Reader Status Tab Definitions on Page 256. • iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Status Tab Definitions on Page 257. • iSTAR Aperio Reader Status Tab Definitions on Page 257 iSTAR Reader Status Tab Definitions Table 64: STAR Reader Status Tab Defindions Field/Button Description Firmware Version The version number of the reader firmware. Communications Communications displays the value Normal if the Controller can communicate with the Reader or Comm Fain the Controller cannot communicate with the Reader. PIN Required PIN Required displays the value True if PIN Required has been selected on the Keypad tabor False othenvise. Tamper Displays the statusof the Tamper Input. Not available on Direct Connect Wiegand readers. Keypad Command This field displays status of the Keypad Commands Allowed setting from the Reader Editor Keypad tab: Aliow Status • Not Allowed • Allowed • Allowed during specified schedule. 256 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226187 STAR Reader Editor iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Status Tab Definitions Table 65: STAR PIM-485 Reader Status Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Firmware Version The version number of the reader firmware. Communications Communicationsdisplays the value Normal if the Controller can communicate with the Reader or Comm Fad if the Controller cannot communicate with the Reader. PIN Required PIN Required displays the value True if PIN Required has been selected on the Keypad tabor False othenvise. Tamper True if a Tamper status isdetected for the PIM Reader, or False if no Tamper condition isdetected. Keypad Command This field displays statusof the Keypad Commands Allowed setting from the Reader Editor Keypad tab: Allow Status • Not Allowed • Allowed • Allowed during specified schedule. [PIM1-pro *II - PIM True if a Tamper status is detected for the PIM-485 board to which this reader is attached. or False if no Tamper condition Tamper isdetected. Motor Stall True if a Motor Stall oandition (a problem with the latching mechanism of the door strike) is detected. or False if no Motor Stallcondition isdetected. Available onty for PIM-485 WA Series Locks, not for other AD Locks. Low Battery True if a Low Batterycondition is detected for the PIM Reader, or False if no Low Batterycondition is detected. AvaiLable only for PIM-485 connected Readers. Manual Lock True if the Manual Lock Overrride has been activated (unlocked by a physical key), or False if the Manual Lock Override Override has not been activated. Available onty for PIM-485 connected Readers. Push Button True if the Push Button on the lock panel (inside the room) has been pressed, or False if the Push Button has not been pressed. Available onty for PIM-485 connected Readers. iSTAR Aperio Reader Status Tab Definitions Table 66: STAR Aperio Reader Status Tab Definitions FieltUButton Description Communications Communications displays the value Normal if the Controller can communicate with the Reader or Comm Fall if the Controller cannot communicate with the Reader. Tamper True if a Tamper status isdetected for the Reader. or False if no Tamper condition isdetected. Low Battery True if a Low Batterycondition is detected for the Reader. or False if no Low Batterycondition is detected. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 257 EFTA01226188 STAR Reader Editor iSTAR Reader State Images Tab l'he State Images tab for a Reader provides a means to change the default images used to indicate iSTAR Reader device states on the Monitoring Station. See State Images Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 274 for information on using the State Images tab for an iSTAR Reader. See Table 67 on Page 258 for default State Images for an iSTAR RM reader See Table 68 on Page 258 for default State Images for an iSTAR PIM-485 reader (Schlage wireless lock and reader). iSTAR Reader State images Tab Definitions Table 67: STAR Reader State Images Tab Definitions Icon Description Icon Description IT Unknown T- - Tampered L Comm Fai Normal Table 68: STAR PIM 485 Reader State Images Definibons Icon Description Icon Description Icon Description F Unknown FA Normal ENT Low Battery 41. Comm Fail Motor Stall (Schlage Wireless Only) pi Manual Lock Override (Sohlage Wireless Illrs, Only) I 4 F Tampered IF PIM Tamper (SohlagsWireless I Push Button (Sohlags Wireless Only) • Ol Onty) Table 69: STAR Aperio Reader State Images Definitions Icon Description Icon Description Unknown di Key Cylinder Override (Aperio only) 258 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226189 STAR Reader Editor Icon Description Icon Description Comm Fail Lock State Locked (Aperio only) Mr ,4 rt i Tampered Lock State Jammed i Acc•O only) Normal C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 259 EFTA01226190 STAR PIM-485 Reader Editor iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Editor The iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Editor allows you to configure the settings for a Schlage PIM-485 reader/lock wirelessly connected to an iSTAR Pro or eX controller PIM-485 board. The iSTAR PIM-485 Reader editor is shown in Figure 84 on Page 260. Figure 84: STAR PIM-485 Reader Editor The iSTAR PIM-485 Reader editor dialog box has the following tabs. ■ iSTAR Reader General tab Lists the Reader name, connections, and card formats for a reader connected to an iSTAR Classic/Pro, or iSTAR eX. See iSTAR Reader General Tab on Page 250. ■ iSTAR PIM•485 Reader VO tab This tab lets you configure the available Inputs and Outputs for the Reader. See the iSTAR PIM-485 Reader I/O Tab on Page 261. ■ iSTAR Reader Keypad tab This tab lets you configure the settings and options for the Reader Keypad on iSTAR Schlage Readers. See iSTAR Reader Keypad Tab on Page 253. Only Schlage Keypad Mode 1 keypad output format (4 data bits per key with no parity) is supported. The mode is configured on the Schlage device. ■ iSTAR Reader Triggers lab See the Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 270 for information on creating Triggers for an iSTAR device. You can define triggers for the following Properties of the iSTAR PIM-485 Reader: 280 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226191 STAR PIM-485 Reader Editor Property Value Communication Status Normalor Comm Fad Low Battery Active Es or inactive • Manual Lock Override Active/go( inactive • Motor Stall Active/go( inactive • Parent PIM Tamper Active Is or inactive ■ PIN Required Status Not Required, Card and PN Required, or PIN Only Push Button Active is or inactive • Tamper Status Active is or inactive ■ ■ 'STAR Reader Groups tab f you have created a Group containing iSTAR readers and added this Reader to it, the iSTAR Reader editor also displays a Groups tab. This tab lists the Reader groups to which this Reader belongs. See the Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 28 for information on using the Group tab for the iSTAR Reader. ■ iSTAR Reader Status tab This tab displays several read-only fields that report the Communications, PIN Required, and Keypad Command Allow Status of the Reader. See the iSTAR Reader Status Tab on Page 256. ■ iSTAR Reader State Images tab This tab displays the default images used to depict this reader in the Monitoring Station. You can use this tab to customize these state images. See the iSTAR Reader State Images Tab on Page 258. You can add or remove Card Formats from multiple Readers via an iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Dynamic View. See Add or Remove Reader Card Formats on Page 25 for more information. iSTAR PIM-485 Reader I/O Tab The iSTAR PIM-485 Reader I/O tab lets you configure the inputs and outputs for the reader. Each input and output is pre-assigned to a specific function for the reader. Typically you can use the Create All buttons to create the inputs and outputs, and then click the button in the Edit column to configure each input and output individually. You can configure these inputs and outputs by clicking on 0 in the Edit column. You can then create triggers that can activate Events based on state changes. Example: You can create a trigger to activate an Event if the Low Battery Input status changes to Active (indicating that the reader battery charge is low). See Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 270. Figure 85 on Page 262 shows the iSTAR PIM-485 Reader I/O tab. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 281 EFTA01226192 STAR PIM-485 Reader Editor Figure 85: STAR PIM-485 Reader ifO Tab i mt.t net te, .s. t:UR TO ars ens.; mil.. t V.61 8:..,,,,,. asi 6TAA PlealisidellIMIonl a.m.. nes P.M.* WS Gas It I ili i [a.r.., ,,) imam 2 odkaincts :: 0.00/11,03 fa Canna. Coq uri Nois leoles 0_.. —.__. ymisis vos.. fte... ‘rui . "dm 001.41N4 POISMS1.1 L *dm RIM 4SIM P014952•60 . I Vif••••• Niawr Taw. ID Vibes Maio Tons 41.• MA Wale Pmelt Car. 0 Vet RudeCorruceasFS A. La Ikea, n ... MEv ..11/A OM* Amis.1IC Mewl laditvons• itt Olnid La* Owl& .611111404.15. Irw el Ftass .a0AIIII46.11=00.. Gm. 2 cmikmicetwas Zotkamodoss fa. — Goal — Tmhis 0 Omladdlor iti ,C0.41.1.a.CINIMI41111m. Definitions for the fields and buttons on the Reader 1/O tab are described in Table 70 on Page 262. Table 70: STAR Reader itO Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Inputs Create Al inputs Click to create all eight inputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to V Delete All inputs Click to delete all eight inputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to Edit Click nin this column to open the iSTAR input editor to edit the input. Connection T his read-onty field identifies the position of each input on the ifO ta b. Configured V indicates that the input has been configured. O indicates that the input has not been configured. Name Displays the system-generated name for this input. You can edit this name by clicking in the field. Template Displays the Template used for creating this input. If the input isnot yet configured, you can click in this column, then click to select an input Template. If the Configured column displays V thisfield cannot be edited. Wireless DSM Re presents the Wireless Door Switch Monitor (DSM) for the door. Wireless REX Represents the Wireless Request To Exit (REX) for the door. 262 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226193 STAR PIM-485 Reader Editor Table 70: STAR Reader I/O Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Wireless Reader Represents the Tamper Input on the Wireless Reader. Tamper Wireless Reader Represents the Communications Failure Input on the Wireless Reader. Communications Fail Motor Stall Represents the Motor Stall Input on the Wireless Reader. Low Battery Represents the Low Battery Input on the Wireless Reader. Manual Lock When this input is active, it indicates that the lock has been unlocked by a physical key. Override The Manual Lock Override status is available on the Status tab for this reader. This property is available for use in triggers. Push Button When this input is active, it indicates that the push button on the lock panel (inside the room) has been pushed. The Push Button Input status is available on the Status tab for this reader. This property is available for use in triggers. Outputs Create All Outputs Click to create all Outputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to V. Delete All Outputs Click to delete all Outputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to Door Latch Relay Represents the Door Latch Relay Output that is used to unlock the door. Edit Click[i in this column to open the STAR Output editor to edit the Output. Connection This read-only field identifies the position of the Output on the I/O tab. Configured V indicates that the Output has been configured. indicates that the Output has not been configured. Name Displays the system-generated name for this Output. You can edit this name byclicking in the field. Template Displays the Template used for creating this Output. If the Output is not yet configured. you can click in this column. then click to select an Output Template. If the Configured column displays V this field cannot be edited. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 263 EFTA01226194 STAR Aperio Reader Editor iSTAR Aperio Reader Editor The iSTAR Aperio Reader editor allows you to configure the settings for an Aperio reader/lock wirelessly connected to an iSTAR Ultra controller Aperio RS-485 Hub board. The iSTAR Aperio Reader editor is shown in Figure 86 on Page 264. Figure 86: 'STAR Aperio Reader Editor I On. iThin N.> , 104,11tr..7) NI ,filS1:•••• • teCt•ot r A elatmeati IN.:SA A r WM. S.M./PA) I.10.11 TowsI weal stotrowl ItImatelbo Eirixter n••• WA Fa. allele es I eletd 1/4 . I Carimas. P•ski 14400 Reefaix I:To3 1' J C.• ea, D......... 4 When you add an iSTAR Aperio Reader, Enable it in the Aperio Reader editor, and Save and Close the editor, a Door object for that reader is added to the parent Ultra controller in the iSTAR Aperio Doors folder in the Hardware tree. If you delete an iSTAR Aperio Reader, the iSTAR Aperio Door associated with the reader is also deleted. If you display a list of iSTAR Doors, the new Aperio Door appears on the list. See iSTAR Aperio Door Editor on Page 455 for more information on Aperio Doors. 284 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226195 iSTAR Aperio Reader Editor Figure 87: 'STAR Apeno Doors anus Door X :7..D ce Cant Sella D polo eb croup by hae • • kaal Canty-n es Nam I Downied Oves SON I Sem AYSS I • jj Caito,XXix <X COW Normal 4 -j dual* 2 • 61Y3 1 Coal it real edge OOP On Cloud Hamel • to dbe le red elx • if2 Mors ; PC* , Waal coce gi * I door 1 ag "WM • ID Star kenoCcas uST AR Apene Fleads•Mt2a5aSPeet Luta • t8 COMI4b• 1 :• 0.lab2-RS 485 Pal 1-ital. The iSTAR Aperio Reader editor dialog box has the following tabs. • iSTAR Reader General tab Lists the Ultra controller name, Hub board, Assigned to Door, Reader number, Device ID, and Reader type. See iSTAR Reader General Tab on Page 250. • iSTAR Aperio Reader I/O tab This tab lets you configure the available Inputs and Outputs for the Reader. See the iSTAR Aperio Reader I/O Tab on Page 266. • iSTAR Reader Keypad tab This tab lets you configure the settings and options for the Reader Keypad on iSTAR Aperio Readers. See iSTAR Aperio Reader Keypad Tab on Page 268. • iSTAR Reader Triggers tab See the Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 270 for information on creating Triggers for an iSTAR Ultra device. You can define triggers for the following Properties of the iSTAR Aperio Reader: Property Value Communication Status Normalor Comm Fai Key Cylinder Override Active Ea or inactive Lock State -lammed Active Ea or inactive . Loa State Locked Active Esi or inactive Low Battery Status Active Esi or inactive Tamper Status Active Esi or inactive • iSTAR Reader Status tab C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 265 EFTA01226196 'STAR Aperio Reader Editor This tab displays several read-only fields that report the Communications, Tamper, and Low Battery status of the Reader. See the iSTAR Reader Status Tab on Page 256. ■ iSTAR Reader State Images tab This tab displays the default images used to depict this reader in the Monitoring Station. You can use this tab to customize these state images. See the iSTAR Reader State Images Tab on Page 258. You can add or remove Card Formats from multiple Readers via an iSTAR Aperio Reader Dynamic View. See Add or Remove Reader Card Formats on Page 25 for more information. iSTAR Aperio Reader I/O Tab The iSTAR Aperio Reader I/O tab lets you configure the inputs for the reader. Each input is pre-assigned to a specific function for the reader. Typically you can use the Create All buttons to create the inputs, and then click the button in the Edit column to configure each input individually. The number of inputs available on this tab varies, depending upon the reader model configured on the General tab in the Reader Type field. You can configure these inputs by clicking on in the Edit column. You can then create triggers that can activate Events based on state changes. Example: You can create a trigger to activate an Event if the Lock Low Battery Input status changes to Active (indicating that the reader battery charge is low). See Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 270. Figure 88 on Page 267 shows a typical iSTAR Aperio Reader I/O tab. 288 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226197 STAR Aperio Reader Editor Figure 88: STAR Aperio Reader I/O Tab islAroveavA 'Wm `WARM. °Pee' ohelfr. qM 1q, le ROGRAY! A r Dam cis ISMrdieldi ISISIN I lainigsl iron ?Q.rno id ivies Mai•frpis It fana 0•Igml I0. j Inside IA* CearlOrtraill r IA.CenneserAil fratatn , Lad lterlanY r LOS Law 0 alp 610 •00111tia• IAASWeArria4 r UP 9.1.41.1.3.MAI 'aeon,' Definitions for the fields and buttons on the Reader I/O tab are described in Table 71 on Page 267. Definitions for the input types are described in Table 72 on Page 268. Table 71: STAR Reader I/O Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Create All Click tocreate all Inputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to V Inputs Delete All Click to delete all Inputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set ton. Inputs Edit Click [ —] in this column to open the STAR Input editor to edit the Input. Connection T his read-onty field indicates the three standard inputs (Comm Fad. Low Battery. and Lock State Jammed. Configured V indicates that the Input has been configured. indicates that the Input has not been configured. Name Displays the system-generated name for this Input. You can edit this name by clicking in the field. Template Displays the Template used for creating this Input. If the Input isnot yet configured, you can click in this column, then click to select an Input Template. If the Configured column displays V , this field cannot be edited. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 267 EFTA01226198 STAR Aperio Reader Editor Table 72: iSTAR Reader I/O Tab Input Definitions Field/Button Description Lock Reader Tamper Represents the state of the Tamper input on the lock. Handle State / Request to Exit Represents the state of the Request to Exit input associated with the door handle. Lock State Locked Represents the Key Cylinder Override Represents the state of the Key Cylinder Override. Door Position State Represents state of the Door Switch Monitor for the door associated with this reader. Lock Communications Fail Represents the Lock Communications Failure Input on the Aperio Reader. Lock State Jammed Represents the Lock State Jammed Input on the Aperio Reader. Lock Low Battery Represents the Lock Low Battery Input on the Aperio Reader. iSTAR Aperio Reader Keypad Tab The iSTAR Reader Keypad tab allows you to configure settings for the keypad on the Reader. You can specify how the Reader accepts PIN entries. Figure 89: iSTAR Aperio Reader Keypad Tab kr. r (MIS tlini I i 0 I Nom/ r••.• 9+•l 9r•w I RNR.. a MIN ntt SUM r NOW r COI VO N ROM. JJ Oita• r we• WI *A4411.11-be (*WO •S•Wellef r 268 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226199 STAR Aperio Reader Editor iSTAR Aperio Reader Keypad Tab Definitions Table 73: STAR Aperio Reader Keypad Tab Definitions Field/Button Description PIN is not required If selected. onty a card swipe is required for successful access to the door connected to this reader. PINonty If selected. this reader can be used for PIN-Onty access. NOTE: PIN only cannot be used as a Query filter value for the PIN Required Status field. Card and PIN If selected, this reader requires both a card swipe and a PIN entry at the keypad for access. required Schedule If Card and PIN Required is selected, you can select a Schedule object to determine when Card and PIN Required is enforced. When the Schedule is active, both Card and PIN are required for access. When the Schedule is inactive, onty a card swipe is required. Allow card If you have selected PIN is not required or Card and PIN required. you can enableAllow card numbers to be numbers to be entered from the keypad by selecting the check box. If you chose PIN Only. thisoption is unavailable (because the entered from Keypad must be used to enter a PIN). keypad Use PIN+1 as If you have selected PIN is not required or Card and PIN required. you can enable Use PIN*1 as duress code by duresscode selecting the check box. If you chose PIN Only. thisoption is unavailable. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 269 EFTA01226200 T riggers Tab for 'STAR Devices Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices C•CURE 9000 uses Triggers, which are configured procedures for activating actions, to activate Events or Outputs for an iSTAR device. A Trigger automatically executes a specified Action when a particular Condition occurs (when the object Property specified in the Trigger reports the Value specified in the Trigger). Example: To provide an audible and visible alarm for a power failure condition, you can create two triggers for the AC Power Fail Input on an iSTAR controller that are activated when the Input's status changes: Activate Output that energizes an audible sounder. Activate Output that energizes an LED alarm light installed near an arming/disarming keypad reader. Figure 90 on Page 270 shows the Triggers tab for an iSTAR Input, which is typical for an iSTAR device. Figure 90: Typical 'STAR TriggersTab wit I C.,•:nnet _J g Inns has. Nwa r T..2.. Giros= tea a* us scow.) On.I I 0••••••1••seei Mtn i COW Mm %am F.'s I 9,•••••••• I photo" est inawilitreesi. • vs- rms. Table 74 on Page 270 provides an example of a configured iSTAR Trigger. Table 74: TriggersTab SettingsExample The following Triggers Tab settings: Property Value Action Details Schedule Time Zone Ast ve Status Alive Activate Event STAR Input Event Always Time Zone of the STAR controller 270 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226201 T riggers Tab for STAR Devices Table 74: Triggers Tab Settings Example (continued) Would create the following Trigger: Any time (Always Schedule) the Active Status (Property) equalsActive (Value). activate the event (Action) named iSTAR Input Event (Details). STAR Input Event is an Event that you would need to create using the Event Editor. You cannot assign a Schedule to an iSTAR Controller trigger. Effectively, iSTAR Controller triggers NOTE use an Always Schedule. From the Triggers tab of an iSTAR device (such as a Controller, Input, or Reader), you can perform the following tasks. ■ Defining a Trigger for an iSTAR Device on Page 271. ■ Removing a Trigger on Page 272. iSTAR Triggers Tab Definitions on Page 272 provides definitions for the fields and buttons on an iSTAR Device Triggers tab. Defining a Trigger for an iSTAR Device You can use the Triggers tab to define a Trigger for an iSTAR device. The typical usage for an iSTAR Trigger is to activate an Event or an Output as the result of a state change of an iSTAR device Property. Example: When an iSTAR Tamper Input changes from the Inactive (normal) to Active (abnormal) state, you wish to activate an Event and activate an audible alarm (an iSTAR Output). Time Zones for iSTAR Triggers If you specify a Time Zone in your Trigger definition, you can control when the Schedule for the Trigger is active. You can only select the C•CURE 9000 server Time Zone or the Time Zone of the iSTAR you are editing. Example: If you have iSTAR controllers that are in different Time Zones than your C•CURE 9000 server, you may want to have some Triggers activate according to the iSTAR controller's Time Zone, while other Triggers are activated according to the server Time Zone. When you specify the Time Zone for a Trigger definition to be the same as the iSTAR controller Time Zone, the Schedule activation times for the Trigger occur according to the iSTAR controller Time Zone. If you have an iSTAR controller in the Pacific Time Zone (GMT - 08:00) and a server in the Eastern Time Zone (GMT - 05:00), a Schedule that is active from Midnight to 6:00 AM is activated from Midnight to 6:00 AM in Pacific Time (GMT - 08:00) rather than Eastern time (three hours later). To Define a Trigger for an iSTAR Device 1. Click on the Triggers tab for your iSTAR device. 2. Click Add on the Triggers tab to create a new Trigger. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 271 EFTA01226202 Triggers Tab for STAR Devices 3. Click El within the Property column to open the Property dialog box showing the Properties available for the device. 4. Click a Property in the list to select it and add it to the Property column. 5. Click within the Value column to display a drop-down list of Values associated with the Property that you have selected. Click a Value that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column. (If there is no set list of Values, you can type in a Value.) 6. Click within the Action column to display a drop-down list of valid actions. Click an Action that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column. 7. When you select an Action, the lower pane in the Triggers box displays an entry field or group of entry fields, specific to the selected Action, so that you can configure the Details for the Action. 8. Once you define the Action details, the Details column displays information about how the Action has been configured. 9. For example, if an Event field is displayed in Details, you can click to select an Event that you want to associate with the Trigger. 10.If the Triggers tab includes a Time Zone column, click within the Time Zone column to display a drop-down list of available Time Zones. Most of the time, you will want to select a Time Zone that is the same as the iSTAR controller Time Zone. If you do not select a Time Zone, the Time Zone of the C•CURE 9000 server is used by default. 11. Click Save and Close to save the iSTAR Trigger. Removing a Trigger If you no longer need a Trigger defined for a Device, you can remove the Trigger. To Remove a Trigger 1. Click the Triggers tab for your device. 2. Click the row selector ! to select a Trigger row. 3. Click Remove to delete the selected row. 4. Click Save and Dose to save the device. iSTAR Triggers Tab Definitions Table 75 on Page 272 provides definitions for the fields and buttons on an iSTAR Triggers tab. Table 75: STAR T riggers Tab Definitions FiekUButton Description Add ClickAdd in the Triggers tab to aeate a new trigger. Remove Click the Row Selector . , then dick Remove in the Triggers tab to delete a trigger. 272 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226203 I as for S I AR Du,: sus Table 75: STAR Triggers Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Click the Row Selector to select a row in the Triggers table. Property Click within the Property column, and then click[. The Property browser opens presenting propertiesavailable for the Comm Port. Click a Property to select it and add it to the column. Value Click within the Value column to display a drop-down list of Values associated with the Property that you have selected. Click a Value that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column. Action Click® within the ActIon column to display a drop-down list of valid actions. Click an Action that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column. As you select an Action, a corresponding entry field, or group of entry fields, appear at the bottom of the dialog box. Click to select entries for these fields. Details Displays dela its about how the Action was configured. Schedule Click within the Schedule column to select a Schedule. Click [ji to select a Schedule that you want to associate with the trigger. Schedules are created in the Configuration Pane. Refer to the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information on creating Schedules. Time Zone Clickwithin the Time Zone column to select a Time Zone for Schedule activation. Clickri to select a Time Zone that you want to associate with the trigger Schedule. Typically you can chose either the C•CURE 9000 server (host) Time Zone or the Time Zone of the STAR controller. If you specify a Time Zone, the Schedule start and end times are calculated using that Time Zone. Example: A Schedule that becomes active at 3:00AM would become active at 3:00AM in the Pacific Time Zone, if that Time Zone was specified. Refer to the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information on Time Zones and Events. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 273 EFTA01226204 State Images Tab for 'STAR Devices State Images Tab for iSTAR Devices The State Images tab provides a means to change the default images used to indicate iSTAR device states on the Monitoring Station. From the State Images tab of an iSTAR device (such as a Controller, Input, Output, or Reader), you can perform the following tasks. ■ Customizing State Images for an iSTAR Device on Page 274 ■ Restore a Default State Image on Page 275 You can replace the default images with JPG formatted files of your choice, to uniquely identify your objects when activities are displayed on the Monitoring Station Client. iSTAR State Images Tabs Definitions on Page 274 provides definitions for the fields and buttons on an iSTAR Device State Images tab. iSTAR State Images Tabs Definitions iSTAR State Images Tabs have the State Images tabs as shown in Table 76 on Page 274. Table 76: iSTAR State Images Tabs Definitions Field/Button Description State This column lists the states that are defined for this STAR device. These are the states that are reported on the Monitoring Station to reflect the status of this iSTAR device. Image This column shows the images that are assigned to eadi of the iSTAR device states. There are images assigned by default to every iSTAR device you create. For any individual iSTAR device, you can use the State Images tab to substitute a different.JPG/JPEG image for the default image. See Customizing State Images for an iSTAR Device on Page 274 for instructions. Save and After you have made changes to any settings for the iSTAR device, dick Save and Close to save those changes and Close the C Esc editor for the device. Customizing State Images for an iSTAR Device From the State Images tab, you can change the images that appear in the Monitoring Station to represent an iSTAR device. To Customize an iSTAR Device State Image 1. Navigate to the State Images tab for the iSTAR device. 2. Double-click the existing image. A Windows Open dialog box appears, allowing you to browse for a folder in which you have placed replacement images. 3. When you locate the replacement image, select it and click Open to replace the default image with this image. 4. When you are done editing the device, click Save and Close to save the configuration. 274 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226205 State Images Tab for STAR Devices Restore a Default State Image You can restore the default state image for any of the states of an iSTAR device. To Restore the Default State Image 1. From the State Images tab, select an existing image. 2. Right-click the image and select Restore Default. 3. Click Save and Close to save the configuration. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 275 EFTA01226206 State Images Tab for STAR Devices 276 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226207 6 Configuring the IP-ACM This chapter explains how to configure the IP-ACM in C•CURE 9000. In this chapter IP-ACM Overview 278 IP-ACM Offline Mode 279 Configuring the IP-ACM 282 iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor .285 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 277 EFTA01226208 IP-ACM Overview IP-ACM Overview The IP-ACM provides connection and management of access control for two doors. Two readers can be configured on each IP-ACM. The IP-ACM acts as its own entity if it becomes disconnected from the iSTAR. Readers will remain active, with limitations. Offline access operation is buffered, and will be reported to the iSTAR Controller when communication is restored (determined by available memory.) Limitations ■ C•CURE 9000 only supports two readers (any combination of RM/Wiegand/BLE readers) connected to an IP- ACM. ■ The IP-ACM is supported on the iSTAR Ultra and the iSTAR Ultra SE in Ultra Mode. ■ Offline mode is supported for RM readers and Wiegand readers connected to the IP-ACM. ■ Offline mode is not supported for BLE readers connected to the IP-ACM. 278 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226209 IP-ACM Offline Mode IP-ACM Offline Mode Offline Mode allows a limited level of access and control if communication is interrupted between the IP-ACM and the iSTAR. Offline Access stores a set of credentials in non-volatile memory on the IP-ACM. Clearances are not downloaded to the IP-ACM and are not stored. IP-ACM Offline Mode is configured in the iSTAR Controller dialog box using the IP-ACMs tab. See the following: ■ Stored Credentials on Page 279 ■ Door Configuration on Page 280 Stored Credentials Predefined Credentials Predefined credentials are downloaded from the iSTAR controller in the form of raw data (Static Card Data). During offline, access will be granted when the predefined credentials (from the Static Card Data stored on the IP-ACM) are presented to the readers. The following restrictions apply to stored predefined credentials: ■ Personnel groups configured for Offline Mode must all share the same card format and facility code. ■ Card formats supported are: • Wiegand 26 • Wiegand 37 • Two-parity bit style formats • 32-bit serial number type formats. ■ Static records can only be deleted from the iSTAR Controller. Credentials Last Granted Access In offline mode, the IP-ACM board will admit cards that are among the last xxx previous admitted cards in addition to a pre-defined personnel group. ■ A total of 1000 credentials (not personnel) for both previous admitted credentials and credentials in the personnel group. ■ Maximum 100 personnel in the personnel group. ■ If you set the Personnel system variable "Maximum Cards Per Person", then that value must be taken into consideration. Example: If you set the "Maximum Cards Per Person" value to 3, then only 1000 -100 x 3 = 700 is allowed in the "Admit the last admitted cards" field for configuration. This is true, even if the personnel count in the personnel group selected is less than 100. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 279 EFTA01226210 IP-ACM Offline Mode Door Configuration Doors must have their readers, inputs, and outputs connected to the 1P-ACM and configured as follows: ■ Readers that are not IP-ACM readers cannot be used. ■ Entry reader must be connected as Reader 1 on Serial Port 2. ■ Exit reader must be connected to Wiegand Port 2. ■ DSM (Door State Monitor) must be connected to the IP-ACM onboard Input 1. ■ REX (Request to Exit) must be connected to the IP-ACM onboard Input 2. ■ Door lock must be connected to the IP-ACM onboard Output 1. The door operation parameters are fixed when the IP-ACM goes into Offline Mode and cannot be changed. The door parameters will go back to their configured settings when the IP-ACM goes back online. Offline fixed parameters: ■ Shunt time:10 seconds ■ Unlock time: 5 seconds ■ Relock delay time: YI second ■ Debounce time: 112 second ■ Unlock on RTE: Enabled ■ Shunt on RTE: Enabled ■ DSM shunted full shunt time: Disabled ■ Delay Relock full shunt time: Disabled The Offline door will not provide access if the Tamper input is active. NOTE IP-ACM Configuration Sequence The IP-ACM configuration sequence is described in Table 1 on Page 280. Table 1: IP-ACM Configuration Sequence Step Task See... Connect the IP-ACM to the nehvork. /P-ACMHardware Configuration Guide 2 Add the IP-ACM to the subnet: !STAR Configuration UtigyUser Guide 1. Open the STAR Configuration Utility (ICU). 2. Click IP-ACM to discover alIP-ACMs in the subnet. 3. Right-click on the IP-ACM in the list and select Configure IP-ACM. 280 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226211 IP-ACM Offline Mode Table 1: IP-ACM Configuration Sequence (continued) Step Task See... 3 Ensure that the STAR Controller (Ultra or Ultra SE in Ultra Mode) is configured in the Creating an STAR Controller on Page C•CURE 9000. 124 4 Access the STAR Controller dialog box IP-ACMs tab: STAR Controller IP-ACMs Tab on Page 1. Add the IP-ACM(s) to the controller. 282 2. Configure the IP-ACMs Offline Mode. 3. Configure the readers to connect to the IP-ACM. STAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor on Page 285 4. Configure the inputs. outputs. and triggers. 5 Configure a door with the readers in the IP-ACM. STAR Door Editor on Page 427 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 281 EFTA01226212 Configuring the IP-ACM Configuring the IP-ACM The IP-ACM configuration is accessed through the iSTAR Controller dialog box IP-ACMs tab, as shown in Figure 1 on Page 282. See Table 2 on Page 283 for descriptions of the fields. Figural: 'STAR Controller IP-ACMs Tab •-••••••••o••• 11 r pails/ Mkt Ofal r nor ICall I 0)1111 %PIM I .010I *MPI YeDiersid AMI WelwynI •••.Gem AlIP-AN, _; Mete AP PAO% . SI I•IS . OSA* l , 111111111111 r iSTAR Lim 1,40110a. I r cmus woods r •STM1We 0.01310n- r 6TIIIUmHOKUM. r OMUM11401541 r tt THUM•4044.4 r sunUMHOMO. r STMT ..qn r cum Up Oaken. OdiesikagINIP•ACIa• cots 1, thin•••••adailen••••• 0w Can f antisue ta nat.. elSr Moro tel. I guanin na. 'OW Wei:skirls $ • Pranci pap. aoktated *Mn , A penca•el (watts te ••• 'ix • le ow...n.00> rwaode WW001/14 10« n IV 5)!X. wing* Nay of sad* l•Scro fie Mode aOlSee 7rn Hurls S 01010 iMPCowin*.Cia•Mgcle 140 Say Reed TopTlaheld milacont is To Configure the IP-ACM 1. From the iSTAR Ultra Controller editor, click the IP ACMs tab, as shown in Figure 1 on Page 282. 2. Click on the Configured check box in the Index row that you want to add/edit. 3. Click El in the Edit column of the Index row to open the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor on Page 285. The iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM editor is used to configure the inputs, outputs, and readers (Wiegand, RM, BLE, and OSDP). 4. Configure the Offline Mode of All IP-ACM's configured on this controller. See Table 2 on Page 283 for descriptions of the fields. 5. When the IP-ACM(s) configuration is complete, click in the Enabled check box, and click Save and Close. 282 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226213 Configuring the IP-ACM Table 2: STAR Controller IP-ACMs Tab Definitions FielcUButton Description IP-ACMs Create All lP-ACMs Click to create the lP-ACMs. When you click Create All IP AC Ms the Configured column check boxes are selected. and you can click n in the Edit column to open the STAR Ultra IP ACM Editor to configure the IP ACM. Delete All IP-ACMs When you click Delete All IP-ACMs. the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all IP- ACMs. When the configuration is save, you are prompted to confirm deletion of each IP-ACM. Offline Mode of All IP-ACMs NOTE: The selections made in the Offline Mode of All IP-ACMs section will apply to all IP-ACMs configured on the controller. In offline mode, the IP-ACM board will admit cards that are among the last )oa previous admitted cards in addition to a pre-defined personnel group. - A totalof 1000 credentials (not personnel) for both previous admitted credentials and credentials in the personnel group. - Maximum 100 personnel in the personnel group. - If you set the Personnel system variable 'Maximum Cards Per Person', then that value must be taken into consideration. Example:lf you set the "Maximum Cards Per Person" value to 3. then onty 1000 -100 x 3 =100 is allowed in the 'Admit the last admitted cards' field for configuration. This is true, even if the personnel count in the personnel group selected is less than 100. Admit the last admitted cards Select a number from the menu that will apply to the previous cards that were admitted. Defautt: 0 Value: 0 to 1000 Card Format used by the members Select a card format to be used for personnel when in office mode. Only individual card formats are of the Personnel Group selectable. The card format is used to determine the card data stream for each person in the personnel group. Al personnel will use the same card format. The first facility code and site code in the list will be used if that format has multiple values. Admit the members of this personnel Click ri to select a pre-configured personnelgroup. group NOTE: The maximum value is 1000 admitted cards. If a Personnel Group isoonfigured to have 100 personnel members, the maximum value is reduced by 100 times the maximum number of cards per person configured in the System Variable. Number of seconds before Offline The time in seconds that the IP ACM waits to enter offline mode after it losescommunication with the GCM Mode isenabled. board. This setting will apply to all IP ACMson thiscontroller unless specified in the STAR Ultra IP ACM Editor General tab. Default: 10 seconds. Range: 5 to 30 seconds. Number of Days to Keep The number of days a credential is kept while in offline mode. Credentials in Offline Mode A value of 0 indicates not to keep a credential when in offline mode. Default: 30days Range: 0 to 9999 days C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chaptur 6 283 EFTA01226214 Configuring the IP-ACM Table 2: STAR Controller IP-ACMsTab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description High LatencyThreshold in The number of milliseconds thatwillcause a round-trip latency alarm. T his value willappty teal IP-ACM's milliseconds configured for thiscontroler. Default: 500 milliseconds (0.5 seconds) Range: 100-2000 milliseconds (0.1 to 2 seconds) 284 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226215 STAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor The iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM editor, shown in Figure 2 on Page 285, is used to configure readers, inputs and outputs. See the following for more information: ■ Accessing the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor on Page 285 ■ iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Inputs Tab on Page 291 ■ iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Outputs Tab on Page 286 ■ iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Wiegand Tab on Page 288 ■ iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM RS-485 Tab on Page 290 ■ iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Status Tab on Page 293 Figure 2: iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor 145ave ad< ISTAA IAa tPKM, Panda Dial r VOglaterce Mode GeW4 I Ir." I Osixes 'Wigged I RS451 Albs - Bard Lecaboi Cattuan lukr. 3 iP.agli 'limbo II MAC kidnxis ceckess I F Use NCI. r CA sibl• one neat Accessing the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor To Access the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor 1. From the iSIAR Ultra Controller editor dialog box, click the IP ACMs tab. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 285 EFTA01226216 STAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor 2. Click on the Configured check box in the Index row that you want to add/edit. 3. Click ri in the Edit column of the Index row to open the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM editor. Table 3: STAR Ultra Controller IP-ACM Editor General Tab Definitions FiskUButton Description Partition This read-only field identifies the Partition. Maintenance Click to put the IP-ACM into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 2: Maintenance Mode for more information. Mode Board Location Controller This field is read-only. IP-ACM This field is read-only. Number MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the IP-ACM. NOTE: You will not be able to edit this field after you enter the IP address and save the configuration. To change the MAC Address, you will need to delete the IP-ACM configuration and create a new one. IP Address The IP addressof the IP-ACM if not using DHCP. Use DHCP Click the check box to use DHCP. Deselect the check box to enter an IP Address. Default: DHCP isenabled. Offline Mode Disable offkne I Cid( the chedc box to disable offline mode on this IP-ACM. mode NOTE: This selection will override the Offline Mode of all IP-ACMs selections h the iSTAR Controls( Editor IP-ACMs tab for this IP-ACM. iSTAR Ultra P -ACM Outputs Tab The Outputs tab allows you to configure the Outputs for the IP-ACM. Table 4 on Page 287 provides definitions of the fields and buttons on the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Board Outputs tab. 288 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226217 STAR Uttra IP-ACM Editor Figure 3: STAR Uttra IP-ACM Outputs Tab NW* STAR lira IP ACM urn I 0 6"nrete ramma DAIS r SImlenerceMccle (Fenn I PPS. Clan w.asN I esatsI moms' sm.] OSS (CAMIOT EIE MIXEDFOR FIRE ALARM WERFACE) Ono. Al Outpx. Oman. Oat, Cl It Caliared Nom -,^nate MIMII F" QIpAIS TAR U4 IF AM utm 0.W.12•STiR ,J1-a IF ACMPA-5 1 Table 4: STAR Ultra IP-ACM Outputs Tab General Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Name Displays the name for this Output board. The name is system-generated bydefautt, but you can edit this name byclicking this field. Description Enter a textual comment about the Output board, such as its location or purpose. This text is for information only. Partition This read-onty field identifies the Partition in which this Output board resides. Maintenance Click to put the STAR Outboard Board into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 2: Maintenance Mode for more information. Mode Location Controller This read-only field identifies the iSTAR Controller to which this Output is attached. Board This read-onty field identifies the STAR Controller board to which this Output board is attached. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 287 EFTA01226218 STAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor Table 4: STAR Ultra IP-ACM Outputs Tab General Tab Definitions (continued) Fieldeutton Description Board Index This read-only field identifies the board index (which represents the SW1 address switch setting on the R/8 board) for this Output board. Outputs Create All Click to create all Outputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set toe. Outputs Delete All Click to delete all Outputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to Outputs Edit column Click® in thiscolumn to open the STAR Output Editor to edit this Output. NOTE: The Configured check box must be selected to open the Output Editor. Index column This read-onty field identifies the position of each Output (1 - 2) on the IP-ACM board. Configured a indicates that the Output has been oonfigured. column indicates that the Output has not been configured. NOTE: The Configured check box must be selected to open the Output Editor. Name column Displays the system-generated name for this Output. You can edit this name by clicking in the field. Template Displays the Template used for creating this Output. If the Output isnot yet configured, you can click in thiscolumn, then click to column select an Output Template. If the Configured column displays V thisfield cannot be edited. iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Wiegand Tab Use this tab to configure Wiegand readers connected to the IP-ACM board. Table 5 on Page 289 provides definitions of the fields and buttons on the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Wiegand tab. 288 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226219 STAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor Figure 4: STAR Ultra IP ACM Wiegand Tab laSave as Cam STAR tAra IP KM1'Ara 1 Parvxn. DedaA r giolenerco *de Geed I *Ss I Oats Ww9end I RS1S5 I Tenn I gay I Pat Once Al R*116111 Dein Al Readers Celt Iwkx Calwed Ilene Tadao F STAR Paw14,AR Uha PICWI 0ba r STAR PArkw2.51AR Ulf. P40.11Are 1 Table 5: STAR Ultra IP-ACM Wiegand Tab.Definitions Box Description Create All Clicktocreate all the Readers. When you click Create All Readers, the Configured column check boxes are selected. and you Readers can click® in the Edit column to open the STAR Reader Editor to configure a direct =inset Wiegand Reader. Delete All When you dick Delete All Readers, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Readers, and all these Readers Readers are immediately de kited (any settings you have oonfigured are lost). Edit Click .. in the Edit column to open the STAR Reader Editor to configure a Reader. See STAR Reader Editor on Page 248. column Index This column displays the number for each reader. This number is the physical port number for a Direct Connect Wiegand reader. column Configured Click in this column to create a reader (make it available to be edited). column Name Displays the name for this Reader. The name is system-generated bydefault. but you can edit this name by clicking in this field. column C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 289 EFTA01226220 STAR Ultra IP-ACM Edrtor Table 5: STAR Ultra IP-ACM Wiegand Tab.Definrtions (continued) Box Description Template Clain this column prior to creating the Reader, then click® to select a Reader template from the fist of available Reader column templates. The Template column shows the template name chosen if you selected a Template prior to creating the Reader. Readers 1 Select the dieck box in the Configured column for a Reader and dick 0 located in the EdIt column to open the iSTAR Reader -2 Editor General tab toconfigure the Keypad, Triggers, Groups, Statusand State Images that are associated with a Reader. See STAR Reader Editor on Page 248 for detaled instructions for configuring iSTAR Readers. The Name column displays a name comprised of the Reader Type and the iSTAR Controller name. You can dick in this column to edit the Reader name. iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM RS-485 Tab Use this tab, shown in Figure 5 on Page 290, to configure RS-485 ports connected to the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Board. Table 6 on Page 291 provides definitions of the fields and buttons on the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM RS-485 tab. Figure 5: STAR Ultra IP-ACM RS-485 Tab a Save ard Oast Mn ISTAA Urn IP P041Uln-1 hexane Puler roan geettaxece Mole General vats I Wan Ixttara aSerS I Type I Shea I RS135 Pan X0,111 Al Pub DA.* Al Ports fee Iles COeCiPed NOM r MAR DO'S POIUSTAR the •40114An.I r ,STAR Demo PothSTAR Ma P401lare.1 290 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226221 STAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor Table 6: iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Board RS-485 Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Create Al Click to create the RS-485 Ports. When you cid< Create All Ports the Configured column dieck boxes are selected, and you Ports can did< 0 in the Edlt column toopen the iSTAR Device Port Editor toconfigure an RS-485 Port. Delete Al When you dick Delete All Porta, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared focal Ports, and al Ports are Ports immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost). Edit column Click® in the Edit column toopen the iSTAR Device Port Editor toconfigure Device Ports for the IP-ACM. See iSTAR Ultra ACM RS-485 Device Port Editor on Page 188. Index column Thiscolumn displays the number for each Device Port. Configured Click in this column to aeate a Device Port (make it avalable to be edited). column Name column Displays the name for this Device Port. The name is system-generated by defautt, but you can edit this name by didong in clidc In this field. Device Ports 1 Select the check box in the Configured column for a Device Port and click El located in the Edit column to open the iSTAR -2 Device Port Editor General tab to configure the Readers and ACM extensions that are associated with the Device Port. See iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 248 for detaled instructions for configuring iSTAR Device Ports. The Name column displays a name comprised of the Device Port and the iSTAR Controller name. You can did< in this column to edit the Device Port name. iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Inputs Tab The Ultra IP-ACM Inputs tab lets you create and configure the Inputs that are attached to this Ultra IP-ACM Board. You can use an existing Input Template to create one or more of the IP-ACM Board Inputs. Click in the Template Column, then click C. A list of available iSTAR Input Templates appears. Click on the Template you wish to use. See Using Templates for Controller Inputs, Outputs, and Readers on Page 37 for more detailed information about using Templates to create Inputs. Table 7 on Page 292 provides definitions for the buttons and fields on the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Inputs tab. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 291 EFTA01226222 STAR Uttra IP-ACM Editor Figure 6: STAR Uttra IP-ACM Inputs Tab VC STAR Ma W.ACIA - iSTAR INACIAl.my ultra a Sava and Clore So* ISOM** PJCM Lalocrobca tsars • in. twin. lame, l Rif PO l lawn lan Scat., Irtexa• Feta Create AlMaratt oods.Misysb Ede *Ara, Calmed Nam Travails Image Terper4TM Uba IP-A00 Ccartneman I al Q Connataecafal4TAR It. Pot Apo Mem Rata 1 Pod Pave Mon SOS IrS7A Pot Pow Mr $110.• 2 I5 Pat Pow Alm SOY 24TA tack Pas Mr Sim 1 Lack Poor Alm Stow 14/ lack Am. Are Amt lock Poser Nis Sae 24i Gerent Ramo Pads Orte AIInputs Delete All Imparts Ed. Ma Coritand Noe Taws iSTAR Intl.STAA Ulm • fronana, Q 67AR V4124TAR lara F./CIA1,n. El cos IntISTAR taro INACM utra E o iSTAR loANSTAR Ulm 14CM*vita Table 7: STAR Ultra IP-ACM Board Inputs Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Special Purpose Inputs Tamper The Tamper input activates when the controller cabinet is opened or removed from its mounting surface. NOTE: For UL applications. this field must be enabled. Select the check box in the Configured column and click [—I boated in the Edit column to open the STAR Input Editor General tab to configure the Tamper input. From the Input Editor you can configure the Options, Triggers, Groups, Status and State Images that are associated with the Tamper Input. The Template column shows the template name chosen if you selected a Template prior to creating the Input. Communication A bgical unsupervised input that reflects the state of the communication between the GCM board and Processor-A on this IP- Fail ACM board. 292 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226223 STAR Uttra IP-ACM Editor Table 7: STAR Ultra IP-ACM Board Inputs Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Port Power Power indicator input for each RM /Weigand port. Alarm Status 1 Port Power Alarm Status 2 Lock Power IP-ACM can provide power for the locks directty from the 2 Output oonnectors (Lock Power 1 8,2). There are automatic over- Alarm Status 1 current shut-off switcheson each Lock Power. The Lock Power Alarm Status inputsgo Active when the over-current shut-off Lock Power switches are active (i.e., when Lock Power has been shutoff). Alarm Status 2 General Purpose Inputs Inputs 1 These standard general purpose supervised inputs are available on STAR Uttra IP-ACM boards. through 4 iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Status Tab The Status tab, shown in Figure 7 on Page 294, provides a read-only listing of information about the operational status of the selected iSTAR Ultra 1P-ACM Board. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 293 EFTA01226224 STAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor Figure 7: STAR Ultra IP-ACM Status Tab a1J=1 as...dame try ISTAct IN IP•KMI ltraSE 1 r Hata MUM Gino., I bat I Cucao I Wised I R.5415 I Tees Stew I Caretflai Anne 'ama I Menne MO Lawry la IFS. Table 8 on Page 294 provides definitions of the fields and buttons on the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Board Status tab. Table 8: STAR Ultra IP-ACM Board Status Tab Definitions Field/Button I Description Communication Status Unknown. Offline. or Online. Firmware Version Processor firmware. such as 00.00.36.00008 IP Address The IP-ACM IP address. High LatencyAlarm Possible status values are True or False. 294 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226225 7 Configuring Advanced Processing Controllers (apC) This chapter explains how to configure the apC, apC/8X, and apC/L software components to work with C•CURE 9000. In this chapter apC Panel Overview 296 apC Controller Configuration Summary 308 apC Comm Port Editor 310 apC Controller Editor 318 apC Input Editor 332 apC Output Editor 336 apC Reader Editor 340 apC Add-on Board Editor 347 apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab 354 apC Input Board Editor (132 and 18) 357 apC Star Coupler Board Editor 365 Triggers Tab for apC Devices 369 Mini Star Coupler Board Editor 373 Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler Editor 376 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter? 295 EFTA01226226 apC Pa nei Overview apC Panel Overview The advanced processing Controller (apC) panel is an intelligent field device that performs basic access control tasks. The apC, apC/8X, and apC/L are access control field panels that coordinate communication between the C•CURE 9000 server and the system security hardware, such as card readers. The apC/L is a smaller version of the apC, making it ideal for parking garages and small office buildings. MI apC/8Xs and some apC/Ls provide Flash ROM support, which lets you download firmware from the server to the panel. Up to three versions of firmware are available for download. See the Monitoring Station User's Guide for information about downloading firmware. Each apC, apC/8X, or apC/L in the system supports Wiegand, proximity, magnetic stripe, and RFID card technologies. The apC (apC/8X) configuration supports eight card readers wired in a daisy-chain arrangement. The apC/L configuration supports two card readers. The apC and apC/L have not been evaluated by UL. NOTE See the following sections for more information: ■ Features of apC Panels on Page 296 ■ Inputs and Mann Device States on Page 299 ■ Outputs and Readers on Page 299 ■ Optional Boards on Page 300 ■ apC Time Zones on Page 300 ■ Changing the Time Zone of an apC Controller on Page 303 ■ apC Time Zone Reports on Page 303 ■ apC Firmware Update on Page 306 ■ apC Controller Configuration Summary on Page 308 Features of apC Panels Several different types of add-on module expansion boards can be used for additional inputs and outputs.The apC firmware offers software-controlled features such as timed activation/deactivation commands, 32-bit card numbers, elevator access and anti-passback control. An apC panel can use multiple card technologies, site codes, and company codes. The apCs full-year real time calendar/clock allows activation and deactivation of cards on specified days. The apC panels can be connected via serial RS-232/485 or networked terminal servers. apC Panel The basic apC panel has eight supervised inputs, eight relay outputs and one reader port, capable of handling a maximum of eight readers, which are wired in a multi-drop configuration. Expansion boards can add reader ports, supervised inputs and additional outputs. By using expansion boards, bus modules and RM-4s, an apC can have as many as 128 inputs and 192 outputs. Depending on the amount of available memory, an apC panel can hold up to 40,000 cards in its database. See Table 77 on Page 297 for a listing of the standard apC panel's inputs, outputs and readers. Total indicates that this is the total number of inputs, outputs or readers for the apC panel. 298 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226227 apC Pa nelOverview There are three Star Coupler expansion boards that can be used with the apC panel to add inputs, outputs and readers : ■ Star Coupler - 8 RM readers, 8 relay outputs, 8 unsupervised inputs (see apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab on Page 354 for more information) ■ Mini-Star Coupler - 8 RM Readers (this is the same board as Star Coupler but inputs and outputs are not populated) ■ WPSC - Wiegand Prox Star Coupler includes 2 boards: • Lower board - 4 Wiegand signaling readers and 4 supervised inputs • Upper board - 4 Wiegand signaling readers and 4 supervised inputs (the upper board plugs into lower board) A Star Coupler Reader is an RM reader connected to a Star Coupler. The Mini Star Coupler Reader is an RM reader connected to the Mini Star Coupler and it differs from the Star Coupler only due to its having no inputs or outputs. The readers used by these Star Coupler expansion boards are RM or Wiegand signaling readers that are connected to a Star Coupler. Table 77: apC Inputs, Outputsand ReadersAvallable Board Inputs Outputs Readers Tamper Input 1 Power Failure Input I Supervised Inputs 8 Outputs 8 Readers 8 Iota: Supervised Reader Inputs 16 tutu: Reader Outputs 16 Iota. Add-On Boards 132 Supervised Input Board 32 Ilil Supervised Input Board 6 R48 Output Board R8 Output Board Star Coupler Readers 8 Iota: Star Coupler Reader Supervised Inputs 16 tutu: Star Coupler Reader Outputs 16 Iota. Star Coupler Unsupervised Inputs 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 297 EFTA01226228 apC Panel Overview Table 77: apC Inputs. Outputs and ReadersAvailable (continued) Board Inputs Outputs Readers Star Coupler Outputs 8 Star Coupler - Ministar Readers 8 total Star Coupler - Ministar - Reader Supervised Inputs 16 total Star Coupler - Ministar - Reader Outputs 16 total Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler Readers 8 total [Upper and Lower Boards] Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler Reader Supervised Inputs [Upper and Lower Boards] 8 apC/L Panel A basic apC/ L panel has two readers and two relay outputs. An apC/L is expandable up to 36 inputs and 38 outputs using RM-4s and bus modules. Depending on the amount of available memory, an apC/L panel can hold up to 40,000 cards in its database. apC/L panels with Flash EPROMS installed can have firmware upgrades downloaded from the host system. The apC/L has not been evaluated by UL. NOTE Table 78: apC/L Standard Inputs. Outputs and ReadersAvailable Board Inputs Outputs Readers Tamper Input 1 Power Failure Input Outputs 2 Readers 2 Supervised Reader Inputs 4 Reader Outputs 4 Add-On Boards 18 Supervised Input Board 32 R8 Output Board 32 apC/8X Panel A basic apC/8X panel has eight supervised inputs, eight relay outputs and one reader port, capable of handling a maximum of eight readers, which are wired in a multi-drop configuration. Expansion boards can add reader ports, 298 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226229 apC PanelOverview supervised input and additional outputs. Depending on available memory, an apC/8X panel can hold up to 160,000 cards in its database. apC/8X panels with Flash EPROMS installed can have firmware upgrades downloaded from the host system. See Table 77 on Page 297 for a listing of the apC/8X panel's inputs, outputs and readers. Total indicates that this is the total number of inputs, outputs or readers for the apC panel. Inputs and Alarm Device States An input is an object that associates an alarm device with an input on the panel or on an input board. There are two kinds of inputs: supervised and unsupervised. All alarm devices can be in one of two states: active or inactive. An input reports the state of the alarm device. A supervised input reports on the status of the wiring between the panel and the alarm device when changes in circuit resistance are detected. If wiring is cut, the system reports an open circuit. If someone attempts to create a jumper across the wiring (to prevent the device from reporting), the system reports a shorted circuit. Supervised inputs can report a total of five conditions to the apC: Short, Open Loop, Line Fault, Inactive or Active. The main board on the apC has eight supervised inputs. An unsupervised input does not monitor the wiring. Unsupervised inputs can report two conditions to the panel: Active or Inactive. With the star couplers, the apC has eight unsupervised inputs available. See To Configure apC Controller Inputs on Page 322 for more information. Unsupervised inputs have not been evaluated by UL. NOTE Supervised inputs can report five states: ■ Short ■ Open Loop ■ Normal ■ Alert ■ Line Fault Outputs and Readers Outputs An output is an object that associates an alarm device with an output on the panel board or add-on module. The output turns alarm devices, such as closed circuit TV or alarm dialers, on or off. See apC Controller Outputs Tab on Page 323 for more information. Readers A reader is a hardware device that accepts access requests. To make an access request, a person swipes or presents a card at the reader. The card reader scans the information encoded on the card and sends it to the apC panel, which grants or denies access. See apC Controller Readers Tab on Page 323 for more information. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter? 299 EFTA01226230 apC Panel OV01VI0W Optional Boards apCs and apC/8X panels support these optional (add-on) boards and controller: ■ 8 apC 1/8 - input modules and 1 apC 1/32 input board, and ■ 8 apC R/8 - output modules and 2 apC R/48 output boards, and ■ 1 Standard Star Coupler, or ■ 1 Mini Star Coupler, or ■ 1 Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler Star couplers enable you to wire the apC panel's 8 readers in a star, daisy-chain, or combination configuration. Star couplers also provide unsupervised inputs and additional outputs and readers for the apC and apC/8X. apC/L controllers and Mini Star Couplers have not been evaluated by UL. NOTE The apC/L supports two types of optional boards: four 1/8 - input modules and four R/8 - output NOTE modules. See apC Controller Add-On Board Tab on Page 324 for more information. Before you configure apC panels, the apC Hardware Interface must be started using the Server NOTE Management application - Server Components tab. Right-click the apC Hardware Interface and click Start Server Component apC Time Zones You can specify the Time Zone for an apC panel, so that the apC panel can support panel-based operations using the local date/time, and the display of the local date/time at door readers, in controller status screens, in Journal Messages, and in Reports. Example: If you specify that an apC panel is in the Pacific Time Zone (GMT- 08:00), and the C•CURE 9000 server is in the Eastern Time Zone (GMT- 05:00), a timed-based action that occurs at the apC panel, such as unlocking a Door, happens at local time (Pacific Time Zone) for the apC panel. Example: If you specify that an apC panel is in the Pacific Time Zone (GMT- 08:00), and the C•CURE 9000 server is in the Eastern Time Zone (GMT- 05:00), a server-based Journal message shows the server date/time (EST), while a panel-based Journal Message shows the panel date/time (PST) as highlighted in Figure 91 on Page 300. Figure 91: Journal Message Showing Local Date/Time *nag* Type Swop.Win lisp, Toll Mow* Dilstrias Mang* Loci/ DM✓iiw Dxci ❑erred Siege 2/28/20121.29 33 PM OS asaierrACH1.1da? pane( it 2/282012 taXi FM I v-iwzoiz12433R4 ocissatask main 300 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226231 apC Panel Overview Example: If you specify that an apC panel is in the Pacific Time Zone (GMT- 08:00), and the C•CURE 9000 server is in the Eastern Time Zone (GMT- 05:00), a Credential with an Expiration Date set as today at 5:00 PM will expire at 5:00 PM Eastern time, rather than Pacific Time, because the expiration occurs at the server, which is in the Eastern Time Zone. The Time Zone setting is configured on the apC controller General tab by selecting a Time Zone from the Time Zone field. See apC Controller General Tab on Page 319 for more information. You can change the value of the apC controller Time Zone field only when the apC Controller is not enabled (Enabled field is blank O). See Changing the Time Zone of an apC Controller on Page 303 for more information. apC Time Zones and Schedules Schedules in C•CURE 9000 are not configured directly with any Time Zone. They are dynamically associated with a local Time Zone when they are used in the C•CURE 9000 Server or are downloaded to a controller. That means that the same schedule can be activated at different times if it is used in different Time Zones. This is flexible, but also potentially complicated if you have controllers in different Time Zones. Example: You create a Schedule to manage Clearances for your night shift. When downloaded to an apC in another Time Zone, the Schedule works as expected. However, if you apply the Schedule to a C•CURE 9000 Server-based Event ("Lock all Doors" using the All Doors Group) that affects the Pacific Time Zone apC, the Event's actions would be triggered in the Server's Time Zone, rather than the Time Zone where the apC resides, perhaps causing Doors to be locked at the wrong time. However, if you create separate Schedules and name them to make it clear which Time Zone (or which controller) they are intended to be used with, you can avoid problems with Time Zone differences. Example: You create a Schedule to assign to Door and Elevator Clearances on your apC in the Pacific Time Zone called "Doors & Elevators - Pacific" and only use this Schedule for Pacific Zone. The Door and Elevator Clearances are downloaded to the apC controller The schedules used in an apC panel for timed actions are primarily associated with Door or Elevator clearances. When a Schedule becomes active, the Journal Message that is displayed identifies the Time Zone associated with the object (such as an apC panel) to which the Schedule is related. You can see the active/inactive status of your Schedules with the Schedule by Time Zones Dynamic View, accessible from the Configuration pane. See the Schedules chapter in the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information. Using apC Panel Time Zones with Trigger Schedules apC Triggers support the ability to designate a Time Zone for a Trigger, so that you can specify that the Schedule for activating the Trigger uses the same Time Zone as the apC panel. If you do not specify a Time Zone for the Trigger, the Trigger Schedule uses the C•CURE 9000 server Time Zone to determine when the Trigger can be activated. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 301 EFTA01226232 apC Pa ne i Overview See Defining a Trigger for an apC Device on Page 370 for more information about specifying a Time Zone for an apC Trigger. Using apC Panel Time Zones with Events You can add a Time Zone to an Event if you intend to activate a timed Action with that Event. The Event General tab includes a Time Zone field that you can use to determine when a Schedule you attach to the Event is Activated. See the Events chapter in the C• CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide. Time Zone for apC Panel Events For timed Actions defined in an Event (the Event is armed and/or activated by a Schedule) that the apC driver downloads to an apC panel to execute , the Time Zone for the Action is automatically set to the Time Zone of the apC Panel. You cannot change the Time Zone setting to a different Time Zone. Example: The C•CURE 9000 server is in the Eastern Time Zone (GMT - 05:00). The apC Panel is in the Pacific Time Zone (GMT - 08:00). If the Event is activated by a Schedule at 10:00 AM, it will be activated at 10:00 AM Pacific Time (the apC panel's Time Zone), not 10:00 AM Eastern Time. For an apC time-based action defined in a Event, if a Time Zone is specified in the Event, the apC driver only downloads the action to apC controllers with the same time zone as the Event. If the apC panel is online when the Event is activated by the Schedule, the apC driver sends the timed Action command to the apC panel. If the apC Panel is offline when the Event is activated by the Schedule, the apC panel performs the timed Action. However, the apC does not have the capability, after communication is re-established, to display activation and deactivation messages for an Event that occurred while the apC was offline. Time Zone for apC Host Events For a host Event (an Event that is initiated at the C•CURE 9000 server, without timed Actions downloaded to the apC Panel), you can specify any Time Zone for the Schedule on the Event General tab. The Time Zone does not need to match the time Zone of the apC panel. However, if the Time Zone of the Event Schedule and the Time Zone of the apC panel are different, a warning message appears to inform you of the discrepancy, called a Time Zone Mismatch, so that you will be aware that the timed Action will be activated according to the host Time Zone, not the apC panel Time Zone. Example: The C•CURE 9000 server is in the Eastern Time Zone (GMT - 05:00). The apC Panel is in the Pacific Time Zone (GMT - 08:00). If the Event is activated by a Schedule at 10:00 AM, it will be activated at 10:00 AM Eastern Time (server time), not 10:00 AM Pacific Time. If the apC panel is online when the host Event is activated by the Schedule, the apC driver sends the timed Action command to the apC panel. If the apC Panel is offline when the host Event is activated by the Schedule, the apC panel does not perform the timed Action, because the Event was not downloaded to the apC panel, and the panel is offline from the host. 302 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226233 apC Panel Overview Changing the Time Zone of an apC Controller You can change the value of the apC controller Time Zone field only when the apC Controller is not enabled (Enabled field is blank O). To change the Time Zone, you must edit the controller, clear the Enabled field, save the controller, then re-open it to change the Time Zone. If you change the Time Zone of the apC controller, the Time Zone settings of all child objects of that apC controller are changed as well. A warning message appears if you change the Time Zone and any Events have controller-based actions on this apC controller and the Event is configured to use a different Time Zone than this apC controller. To Change the Time Zone of an apC Controller 1. From the Hardware pane, select the apC controller you wish to change. Right-click and select Edit 2. Clear the Enabled field (change to O). 3. Click Save and Close to save the change. 4. From the Hardware pane, select the apC controller again. Right-click and select Edit 5. When the apC controller editor opens, the Time Zone field can be changed. 6. Click Save and Close to save the change. apC Time Zone Reports C•CURE 9000 provides several pre-defined Reports (and Queries) that can help you find Time Zone mismatches - where the C•CURE 9000 server and the apC panel are in different Time Zones, such that a host Event will be unable to activate an object on an apC that is offline.) for Events associated with apC panels in different Time Zones than the C•CURE 9000 server. Table 79: apC Time Zone Reports/Queries Report Query SWH70 - apC Input Groups with Time Zones SWH71 -apC Door Groups with Time Zones SWH 72 - apC Time Zone Mismatch Actions SWHrep72 - apC Tine Zone Mismatch Actions SWH 73 - apC Online Only Actions SWHrep73 - apC Online Only Actions SWH 74 - Actions with Time Zone Mismatch SWHrep74 - Actions with Tine Zone Mismatch Query See the Reports chapter of the C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide for more information about these Reports and Queries Creating Custom Reports for apC Actions and Time Zones In addition, you can use the Report Editor to create custom reports on apC controller actions, including Time Zone information. You can use the pre-defined Reports as starting points for your own custom Reports by clicking Create Copy and then customizing the copy. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 303 EFTA01226234 apC Panel Overview apC Controller Actions Report You can create a custom Report that lists apC Controller objects and all the actions triggered by the controller and its child objects (like doors, readers and inputs), as well as action items that should be loaded into the apC because they are configured in Event objects. If a Report Query is not specified, the report lists all the apC Controllers and all the actions, noting each action is Online Only - performed only if the apC panel is Online - if the custom fields in the Action Item class are selected. Specifying a Report Query allows you to select any apC Controller field and any Action Item field, including these custom fields: ■ Online Only - whether the action can occur only on an online apC) ■ Online Only Reason - the reason that an action can only occur on an online apC. Possible values are: • Time Zone Mismatch - The Time Zone of the timed action is different from the Time Zone of the controller. • No Firmware Support - The action is not supported by the controller, so it must be executed on the host. • Cross Panel Action - The action is activated by one controller and modifies an object on another controller. • Invalid Configuration - The action cannot be activated (for example, a change in Comm Fail status should cause an Event to activate an Output on the same controller, but the Comm Fail prevents the Event from communicating with the Output.) To Create an apC Controller Actions Report 1. Create a new Report - From the Data Views pane, select Report from the drop-down list of objects, then click New. 2. Select apC Controller as the Report type field. 3. Select apC Controller Actions as the Sub type field. 4. Click on apC Controller in the Class Selector. 5. In in the Field Selector, select the fields for the apC Controller class that you want to display in the Report. 6. Click on Action Item in the Class Selector. 7. In the Fields Selector, select any fields you want in the report (including the custom fields Online Only and Online Only Reason) for the Action Item class. 8. Optionally, you can click to select a Report Query as the basis of the report. SWHrep72 and SWHrep73 are available in the Report Query drop-down list for this purpose. 9. Click Save and Close to save the Report. 10. The Report is added to the Reports Dynamic View. You can double-click the Report to run it. Action Item Time Zones Report You can create a custom Report that lists Action Item objects (with the ability to query on any Action Item property) and additionally query on three additional custom fields in the Action Item Time Zone Sub type: ■ Source Time Zone - the Time Zone of the Source object of the action item (if any). ■ Target Time Zone - the Time Zone of the Target object (if any). 304 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226235 apC Pa nei Overview ■ Time Zone Mismatch - set to TRUE if the Time Zone of the Action Item is not equal to the Time Zone of the Source object and/or not equal to the Time Zone of the Target. To Create an Action Item Time Zones Report 1. Create a new Report - From the Data Views pane, select Report from the drop-down list of objects, then click New. 2. Select Action Items as the Report type field. 3. Select Action Item Time Zone in the Sub type field. 4. Click on apC Controller in the Class Selector. 5. In the Field Selector, select the fields for the apC Controller class that you want to display in the Report. 6. Click on Action Item Time Zone in the Class Selector. 7. In the Fields Selector, select any fields you want in the report (including the custom fields Online Only and Online Only Reason) for the Action Item Time Zone class. 8. Optionally, you can click to select a Report Query as the basis of the report. SWHrep74 is available in the Report Query drop-down list for this purpose. 9. Click Save and Close to save the Report. 10. The Report is added to the Reports Dynamic View. You can double-click the Report to run it. apC Door Group and Input Group Time Zones Report You can create a custom Report that lists either apC Door Groups or apC Input Groups and their Time Zones by editing the following pre-defined Reports, creating a copy, adding a Query, or customizing the Report Layout: ■ SWH70 - apC Input Groups with Time Zones ■ SWH71 - apC Door Groups with Time Zones Both of these pre-defined Reports: ■ Start with a Group Report ■ Use the Group Member field Time Zone Name to output the Time Zone of the objects in the Report. To Create an apC Door Group or apC Input Group with Time Zones Report 1. From the Data Views pane, select Report from the drop-down list of objects, then click gat 2. Select either: ■ SWH70 - apC Input Groups with Time Zones ■ SWH71 - apC Door Groups with Time Zones 3. Right-click and choose Edit. The Report editor opens. 4. Click Create Copy. A new Report opens in the Report editor, based on the pre-defined Report you chose. 5. Click EI in the Report form field if you want to select a different Report From. 6. Click EI in the Report query field if you want to select a Query for the Report. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 305 EFTA01226236 apC PanelOverview 7. Select Prompt for Query ❑p if you want to display a Query Parameter Prompt when the report is run. 8. Click the drop-down list for the Layout style if you want to change the Report layout. 9. Change the fields in the Class selector and the Field selector if you want to change the fields displayed on the Report. 10. Click the Layout Design tab if you want to manually change the Report design. 11. Click the Layout Preview tab to see a preview of how the Report will look. 12. Click Save and Close to save the Report. 13. The Report is added to the Reports Dynamic View. You can double-click the Report to run it. apC Firmware Update You can update the apC, apC/8X or apC/L firmware on apC panels from either the Admin Client or the Monitoring Station client. You can initiate a firmware update by right-clicking on the apC controller: ■ In the Hardware Tree. ■ In a Dynamic View in the Administration Client. ■ In the Status List - Controller in the Monitoring Station. The UL approved firmware to be used for the apC/8x panel is x.7ZF NOTE To Update Firmware on an apC 1. Right-click on the apC that you want to update. 2. Select Update Firmware from the context menu that appears (see Figure 92 on Page 306). Figure 92: apC Context Menu The Update Firmware selection does not appear if the apC is not Enabled or is off-line. NOTE 3. The apC Firmware Download dialog box opens (see Figure 93 on Page 307). 308 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226237 apC Panel Overview Figure 93: apC Firmware Download Dialog Box Inwrivoradt Download Gnaw Nee apc_l OsieriYotan B TV yalthitortitiri: 4. Select the firmware version that you want to download from the list in the dialog box. 5. Click Start firmware download. A progress bar shows you the when the download is completed. 6. When the download has completed, click Close to close this dialog box. Do not attempt to download firmware to more than one apC panel on a chain at one time, and do TIP not attempt to download firmware if that chain is busy doing a personnel download. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 307 EFTA01226238 apC Controller Configuration Summary apC Controller Configuration Summary Configuring an apC is a multiple task process because of the number of options available on the apC. The following summary gives you an outline of the configuration process, with links to topics that provide the details. Table 80: apC Configuration Summary Configuration See... 1. Create and configure an apC Comm Port. apC Comm Port Editor on Page 310 2. Create an apC Controller. To Create an apC Controller on Page 318 3. Use the apC Controller General Tab to configure the Connection Type, Comm Port, RM LCD Message apC Controller General Tab on set, apC Type, Time Zone, and apC Address. Page 319 4. Use the apC Controller Communications Tab toconfigurecommunicationsparametersfor the apC. apC Controller Communications Tab on Page 321 5. Use the apC Controller Inputs Tab to configure Panel Status Inputs and Supervised Inputs. apC Controller Inputs Tab on Page 322 Edit each apC Input on the apC Input Editor Triggers tab, and State Images tab, and view the Input's apC Input Editor on Page 332 statuson the Status tab. 6. Use the apC Controller Outputs Tab to configure apC Outputs. apC Controller Outputs Tab on Page 323 Edit each apC Output on the apC Output General Tab and State Images tab. and view the Inputs apC Output General Tab on Page groups and statuson the Groups tab and Status tab. 336 7. Use the apC Controller Readers Tab to configure apC Readersand options. apC Controller Readers Tab on Page 323 Edit each apC Reader on the apC Reader General Tab,11O tab, Keypad tab, Triggers tab, and State apC Reader General Tab on Page Images tab, and view the Inputs statuson the Status tab. 340 8. Use the apC Controller Add-On Board Tab to create and configure an apC add-on board. apC Controller Add-On Board Tab on Page 324 Edit each apC Add-on Board from the apC Add-on Board Editor, configuring Input Boards. Output apC Add-on Board Editor on Page boards, and Star Couplers. 347 Edit the apC Input boards from the apC Input Editor, creating l/32 and I/8 Input boards, as needed. apC Input Editor on Page 332 Edit each apC Input from the apC Input Editor, configuring Supervised Inputs and Status Inputs. If you created a Star Coupler, use the apC Star Coupler Board Editor to create Readers, apC Star Coupler Board Editor on unsupervised inputs. and outputs. Page 365 If you created a Mini Star Coupler, use the Mini Star Coupler Board Editor to create apC Readers. Mini Star Coupler Board Editor on Page 373 308 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226239 apC Controller Configuration Summary apC Configuration Summary (continued) Configuration See... If you created a WPSC, use the Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler Editor tocreate Readers and Wieland Proximity Star Coupler Inputs. Editor on Page 376 9. Use the apC Controller Triggers Tab to set up triggers for Actions based on apC controller property apC Controller Triggers Tab on states. Page 326 10. Use the apC Controller Holiday Groups Tab to add Holiday Lists to the apC. apC Controller Holiday Groups Tab on Page 327 11. You can view Controller Status from the apC Controller Status Tab. apC Controller Status Tab on Page 325 12. You can change the state images that appear in the Monitoring Station to represent this controller on apC Controller State Images Tab the apC Controller State Images Tab. on Page 330 13. You can view the apC Controller groups to which this apC belongs on the Groups Tab for Hardware Groups Tab for Hardware Devices Deviceson. on Page 28 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 309 EFTA01226240 apC Comm Port Editor apC Comm Port Editor You need to create and configure an apC Comm Port object for your apC to establish communications with C*CURE 9000. An apC panel can communicate with serial port connections, using RS-232 connections to an RS-485 converter, or via an Ethernet-connected network. For general instructions about the Hardware pane see Using the Hardware Pane on Page 20. To Configure an apC Comm Port 1. To configure an apC Comm Port, open the Hardware Pane,select the Hardware Folder in which you want the apC Comm Port to reside, and right-click to display the Hardware Folder context menu. Click apC Comm Port then click New. Figure 94: Creating an apC Comm Port Ha in Warr • amine 12 DalaiLeta, rba iff ISC CanPat; Ando LCD Mosso Sat O [cow. Nano PatinrcDaltd O Pathan 1(PeesnPaaisa 1) Pallxn 2 retlicetPealon 2) 1:2 Sollwage Novel paikoDei. Sanwa* Nou.IA CJ SoihrznHowe 2PesibT4 • 0 Unestwed 6TAR Oust* • IX Cotrol,* • 40C Controle• WAS Peaty COM Hebb • )FTWA The apC Comm Port editor appears (see Figure 95 on Page 311). See Table 81 on Page 313 for definitions of the fields on the Comm Port editor General Tab 310 Chapter? C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226241 apC Comm Port Editor Figure 95: apC Comm Port Editor You may also choose New Template. For further information about creating Templates, see Creating a Template on Page 34. 2. Enter a unique Host Communications Port Name (required). 3. Optionally, enter a textual description of the apC Comm Port in the Description field. 4. Select the Enabled check box if you want the Comm Port online after you have completed the configuration procedure. 5. Select the Communications Type. • For an apC Controller that uses a network communications path, click Network Port. See Configuring an apC Comm Port Network Connection on Page 312. • For an apC that uses a serial connection to the C•CURE 9000 server, click Serial Port. See Configuring an apC Comm Port Serial Port on Page 312 • For an apC that uses a redirected serial connection to the C•CURE 9000 server, click Redirect Serial Port. See Configuring an apC Comm Port Redirect Serial Port on Page 313. 6. You can set a Port Timeout Delay Time in tenths of a second units by typing it within the entry field or by using the selection arrows. The range is 0 through 99; the default entry is 0. 7. When you have completed configuring the apC Comm Port General tab, you can click Save and Close to save your changes, or you can click the Triggers tab (see apC Comm Port Triggers Tab on Page 315) to continue configuring the apC Comm port. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 311 EFTA01226242 apC Comm Port Editor Configuring an apC Comm Port Network Connection To Configure an apC Comm Port Network Connection 1. Type a unique IP Address in the IP Address field. This must be the IP Address of the terminal server being used to communicate with the C•CURE 9000 system. 2. Select a TCP Port, the address of the node from which the apC Host TCP Port communicates with the C•CURE 9000 system. The values range from 0 through 9999. The default entry is 3001. 3. Select a Re-connection Retry Period in tenths of a second units by typing it within the entry field or by using the selection arrows. The values range from 0 through 99. The default entry is 30 (3 seconds). Configuring an apC Comm Port Serial Port To Configure an apC Comm Port Serial Port 1. When you choose to configure a Serial Port, select the Communications Type Serial Port from the drop-down list. The Name field will reflect the port number that you select. The range is COM1 through COM256. 2. As in the Network Comm Port, you can set a Port Timeout Delay Time in tenths of a second. The range is 0 through 99, the default entry is 0. Figure 96: apC Comm Port Editor, Serial Port options co lin I 12844414b4, r E441944 Partike. Dthal F Hertenar<e Mcde Greet I w4944 Green I 944.4 19eo twos I Cowinacny tn. e" let Poe • Ser4Pat • Reittect Serial Pori Port Semro Pon Ticneo.t Delay Time (1)104•4) a IP Caren Pon 312 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226243 apC Comm Port Editor Configuring an apC Comm Port Redirect Serial Port To Configure a Redirect Serial Port 1. When you choose to configure a Redirect Serial Port, select the Communications Type Redirect Serial Port button. In the Port Settings box, select a corn port from the drop-down list. The Name field will reflect the port number that you select. The range is COM1 through COM256. 2. As in the Network Comm Port, you can set a Port Timeout Delay Time in tenths of a second. The range is 0 through 99, the default entry is 0. Figure 97: apC Comm Port Editor, Redirect Serial Port Options uwi asicooloon A r &ebb! Perth:. Nall r tfornerarce lkdo Galen! I Times I Goss I Stsius I Stzte mom I Carmarcaer. Tn. r Network Pot Sae/ Port a Rent Sergi Poi Art Searto Pat Tom. new Tone (110sec): Caren Part ae-ccenKtirm Pay PericrginOitC) Ir The Fields on the apC Comm Port General tab are described in Table 81 on Page 313. Table 81: apC Comm Port Field Definitions Field Description Name Enter a unique name up to SO characters long for the controller. If you enter the name of an existing object, the system returns an error message indicating there is a conflict. Description Enter a textual oomment about the controller, such as its location or purpose. This text is for information only. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 313 EFTA01226244 apC Comm Port Editor apC Comm Port Fall Definitions (continued) Field Description Enabled This setting determineswhether or not the apC Comm Port is able to provide communication between the apC Controller and the C•CURE 9000 Server. Select Enabled to set the Comm Port online. To take the Comm Port offline, you can clear the Enabled selection. NOTE: If the apC Comm Port iscurrentty in use by apC controllers, you must disable allof the controllers before you attenpt to take the Comm Port offline. If any apC controllers are enabled when you attempt to take the apC Comm Port offline, an error message is displayed -'Port cannot be disabled with enabled controllers. Please disable controllers fast. When the controllers are re-enabled they will do a full personnel download' The message explains that when you re-enable the apC Comm Port, then re-enable the apC controllers, each controller will perform a full personnel download. Maintenance Click to put the apC Comm Port into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 2: Maintenance Mode for more information. Mode Partition This read-only field dentifies the Partition in which this Controller resides. If you are creating a new Controller, the Partition that is currentty the New Object Partition for your Operator account is automaticalty assigned to each Controller you create. If you want to change the Partition of a Controller, you must move the Cluster in which the Controller resides. See Using Drag and Drop in the Hardware Tree on Page 27. Communications Type Network Select Network Port if you are using a terminal sewer to connect your apC to C•CURE 9000. Port Serial Port Select Serial Port if you are using a serial oonnection for your apC. Redirect Select Redirect Serial Port if you are redirecting the serial connection for an apC to a serial port that is physicalty on a Terminal Serial Port Server, but logicalty on the C•CURE 9000 Server. Port Settings Port Timeout The Port Tlmeout Delay Time is the extra interval that the host waits for a response from the apC panel after sending a Delay Time message to the panel. If the host does not receive a response in the specified time, the host retransmits the message or declares a (1/10 sec) communications failure. Thisfield allows you to set the timeout delay for all panels that use a speacport.Software House recommends that you set this period to 20 (2 seconds). However, if you require additional delay time because apC panels run on a Digiboard, Equinox board, or over a network, you may need to increase this value. Keep this value as small as possible, or system performance may be affected. If your panelgoes into communications failure often, try setting thisvalue between 30 (3 seconds) and 50 (5 seconds). Re- Re-connection Retry Period is the duration that the host waitstodeclare an unresponsive panel to be in failure. Software connection House recommends that you set this period to 300 (30 seconds) which is the default value. Retry Period (1/10 sec) IP Address The IP address of the terminal server C•CURE 9000 that is being used to communicate with the C•CURE 9000 system. TCP Port The address of the node from which the apC Host TCP Port communicates with the C•CURE 9000 system. T he values range from 0 through 9999. The default entry is 3001. Serial Port and Redirect Serial Port Options 314 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226245 apC Comm Port Editor apC Comm Port Field Definitions (continued) Field Description COM Port Select the Communications Type Serial Pon from the drop-down list. The Name field wireflect the port number thatyou select. The range is COM1 through COM256. apC Comm Port Triggers Tab The apC Comm Port Triggers tab allows you to set up Triggers - configured procedures used by C•CURE 9000 to activate specific actions when a particular predefined condition occurs. This tab provides you with ability to activate an event based on the Comm Status of the apC Comm Port. If the Comm Status property of the apC Comm Port changes, you can specify the event you want to activate. A typical use for a Comm Port trigger would be to warn the Monitoring Station of a communications failure. You can configure an event that would send a message requiring acknowledgment when the apC panels are unable to communicate with the host. 1. Click the apC Comm Port Triggers tab to provide a means to link the Comm Port to an event. Example: A typical use for a Comm Port trigger would be to warn the Monitoring Station of a communications failure. You can configure an event that might send a message requiring acknowledgment when the apC panels are unable to communicate with the host, as shown in Figure 98 on Page 315. Flours 98: apC Comm Port TriggersTab „IAA Win <of Comm Path DIOCAPKM %tack Correruncaos Port A Erebied Pinion DOA El:we:Nice tie owes Non lawnI stew I &seems I M4 as;team PIM* vrr Attla Dade Can, Steen CcmmFW terse Eve* . °waft., Snit cc CsPSFi !Mb 2. Choose a Property for he Trigger from the Property drop-down list. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 315 EFTA01226246 apC Comm Port Editor 3. Select the value that you want to activate the Trigger from the Value drop-down list. 4. Pick the Action you want the Trigger to perform from the Action drop-down list. 5. Depending upon the Action you chose, you may need to select the Action details from the Details field. For example, if you chose to Activate an Event with the Action, you need to select an Event from the Details field. Click El and select an Event from the selection box that appears. 6. Click Save and Close to save the Trigger settings for the apC Comm Port. apC Comm Port Status Tab The Status tab provides a read-only listing of critical information about the operational status of the selected apC Comm Port including: ■ Communications Status - displays the values Unknown or CommFail. ■ Online Status - displays the values: Online, Disabled or Offline. Figure 99: apC Comm Port • Status Tab apC Comm Port State Images Tab The State Images tab provides a means to change the default images used to indicate communication port states. These images appear on the Monitoring Station and change according to the state of the object that they represent. The apC Comm Port - State Images tab is shown in Figure 100 on Page 317. 316 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226247 apC Comm Port Editor Figure 100: apC Comm Port State Images Tab To Change a State Image 1. Double-click the existing image. A Windows Open dialog box appears allowing you to browse for a folder in which you have placed replacement images. 2. When you locate the replacement image, select it and click Open to add it to the image listing. 3. If you are done editing the apC Comm Port, click Save and Close to save the Comm Port's configuration. Alternatively, if you want to save the Comm Port and create a new one, click Save and New. The Comm Port Editor remains open to allow you to create a new Comm Port. To restore the default image, right-click on the new image and select Restore Default. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 317 EFTA01226248 apC Controller Editor apC Controller Editor The apC Controller editor allows you to configure apC, apC/8X, and apC/L panels and their connected Input boards, Output Boards, Readers, Inputs, and Outputs in C•CURE 9000. For more detailed information about the apC panel and its options, see the apC Panel Overview on Page 296. The apC Controller Editor has the following tabs: • apC Controller General Tab on Page 319 • apC Controller Communications Tab on Page 321 • apC Controller Inputs Tab on Page 322 • apC Controller Outputs Tab on Page 323 • apC Controller Readers Tab on Page 323 • apC Controller Add-On Board Tab on Page 324 • apC Controller Status Tab on Page 325 • apC Controller Triggers Tab on Page 326 • Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 28 • apC Controller Holiday Groups Tab on Page 327 • apC Controller User Defined Fields Tab on Page 329 • apC Controller State Images Tab on Page 330 To Create an apC Controller 1. To configure an apC controller from the C•CURE 9000 Administration Hardware pane, select the Hardware folder for which you want to configure an apC Controller and right-click to display the context menu, as shown in Figure 101 on Page 318. Figure 101: Hardware Pane apC Controller Selection • Herd...ace Folder Hardware Tree Search • Hardware Ceetifscates RUC —' 4 Edit X Detete tD Export selection... Find in Audit Log... Find in Journal... j, CVO" s C.CURE Mobile apC Comm Port ri au 'STAR Cluster ti ISC Controller Ifeleti apC Controller k Neve New Template Card Formats and Keys • 318 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226249 apC Controller Edda( From the Hardware context menu, choose apC Controller and New. The apC Controller General tab appears, as shown in Figure 102 on Page 319. You may also choose New Template. For further information about creating Templates, see Templates on Page 34. If the New and New Template selections are unavailable, you may be trying to create an apC in a Partition that is not your New Object Partition, or you do not have Privileges to create objects in this Partition. Check the C•CURE 9000 Menus to verify that your New Object Partition setting is correct, and check with your C•CURE 9000 administrator that you have the correct Privileges. apC Controller General Tab The apC Controller General tab provides a means to select the Communications Port, RM LCD Messages, and to identify the apC panel type. Figure 102: apCControler GeneralTab aid So.• ed nti• Ens.* Neel. me?... 5w...own... o••••• ay. I Amo.pesc.am.I is. I ramldwl asserml iraara PasI sseasl Gael JJ 70,10 1111•4 syn. Ir . Ise bow elowl•••••16140W4•••••••••••••••••• MS. SNI. aigrant r a Al im._ To Configure the apC Controller General Tab 1. In the apC Controller General tab, type a unique controller Name and a corresponding Description (optional) in the identification fields at the top of the apC Controller dialog box. 2. Maintenance Mode - Click to put the apC Controller and/or its components into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 2: Maintenance Mode for more information. 3. Click the Enabled check box when you are ready for the apC to establish communications with the C•CURE 9000 server. You should wait until you have configured the controller settings and some or all of the Inputs, Outputs, and Readers before enabling the apC. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 319 EFTA01226250 apC Controller Edda, The apC Comm Port you choose in Step 5 must also be Enabled; otherwise, the apC cannot NOTE remain enabled. If you save the apC controller after assigning a disabled apC Comm Port, the apC will go offline and when you open the apC object again in the apC editor, the Enabled check box will no longer be checked. 4. Select Direct Connect as the type of connection between the host and the apC. Use the Port field in this dialog box to specify a port to which the apC chain is connected. 5. To select a host communications Port for the apC controller, click 0 in the Port field to select an apC Comm Port. Software House strongly recommends that you select an apC comm port that is in the same NOTE partition as your apC. The example in Figure 102 on Page 319 shows the selection of a Serial Port connection. 6. To select a particular customized set of LCD messages for the RM Readers, click 0 to display a Reader LCD Message Set selection list. If you leave this field blank (the default), the Readers use the default messages. 7. Select the Time Zone in which your apC panel resides by clicking and selecting the Time Zone from the list that appears. If you leave this field blank, the apC panel Time Zone defaults to the C•CURE 9000 server setting. You can only change the value of the apC controller Time Zone when the apC Controller is not enabled (Enabled field is blank O). See Changing the Time Zone of an apC Controller on Page 303. 8. Select the type of apC panel you are configuring from the apC Type and Address box: • apC • a pC/8X • apC/L 9. Rotary switch settings can also be set on the apC panels using the two Switch entry fields. For apC/L panels, the rotary switches are labeled 3-8 and 1. For all the other apC types, switches 4 and 5 are displayed. The range of settings is 0 through 9 or A through F for all but Switch 3-8, which has a range of 0 or 1. The values you enter for Switch 4, Switch 5, Switch 1, and Switch 3-8 should match the switch settings on the physical apC controller. 10. The Panel is nearly full when it reaches the percent of capacity field allows you to enter a range from 0% to 99%. 11. The final entry field on the apC Controller - General tab is in the Priority box. Select a numeric value to assign a Base Priority for Cause. The range is from 0 to 255. When configuring an Event, you can assign an Event Priority. The Event Priority allows you to rank the importance of a particular Event relative to other Events in the system. If Events occur simultaneously, Event Priorities enable the system to execute responses in the proper sequence. C•CURE 9000 provides eight priority ranges, each containing 25 priority settings, for a total of 200 possible Event Priorities. 12. Click the Communications tab to display it, as shown in Figure 103 on Page 321. You can also click Save and Close to return to the Hardware Pane and finish the apC Controller configuration later. 320 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226251 apC Controller Editor apC Controller Communications Tab To Configure the apC Panel Communications Tab 1. In the Communications tab, as shown in Figure 103 on Page 321 enter the period in tenths of a second that the panel driver (on the Server) attempts to communicate with this panel in the Poll Period field. For example, if you enter 10, the panel driver communicates with this panel a minimum of once per second. You can set different poll periods for each panel that you configure. This field is not available when Dialup is selected in the Connection Type list box. Software House recommends that you set the poll period to 20 (2 seconds). Setting this value lower than 20 causes the host to receive activity from the panel more quickly but could cause the driver to interfere with other programs running on the server at larger installations. This is especially true if the panel is on a network port. The range is 0 - 850. Setting the poll period to more than 30 will result in up to a 3 or 4 seconds delay between reading the NOTE card and opening the door. Figure 103: apC Controller - Communications Tab two k W.... Ferro 1..14.10•441 r sirserase es.s c.....sprimiempain.d.itesearsigsrisamierisissistressiimakmals•12.•• 1 - Cowman* 0•••••Maiind Ira M3••••••••0191.4•0 It PlidaneieSslindthrtims01••••) 1= )0 - 3 MlOsadoldellailliSPOISH1100.0 105, II•aesalandiftlimOmal fl 2. Enter the extra interva in tenths of a second that the host waits for a response from this panel after sending a message to the panel in the Poll Timeout delay time field. If the host does not receive a response in the specified time, the host retransmits the message or declares a communications failure. Software House recommends that you set this period to 80 (8 seconds). However, if you require additional delay time because the panel runs on a Digiboard, Equinox board, or over a network, you may need to increase this value. Keep this value as small as possible, or system performance may be affected. If your panel goes into communications failure often, try setting this value between 80 to 110. The range is 0 - 999. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 321 EFTA01226252 apC Controller Editor 3. Enter the interval in tenths of a second that the host waits to declare an unresponsive panel to be in failure in the Panel communications failure delay time. A message appears on the Monitoring Station in the case of a panel failure. Software House recommends that you set this period to 200 (20 seconds). The range is 0 - 850. 4. Enter the interval in tenths of a second that the system polls the panel while it is in communications failure in the Poll period while in communications failure entry field. Typically, you should set this value higher than the value for the initial poll period to avoid slowing down polling of other units on the chain. Software House recommends that you set this period to 200 (20 seconds). The range is 0 - 999. 5. Enter the time period in minutes and seconds (mmss format) that the panel waits for a message from the host after receiving the communications failure message from the host in the Host communications failure delay time entry field. If the panel does not receive a message in the specified time, the panel declares a communications failure. Software House recommends that you set this period to 30 seconds. 6. Click the Inputs tab to display it, as shown in Figure 104 on Page 322. apC Controller Inputs Tab To Configure apC Controller Inputs To configure Inputs, select the check box in the Configured column (see Figure 104 on Page 322) and click located in the Edit column to display the apC Input editor General tab. See the apC Input Editor on Page 332. Figure 104: apC Controller Inputs Tab SO= lbw imuro AA_ Mao r sown csms I ants Ivo pupal Aral Allialimii•••11•••itsphidsplirpl immOdiralitiSI Issas.' [ PPOISPoili g oisnerva _ 0Ss Sled* i Sam Ciampi I NE. leers I TCra" ✓ , ♦04•1•MPOS _C••••••••• IN Ida I-. ✓ aX marmot* ✓ aPC InIelleC • ..ene ✓ art m4,01 ✓ Pea.C1 322 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226253 apC Controfier Editor Click the Delete All check box where ever it appears and then click Save and Close if you want to NOTE eliminate all the Inputs, Outputs, or Readers that you have configured in a given dialog box. To take an apC panel offline, remove the check from the Enabled option check box located below each Reader, Input, or Output board Description entry field (located in General tabs). Use the Template column to quickly configure all in a particular set of inputs, outputs or readers. TIP apC Controller Outputs Tab To Configure apC Outputs 1. To configure Outputs, select the check box in the Configured column in the apC Outputs tab. 2. Click [J located in the Edit column to display the apC Output Board General tab. 3. Use the apC Output editor to configure the output (See apC Output Editor on Page 336) Figure 105: apC Controls( Outputs Tab apC Controller Readers Tab The apC Controller Readers tab, shown in Figure 106 on Page 324, allows you to configure devices that supply Wiegand, magnetic stripe and proximity card signaling. To Configure an apC Reader 1. Select the check box in the Configured column for the apC Reader (Index 1 through 8) you want to configure. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 323 EFTA01226254 apC Controller Editor 2. Click 0 located in the Edit column to open the apC Readers General tab(see apC Reader General Tab on Page 340). 3. Choose either of the following options for all readers on the Readers tab: • Allow card numbers to be entered from the keypad. • Use PIN+1 as duress code. • Always use Shunt Expire Output on Door Figure 106: apC Controller ReadersTab s_LJLIE &vendam Om "'pc' Dosafloor P Enatied Pinta Ilan Wag r 163otcrunct Mode Genni ICammcaore Itroas I awl 8e4ecrs I midOn 85551 Ster.2 I Tom I Gass I Howe/ Grtuas I Ow Delesi ASS I kite mages P.M:ma r Can al Ittains :eels Al Peals Eat h382 Galena Irk= Tarobte I P arC Roodetlapc tat 2 17 WC 14•1812584 too 3 r apC Ree28.358C-1 L_Li A r ark Flew. , 5 r apC 5480.0358C-1 s r apC ReslakpC4 7 r apt Fladiew01 8 r 8K Flosa485C-1 —Deer end Rader Opiate r aid-tea ..wind Gmbraid r u.,FINtindinee cede r any, we Shwabgir•Oulostbakce You may configure an apC Reader from the apC panel Readers tab or from the Add-on Board tab. A NOTE reader index configured on one tab will be unavailable on the other tab. The location chosen will affect the possible reader type and reader input/output option selection. apC Controller Add-On Board Tab The Add-On Board tab, as shown in Figure 107 on Page 325, provides a means to expand the capabilities of the apC panels. Expansion boards can add reader ports, supervised inputs and additional outputs. 324 Chapter? C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226255 apC Contra!ter Editor To Configure Add-On Boards Using the apC Add-On Board Tab To start the configuration of Add-On Boards, select the check box in the Configured column in the apC Add-On Board tab and click 0 located in the Edit column to display the apC Add-On BoardGeneral tab (see apC Add-on Board Editor on Page 347). Figure 107: apC Coniroler Add-OnBoar0Tab apC Controller Status Tab The Status tab, as shown in Figure 108 on Page 326, provides a read-only listing of critical information about the operational status of the selected apC Controller including ■ Online Status - indicates whether the controller is online and communicating with the system. ■ Firmware Version - the version of the firmware used by the controller. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 325 EFTA01226256 apC Controfier Editor ■ Communications Status - displays the values Unknown, CommFail, Comm. Normal, Comm. Loss, Comm. Password Fail, Firmware Download, Card Download, Comm. Tamper, Comm. Power Fail or Comm. Battery Low. ■ Connection Type Status - displays the values: Unknown, Conn. Normal, Conn. Direct, Conn. Dialup, Conn. Dialing, Conn. Disconnected, or Conn. Connected. ■ Current Personnel Records - displays the number of records. ■ Panel state status - displays the values Unknown, Panel Normal, Panel Tamper, Panel Power Failure, Configuration Download, Full Personnel Download, Full Download, Database Backup or Panel Battery Low. Figure 108: apC Controller Status tab Sere Ix, arAtCOOr P Erie; Panora Man Wag ENreArkyce Mere GcnaS IC:rm./x.1n Ihxts I Oicas I Rnees I A:100+ Coal $tilea I hp-ars 1 Gni...4 I Hada/ Gro.od Uw Nene, 40:0 Sae maGei Drenc Sulu, Fam•vt WIst.n I CcenracafaCe SOW CalebeCbC.1 Type Stn.. aw RAN I Curren Perwevi Reccres Mantuan PSKr✓tl ReCo apC Controller Triggers Tab See the following for information on apC Triggers: ■ Triggers Tab for apC Devices on Page 369. ■ Defining a Trigger for an apC Device on Page 370. ■ Removing a Trigger on Page 272. You can click Save and Close after configuring apC triggers, or navigate to the Status tab. 326 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226257 apC Controller Editor apC Controller Holiday Groups Tab A Holiday is a day or set of days that you configure to allow scheduling access control variations to time-based events and to vary the normal lock and unlock time specifications. You can include a Holiday in a Holiday Group and assign a Holiday Group to a schedule. You need to configure the Holiday Groups that should apply to each apC, so that schedules on that apC respect the correct Holidays. If a Holiday Group is not listed on this tab, the Holidays it contains are not applied to this apC. Holiday Groups were called Holiday Lists in C•CURE 800/8000. NOTE If a schedule downloaded to the apC has a Holiday Group assigned, and that Holiday Group is listed on this tab, the activation times in the Holiday Group are evaluated. If the schedule is active and one of the Holidays in the Holiday Group is active, the start time and end time assigned with the Holiday Group become the schedule's start time and end time. For more information about apC Holiday Groups, see the C• CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide. To use the Holiday Groups tab, see Configuring Holiday Groups for an apC Panel on Page 327 for more information. Configuring Holiday Groups for an apC Panel You can download any holiday Group to an apC panel from the Holiday Group Configuration dialog box. A Holiday Group downloaded to an apC panel acts as an override to prevent activation of normally scheduled clearances on the Holidays defined in the Holiday Group. You can configure up to 8 holiday groups for each apC panel. Only Holiday Groups that are downloaded to an apC panel will affect access control at that panel. To Select Holiday Groups for the Panel 1. On the Holiday Groups tab of the apC Controller dialog box, click the Add button. The Group selection box appears allowing you to choose the Holiday Groups that you have configured, as shown in Figure 109 on Page 328. 2. For each Group that you want to download to the apC panel, click that Holiday Group in the Group box and click OK to add it to the Holiday Group(s) box. You can select more than one Holiday Group when you click the Control (Ctrl) key as you select the available Holiday Group. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 327 EFTA01226258 apC Controller Editor Figure 109: apC Controller HolidayGroups Tab Pr" sILILIE Pre •e:: • Zn•crimor P Enatiee Pallor Ma Mx, 163.reenwct Mcce eonI OPTarkaals I 'Mae I oats I Pews, I MOOn Cord I Staled %gen I Gate Moktry Gross I Uw Ddrel Atka I Ise ruces Heidi. &awe "I' Add. .P.ara,t Heft Otiect Salomon SekciInt ',am< bag <On+, ro ert4.01, by here Neat ' I Ps I Oescnvocr hoetoilk, Ave I Hew., Go Doli.it 3. Click OK to save add the selected Holiday Groups. 4. A selected Holiday Group appears in the Holiday Group(s) box, as shown in Figure 110 on Page 329. 328 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226259 apC Controller Editor Figure 110: apC Controller HoklayGroups Tab sLJLIE Ow? Sr. DeltaMOr P Erlatled Pence Man Weg r gen:curet MCde Geon I Cain...rani I rats I Oats I Reeeen I Moon Goya I Asa I Tape., l Gad Hobe* onkel lute Neva rem I ea.mar, Wird. G'09 5. To remove one or more Holiday Groups, click a Holiday Group to select it (use CTRL+Left-click to select multiple Groups), then click Remove to remove the selected Holiday Groups from the panel. 6. Click the State Images tab to display it, as shown in Figure 111 on Page 331. Click Save and Close to return to the Hardware Pane to finish the apC Controller configuration. apC Controller User Defined Fields Tab The User Defined Fields tab, shown in Figure 1 on Page 330, displays user-defined fields in the system for hardware. User-defined fields are configured in the Configuration pane. If there are no user-defined fields configured, then the tab is empty. See the C• CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 329 EFTA01226260 apC Controller Editor Figure 1: ape User Defined Tab fjois Ms. D_ r anws.L. gad i Lsm.sSs1.I...I Dr I Flabd L.00.0s41 %LAI InewsI I eadIN Gee IlimNealA•11•I Lew apC Controller State Images Tab The apC Controller State Images tab provides a means to change the default images used to indicate controller states (see Figure 111 on Page 331). These images appear on the Monitoring Station and change according to the state of the object that they represent. To Change an Image 1. Double-click the existing image. A Wmdows Open dialog box appears allowing you to browse for a folder in which you have placed replacement images. 2. When you locate the replacement image, select it to add it to the image listing. 3. To restore the default image, right-click on the new image and select Restore Default. 4. Click Save and Close to finish the apC Controller configuration and return to the Hardware Pane. 330 Chapter? C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226261 apC Controller Editor F lgure 111: apC Controller State Images Tab JJJ None [KC' P fade, Panty., Galway Surtenance Mole Great I Coimsocatov I frats l Wats I Palen P6:10n Board I Ram I Top;en I Goss I Hada Grimm I thee Dance Feb 9-" e‘rAm I Rae in19, urc U brew U Faso A y brig 1.,rieed I+ Pegs my y C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 331 EFTA01226262 apC Input Editor apC Input Editor The apC Input Editor is used to configure apC Inputs that you have created on the apC Controller Inputs tab. • apC Input General Tab on Page 332 • apC Input Board Triggers Tab on Page 333 • Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 28 • apC Input Board - Status Tab on Page 334 • apC Inputs State Images Tab on Page 335 apC Input General Tab The apC Input - General Tab, shown in Figure 112 on Page 332, displays five read-only the Identification fields. The apC Controller name is shown in the Controller field and the Input Board in the Board field. Figure 112: apC Controkr Inputs- General Tab a NOM le:C hattl- apC RE1 Q•100,01, P gmeNdi Parbucn man We r &Menem< Mode Omni I %On I Gas I Stele' IMe Delred RAO Sts. rages I Wenidforice COOtlidt lacCI aimed IfknarC-1 Type 'G-••d &waled n I CQM0CICa kit 1 Cows Sang.ed P sinithwesPOW:falann9•1.:^ P Send state chain*: si p.rn.q r tavue a.Setivisual Bran Dade Selo r Armtd The following Input fields are read-only: 332 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226263 apC Input Editor Type - reflects whether the Input has been assigned to a Door or other object or has a special purpose. These include: ■ Tamper ■ Comm Fail ■ General Assigned To - displays the name of an associated Door or Elevator Button. If the Input is used for a door, then the Name field is read-only displaying the name of the controlled door. Connection - specifies the input connection point on the Input Board and is assigned when the Board is configured. To Configure the apC Inputs General Tab 1. When the Supervised check box is selected, this read-only field indicates that the panel supports input supervision. The Supervised check box must be selected for Proprietary Burglar Alarm applications. NOTE 2. To have a notification of changes in state of the Input sent to the guard station, select the Send state changes to the monitoring station check box. The Send state changes to the monitoring station option must be selected for Proprietary Burglar NOTE Alarm applications. 3. To have a notification of changes in state of the Input sent to the journal, select the Send state changes to journal check box. This option will be selected by default. You may limit the transmission of state change messages to the journal exclusively, when you NOTE click to de-select the Send state changes to the monitoring station option and instead, select the Send state changes to journal option. Use of the latter option can decrease the messaging traffic derived from the apC Input during normal operations. To further limit messaging, you may also leave both check boxes unselected. You may select multiple Inputs in a dynamic view and use the Set Property option to limit the transmission of state changes. See Using Set Property for an iSTAR Controller on Page 130, for more information. 4. Activate on Supervision Error - Select this check box if the input is supervised and you want it to activate when a supervision error occurs. 5. Click Save and Close or the Triggers tab to display it, as shown in on Page 333. apC Input Board Triggers Tab The Triggers tab, shown in Figure 140 on Page 369, allows you to set up Triggers, configured procedures used by C•CURE 9000 to activate specific actions when a particular predefined condition occurs. See the following for information on apC Triggers: ■ Triggers Tab for apC Devices on Page 369. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 333 EFTA01226264 apC Input Editor ■ Defining a Trigger for an apC Device on Page 370. ■ Removing a Trigger on Page 272 apC Input Board - Status Tab The Status tab provides a read-only listing of critical information about the operational status of the selected apC Input including: ■ Active Status - displays the values Active or Inactive. ■ Armed Status - displays the values Armed or Disarmed. ■ Hardware Status - displays the values: Secure, Active, Open Loop, Shorted Loop, or Fault. ■ Supervision Status - displays the values: Un-initialized (not in supervision error), Open Loop, Shorted Loop, or Fault. Figure 113: apC Boards Inputs Status Tab Syne Irct WW1- apC RE I linattocc p Enabled Pithce Wan Yen; r .mmsce Mode General I Tryon I Goad and I Use Wined fekk I Side •.me I AC[we St3ELPS kw,* :env! SttituS 'rawer Fete Ilkicnran Savior Statue Ithrdseked 334 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226265 apC Input Editor apC Inputs State Images Tab The apC Inputs State Images tab provides a means to change the default images used to indicate input states (see Figure 114 on Page 335). These images appear on the Monitoring Station and change according to the state of the object that they represent. To Change an Image 1. Double-click the existing image. A Windows Open dialog box appears allowing you to browse for a folder in which you have placed replacement images. 2. When you locate the replacement image, select it to add it to the image listing. 3. To restore the default image, right-click on the new image and select Restore Default. Figure 114: apC Boards InputsState Images Tab =UM! ki 54 vc and Oa.< Na** ev- Vox? AEI Qat'cOOn Ll P Enabled Pt Mon Wm r Sirasnart• Mc* ail I Teen I Gee) Sr. I a DOW NW Singe I SAW mew kbre Mood From Deemed Eretied SuNria.:e EnO, 4. Click Save and Close. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 335 EFTA01226266 apC Output Editor apC Output Editor The apC Output Editor is used to configure apC Outputs that you have created on the apC Controller Outputs tab. • apC Output General Tab on Page 336 • Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 28 • apC Output Status Tab on Page 337 • apC Output State Images Tab on Page 338 apC Output General Tab To Configure Outputs Using the apC Output General Tab The apC Output General tab lists the following read-only fields: Type - reflects whether the Output has been assigned to a Door or other object. For apC panels, General is the un assigned output type. Assigned To - displays the Elevator or Door object name. For any Output, the Connection field indicates the index number on the board. Figure 115: apC Controls( Outputs General Tab Name R El rel<WACe P tingled Pants. liam Vic r Manyearce Mode Cnatinaps I Asa I m, Ddnod fields I Sloe "epee I 0Axst tleakinco Coteau Igo-i I Type knoll 6rit-resb, COamobc" /Win I bise &taco tilOsoc) 17 P NOUnally awned P Sad sum modes Pnxntono0 stm+te 1. The following Options are configurable for an Output: 338 Chapter? C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226267 ape Output Editor a. Pulse Duration - (momentary activation) is entered in tenths of a second intervals with a default of 0 seconds. The range is 0 to 1000. b. Normally Energized - When checked, the output is energized (power is supplied to the relay) when it is inactive. When the output is activated, power is removed. c. To have a notification of changes in state of the Output sent to the Monitoring station, select the Send slate changes to the monitoring station check box. This selection is unavailable for an apC Door Output. State changes for a Door Output are not sent to the Monitoring Station. d. To have a notification of changes in state of the Output sent to the journal, select the Send state changes to journal check box. This option is selected by default. This selection is unavailable for an apC Door Output. State changes for a Door Output are not sent to the journal. You may limit the transmission of state change messages to the journal exclusively, when you NOTE click to de-select the Send state changes to the monitoring station option and instead, select the Send state changes to journal option. Use of the latter option can decrease the messaging traffic derived from the apC Output during normal operations. To further limit messaging, you may also leave both check boxes unselected. You may select multiple Outputs in a dynamic view and use the Set Property option to limit the transmission of state changes. See Using Set Property for an iSTAR Controller on Page 130, for more information. 2. Click Save and Close or the apC Outputs - Status tab to display it, as shown in Figure 116 on Page 338. For further information about the use of the Groups tab, see Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 28. apC Output Status Tab The Status tab (see Figure 116 on Page 338 provides a read-only listing of critical information about the operational status of the selected apC Board Output including ■ Active Status - displays the values Active or Inactive. ■ Active State - displays Unknown. ■ Mode - displays Unknown ■ Active Reason - displays Unknown C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 337 EFTA01226268 apC Output Editor F igure 116: ape Outputs Status Tab &Ism< ald or apC Output State Images Tab The State Images tab provides a means to change the default images used to indicate output states. These images appear on the Monitoring Station and change according to the state of the object that they represent. The apC Output State Images tab is shown in Figure 117 on Page 339. To Change an Image 1. Double-click the existing image. A Wmdows Open dialog box appears allowing you to browse for a folder in which you have placed replacement images. 2. When you locate the replacement image, select it to add it to the image listing. 3. To restore the default image, right-click the new image and select Restore. 338 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226269 apC Output Editor F igure 117: apC Outputs State Images Tab 4. Click Save and Close. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 339 EFTA01226270 apC Reader Editor apC Reader Editor The apC Reader Editor is used to configure apC Readers that you have created on the apC Controller Readers tab. The apC Reader editor has the following tabs: ■ apC Reader General Tab on Page 340 ■ apC Reader Input/Output Tab on Page 341 ■ apC Reader Keypad Tab on Page 342 ■ Hardware Groups Tab Definitions on Page 29 ■ apC Reader Triggers Tab on Page 344 ■ apC Reader Status Tab on Page 344 ■ apC Reader State Images Tab on Page 345 You can add or remove Card Formats from multiple Readers via an apC Reader Dynamic View. See Add or Remove Reader Card Formats on Page 25 for more information. apC Reader General Tab To Configure a Reader Using the apC Reader General Tab 1. Select a Reader Type: MRM, Direct Connect Wiegand, or RM, as shown in Figure 118 on Page 341. The Reader Type selected should match the connected apC panel since the type will affect the inputs and outputs available on the Reader I/O tab. Example: • The RM has 2 supervised inputs and 2 outputs. • the MRM has 2 supervised inputs and 1 output. The Identification area in the Readers - General tab displays read-only, previously-configured information. 2. To choose a card format for the reader that you have selected, click Add in the Card Format area. The Card Format browser appears, as shown in Figure 118 on Page 341. You may configure an apC Reader from the apC panel Readers tab or from the Add-on Board tab. NOTE A reader index configured on one tab will be unavailable on the other tab. The location chosen will affect the possible reader type and reader input/output option selection. See the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide - Table 1-5 for a list of UL approved card formats and readers. 340 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Con figuration Guide EFTA01226271 apC Reader Editor Figure 118: apC Controller - Readers- General Tab F AM" Reader apt React,. I api RI I a sera adOne flow logC Reodel.zof RETI anC61:6011: .:J P &tied RIMS: MOI Wog r ticimenrce Mode •-^"•••• (w I twflog I TI I way* l au I I.M. loom nom I ase awn IfilenalteO acotolkr: l.01 Bard RwagC-1 AasegotO to lax door) C000chon IFkeder R•okt lam CardFail r.gad P.Itnoot fl-4 3. Click the applicable row in the Card Format browser to select Card Format. Repeat for multiple formats. 4. Navigate to the Input/Output (I/O) tab (see Figure 119 on Page 342). apC Reader Input/Output Tab Dedicated Supervised Inputs and Outputs vary on the apC Readers I/O tab, depending upon the Reader Type selected in the Reader General tab. The I/O Tab is shown in Figure 119 on Page 342. To Configure the I/O Tab 1. To configure the Inputs, follow the instructions given in To Configure apC Controller Inputs on Page 322. 2. To configure Outputs, follow the instructions given in To Configure apC Outputs on Page 323. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 341 EFTA01226272 apC Reader Editor Figure 119: apC Controller Reader InpuVOutput Tab irgj 2g &eve sit:kb. kn l[ApC Readal-apC RE I rboalotlen: F pew Pt Main Wro r Mpiriennelkde *Coital I/O IrmpeelTetonI Goa I eas Us Oemed nal I &allMP' I as 3e Cite* M Inn _ Intel trouts Ect I amen Caned Nam lade Sown I F apC Fps - I -apC Reeled- apC REI koarriped 2 r IsCIn - 2 -ape Roaderl-ariC RE1 , ' Chin k Create AI Gun. _Delete AI Gni, EIS CnInt I Calingl !In, t us a 0404 • 1AC R••441.ipc RE1 r 0.02 .2 -egC Reeder'. epC REI 3. Navigate to the Keypad tab to configure the PIN requirements for the reader. apC Reader Keypad Tab The apC Readers - Keypad tab provides a means to control reader keypads (see Figure 120 on Page 343). Keypad configuration on an apC panel allows specification of Card and PIN required. The Schedule is configurable when a PIN is required and restricts the time when the PIN must be entered. The default Schedule is Always and is the initial value of the Schedule browser. 342 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226273 apC Reader Editor Figure 120: apC Controller - Readers- Keypad Tab do PC Reader! apt RI I a Saw edam Sinr lapC Resodel.epC PEI flealitaix I tne$ed Pertibon Man Wm r Mamenance Mode emend Lo IMOM I Tromrt I Gram I Stets I Um Dined Roos I Stele nom I FIII Rm.:erred: R PIN is Ka itquitid r r Card and AN rodweed _LI To Configure the apC Readers - Keypad Tab I. Choose one of three options for PIN Requirements: • PIN is not required - to require a card swipe only; • PIN Only • Card and PIN required - to require a both a card swipe or presentation with a PIN entry. 2. Click 0 to select a Schedule, which is set up in the Configuration Pane. If you selected PIN is not required or Card and PIN required for PIN Requirements, two choices appear in the Options area. 3. Choose either of the following options: • Allow card numbers to be entered from the keypad. • Use PIN+1 as duress code. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 343 EFTA01226274 apC Reader Editor apC Reader Triggers Tab See the following for information on apC Triggers: ■ Triggers Tab for apC Devices on Page 369. ■ Defining a Trigger for an apC Device on Page 370. ■ Removing a Trigger on Page 272 You can click Save and Close after configuring apC Reader triggers, or navigate to the Status tab. apC Reader Status Tab The apC Reader Status tab provides a read-only listing of critical information about the operational status of the selected apC Readers including: The apC Reader Status tab is shown in Figure 121 on Page 345 ■ Communications - displays the values Normal or Comm Fail ■ Tamper - displays the values True or False. ■ PIN Required - displays the values True or False. 344 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226275 apC Reader Editor Figure 121: apC Controller- Reader Status Tab all2I2JE Save and Cbx Han' leaC Rea:orI toC Dinalobeet fretted Preen Mal Wro r Winmeance Made Gym" I V0 1 Repel I Tram I Sato gamble" Defrod ROM Stele mewl -porn< Sas formers Veneto. Communications: INowt EIN Rowlett 'Hat Reamed Lanier IF** apC Reader State Images Tab The State Images tab provides a means to change the default images used to indicate reader states (see Figure 122 on Page 346). These images appear on the Monitoring Station and change according to the state of the object. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 345 EFTA01226276 apC Reader Editor Figure 122: apC Controller - Readers- State Images Tab = IIDJ 2g ja Save ed that Ur* isC Reed.1 cpC RE I Qescaco Ensued Pate«, Mon Ifing r Maimmence Wee Govnil l0 I %pad I Tecces I Cam I Saba I Llw Dined raft MMO 0‘19n I Ade *ago PIM Trace (Sake Macs Oaf) Low Boar/ ONdem OrM Veal Lath Oren do Mita, %Waco OM Park barn adewwww0s4 Kay eArdrOowlat Von Orly) Lack Free bowl Ammo Orly) Lodi 9ste Awned Vase Orhi I To Change an Image 1. Double-click the existing image. A Windows Open dialog box appears allowing you to browse for a folder in which you have placed replacement images. 2. When you locate the replacement image, select it to add it to the image listing. 3. To restore the default image, right-click on the new image and select Restore Default. 4. Click Save and Close. 348 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226277 apC Add-on Board Edrtor apC Add-on Board Editor The apC Add-on Board Editor provides a means to configure boards that expand the capabilities of the apC panels. Expansion boards can add reader ports, supervised inputs and additional outputs. The apC Add-On Board Editor displays the following tabs: ■ apC Add-On Board General Tab on Page 347 ■ apC Add-On Board Input Boards Tab on Page 348 ■ apC Add-On Board Output Boards Tab on Page 349 ■ apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab on Page 354 apC Add-On Board General Tab The apC Add-On Board General tab displays the Board Location Controller field, which is a read-only field that displays the associated apC panel. Navigate to the Input Boards tab. See Figure 123 on Page 348. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 347 EFTA01226278 apC Add-on Board Editor Figure 123: apC Controller Ad d-On Board General Tab Ca apC Add-On Board - apC Add-apc test 1JxI Save and Close Name: IaoC Addeoc test Description: _J J Partition. Man Wile r Maintenance Mode Ganda' Haut Boards I Output Borth I Star Gawks Board Location Controller I apC Add-On Board Input Boards Tab The apC Add-On Board Input Boards tab allows you to add a Supervised 132 Input Board (Index 1) and eight Supervised IS Input Boards (Index 1 through 8). To Configure the 132 Input Board Using the apC Input Boards Tab ■ To configure the 132 Input Board, select the check box in the Configured column in the apC Add-On Board - Input Boards tab and click El located in the Edit column of the Supervised 132 Input Board box to display the apC 132 Input BoardGeneral tab (see Figure 124 on Page 349). 348 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226279 apC Add-on Board Editor Figure 124: apC Controller Add-On Board Input Boards Tab IDt apC Add-On Board - apC Add-app test A save and cicnx. Name: apC Addepc test Qesaipeon: Parution Man Wing I— Maintenance Mode General bin Bowie I Output Boards I Star Coupler I —Supervised 132 Input Board — J Create Delete Edt kits Call9nd Nana tart 132 MA BoardleipC Addeipc test Supervised IS Input Boards create all Boats 7 Delete Al Boards Edt hem I Unkind Name 1 IP' apC la Foul Bort apC Addyric te• 2 W IOC IS krout BoteacciC Addape test 3 r .e is Iron Boat3apC Addapc tet 4 r ape PI kW Board4epC Addepc test 5 r aPC PI kid Board5tpC Addax teat 6 ❑ apC 18 !Iva BoardSepC Add-apc ted 7 ❑ apt 91kput Bezed7epC Addax tett 8 r apC IS WA BoangapC Addepc test apC Add-On Board Output Boards Tab The apC Add-On Board Output Boards tab allows you to add two R48 and eight R8 Output Boards. ■ R48 Output Board on Page 349 ■ R8 Output Board on Page 352 R48 Output Board To Configure the R48 Output Board 1. To configure the R48 Output Board, select the check box in the Configured column in the apC Add-On Board Output Boards tab and click 0 located in the Edit column of the R48 Output Boards box (see Figure 125 on Page 350) to display the apC R48 Output Board General tab, as shown in Figure 126 on Page 351. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 349 EFTA01226280 apC Add-on Board Editor Figure 125: apC Controller Add-On Board Output Boards Tab LY apC Add-On Board - apC Add-apc test .{4 Save and Close Name: apC A d aoc test Description Part:non Man ?hie Maintenance Mode Oyler" I Inn Boards Output Bowls I Star Coupler MB Output Boards v Create All Boat De'ete NI Boards Coligured Name apC R48 Outp4 BoardlopC Addax teat 2 2 • I • toC R48 Outiot Beed2opC ticle-apc test —FOB Output &ord. v Create Al Boards Delete AP Boards Edt int( Ccriouted Bre W 1 W %CRS Curd Boall-apC NM-meted 2 r apC FPIBaps Board2-apC Addepc teat 3 r 8 Output BoadlapC ArkFarctert 4 r ariC Ft8 °trot Board4-apC Pavetest 5 r apC Ft8 Ottpu Board5apC Arriape tee 6 r apC 143 Caput likeird&apC irclOarc teat 7 r acC RSOutput Bowd7-apC Maya tat 5 r rOC MUM 60100840C Fiddler led The apC R48 Output Board General tab displays three read-only fields: • Controller • Board • Board Index These fields locate the Output that you have chosen to configure. As you configure more Add-On Board Outputs for this controller, the Board Index field reflects the output placement on the R48 output board, ranging from 1 through 2. 350 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226281 apC Add-on Board Edrtor Figure 126: apC Controller Add-On Board Output Boards General Tab t apC R48 Output Board - apC R48 Output Board, apC Add- 'x -I im and Mae 1 Qtecoplan. Genesal11.16thApuls 1 17.3200RA: 33 48 eurws Local CalITOSIC lac • Comm A • RE RI toed neRckl• Bold 'row 1 2. 7•o configure Outputs, select the apC R48 Output 1-16 Outputs tab, as shown in Figure 127 on Page 351. Figure 127: apC Controller Add-On Board Output Boards 1-16 Outputs Tab KS= [PCR48 CAW (Wadi AK Addipe 0Brrbdpra , o,s 1460Upr: 1I320apUl 33 480.4pis .17 All 0403 OS% All Clulputs FY bx Catpred Nma 701'0.1,0 • aPC OUP..41.44C R48 OSA Boeql ❑ apC 0Upa2apCR4GOsJ BAAS, .)0 3 ❑ act OusAtlapC RIB Maw Baadl•m.. 4 ❑ ecC Oup.Al.sCRA800:4 Bordlio 5 ❑ apC Oup45cpC MS OS. Bood1.40 76 ❑ mC 00406.44CF4480u0.4Boadlta U ❑ .tioC Ow/47.6C RIB O4AA BoodlAo [ 8 ❑ apt °JAS.:ACMass Down* 9 ❑ apC 00:09.apERSOuPpl BoaARAA 10 ❑ ec.0 Otio410-ect RIES OchAA Bosdl [ 11 ❑ cc OUral ' ,Ape Ale ClapialBondi a 12 ❑ apC OUoal 2AAC R48 Os/ EINAR.* 13 ❑ ocCOtAx.13-ecCR480.408oAdIA 14 ❑ 40coap.4144CA4110.1p484.01 a I= 15 ❑ apC Ot4a415-44:CR480t/pulBordba 16 ❑ 4cC Otio416,<C P48 Dirot Boe.51 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 351 EFTA01226282 apC Add-on Board Editor 3. To configure the Outputs on the Add-On Board R48 Outputs 1-16 Outputs, 17-32 Outputs and 33-48 Outputs tabs, follow the instructions given in To Configure apC Outputs on Page 323. 4. Once you have finished configuring the R48 Outputs, click Save and Close to return to the apC Add-On Board Output Boards tab. R8 Output Board To Configure an R8 Output Board 1. To configure the R8 Output Boards, select the check box in the Configured column in the apC Add-On Board Output Boards tab and click C] located in the Edit column of the R8 Output Boards box (see Figure 125 on Page 350) to display the apC R8 Output Board General tab, as shown in Figure 128 on Page 352. Figure 128: apC Controller Add-On Board Output Boards General Tab epC RB Output Board - apC R8 Output Boardl-apC A... ±- IbSavo ane Clot* Its jog Re 03003313433322(92 /1•30a3C RE 2 Casette.% elf dennE0333 Comvie• *ECRU 1/0.+3 32C 43113of RE 2 E333.3 one. 3 3" 6./ 63 t.3 Al Outputi 00303 AR Copal dex [whys! Raw ❑ acC (howl -4cC R8 Out,. Bora)a. _1= acc OunAteEC R8 03433 Bounflac, 3 E E3C 03•0382e3C R803434 earflap ❑ EEC 03•32334 e3C Re 03443 83.3.03ap -1 6 ❑ aK 03•3313•3C R130332... 834.313q3 1 6 0 cC 03•33.36sC R80330.3 Barfly 1 0 32C 0~7 o3C R80343.2 8,33,33.0 Is 0 32C 03.13.43 erg 000+w 03.33,33. k Ed. 6" °ea Ai Iput; irea be. Tarp.. Cessesca teeny*, 0 in liar TimpwapC RE °opt* OonslapC A61 ComonatinfalapC RE Otow Boa r.netle 1 The apC R8 Output Board General tab displays three read-only fields: • Controller • Board • Board Index These fields locate the Output that you have chosen to configure. As you configure more Add-On Board Outputs for this controller, the Board Index field will reflect the output placement on the R8 output board, ranging from 1 through 8. There are also two Status inputs available for the R8 Output Board: 352 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226283 apC Add-on Board Editor ■ Board Tampered, which indicates tampering with the Add-On Board ■ Communications Fail, which detects a communications failure. You will not see comm fail or tamper until at least one of the inputs or outputs is configured. NOTE 2. To configure the R8 Output, select the check box in the Configured column in the apC R8 Output Board General tab and click ID located in the Edit column of the R8 Outputs box, as shown in Figure 128 on Page 352. 3. To configure each RS Output, follow the instructions given in To Configure apC Outputs on Page 323. 4. Once you have finished reader the R8 Outputs, click Save and Close to return to the apC Add-On Board Output Boards tab. 5. Click the Star Coupler tab to configure Star Coupler Readers, Inputs and Outputs, Mini Star Readers and WPSC (Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler) Readers and Supervised Inputs. Because the apC can only support 8 readers, some of the Reader ports on the Star Coupler may be NOTE unavailable to configure on C•CURE 9000 if readers are configured directly on the apC Readers tab. For example, if Readers 1 and 6 are configured on the Readers tab, Readers 1 and 6 will be unavailable on the Star Coupler (Configured check box is read-only). Conversely, if Readers 1 and 6 are configured on the Star Coupler, then Readers 1 and 6 on the Readers tab will be unavailable. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 353 EFTA01226284 apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab The apC Add-On Board Star Coupler tab allows you to add one of the following: ■ Star Coupler, with up to 8 Star Coupler Readers, 8 Unsupervised Inputs and 8 Outputs. See the apC Star Coupler Board Editor on Page 365. Or ■ Mini Star with up to 8 Mini Star Readers. See the Mini Star Coupler Board Editor on Page 373. The Mini Star Reader has not been evaluated by UL and cannot be used in UL Listed applications. NOTE or ■ WPSC (Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler) with up to 8 WPSC Readers and 8 Supervised Inputs on upper and lower boards. See the Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler Editor on Page 376. Unsupervised inputs cannot be used in Proprietary Burglar Alarm applications. NOTE Figure 129 on Page 355 shows the apC Add-On Board Star Coupler tab. 354 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226285 apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab Figure 129: apC Add-on Board Star Coupler Tab Ca apC Add-On Board - apC Add-apc test sIL1 and rifle. Name: apC Addeo° test Qescripeon: Partition-- Man Wing F Maintenance Mode Genes I inrm Boss I Output Bost Star Caeler —Ste Coupler rat I 9ar Cater Coritand I Name StarCoupder Star CouplerapC Addapc teal Mei Stet r MN StetetsC Add-ape test WPSC WPSCapC Addapctee Configuring the apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab You use the apC Add-On Board Star Coupler tab to configure the type of Star Coupler board you have connected to your apC controller. To Configure the apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab 1. Open the apC Add-On Board Editor by navigating in the Hardware Tree to the apC controller you want to edit, then navigating in the tree to the apC Add-On Board you want to edit. 2. Double-click on the apC Add-On Board. The apC Add-On Board Editor opens. 3. Click on the Star Coupler tab. 4. For the Star Coupler board type that is attached to your apC, click in the Configured column to enable that board. Example: C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 355 EFTA01226286 apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab If you have attached a Mini Star Coupler to your apC, click Configured for the Mini Star in the Star Coupler table. If you select a Star Coupler and then by to enable a different one, a message appears NOTE asking "Are you sure you want to delete the Star Coupler object ,object-name>?" because you can only have one Star Coupler configured. Click Yes if you want to delete the Star Coupler you configured and replace it with your new choice. Click No if you want to keep the Star Coupler you configured and cancel this action. apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab Definitions '!'he apC Add-On Board Star Coupler tab has the (Slowing file and buttons. Table 82: apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Edit Column Click n in the Edit column to open the editor for the Star Coupler you have enabled. Star Coupler This column displays the type of each Star Couplers you can enable and configure. Column Configured Click nin this column to enable a Star Coupler, Mini Star, or WPSC (make it available to be edited). Name Displays the name for this Star Coupler. The name is system-generated by defautt, but you can edit this name by clicking in click in this field. Star Coupler The Star Coupler is a single expansion board that attaches to the a pC/8X or apC to a lbw the RM readers. I/8 inputs. and R/8 outputs to be wired in a Star topology. Mini Star A Mini Star is a single expansion board that attaches to the a pC/8X or apC panels to allow the RM readers to be wired in a star topology. WPSC The Wiegand/Proximity Star Coupler (WPSC) consists of a two board set that attaches to the apC or apC/8X to allow direct connection of up to 8 read heads using Wiegand signaling. 356 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226287 apC Input Board Editor (132 and 18) apC Input Board Editor (132 and 18) The apC Input Board editor is used to configure apC Input Boards that you have created on the apC Add-on Boards tab. The apC Input Board editor has the following tabs: ■ apC 132 Input Board General Tab on Page 357 ■ apC 132 Input Board 1-16 Inputs Tab on Page 358 ■ apC 132 Input Board 17-32 Inputs Tab on Page 360 ■ apC 18 Input Board General Tab on Page 362 apC 132 Input Board General Tab The apC 132 Input Board - General tab, as shown in Figure 130 on Page 358, displays the Input Location - Controller, Board and Board Index fields. These are read-only fields that display the apC panel, the apC Add-On Board and Index (for the 132 Inputs the Index is 1) associated with the 132 Supervised Inputs. These fields identify the Input board that you have chosen to configure. The Board Index field reflects the position of the 132 input board on the apC. Navigate to the 1-16 Inputs tab. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 357 EFTA01226288 apC Input Board Editor (132 and III) Figure 130: apC Controller 132 Add-On Board General Tab 0 apC 132 Input Board - apC 132 Input Boardl-apC 2 I3 Save and Case Name: [,oc 132 VDU %aril epC 21 12escripfien: j Panition: Man W1ng 1- Maintenance Mode Gummi 11.16 Inputs 11732 Inixts I Group Location controller lapC-1 Board 'apC Addapc teat Bgard Index. 11 apC 132 Input Board 1-16 Inputs Tab trhe apC 132 Input Board 1-16 Inputs tab allows you to add 16 Supervised Inputs on the 132 Input Board (Board Index 1). To Configure the 1-16 Inputs Board 1. To configure the 146 Supervised Inputs, select the check box in the Configured column in the apC Add-On Board -132 Input Board - 146 Inputs tab (see Figure 131 on Page 359) and click 0 located in the Edit column of the Supervised Inputs box to display the apC Input (Index Numbers 1 through 16)132 Input Boardl - General tab (see Figure 132 on Page 360). 358 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226289 apC Input Board Editor (132 and 18) Figure 131: apC Controller 132 Add-On Board 1-16 Inputs Tab Q! apC I32 Input Board - apC 132 Input Boardl-apC 2 a _1212s1 Save and Close Name apC 132 Input Board1-apC 2 tiesaipbon. I A zj Partition: Main Wing r Bateman° Mode Genets 1-16 Inputs `1732 lepers 1 Goup 1 Supervised Inputs -%-e- Create es Louie -Li Delete 4. Twigs Edt bdex C408;Nred Name Template 1 F apC Inpu t-apC 132 Input Board l-apC 2 F apC Inpu2-apC 132 Input Bowdl-apC 2 3 F apC Ing43-apC 132 Iript4 Boardl-apC 2 4 F apC Input4-apC 132 Input Boardl-apC 2 5 r acc Inpti5-apC 132 kta Boardl-apC 2 1 ... 6 r apC Ing46-apC 132 kilt Boardl-apC 2 apC Ilya Template... 7 r apC Input7-apC 132 Input Boardl-apC 2 apC File Template... 8 r apC Input8-apC 132 Inca BoardlopC 2 apC Input Template... 9 r apC IrextBapC 132 Input BoardlepC 2 eepC Irput Template... r epC Input10-apC 132 Fput Board1-apC 2 apC °put Template.. r apC Iput11-apC 132 Irput BoardlopC 2 apC Input Template.. r apC Iput12epC 132 Irput Board1opC 2 apC Input Template... r apC Input13-apC 132 Irput Board1opC 2 apC Input Template.. 14 r apC Irext14-apC 132 Irput Board1opC 2 apC Input Template.. 15 r apC Inixt15-apC 132 Input Board1opC 2 apC Input Template 16 r apC Inputlf.apC 132 Input Board1opC 2 apC Input Template... The apC Input General tab, as shown in Figure 132 on Page 360, displays the Input Location - Controller, Board and Connection fields. These are read-only fields that display the apC panel, the apC Add-On Board and Input Number associated with an 132 Supervised Input. These fields locate the Input that you have chosen to configure. 2. To configure the Inputs on the I32 Input Board - 1-16 Inputs tab, follow the instructions given in To Configure apC Controller Inputs on Page 322. 3. Navigate to the 17-32 Inputs tab. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 359 EFTA01226290 apC Input Board Editor (132 and 18) Figure 132: apC Controller 132 Add-On Board 1-16 Inputs General Tab U epC Input - apC Input1-apC I32 Input Boardl-apC 2 a2ci A Save and Close Name: tr. • r..c 6 aoC Eiescription. A 11.7. Enabled Partition: Maki Wing r tAaintenance Mode General I Timers I Gays I Status I User Defined Reads I State images I Identification fpntroller: 'apC-1 Booed. 'apC 132 Input BoardlnpC 2 Type: 'General /Assigned to: I Connection: Pro_t 1 Options 17 Supervised F Send at/Andaman jo monitoring station 17 Send state chances to journal r Activate on Supervision Error Default State F Armed apC 132 Input Board 17-32 Inputs Tab The apC 132 Input Board 17.32 Inputs tab allows you to add 16 Supervised Inputs on the 132 Inputs Board (Board Index 1). 360 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226291 ape Input Board Editor (132 and 18) To Configure the 17.32 Inputs Board 1. To configure the 17-32 Supervised Inputs, select the check box in the Configured column in the apC Add-On Board - 132 Input Board - 17-32 Inputs tab (see Figure 133 on Page 361) and click CI located in the Edit column of the Supervised 132 Input Board box to display the apC Input (Index Numbers 17 through 32)132 Input Boardl General tab (see Figure 108 on Page 326). Figure 133: apC Contrast 132 Add-On Board 17-32 Inputs Tab yW apC 132 Input Board - apC 132 Input BoardI.-apC 2 Save and Close apC 132 Mott Boardl-apC 2 Partition. Main Wog r Maintenance Mode Genera 1.16 Inputs 17-32 16441 'Gimp I Supervised Inputs Create AP Inputs Delete Al Irputh Edt Index elnalled Name Tanulate 17 r apC Inpt117-apC 132 hput Board1-apC 2 IVA t iii •-• 18 r apC Input18-apC 132 frout B6601-apC 2 Input terngkite 1 [D... 19 r apc Ing4.419-apC 132 tout Board1-apC 2 Ingot template 1 [D... 21) r apc Input20-apC 132 Input Boardl-apC 2 kat template 1 [D... 21 r apC Input21-0C1321nput Boardl-apC 2 Input template 1 (IL. 22 r apC Input22-apC 1321rput Board1-epC 2 Irput template 1 (IL. 23 r apC Inp123-apC 132 kat Board1-apC 2 Irptil template 1 [IL. 24 r apC Inp.424-apC 132 hoot Boesd1-apC 2 Irput template 1 [IL. 25 r apC Inp12.5apC 132 Irpot Board1-apC 2 Iran template 1 [D... 26 r apC InpU2frapC '32 Input BoadbapC 2 bpi template 1 [IL. 27 r apC Inp127.apC 132 I-put BoardVapC 2 Input template 1 [D... 28 r apC Input28.apC I32 Fput BoardtapC 2 Input template 1 [IL. 29 IP apC Inixt29.apC 132 I-put Boardt.apC 2 30 p apC Inixt30apC '32 Irput Board1apC 2 31 P apC Input31-apC 132 Input Board1.apC 2 P apC Inptt32,apC 132 i-put Coarc11.apC 2 2. To configure the Inputs on the 132 Add-On Board - 17-32 Inputs tab, follow the instructions given in To Configure apC Controller Inputs on Page 322. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 361 EFTA01226292 apC Input Board Editor (132 and 18) Figure 134: apC Controller 132 Add-On Board 17-32 Inputs General Tab U epC Input - epC Input17-apC 132 Input floardl-a pC 2 .acJJ Save and Close Name: gescription. HI.7 Enabled Partition: Man %sting r tAaintenance Mode Geneml 'Triggers' Status' User Defined Fields' State images Identification fpntrollet: lapC-1 &art IapC 132 hput Boartl-apC 2 Type: heneral Assigned to: Connection: Prime 17 Options 17 Supervised rI•o Send state changes p monitoring saltine r7 Send state changes to journal r Activate on Supervision Error Default State r Armed apC 18 Input Board General Tab You can also add-on up to 64 Supervised Inputs (8 Inputs available on 8 18 Input Boards) with Triggers available for each input. 362 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226293 apC Input Board Editor (132 and 18) To Configure the 18 Input Board I. To configure an IS Input Board, select the check box in the Configured column on the apC Add-On Board - Input Boards tab and click 0 located in the Edit column of the Supervised 18 Input Board box to display the apC I8 Input Board - General tab (see Figure 135 on Page 363). F Igu re 135: apC Controler18 Add-On Board18 InputsGeneralTab ICY apC IB Input: • . . . , Add-apc test _ Ir 121 Save and Close Name I..0 18 In. Boardl-a.0 Add-a. test Pescription _J _I Partition lain Wing F Maintenance Mode I General I Gap I — Location Controller: lapC•1 Board. lapC Add-apc test BOW Index Ii —Supervised Inputs ii --i Create AI Ingots _ Dekte All Inputs sae I index I Corttned time I Tardate 1 r apC ktutt-aoCII3 hoot Boardl-e0C Aid... 2 n apC Input2-apC18 hput Board' apC Pdd... 3 0 apC hput3cpCI8 hput Board1cpC Add... 4 ri apC hput4cpC I8 bout BoardhapC Add... 5 0 apC Input5cpC18 hput Board1-apC Add... 0 apC Input6cpC18 bout Board1apC Add... M apC Input7cpC18 hput Board1cpC Add... 8 r apC IrotItepC18 Input %St 'IOC Md... Stage Inputs 17 Create AI Inputs Erg Insults* I Certgued 1 Name I Terrciate Tamper Fr TamperapC 18 Input BoantletpC Addeo... ... Cormnricati... Fr Communcton falureapC18 Input Boar.. M_ 2. To configure Inputs, select the check box in the Configured column in the apC 18 Inputs tab and c wk located in the Edit column to display the apC Add-On Board - apC 18 Input Board - General tab. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 383 EFTA01226294 apC Input Board Editor (132 and 18) 3. To configure the Inputs on the 18 Add-On Board - 18 Inputs tab, follow the instructions given in To Configure apC Controller Inputs on Page 322. There are also two Status inputs available for the 18 Input Board: ■ Board Tampered, which indicates tampering with the Add-On Board ■ Communications Fail, which detects a communications failure. 4. Once you have finished reader the 18 Inputs, click Save and Close. 384 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226295 apC Star Coupler Board Editor apC Star Coupler Board Editor The apC Star Coupler Board Editor is used to configure apC Star Coupler boards. Star Couplers are single expansion boards that attach to the apC/8X or apC to allow the RM readers, 1/8 inputs, and R/8 outputs to be wired in a Star topology. The Star Coupler Board allows addition of: • 8 MRM/RM Reader ports • 8 Unsupervised Inputs • 8 dry contact, form C, relay Outputs The Star Coupler can be installed on apC and apC/8X panels. For more information, see the Star Coupler - Mini Star Coupler Quick Start Installation Guide. This editor is accessed from the apC Add-on Board Editor Star Coupler tab (see apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab on Page 354). To Configure the Star Coupler Board 1. To configure the Star Coupler Board, select the check box in the Configured column in the apC Add-On Board Star Coupler tab and click located in the Edit column of the Star Coupler box (see Figure 129 on Page 355) to display the Star Coupler General tab, as shown in Figure 136 on Page 365. The apC Star Coupler Board General tab displays three read-only fields: — Controller — Board — Board Index These fields are located on the Star Coupler that you have chosen to configure. As you configure more Add-On Boards for this controller, the Board Index field will reflect each placement, to differentiate board locations. Figure 136: apC Star Coupler General Tab I. Star Coupler Star Star Coupler -apC Add • "43ve end Cole Was Star Coorler•e0C 44J 9.1100beci '• Rea:leir Untweivned Irotts Woos Loftier KC Ex • CoomA • RE RI !lard BfrudInCe. 2. Click the Readers tab to configure the Star Coupler readers. See Star Coupler Readers Tab on Page 366 for the Star Coupler Readers tab. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter? 365 EFTA01226296 apC Star Coupler Board Editor 3. Click the Unsupervised Inputs tab to configure the Star Coupler unsupervised inputs. See Star Coupler Unsupervised Inputs Tab on Page 367 for the Star Coupler Unsupervised Inputs tab. 4. Click the Outputs tab to configure the Star Coupler outputs. See Star Coupler Outputs Tab on Page 367 for the Star Coupler Outputs tab. 5. When you have completed configuring the Star Coupler and its attached devices, you can click Save and Close to save your changes. Star Coupler Readers Tab 11w Star Coupler Readers tab allows you to configure the readers connected to your Star Coupler. To Configure Star Coupler Readers 1. Navigate from the apC Controller Add-On Board Tab on Page 324 to the apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab on Page 354 2. Click Star Coupler to open the apC Star Coupler Board Editor on Page 365. 3. Click the Readers tab to configure readers for the Star Coupler. Refer to the Figure 137 on Page 366 for an example of the Star Coupler Readers tab. Figure 137: apC Controller Star Coupler Readers Tab Star Coupler Star - Star Coupler-apC Add-apC RE 2 _ , X 45ave and Close name Sq. Cogielace Addwe RE 2 12e:croon Gentle/ Readal UnA4xAuedInAn: Out;a: kArs 00403 All Readers (dr Ink Cafigure0 Nam, Tercide 0 apC Readed Slav C000kraoC AdJaoC 2 ape ReAft42.SIA CoupitraoCAdiaoC 0 apC ReadoZSim Cadet-44'141*C 4 apC ReadontSial CadxapCAddapC 5 apC Rsacle5.5i4. CoupleruoCAdtacC 6 0 apC Reaclet6Siet CovplineCROOAPC 2 apC Readenis Cais*-soCAdi-toC CI icc Read&e-Siro CoupleproC Add apt 4. To create all available readers for the Star Coupler, click Create All Readers. apC Readers that have previously been created on other board connections are unavailable (shaded gray) to be created here. 5. To create an individual reader, select the check box in the Configured column for the Star Coupler Readers (Index 1 through 8) and click EI located in the Edit column. The apC Reader Editor opens to allow you to configure this reader. See apC Reader Editor on Page 340 for details on configuring an apC Reader. 388 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Con figuration Guide EFTA01226297 apC Star Coupler Board Editor 6. When you have finished creating and configuring readers for the Star Coupler, you can click Save and Close to save your changes. Star Coupler Unsupervised Inputs Tab The Star Coupler Unsupervised Inputs tab allows you to configure the inputs connected to your Star Coupler. To Configure Star Coupler Unsupervised Inputs 1. Navigate from the apC Controller Add-On Board Tab on Page 324 to the apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab on Page 354, and click Star Coupler to open the apC Star Coupler Board Editor on Page 365. 2. Click the Unsupervised Inputs tab to configure Unsupervised Inputs for the Star Coupler (see Figure 138 on Page 367). 3. To create all Unsupervised Inputs for the Star Coupler, click Create All Inputs. 4. To create an individual input, select the check box in the Configured column for the Star Coupler Inputs (Index 9 through 16) and click GJ located in the Edit column. The apC Input Editor opens to allow you to configure this input. See apC Input Editor on Page 332 for details on configuring an apC Input Figure 138: apC Controller Star Coupler Unsupervised Inputs Tab ta Star Coupler Star - Star Coupler-apC Add-apC RE 2 IX -2 .one and Close Sear CooleeseC AddaPC RE 2 free! Template 1 peed lot Index10.16 linteatented Irene Duna: ;I. liTA.kt Delete All Irpas Name Teepee IsPA9Slat CaokseeCAddePC R IOC Stud OSte CmeametAdect epC Ira+ 0 apC 'spat1des Cowered Aeeent asp Iroul T mete_ .,CC 'spud 24let CosplerapC AddeeC apC Input TempLat fC Iseult 3Ste Caelitea AddepC art Iroul Tempe.. -cC CoanalliC AdclepC tOC Wool Tenet. cop Impel &Ste CoutlenatCAdeleOC tope Iron errgist .. *CW0,116414 Caslet-.1pC Add q:C apC Iroul Tepplet.. 5. When you have finished creating and configuring inputs for the Star Coupler, you can click Save and Close to save your changes. Star Coupler Outputs Tab The Star Coupler Outputs tab allows you to configure the outputs connected to your Star Coupler. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 367 EFTA01226298 apC Star Coupler Board Editor To Configure Star Coupler Outputs 1. Navigate from the apC Controller Add-On Board Tab on Page 324 to the apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab on Page 354 2. Click Star Coupler to open the apC Star Coupler Board Editor on Page 365. 3. Click the Outputs tab to configure outputs for the Star Coupler (see Figure 138 on Page 367). Figure 139: apC Controller Star CouplerCutouts Tab ci Star Coupler Star - Star Coupler-apC Add-apC RE 2 X New [51es CoatreiCAddePC RE 2 aeide6:a :1 General ReAlava Uravervited Input 0trieor (Airrir Greate All CaarputS Delete All CuTuts Edt leder* ed Nave Templet. a are 0.APASSies CouebkirekklatiC O apC NOM e‘Sun Couobi4oCAdclief O apC GUIDLA11 Srai Cour*, aoC Add act I O arerC 0Arraul12.Star CouralerA;C Add net apC °Argil IStar CouplecraaC eutdapC apC Gips°IrSter CorykaracC AS O . 45C 0dputISSIzi CatOnOCAdd414-. 0C Chiptal 64lai CotaleCCAddAtt.. To create all outputs for the Star Coupler, click Create All Outputs. 5. To create an individual output, select the check box in the Configured column for the Star Coupler Outputs (Index 9 through 16) and click GJ located in the Edit column. The apC Output Editor opens to allow you to configure this output. See apC Output Editor on Page 336 for details on configuring an apC Output 6. When you have finished creating and configuring outputs for the Star Coupler, you can click Save and Close to save your changes. 388 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226299 T riggers Tab for apC Devotes Triggers Tab for apC Devices C•CURE 90(10 uses Triggers, which are configured procedures for activating actions, to activate Events or Outputs for an apC device. A Trigger automatically executes a specified Action when a particular Condition occurs (when the object Property specified in the Trigger reports the Value specified in the Trigger).Navigate to the Triggers tab. Figure 140 on Page 369 shows the Triggers tab for an apC Input, which is typical for an apC device. Figure 140: Type:4140C Triggers Tab Genera Texea I Goal Ass l Usa Odried Cekle l %se eucae '.Rdlli0Vt Hwy Iktni Stles• A triggers tab provides you with the ability to define the activation/deactivation, enable/disable, and arm/disarm, etc. of such objects as: events, inputs, outputs, camera actions, door status changes, etc. Triggers can also be used to launch imports and exports, email and reports, viewer and message displays, personnel ID number state changes, controller downloads, sound activation, communication notifications, etc. Table 83 on Page 370 provides an example of a configured apC Trigger. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter? 369 EFTA01226300 Triggers Tab for apC Devices Table 83: Triggers Tab Settings Example The following Triggers Tab settings: Property Value Action Details Schedule Time Zone Active Status Active Activate Event apC Input Event Always (Time Zone of apC or C•CURE 9000 Server) Would create the following Trigger: Any time (Always Schedule) the Active Status (Property) equalsActive (Value), activate the event (Action) named STAR Input Event (Details). STAR Input Event isan Event that you would need toareate using the Event Editor. From the Triggers tab of an apC device (such as a Controller, Input, or Reader), you can perform the following tasks. ■ Defining a Trigger for an apC Device on Page 370. ■ Removing a Trigger on Page 272. apC Triggers Tab Definitions on Page 371 provides definitions for the fields and buttons on an apC Device Triggers tab. Defining a Trigger for an apC Device You can use the Triggers tab to define a Trigger for an apC device. The typical usage for an apC Trigger is to activate an Event or an Output as the result of a state change of an apC device Property. This tab provides you with the ability to define the activation/deactivation, enable/disable, and arm/disarm, etc. of such objects as: events, inputs, outputs, camera actions, door status changes, etc. Triggers can also be used to launch imports and exports, email and reports, viewer and message displays, personnel ID number state changes, controller downloads, sound activation, communication notifications, etc. Example: When an apC Tamper Input changes from the Inactive (normal) to Active (abnormal) state, you wish to activate an Event and activate an audible alarm (an apC Output). Time Zones for apC Panel Triggers If you specify a Time Zone in your Trigger definition, you can control when the Schedule for the Trigger is active. You can only select the C•CURE 9000 server Time Zone or the Time Zone of the apC panel you are editing. Example: If you have apC panels that are in different Time Zones than your C•CURE 9000 server, you may want to have some Triggers activate according to the apC panel's Time Zone, while other Triggers are activated according to the server Time Zone. When you specify the Time Zone for a Trigger definition to be the same as the apC Panel Time Zone, the Schedule activation times for the Trigger occur according to the apC Panel Time Zone. If you have an apC panel in the Pacific Time Zone (GMT - 08:00) and a server in the Eastern Time Zone (GMT - 05:00), a Schedule that is active from Midnight to 6:00 AM is activated from Midnight to 6:00 AM in Pacific Time rather than Eastern time (three hours later). 370 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226301 -DiggersTab for apC Devices To Define a Trigger for an apC Device 1. Click on the Triggers tab for your apC device. 2. Click Add on the Triggers tab to create a new Trigger. 3. Click 0 within the Property column to open the Property dialog box showing the Properties available for the device. 4. Click a Property in the list to select it and add it to the Property column. 5. Click 0 within the Value column to display a drop-down list of Values associated with the Property that you have selected. Click a Value that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column. (If there is no set list of Values, you can type in a Value.) 6. Click 0 within the Action column to display a drop-down list of valid actions. Click an Action that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column. 7. When you select an Action, the lower pane in the Triggers box displays an entry field or group of entry fields, specific to the selected Action, so that you can configure the Details for the Action. 8. Once you define the Action details, the Details column displays information about how the Action has been configured. For example, if an Event field is displayed in Details, you can click to select an Event that you want to associate with the Trigger. 9. If the Triggers tab includes a Schedule column, click within the Schedule column to display a drop-down list of pre-configured schedules. Click 0 to select a Schedule that you want to associate with the trigger. Schedules are created in the Configuration Pane. See the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information. 10. If the Triggers tab includes a Time Zone column, click within the Time Zone column to display a drop-down list of available Time Zones. If the Time Zone column is blank, or you do not select a Time Zone, the Time Zone of the C•CURE 9000 server is used by default 11. Click Save and Close to save the apC trigger. Triggers related to apC objects cannot activate an Event that is downloaded to an iSTAR controller. NOTE apC Triggers Tab Definitions Table 84 on Page 371 provides definitions for the fields and buttons on an apC Triggers tab. Table 84: apC Triggers Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Add Click Add in the Triggers tab to canto a new trigger. Remove Clid< the Row Selector . , then click Remove in the Triggers tab to delete a trigger. Clid< the Row Selector to select a row in the Triggers table. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 371 EFTA01226302 Triggers Tab for apC Devices Table 84: apC Triggers Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Property Click within the Property column, and then click ri. The Property browser opens presenting properties available for the Comm Port. Click a Property to select it and add it to the column. Value Clickwithin the Value column to display a drop-down list of Values associated with the Property that you have selected. Click a Value that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column. Action Click(] within the Action column to display a drop-down list of valid actions. Click an Action that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column. As you select an Action, a corresponding entry field, or group of entry fields, appear at the bottom of the dialog box. Click to select entries for these fields. Details Displays details about how the Action was configured. Schedule Clickwithin the Schedule column to select a Schedule. Click [ ... 1to select a Schedule that you want to associate with the trigger. Schedules are created in the Configuration Pane. Refer to the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information on creating Schedules. Time Zone Click within the T line Zone column to select a Time Zone for Schedule activation. Click El to select a Time Zone that you want to associate with the trigger Schedule.lf you speedy a Time Zone, the Schedule start and end times are calculated using that Time Zone. For example, a Schedule that becomes active at 3:00 AM would become active at 3:00AM in the Pacific Time Zone, if that Time Zone was specified. Refer to the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information on Time Zones. 372 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226303 Mini Star Coupler Board Editor Mini Star Coupler Board Editor Mini Star Couplers are single expansion boards that attach to the apC/8X or apC panels to allow the RM readers to be wired in a star topology. For more information, see the Star Coupler - Mini Star Coupler Quick Start Installation Guide. Mini Star Coupler Boards have not been evaluated by UL and cannot be used in UL Listed NOTE applications To Configure the Mini Star Coupler Board 1. To configure the Mini Star Coupler Board, select the check box in the Configured column in the apC Add-On Board - Star Coupler tab and click located in the Edit column of the Star Coupler box (see Figure 129 on Page 355) to display the Mini Star Coupler - General tab, as shown in Figure 141 on Page 373. The Mini Star Coupler Board - General tab (see Figure 141 on Page 373) displays three read-only fields: — Controller — Board — Board Index These fields are located on the Mini Star Coupler that you have chosen to configure. As you configure more Add- On Boards for this controller, the Board Index field will reflect each placement, to differentiate board locations. Figure 141: apC Controler Add-On Board Mini Star Coupler General Tab OFirr:lar Mrin Star p r Id Rat aelatibre nresel Readors I I xion acC WCamA -RE Ill eoCAOS 2. Click the Readers tab to configure readers for the Mini Star Coupler. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 373 EFTA01226304 Mini Star Coupler Board Editor Figure 142: apC Controller Add-On Board Mini Star Coupler Readers Tab NaYt MnSisinC Added RE 2 lesocign Gee s Radice: ,a10803 All Readers DOW N Reader ES Iran CcinVal time tenon ❑ apC lindal. IA riStwapC A61acC RE 2 I 12 0 CC Reede•24InStetCC Added RE 2 O aPC Rndielain9r.apt 46$44 RE 2 tcC Readecliln 94.4:C AdelccC RE 2 O sC ReedeoMnStewoC iviSeoC RE 2 5 G ❑ tpC ReadafAlii StaraKAddart PI 2 El ICC P!.:4044r•StwatiCAddipC RE 2 tc.0 fte.6AMn•StaracCA6ivirk PC 2 I 3. Select the check box in the Configured column for the Mini Star Coupler Readers (Index 1 through 8) and click located in the Edit column to display the Mini Star Coupler Readers - General tab, shown in Figure 143 on Page 374. The 8 available Mini Star Coupler Readers allow up to 2 Supervised Inputs and 2 Outputs. For further instructions for reader readers, see To Configure an apC Reader on Page 323. Readers that are unavailable (see Figure 142 on Page 374) have already been configured on the NOTE apC panel Readers tab. Figure 143: apC Controller Add-On Board Mini Star Coupler Readers General Tab tin ner Coca:a FlEmblea (ens*. <OC ft< Um C. PE M1 pas frnSisIPC Ar•Zed l) Ccreocia, Pa* Reukt.toe RM P.eonn hat °elan. 4. Click Save and Close to return to the apC Controller - Add-On Board - Star Coupler tab. 374 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226305 Mini Star Coupler Board Editor Be sure that the Mini Star Coupler Board is installed correctly on the apC or apC/8X. For more information, see the Star Coupler - Mini Star Coupler Quick Start Installation Guide. 5. Click Save and Close to return to the apC Controller - Add-On Board tab. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 375 EFTA01226306 WK:gand Proximity Star Coupler Editor Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler Editor The Wiegand/Proximity Star Coupler (WPSC) consists of a two board set that attaches to the apC or apC/8X to allow direct connection of up to 8 read heads using Wiegand signaling. The WPSC board set consists of a Lower Board and an Upper Board. The Lower Board provides connections for 4 readers indexed 1.4 and 4 inputs indexed 17-23. The Upper Board provides connections for 4 readers indexed 5.8 and 4 inputs indexed 25-31. When using the WPSC Add-On Board, the standard Star Coupler cannot be used because the WPSC board set attaches to the same bus connector as the Star Coupler. Each board provides one supervised input for each reader, which should be used in conjunction with one of the 8 supervised inputs on the apC main board to provide a total of two supervised inputs for each reader. The supervised inputs on the WPSC remain inactive in the Monitoring Station unless readers are NOTE configured in the WPSC editor. Since the WPSC board set does not provide output relays, it is recommended that the 8 on-board apC relays be used. For more information, see the WPSC Quick Start Installation Guide. To Configure the Wiegand/Proximity Star Coupler Board 1. To configure the Wiegand/Proximity Star Coupler (WPSC) Board, select the WPSC check box in the Configured column in the apC Add-On Board - Star Coupler tab and click 0 located in the WPSC Edit column of the Star Coupler box. The Wiegand/Proximity Star Coupler Board General tab displays three read-only fields: — Controller — Board — Board Index These fields are located on the Wiegand/Proximity Star Coupler that you have chosen to configure. As you configure more Add-On Boards for this controller, the Board Index field will reflect each placement, to differentiate board locations. Figure 144: apC Controls( Add-On Board Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler General Tab 376 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226307 Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler Editor 2. Click the Lower Board tab to display the 4 available WPSC Readers and 4 Unsupervised WPSC Inputs, as shown in Figure 145 on Page 377. Figure 145: apC Controls( Add-On Board WPSC Lower Board Tab Star Coupler WPSC - WPSC-apC Add-apC RE 2 kiln and Cbs• -u••=••••.- name WPSCA:CAdd.0 RE 2 9eximben toy. Boyd um., goad. ✓ Create All Readers Delete All Readers Ccalared Nee I 'noble ❑ soC Reedet1M1250aci:AdlapC RE 2 I2 ❑ aPC Reedet24F5C.acC AddecC RE 2 I3 ❑ 4t/C Reals3AVF5C.acC AddeoC RE 2 4 ❑ eoC Reader4MFIC.apC M6coC RE 2 wow.,:nitrolt •7 CI:E5305 All Irputs I:531595 Sl Ircuts Ede Index Conigkeci Name Templets 15 El adInpol7WPSC.40C Rdtratt RE 2 15 2] 4ot lia419WPSCatt Add-a/CCM 2 21 ❑ tot IroA2PAC'SCead AdeltC 2 I-123 ❑ <a Ing.A234/F5C4KA.acC HE 2 apC IrotA I cook/ 3. Select the check box in the Configured column for the WPSC Readers (Index 1 through 4) and click 0 located in the Edit column to display the apC Readers - General tab, shown in Figure 146 on Page 378. You can configure the reader keypad and triggers for each of the 4 available WPSC Readers. For further instructions see apC Controller Readers Tab on Page 323. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 377 EFTA01226308 Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler Editor Figure 146: apC Controller Add-On Board WPSC Lower Board Reader General Tab /IS:fledOwe Yoe anC finces.nnirCC rpC ArIcr attea. Efatrof Gerd le C 14(4/ItaX*1 Cobalt ICC ([4•CoreA•RERI good Noscaccate AWN.. CCP.cato Roth> 2 Amos Pse Cos Corns ? /[0:1 r.torown Ilene CescrVon • S 'dytpirti 4. To configure Inputs, select the check box in the Configured column in the Wiegand/Proximity Star Coupler - Inputs tab and click located in the Edit column to display the apC Add-On Board - Wiegand/Proximity Star Coupler Input - General tab, as shown in Figure 147 on Page 379. 378 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226309 Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler Editor Figure 147: apC Controller Add-On Board WPSC Lower Board Input General Tab n dr, Inpu Inpull 9 Wind it 4,C IroJ1SWPSCIpC ac, OPX.• C`On " crypt Gaya 9$.a Slate nage I truer. ift DC•COM A • RE ill ttcl WPSC*CAdd- ()Vern Dicsove TP...J11110 sect IOd Sm. - dumps); aria. Oa" Sand von chr91.10Pni E Adnalec. ppnlm Wog Stele E hard 5. To configure the Inputs on the Wiegand/Proximity Star Coupler Add-On Board - Inputs tab, follow the instructions given in To Configure apC Controller Inputs on Page 322. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 379 EFTA01226310 Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler Editor Figure 148: apC Controller Add-On Board WPSC Upper Board Tab WFSCapC Adtlap:C RE 2 irpothor Caramel Lcwo Bowl Um." Bcrd create All Readers ._ Dew All Readers Edt Pew Coregkeed Name TenpLse 5 ad Reaclea5MF5C.acC Added RE 2 fB ad Reaclea6MPSCapC Added RE 2 l7 O apC fictlet7VPSC.coC Mind RE 2 ❑ *DC Readei8WPSC.ecCActeeof RE 2 Stsper.:NRcor: Coate AU [Matt Delete all InP.Ra Eck Nape Impale 25 ad Irput25w1:5C-acC AttpC RE 2 ad Irps27-wP5C4oC A0PacC RE 2 as apC Irput29WPSCP0C A6PacC RE 2 1 apt irput31-WPSC-KC AllPapC RE 2 6. Click Save and Close to return to the apC Controller - Add-On Board - Star Coupler tab. Be sure that the Wiegand/Proximity Star Coupler Board is installed correctly on the apC or apC/8X. For more information, see the INPSC Quick Start Installation Guide. 7. Click Save and Close to return to the apC Controller - Add-On Board tab. 8. Click the Status tab to display it, as shown in Figure 108 on Page 326. Click Save and Close to return to the Hardware Pane and finish the apC Controller configuration later. 380 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226311 8 Configuring RM Reader LCD Messages This chapter explains how to customize sets of LCD messages, such as "Present Card" or "Access Granted," for your RM readers to meet the specific needs of your facility or site. In this chapter Reader LCD Message Set Overview 382 Reader LCD Message Set Editor 383 Reader LCD Message Set Tasks 388 Changing the Language for the Default RM LCD Messages 393 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 381 EFTA01226312 Reader LCD Message Set Overview Reader LCD Message Set Overview RM readers display LCD messages, such as "Present Card" or "Access Granted" to indicate different states to cardholders. You can customize sets of these messages to meet the specific needs of your facility or site. Example: You could change the "Access Granted" message to "Please Enter Now". When you assign a set of messages to an iSTAR Controller or an apC Panel, all the RM readers on that controller use those same messages. The Reader LCD Message Set Editor allows you to configure message sets. You can also use the Reader LCD Message Set Editor to change the language in which your messages appear. See Changing the Language for the Default RM LCD Messages on Page 393. Only ASCII characters 0 to 125 are supported for display on the RM Reader. NOTE ■ There are 94 printable characters. (Code 1 to 31 are non-printing, mostly obsolete characters that affect how text is processed.) ■ No accented characters are supported. 382 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226313 Reader LCD Message Set Editor Reader LCD Message Set Editor The Reader LCD Message Set Editor, shown in Figure 149 on Page 383, lets you create and modify message sets in C•CURE 9000 containing replacement texts for the LCD messages that display on the RM Readers. In addition, the editor lets you set the way that the date and time display on the Reader. The Reader LCD Message Set Editor has only one tab—the General tab. For more information, see: ■ Accessing the Reader LCD Message Set Editor on Page 383 ■ Reader LCD Message Set Definitions on Page 384 ■ Creating a Reader LCD Message Set on Page 388 Accessing the Reader LCD Message Set Editor You access the Reader LCD Message Set Editor from the C•CURE 9000 Hardware pane. To Access the Reader LCD Message Set Editor 1. Click the Hardware button in the Navigation Pane to open the Hardware Tree. 2. Right-click the Hardware Folder, click Reader LCD Message Set, and click New on the sub-menu that appears, as shown in Figure 149 on Page 383. (Once you have created a message set, a Reader LCD Message Set folder appears in the Hardware Tree.) Figure 149: Hardware Tree Reader LCD Message Sets - Or - Click the Hardware drop-down list and scroll down to select Reader LCD Message Set. ISC kid ISC Rex* • iSTAR AO1Bowd 3 TTAR CHM I , Dolce Pat .STAR ROA 6TAR Poi Board 'STAR O.tat Board .STAR Ruda Click Pi m to open a Dynamic View showing a list of all existing Reader LCD Message Sets, right-click the Reader LCD Message Set you want to change, and click Edit from the context menu that appears. The Reader LCD Message Set Editor opens with the General tab displayed, as shown in Figure 150 on Page 384. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 383 EFTA01226314 Reader LCD Message Set Editor Figure 150: Reader LCD Message Set Editor 1:1Sfrea aniCke. k:Ses artily li n kelathiN P__ Odes Dor .44.0P/M",- In 12 v Rv Cbck Massage Na. Messase Tail Accret great ACCESS GR:NTED arV.C;iPaN INTER Pri INTER NEM CARD till.0O ED PLEASE Vali WAJI Ift6V Reader LCD Message Set Definitions The Reader LCD Message Set Editor has the buttons described in Table 85 on Page 384 and the fields shown in Table 86 on Page 384. 'Fable 87 on Page 385 has detailed information about each of the 34 messages that can be customized for a message set. Table 85: Reader LCD Message Set Editor Buttons Button Description Save Click this button when you have completed changes to the Reader LCD Message Set and wish to save those changes. The Reader and LCD Message Set Editor closes. Close Save Click this button when you have completed any changes to the Reader LCD Message Set and wish to save those changes and also and create a new Reader LCD Message Set. The message set you were editing is saved, and a new Reader LCD Message Set opens New (either blankor including template information if you were using a template to create the message set). in Click this button when you want to close the Reader LCD Message Set Editor without saving your changes. Awarning appears asking whether or not you want to save your changes before closing the editor. Click Yes to exit and save and No to exit and cancel your changes. Table 86: Reader LCD Message Set Editor- General Tab 384 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226315 Reader LCD Message Set Editor Reader LCD Message Set Editor - General Tab (continued) Field/Button Description Description Enter a brief description for this Reader LCD Message Set. Partition This read-onty field identifies the Partition to which this Reader LCD Message Set belongs. (This field is visible onty if the C•CURE 9000 system is partitioned.) Display Formats Date Select the format for the date display: MM/DD/YY (the default) or DD/MM/YY Time: Hour Select the format for the time display: 12 hour (the default) or 24 hour. Clack Messages Message Name of the Reader LCD Message string. Name Message Text Default text for the Reader LCD Message. Table 87: Reader LCD Messages Message Message Text Description iSTAR apC Name Uses Uses Accessgranted ACCESS Admit text-general use Yes Yes GRANTED Accessdenied ACCESS DENIED Reject text-general use Yes Yes Enter PIN ENTER PIN Enter PIN prompt-general use Yes Yes Enter next card ENTER NEXT Enter next card prompt-used for occupancy and visitor/escort features Yes Yes CARD Unlocked UNLOCKED Door unlocked mode text-general use Yes Yes Please wait PLEASE WAIT Text displayed while access decision pending-general use Yes Yes Wait -busy WAIT -BUSY Text displayed when door busy processing a previous access-general use Yes Yes Enter floor ENTER FLOOR ape display for elevator admit-general use No Yes Reader not READER NOT Text displayed when reader disabled-general use Yes Yes ready READY Present card PRESENT CARD Locked Door mode text-general use Yes Yes Enter command ENTER Intrusion entrance delay text-intrusion zone feature Yes No COMMAND C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 385 EFTA01226316 Reader LCD Message Set Editor Reader LCD Messages (continued) Message Message Text Description iSTAR apC Name Uses Uses Misread card MISREAD Visitor/escort misread card feedback text-visitor/escort feature Yes No Ali secure ALL SECURE Intrusion zone all inputs secure text-intrusion zone feature Yes No Exit now EXIT NOW Intrusion exit delay text-intrusion zone feature Yes No Ready to arm READY TOARM Intrusion zone ready to arm status text-intrusion zone feature Yes No Not ready to arm NOT READY TO Intrusion zone not ready to arm status text-intrusion zone feature Yes Yes ARM Door in alert DOOR IN ALERT STAR reader tampered text. or apC reader tamper or door held forced Yes Yes open text-general use Area armed AREAARMED Intrusion zone armed mode text-intrusion zone feature Yes Yes Area disarmed AREA DISARMED Intrusion zone disarmed mode text-intrusion zone feature Yes Yes Secure pending SECURE Intrusion zone disarm pending text-intrusion zone feature Yes No PENDING Secure SECURE Door secure mode text-general use Yes Yes Keypad CMD ISSUED Keypad command issued text-keypad commands feature Yes No Command Issued Keypad CMD FAILED Keypad command failed text-keypad commands feature Yes No Command Failed Keypad ENTER ACCESS Keypad command prompt 1 text-keypad commands feature Yes No Command Prompt 1 Keypad ENTER TARGET Keypad command prompt 2 text-keypad commandsfeature Yes No Command Prompt 2 Acknowledged ACKNOWLEDGED Enter next card acknowledgement text-occupancy and visitor/escort Yes Yes features Enter escort ENTER ESCORT Request Escort prompt-occupancy and visitor/escort features Yes No Secure violated SECURE Intrusion zone armed and violated status text-intrusion zone feature Yes No VIOLATED Secure SECURE Intrusion zone armed but not ready to re-arm status text-intrusion zone Yes No offnormal OF F NORMAL feature 386 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226317 Reader LCD Message Set Editor Reader LCD Messages (continued) Message Message Text Description iSTAR apC Name Uses Uses Lockout LOCKOUT 8 T Area lockout reject 8 T will be replaced with remaining lockout time Yes No HHH:MM HHH:MM-area lockout feature Reject REJECT Occupancy reject indicates that supervisor/escort cannot leave Yes Yes unattended UNATTEND superviseestvisitors unattended-occupancy feature Reject REJECT Occupa ncy generaI reject text-occupancy feature Yes Yes occupancy OCCUPANCY Door held open DOOR HELD STAR door held open status text-STAR onty (apC displays Door in Alert Yes No OPEN instead) Door forced DOOR FORCED STAR door forced open status text-STAR onty (apC displays Door in Alert Yes No open OPEN instead) C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 387 EFTA01226318 Reader LCD Message Set Tasks Reader LCD Message Set Tasks You can perform the following tasks to configure Reader LCD Message Sets. ■ Creating a Reader LCD Message Set on Page 388 ■ Creating a Reader LCD Message Set Template on Page 388 ■ Configuring/Modifying a Reader LCD Message Set on Page 389 ■ Viewing a List of Reader LCD Message Sets on Page 389 ■ Deleting a Reader LCD Message Set on Page 391 ■ Using Set Property to Configure Reader LCD Message Sets on Page 392 Creating a Reader LCD Message Set You can create a new Reader LCD Message Set. To Create a Reader LCD Message Set 1. Click the Hardware button in the Navigation Pane to open the Hardware Tree. 2. Right-click the Hardware Folder, click Reader LCD Message Set, and click New on the sub-menu that appears. - or - If Reader LCD Message Sets were already created, right-click the Reader LCD Message Sets Folder and click New on the sub-menu that appears. 3. The Reader LCD Message Set Editor opens, and you can configure the message set. 4. To save your new Reader LCD Message Set, click Save and Close. Or - Alternatively, if you want to save the Reader LCD Message Set and then create a new one, click Save and New. The current Reader LCD Message Set is saved and closed, but the Reader LCD Message Set Editor remains open to allow you to create a new Reader LCD Message Set. Creating a Reader LCD Message Set Template You can create a new template for a Reader LCD Message Set. A Reader LCD Message Set template saves you time because you can reuse the same configuration repeatedly. To Create a Reader LCD Message Set Template 1. Click the Hardware button in the Navigation Pane to open the Hardware Tree. 2. Right-click the Hardware Folder, click Reader LCD Message Set, and click New Template on the sub-menu that appears. - - If Reader LCD Message Sets were already created, right-click the Reader LCD Message Sets Folder and click New Template on the sub-menu that appears. 388 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226319 Reader LCD Message Set Tasks The Reader LCD Message Set Editor where you can configure the Reader LCD Message Set template opens. 3. Configure the template to meet your requirements. Any fields you configure values for become part of the template; then when you subsequently create a new Reader LCD Message Set from that template, these values are already filled in. 4. In the Name field, enter the name you wish to use for the template. Example: Reader LCD Message Set Templatel 5. To save the template, click Save and Close. The template will be available as an option on the pull-down Template menu. Configuring/Modifying a Reader LCD Message Set You can configure a new Reader LCD Message Set or modify an existing one using the Reader LCD Message Set Editor. To Configure/Modify a Reader LCD Message Set 1. Create a new Reader LCD Message Set or modify an existing Reader LCD Message Set. The Reader LCD Message Set Editor opens for you to edit the Reader LCD Message Set making changes as you wish in the fields on the top of the editor and on the General tab. 2. Type a Name and Description for the Reader LCD Message Set that sufficiently identifies this message set and its purpose. 3. Select your desired date format —by either leaving the default MM/DD/YY or clicking the down-arrow to pick DD/MM/YY. 4. Select your desired time format —by either leaving the default 12 Hour Clock or clicking the down-arrow to pick the 24 Hour Clock. 5. In the Messages box, use the vertical scroll bar to find the message you wish to modify in the Message Name column and change its related entry in the Message Text column as desired. There are 34 messages whose text you can modify for your uses. Many of them are used by (can be downloaded to) both iSTAR and apC controllers; one of the messages is used only by apCs, while about 15 messages are used only by iSTARs. For detailed information about the messages, see Reader LCD Message Set Definitions on Page 384. Viewing a List of Reader LCD Message Sets You can display a list of the Reader LCD Message Sets you have created by opening a Dynamic View of Reader LCD Message Sets. To View a List of Reader LCD Message Sets 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 389 EFTA01226320 Reader LCD Message Set Tasks 2. Select Reader LCD Message Set from the Hardware drop-down list and click gag to open a Dynamic View showing a list of all existing Reader LCD Message Sets, as shown in Figure 151 on Page 390. (You can also click the down-arrow of this button to either view the list in the current tabbed view or open a new tabbed view). Figure 151: Reader LCD Message Set List I- Reeder LCDMessage Set X1 WS • °el Y Ce Quit Dreg columns lo group by bete Ner Descry:ton 0 I ReacNelsegeS6 I ReeflonceSet le lit0.4.5406.11 R.Ksintag•Set 2. • You can sort, filter, and group items in the list. • You can right-click a Reader LCD Message Set in the list to open the Reader LCD Message Set Context menu (see Table 88 on Page 390) and perform any of the functions on that menu. • You can right-click any column heading to open a context menu of all possible Reader LCD Message Set fields that can display as columns and add/remove fields to view certain information. For more information on using Dynamic Views, see the Dynamic Views chapter in the C• CURE 9000 Data Views Guide. Reader LCD Message Set List Context Menu The context menu that opens when you right-click a Reader LCD Message Set in the Reader LCD Message Set Dynamic View includes the selections described in Table 88 on Page 390. Table 88: Reader LCD Message Set List Right-Click Context Menu Options Menu Description Selection Lae Clickthismenu selection to edit the selected Reader LCD Message Set. The Reader LCD Message Set Editor opens. You can rename the message set and change any of its attributes. Dente Chet( this menu selection to delete the selected Reader LCD Message Set. A prompt appears asking you to confirm that you want to delete the Reader LCD Message Set. Click Yes to delete the Reader LCD Message Set or No to cancel the deletion. NOTE: You cannot delete a Reader LCD Message Set if it is being used by an STAR and/or apC Controller. Set Cid( this menu selection to change the value of the selected properties in the selected Reader LCD Message Set(s). c! one! ty A dialog box appears asking you to select a property to change. Click El to open a selection fist and dick the property you wish to change. You can then change the value of the folowing property: • Description —You can change the textual description of the Reader LCD Message Set(s) by selecting this property and typing in a new value. Add to This option isnot supported for Reader LCD Messages. Group 390 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226321 Reader LCD Message Set Tasks Reader LCD Message Set List Right-Click Context Menu Options (continued) Menu Description Selection Export Click this menu selection to Open an Export...to XML or C SV tile dialog box to export one or more of the selected Reader LCD selection Message Set records toeither an XML or a CSV Me. This allows you to quickly and easily create XMLJCSV reportson the selected data. NOTE: Although XML is the initial default fie type. once you choose a type in the Save as type field. whether XML or CSV, that becomes the default the next time this dialog box opens. CSV-formatted exports cannot be imported. If you require importing functionally. export to XML. • When you export to an XML file, alavalable data for the selected object(s), whether displayed in the Dynamic View or not—as wellas al the child objects of the selected record(s), is exported. • When you export toa CSV file, only data in the oclumnsdisplaying in the DynamicView isexported, and in the order displayed. Thisalows you to both select and arrange data fields for your report. In addition. exporting tea CSV fie alows you to view the exported data in an Excel spreadsheet and further manipulate it for your use. For more information, see the Dynamic Views chapter in the C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide. NOTE: When you dick Export Selection, you are running the export on the dent computer. Consequently, the system does not use the Default Export Directory Path—which is on the server. It opens a directory on the client, reverting to the lastdirectory used. You can navigate to the default export server directory, if you wish. Or to avoid confusion or use the same destination folder for both dient and server computers, you can use UNC (Universal Naming Convention) paths, for example: %%Computer Name% Program Fies1Sofhvare HouselSWHouselSWHSystemlExport. Find in Click this menu selection to Open a Query Parameters dialog box in which you can enter prompts and/or modify the Query criteria Audit Log to search for entries in the Audit Log that reference the selected Reader LCD Message Set. When found the resultsdisplay in a separate Dynamic View. Find in Click this menu selection to Open a Query Parameters dialog box in which you can enter prompts and/or modify the Query criteria Journal to search for entries in the Journal that reference the selected Reader LCD Message Set. When found the resultsdisplay in a separate DynamicView. Deleting a Reader LCD Message Set You can delete a Reader LCD Message Set if it is not currently being used by any iSTAR and/or apC Controller. To Delete a Reader LCD Message Set 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select Reader LCD Message Set from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click a z to open a Dynamic View showing all Reader LCD Message Set objects. 4. Right-click the Reader LCD Message Set(s) in the list that you want to delete and select Delete from the context menu. A confirmation message appears. 5. Click Yes to confirm the deletion of the Reader LCD Message Set or click No to cancel the deletion. If you click Yes, the Reader LCD Message Set objects dialog box appears showing the results of the delete operation, with one line per message set. If no controllers are using the message set(s), the line shows that the message set was deleted. If, however, the message set is in use, the message Unable to delete object - The C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 391 EFTA01226322 Reader LCD Message Set Tasks message set is currently in use by iSTAR or apC controllers. Please remove the message set from the controller(s) is displayed. Using Set Property to Configure Reader LCD Message Sets You can use Set Property to quickly set a property for one or more Reader LCD Message Sets without opening the Reader LCD Message Set Editor, thus making it useful for mass updates. See Table 88 on Page 390 for the properties that can be changed. a To Set a Property for a Reader LCD Message Set 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select Reader LCD Message Set from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click Or to open a Dynamic View showing all Reader LCD Message Set objects. 4. Right-click the Reader LCD Message Set(s) in the list for which you want to set the property and select Set Property from the context menu. 5. Specify the property for the Reader LCD Message Set(s). Click the drop-down button to see a list of properties. 6. Enter the value for the property and click OK. 7. Click OK on the Setting Properties of Reader LCD Message Set message box. 392 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226323 Changing the Language for the Default RM LCD Messages Changing the Language for the Default RM LCD Messages You can use the Reader LCD Message Set Editor to easily change the language in which the default messages appear. When you first start the C•CURE 9000, the default messages appear in the system-wide primary language you chose during installation. Example: You chose English as the primary system language and configured all the sets of English messages your Boston site needs; you may now want to customize some message sets in French for your Montreal site. The C•CURE 9000Multilingual User Interface (MUI) Editor, available as a licensable option when NOTE purchasing C•CURE 9000, allows you to localize the C•CURE 9000 user interface for a broad range of languages and cultures. When installed and enabled, the C•CURE 9000 MUI Editor allows anyone with appropriate access permissions to localize individual screens and system messages, including the Reader LCD Message Sets, from within C•CURE 9000 at any time. For information on the MUI Editor see the chapter, "Displaying the C•CURE 9000 in Multiple Languages" in the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide. To Change the language for the Default Message Set 1. Exit the C•CURE 9000 Administration Application. 2. Go to the Windows Control Panel and click Regional and Language Options. 3. Use the Regional Options tab on the Regional and Language Options dialog box to change to the language and culture you need by clicking the down- arrow to scroll to your choice and the Customize button to specify your own required formats. Example: French (Canada). Figure 152: Windows Regionaland Language OptionsScreen Rev.)nal and l a np.imps npl ions RcgoalOr6:ns Lexpaagss i MonsclI SP/alath ard /mats oclicrolllecli km SG CONorn lomat notes.*n at. dates. <Stine. Idect kan to match kipittances. a da Cusiceree to *coca yea monk/matt EnOsh CUSS Stall (NW/ Zenbebia/1 Ethan FMKRAII Frrch nodh Becull Fcenth Camthl Fcerch Fars) nench larrthing) Roach Manx.) Fiamt. $./iroba/1 Macedcaan Galoan !Gel/IV/10Mb* Gomm IGernwrvl Gomm lUeciteraterg • as rent and Gemwn !weed:O91 Garman IS./.Meth Get,. littgawn Icekack Itthaeata tiata,Iltay) 001,-.15/4://4/all C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 393 EFTA01226324 Changing the Language for the Default RIO LCD Messages 4. Click Apply and then OK. 5. Restart the Administration Application, click the Hardware button in the Navigation Pane. 6. Right-click the Reader LCD Message Sets Folder in the Hardware bee and click New on the sub-menu that appears, as shown in Figure 149 on Page 383. 7. The Reader LCD Message Set Editor opens, and you can customize a set of messages in French. 394 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226325 9 Floors This chapter explains how to configure Floors in C•CURE 9000. Floors are part of Elevator access control. An Elevator associates a Floor with an Input or Output. In this chapter Floors Overview 396 Configuring Floors 397 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 9 395 EFTA01226326 Floors Overview Floors Overview Floors are configured to define Elevator control. Floors are paired with inputs and outputs to control floor access through elevators. Before you can configure elevators, you must configure floors and/or floor groups. See Elevator Configuration Overview on Page 500 for more information. When a person presents a card at an elevator, the system checks the clearances associated with the card for the elevator and associated floors. If the person's clearances do not allow access, the access attempt is rejected before the person presses an elevator button. If the person has access to a floor, the system grants access to the person and activates the output attached to the button for that floor. A Floor has only Name, Description and Enabled properties. If the Floor has been assigned to any Elevators, they will appear in a read-only list on the Floor General tab. Elevator controls have not been evaluated by UL. NOTE 396 Chapter 9 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226327 Configuring Floors Configuring Floors Accessing the Floor Editor You can access the Floor editor from the C•CURE 9000 Hardware pane. To Access the Floor Editor 1. Click the Hardware pane button. 2. Click the Hardware drop-down list and select Floor. 3. Click K to open a Dynamic View showing all Floor objects. 4. Double-click the Floor in the list that you want to edit, and the Floor General tab opens, as shown in Figure 153 on Page 397. Figure 153: Floor General Tab ®Save anc Close Sax and 'iew 5. Type a name for the Floor in the Floor Name field. 6. Type a description for the Floor in the Description field. 7. Select Enable to indicate that the Floor is available for use. Elevators that are assigned to the Floor will be shown in the Accessed Elevators box. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 9 397 EFTA01226328 Configuring Floors 8. Maintenance Mode - Click to put the Floor into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 2: Maintenance Mode for more information. 9. Click Save and Close when you are finished. 10. When you create a Floor group, a Group tab will appear with the Floor General tab, as shown in Figure 154 on Page 398. Figure 154: Floor Groups Tab Floor Definitions The definitions for the fields and buttons on the Floor General tab are listed in Table 89 on Page 398. Table 89: Floor General Tab FiekUBufton Description Name Enter a name for the floor. Description Enter a brief description for this floor. Maintenance Mode Click to put the floor into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 2: Maintenance Mode for more information. 398 Chapter 9 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226329 Configuring Floors Table 89: Floor General Tab (continued) Field/Button Description Enabled Chedahis box to put the floor online. When the floor isoffline. the C•CURE 9000 System ignores the floor. Accessed Displays a fist of elevators with buttons associated with this floor. These associations are set when you configure the Elevators Elevators. Save and Close Click Save and Close toaccept your changes to the Floor configuration. Creating a Floor You can create a new Floor. To Create a Floor 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select Floor from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click New to create a new floor. The Floor Editor opens and you can configure the Floor. 4. To save your new floor, click Save and Close. Alternatively, if you want to save the floor and then create a new one, click Save and New. The current floor is saved and closed, but the floor Editor remains open to allow you to create a new floor. Creating a Floor Template You can create a new template for a Floor. A Floor template saves you time because you can reuse the same configuration repeatedly. To Create a Floor Template 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select floor from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click the drop-down arrow next to New and select Template. 4. The Floor Template opens and you can configure the Floor template. 5. To save your new floor Template, click Save and Close. The new Floor template appears under Templates in the Template drop-down list. To Select a Floor Template 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select floor from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click the drop-down arrow next to New and select Template. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 9 399 EFTA01226330 Configuring Floors 4. Select the template you wish to use under Templates. Deleting a Floor You can delete a Floor. To Delete a Floor 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select Floor from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click Ma to open a Dynamic View showing all Floor objects. 4. Right-click the Floor in the list that you want to delete and select Delete from the context menu. 5. Click Yes on the "Are you sure you want to delete the selected Floor?" message box. Modifying a Floor You can edit a Floor. To Edit a Floor 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select Floor from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click toy to open a Dynamic View showing all Floor objects. 4. Double-click the Floor in the list that you want to modify and select Edit from the context menu. The Floor Editor opens. Viewing a List of Floors You u;1O vices a list of Floors. a To View a List of Floors 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select Floor from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click • to open a Dynamic View showing all Floor objects. Using Set Property to Configure Floors You can use Set Property to quickly set a property for a Floor without opening a Floor. Set Property allows you to select multiple Floors in the dynamic list, and right-click to use Set Property to set a specific property for all of them. So, for example, if you wanted to change a setting for 20 Floors, you could select all of them and do it in one step. 400 Chapter 9 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226331 Configuring Floors To Set a Property for a Floor 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select Floor from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click s k, to open a Dynamic View showing all Floor objects. 4. Right-click the Floor in the list for which you want to set the property and select Set Property from the context menu. 5. Specify the property for the Floor. Click the drop-down button to see a list of properties. 6. Enter the value for the property and click OK. 7. Click OK on the Setting Properties of Floor message box. Add Floors to a Group You can use Add To Group for Floors. Add Floors To Group enables you to add the Floor object to the group. When you create a Floor group, a Group tab will appear with the Floor - General tab. To Add Floors To a Group 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select floor from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click la to open a Dynamic View showing all floor objects. 4. Right-click the floor in the list that you want to add to a group and select Add To Group from the context menu. Figure 155 on Page 401 displays the Hardware pane and the context menu from which you can add a floor object to a Group. Figure 155: Hardware Pane -Adding a Floor to a Group Halefreate Tete IIeIOVae DOS Coteau • eiZ Dca PIM it NC RE Fit ni ^e1C and t WC RE tE Float g ISCRE rk X Delete iE ike2 l e SCAM FIRE Acc Set twooerti 6TM RE R RE Roc Ad0 t0 4a9 670A RE Emat ISC Ca Pa &gat LCD Id radnark Log.. Canon Han C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 9 401 EFTA01226332 Configuring Fbors 402 Chapter 9 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226333 10 Doors A Door in C•CURE 9000 provides access control by specifying the controllers, readers, inputs, and outputs associated with an entrance. From the application's hardware tree, you will configure the specific controller type first, then configure the associated readers, inputs, and outputs, and then configure the Door. This sequence of reader the security components is necessary because each door requires the associated components to operate with their apC or iSTAR controllers. In this chapter Door Overview 404 Door Tasks 405 apC Door Editor 410 apC Door Definitions 421 iSTAR Door Editor 427 iSTAR Door Monitoring Tab 442 iSTAR Door Definitions 446 iSTAR Aperio Door Editor 455 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 403 EFTA01226334 Door Overview Door Overview In general, a door is a logical structure that ties together a controller and its associated readers, inputs, and outputs for access control. In C•CURE 9000, before you configure the door you must first configure the type of controller that is to be used for the readers, input, and outputs. Then you can configure the door associated with the components. Figure 156 on Page 404 represents the way readers, inputs, outputs, events, and areas are related to Doors in C•CURE 9000, while Table 90 on Page 404 describes typical door components. Figure 156: Typical Door Configuration Inputs Outputs (RTE, DSM) (DLR, ADA) Reader Events In/Out Reader A re a In/Out In/Out Table 90: Typical Door Components Component Description RTE Input A Request To Exit (RTE) input sends a signal that lets C•CURE 9000 know that someone isgoing to open the door to exit. Typicalty this device is a motion sensor or a press to exit button. DSM Input A Door Switch Monitor (DSM) sends a signal that lets C•CURE 9000 know whether the door is open or closed. DLR Output A Door Latch Relay (DLR) is used to send a signal from C•CURE 9000 to a door latch to lock or unlock the door. ADA Output An output that activates a door assistance mechanism. usualty installed for compliance with the Americans with DisabilitiesAct (ADA). Reader Defines the card readers that control entryor egress through thisdoor. In/Out Events Door events are usualty triggered by state changes in the Door inputs and outputs. You specify the Event you want to activate when a change, such as"Door held open; occurs. Area In/Out Defines the Area a cardholder enters and the area a cardholder leaves through th door. Example: Acardholder passing through a door named "Sales' is leaving an Area called "Lobby" and entering an Area called "Sales Office." 404 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226335 Door Tasks Door Tasks You can perform the following general tasks to configure iSTAR and apC Doors. ■ Creating a Door on Page 405 ■ Creating a Door Template on Page 406 ■ Deleting a Door on Page 407 ■ Modifying a Door on Page 407 ■ Viewing a List of Doors on Page 408 ■ Using Set Property to Configure Doors on Page 409 ■ Add a Hardware Device to Group from a Dynamic View on Page 409 Creating a Door A door object must be configured for the type of controller to which it is connected: iSTAR or apC controllers. The process is essentially the same when creating each door object type. First you must create the controller, then configure the controller's General tab and Board tab to configure inputs, outputs and readers. One exception is that with the iSTAR controllers, you are required to first create an iSTAR cluster and then create controllers within that cluster. Once you have created and configured the door controller, you may create as many doors as that type of controller can accommodate. To Create a Door Follow the steps below to create a door for an apC controller. To create an iSTAR door, first refer to the next set of steps for reader the iSTAR Cluster and Controller before reader the iSTAR door. 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. In the Hardware tree, expand the facility folder where you want to create a door. You must create a door by highlighting a controller icon, board icon, or door icon in the hardware tree: • apC - highlight the apC controller icon, right click, and select apC Door > New. • iSTAR - highlight the iSTAR controller icon, right click, and select iSTAR Door > New. You can also create a new door from the door icon in a folder: highlight the door icon, right click, and select Door > New. A new Door Dialog box opens. When the Door Dialog box opens on the General tab, configure the Door. 3. Enter a Name and Description. 4. Maintenance Mode - Click to put the door into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 2: Maintenance Mode for more information. 5. Configure the fields on the General tab, as needed. The fields listed below are on the apC and iSTAR Door dialog boxes. • Controller - This is a read-only field that indicates the controller associated with the door. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 405 EFTA01226336 Door Tasks • Door Switch Monitor - Click ID to display a list of inputs available for the controller. This signal is true when the door is open. It is used to determine Admit Unused, Door Held, and Door Forced. Click an Input to select it and assign it to the Door Switch Monitor field. • Door Lock Relay - Click ID to display a list of outputs available for the controller. T his output is used to open the door. Click an Output to select it and assign it to the Door Lock Relay field. • Alternate Shunt Relay - Click CI to display a list of outputs available for the controller. Alternate Shunt is used for cardholders with disability and sometimes for aircraft loading doors. Click an Output to select it and assign it to the Alternate Shunt Relay field . • Shunt Expiration Relay - Click CI to display a list of outputs available for the controller. This output will indicate the expiration of the shunt. Click an Output to select it and assign it to the Shunt Expiration Relay field. • Entrance Reader - Click CI to display a list of Readers available. Entrance and Exit Readers are required for Area related functions such as Occupancy and Anti-Passback Click a Reader to select it and assign it to the Entrance Reader field. • Exit Reader - Click ID to display a list of Readers available. Entrance and Exit Readers are required for Area related functions such as Occupancy and Anti-Passback Click a Reader to select it and assign it to the Exit Reader field. • Readers are continuously active - Click this check box to enable continuous reader activity. Continuously Active is not normally used. It is typically used for subway gates and other high volume applications. • Request to Exit Input - Click CI to display a list of Inputs available. Click an Input to select it and assign it to the field. • Unlock Door on RTE - Click this check box to unlock the door at a Request to Exit. This is usually checked, but certain high security areas may use the REX as a signal to the Security Officer who verifies the person and opens the door. • Shunt DSM while RTE is active - Click this check box to Shunt Door Switch Monitor While Request to Exit is Active. This is frequently used to correct a race condition between REX and DSM. 6. To save your new Door, click Save and Close. To save the Door and create a new one, click Save and New. The current Door is saved and closed, but the Door Editor remains open to allow you to create a new Door. The following controller creation provides a sample of the steps involved in the creation of an iSTAR Cluster and Controller. For more detailed information about the creation of iSTAR Clusters, refer to Configuring iSTAR Clusters on Page 87. For more detailed information about the creation of controllers, refer to: ■ Creating an iSTAR Controller on Page 124 ■ Configuration Overview for iSTAR Controllers on Page 119 ■ apC Panel Overview on Page 296. Creating a Door Template You can create a template for a Door. A Door template saves you time because you can reuse the same configuration repeatedly. 406 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226337 Door Tasks To Create a Door Template 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select either an apC or iSTAR Door from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click the drop-down arrow next to New and select Template. 4. The Door Template opens and you can configure it. 5. To save your new Door Template, click Save and Close. The new Door template appears in the Template drop down list under Templates. To Select a Door Template 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select either an apC or iSTAR Door from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click the drop-down arrow next to New and select Template. 4. Select the template you wish to use under the Templates list and configure the door as explained in Creating a Door on Page 405. Deleting a Door You can delete a Door from a controller. To Delete a Door 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select either an apC or iSTAR Door from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click a ds to open a Dynamic View showing Door objects of the same type. 4. Right-click the Door in the list that you want to delete and select Delete from the context menu. 5. Click Yes on the "Are you sure you want to delete the selected Door?" message box. Modifying a Door You can edit a Door. To Edit a Door 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select either an apC or iSTAR Door from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click Mik to open a Dynamic View showing Door objects of the same type. 4. Double-click the Door in the list that you want to modify, and the Door Editor opens. Or, you can select the door in the list, right click, and select Edit from the context menu. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 407 EFTA01226338 Viewing a List of Doors You J.- J:1 cicw a list of Doors. To View a List of Doors 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select either an apC or iSTAR Door from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click gl to open a Dynamic View showing Door objects of the same type. In the Dynamic View, you can right-click the column header and select new columns from the list to NOTE add them to the Dynamic View. (For iSTAR Doors you can add a column that identifies the Intrusion Zone to which the Doors belong.) If you right-click a row in the Door Dynamic View, a context menu is displayed. This menu contains a number of standard selections, as well as selections that are specific for Doors. See Using the Object List Context Menu in the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide for more information about the object context menu. See Table 91 on Page 408 for context menu selections that are specific to Doors. There are additional context menu selections for Advanced Door monitoring. See Advanced Door Monitoring Details on Page 495 for more information. Table 91: Doors Context Menu Selections Selection Description Lock Opens a Manual action dialog box that lets you lock the selected Door. Unlock Opens a Manual action dialog box that lets you unlock the selected Door. Momentary Opens a Manual action dialog box that lets you momentarily unlock the selected Door. Unlock Show Opens the Cause List viewer for this Door. Locked Causes Door Opens the Doors Monitoring Screen for the Door you selected. Monitoring See Door Monitoring Screen on Page 496 for information about the Doors Monitoring screen. Show Click this menu selection to view a list of Security Objects associated with this iSTAR or apC Door. For more information, see Association 'Showing Associations for an Object' in the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide. Monitor Click this menu selection to view activity for the selected iSTAR and apC Door(s), and any Input, Output, Reader, and Trigger- with-target-Event dlidren, on an Admin Monitor Activity Viewer. For more information, see 'Monitoring an Object from the Administration Station' in the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide. 408 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226339 uocr I Using Set Property to Configure Doors You can use Set Property to quickly set a property for an iSTAR or apC Door without opening an iSTAR or apC Door editor. Set Property allows you to select multiple Doors objects in the dynamic list, and right-click to use Set Property to set a specific property for all of them. Example: If you wanted to change an unlock property setting for 20 apC Doors, you could select all of them listed in the dynamic list and do it in one step. To Set a Property for a Door 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select either an apC or iSTAR Door from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click it s to open a Dynamic View showing all Door objects. 4. Right-click the Door (or set of doors) in the list for which you want to set a property and select Set Property from the context menu. 5. Specify the property for the Door. Click the Browse button to see a list of properties. 6. Enter the value for the property and click OK. 7. Click OK on the Select a property and value for object message box. Add a Hardware Device to Group from a Dynamic View When you select a Hardware device from a Dynamic View and then right-click for the context menu, Add to group appears as a menu selection. This function enables you to add the object(s) to a Group. More more information about the Group function see Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 28. To Add a Hardware Device To a Group 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select a Hardware device from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click gib to open a Dynamic View showing all objects of that type. 4. Right-click on the object that you want to add to a Group and select Add To Group. A list of Groups is displayed. 5. Select the Group from the list, and the object is added to that group. 6. Click OK to confirm your choice. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 409 EFTA01226340 apC Door Editor apC Door Editor The apC Door editor has the following tabs: • apC Door General Tab on Page 411 • apC Door Readers Tab on Page 413 • apC Door Timing Tab on Page 415 • apC Door Triggers Tab on Page 416 • Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 28 • apC Door Status Tab on Page 416 • apC Door Visitor Management Tab on Page 418 • apC Door State Images Tab on Page 417 Configuring an apC Door To configure a Door associated with an apC controller, first you must configure an apC panel, along with its readers, input, and outputs. For more information see apC Controller Configuration Summary on Page 308. To configure the door, perform the following tasks. The apC and apC/L controllers have not been evaluated by UL. NOTE To Configure the apC Door 1. In the C•CURE 9000 Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Configure the apC panel's Readers, Inputs, and Outputs. 3. In the Hardware tree, find the apc Controller to which you want to associate the new apC Door, and click the "+" to expand the contents of that directory. A list displays that includes Doors, Elevators, Inputs, Outputs, and Readers. These objects are also directories. If you already have some apC doors configured, you can display all existing doors for the controller. Highlight Doors and click Rai to open a Dynamic View showing all Door objects of this type (see Figure 157 on Page 411). Edit an existing door by double-clicking the door in the Dynamic View to open the door's editor window. 4. Highlight the Doors directory in the Hardware tree, right-click to display the context menu, and select New. A new apC Door editor displays. See apC Door - General tab, as shown in Figure 158 on Page 412. Another way to create the new apC door is to highlight the Controller in the Hardware tree, right click, and select apC Door>New. 410 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226341 apC Door Editor Figure 157: Hardware Pane - Create an apC Door tog coTtenn: to roup Iteromme v 2 DuISCatficee. Nano to float apC Caftan 1 Biz 5 ISC Cows Pats apC CaRclei 2 Bklg 5 P a Rosin LCD MenageSOH • la CCOPare. Haas PatkriDttal re aPC CamPats ccuREMoble AOC Cabal 1Oki; 5 • • 4gC Coracle, 28145 llp Itert it Eire New hada, ite 5. Configure the door on the General tab and any other tabs, as needed. You will need to have already configured the apC Readers, Inputs, and Outputs to fully configure an apC door. 6. Configure remaining tabs for this door, or click Save and Close. The new door displays under the Doors directory in the Hardware tree. apC Door General Tab Configure the door on the General tab and other tabs, as required. You will need to have configured the apC Readers, Inputs, and Outputs to configure an apC door. Refer to the apC Controller Configuration Summary on Page 308 for further information. The following section documents the tasks required to configure a basic Door object for apC panel access control. The Door Reader buttons and entry fields on the Door General tab, shown in Figure 158 on Page 412, allow you to specify the card readers associated with this Door, and to configure door-specific settings for these readers. To Configure the apC Door General Tab 1. Use the Identification box to enter a Name and brief Description (optional) of the door that you are reader. The Controller that you have chosen to operate the door is listed in the read-only Controller field. 2. Click ID for the Door Switch Monitor. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the Door Switch Monitor, a browser opens presenting a list of inputs available for the controller. Click an Input to select it and add it to the entry field (see Figure 158 on Page 412). C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 411 EFTA01226342 apC Door Editor Figure 158: apC Door GeneralTab Ind cost anis? WM( boc x, LIMOS raving Dnr Rule Paritica Men Wry r tirltroxe mak, GRAM I RHA<tl Tag l Iran l Gan l Rai I IC Deaf Fah Ra vva to t Lain.. rapt., Door Saadi Mak.: IcC Pat I , tot PMUr1 cc FtEl (Mc Wag) Eta Lea* Rake; IcC 0.1D-114p: REI Nan Cc) &VS RagRay I't I VC Peat I apC REI SOVESSIIKe Par CC Oa/ICC R8040 Eked Nan VMI Raves/ To Ent Nest To Shape itoC FRUIcC REI Psi, Wm] =al P IMAM. enRIZ P Supt 091a RIESloin 1 k 3. Click Ej for the Door Lock Relay. When you click this button to select an output to assign to the Door Lock Relay, a browser opens presenting a list of outputs available for the controller. Click an Output to select it and add it to the entry field. 4. Click Ej for the Alternate Shunt Relay. When you click this button to select an output to assign to the Alternate Shunt Relay, a browser opens presenting a list of outputs available for the controller. Click an Output to select it and add it to the entry field. 5. Click [j for the Shunt Expiration Relay. When you click this button to select an output to assign to the Shunt Expiration Relay, a browser opens presenting a list of outputs available for the controller. Click an Output to select it and add it to the entry field. 6. Click [j for the Request to Exit Input. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the Request to Exit, a browser opens presenting a list of inputs available for the controller. Click an RTE Input to select it and add it to the entry field. 7. Select the Unlock Door on RTE check box to unlock the door at a Request to Exit 8. Select the Shunt DSM While RTE is Active check box to Shunt Door Switch Monitor While Request to Exit is Active. 9. Navigate to the Readers tab, or click Save and Close to return to the Hardware pane. 412 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Con figuration Guide EFTA01226343 apC Door Editor apC Door Readers Tab The apC Door - Readers tab allows configuration of inbound and outbound access readers and for bi-directional readers installed at apC controlled doors. MI the readers on the door must be located on the same apC panel. See Figure 159 on Page 413. The Readers tab also lets you configure doors as "ordinary" or turnstile for escorted access for visitors by selecting the Readers Are Continuously Active check box. Figure 159: apC Door Readers Tab Soma la:court amentOca &V•••.; Derr A Pane", Wan Wrg r Lieritrarce Male GAPS Parka I Tina, I Nal I eValt• I as I tblitodowd Rids I SISSON I Attess Pisan Kcal Near kpcpad.i. apC RE1 pan Yingl — • I 93••••••r•We repC Peadel. apC RE1 Man Alp) I .1 ig Reds anmonody uipte 8.-treciael %Wen Mtnace NIhs th04 Maris Neal wane lecC eat I IcC 32 nu &all to, 2 RA ...Iv I Mimi ogroMe rtlin li10 secoa Cl encresed ionise ass MA 00114.*IN Otitald MOYVIX4t Mancini/10w 1/10•exads dement To Configure the apC Door Readers Tab 1. Click for the Inbound Access Reader. When you click this button to select a reader to assign to the Inbound Access Reader, a browser opens presenting a list of readers available for the panel. Click a Reader to select it and add it to the entry field. When specifying an access reader, follow these guideline: • Both access readers on the door must be located on the same apC panel. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 413 EFTA01226344 apC Door Editor • If you are using a bi-directional reader, specify the same reader in the inbound and outbound access reader fields. 2. Click 0 for the Outbound Access Reader. When you click this button to select a reader to assign to the Outbound Access Reader, a browser opens presenting a list of readers available for the controller. Click a Reader to select it and add it to the entry field. 3. Select the Readers are Continuously Active check box to enable continuous reader activity, enabling readers to read and process cards even when the doors associated with them are unlocked or open because of another card access request. This mode is typically used for turnstiles or other high traffic situations that would result in unacceptable delays if the reader went through its normal sequence of read-open-close for each cardholder. Example: Suppose a user swipes their card and unlocks a door. Before the door opens and closes, another person swipes his card. If this box is checked, the system treats the second swipe as an access request. If you leave this box unchecked, the system ignores the second swipe. This feature is useful at high volume doors where you don't want to wait for the door to close after every access. For escorted access for visitors to work at: • "Ordinary" doors — multiple person access on each access cycle — select the Readers Are Continuously Active check box. • "Turnstiles" (or Mantraps) — one person access only on each access cycle — clear the Readers Are Continuously Active check box. 4. Click 0 to select an input for the apC Bi-directional Reader in the Activation of the Input Determines Inbound Movement entry field. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the inbound input, a browser opens presenting a list of inputs available for the panel. Click an Input to select it and add it to the entry field. The selected input tests for inbound movement at the apC controlled door. When this input activates within the directional link time, the system determines that the card is moving in the inbound direction. The apC panel uses this information for access control decisions. The inbound input must be on the same apC as the bi-directional readers on this door. 5. If the door has an inbound input defined in the Activation of This Input Determines Inbound Movement field, enter the time in tenths of seconds that the panel waits between card reads and input state changes to determine that the card is entering the area in the Must Activate Within entry field. The range for this field is from 0 to 99.99 seconds in units of 0.1 seconds. If the input changes state within the specified time, the panel determines that the card is moving into the inbound area. 6. Click 0 to select an input for the apC Bi-directional Reader in the Activation of the Input Determines Outbound Movement entry field. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the outbound input, a browser opens presenting a list of inputs available for the panel. Click an Input to select it and add it to the entry field. The selected input tests for outbound movement at the apC controlled door. When this input activates within the directional link time, the system determines that the card is moving in the outbound direction. The apC uses this information for access control. The outbound input must be on the same apC as the bi-directional readers on this door. 7. If the door has an outbound input defined in the Activation of This Input Determines Outbound Movement field, enter the time in tenths of seconds that the panel waits between card reads and input state changes to 414 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226345 apC Door Editor determine that the card is entering the area in the Must Activate Within entry field. The range for this field is from 0 to 99.99 seconds in units of 0.1 seconds. If the input changes state within the specified time, the panel determines that the card is moving into the outbound area. 8. Navigate to the Timing tab, or click Save and Close to return to the Hardware pane. apC Door Timing Tab A door that is controlled by an apC panel is constrained to a single set of door timing values for each side of the door. Required apC door sequences use the same set of timing values regardless of schedule. Only one alternate set of timer values is used in each door sequence. This corresponds to a personnel record configured to use Alternate Shunt Time. See the Timing tab in Figure 160 on Page 415. Figure 180: apC Door Timing Tab .1:Jal eV Oast Sa.< ad! an. *awl DOS avyterg D_ Soda Paid= lien VAro r Monarace Mole Gent I Rooks bra I Nein I Goa I Sue I Ike OWNS &No I Subape I Dolt Mock iseccoa) SLIM rem(seearal: Ltrezt ids (wak) Is arra Sent Teo (Worms* Ix 00 00 Runt Esweece Worm" Tire (gm ea) D2, r Cbstectarce Time (110 stCI Doc, Opun )ace Ton•1110 toc) Setting apC Door Timing 1. Delay Relock - Enter the number of seconds to delay door relock after the door is opened (after a request to exit, for example). The range in seconds is 000 to 0:1639 (999 seconds); the default is 000. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 415 EFTA01226346 apC Door Editor 2. Shunt Time - Enter the number of seconds that the door can remain open before a door held open alert is generated within the range of 000 to 0:16:39 (999 seconds); the default is 0:0:10 (10 seconds). 3. Unlock Time - Enter the number of seconds the Door remains unlocked after a valid card swipe, RTE activation, or momentary unlock within the range of 000 to 0:4:15 (255 seconds); the default is 005 (5 seconds). 4. Alternate Shunt Time - Enter the number of hours, minutes, and seconds the Door can remain open before a door held open alert is generated after a valid card swipe by a cardholder with the Alternate Shunt flag set in their personnel record. This value is used only if it is set to a greater time than the Shunt time value within the range of 000 (default) to 18:0:0 (18 hours). 5. Shunt Expiration Warning Time - If set, the Shunt expiration relay is fired regardless of the shunt time used. If set to 0 (the default), the Shunt expiration relay will only be fired if the Alternate shunt time was used. The Shunt Expiration Warning has a range of 000 to 0:4:0 (4 minutes). 6. Door Close Debounce Time - Setting this value to 0 indicates that there is no timer. The range is 0 - 25.5 seconds units of 0.1 seconds. 7. Door Open Grace Time - Also known as Door Open Debounce Time. Setting this value to 0 indicates that there is no timer; as soon as the door opens, door forced open is reported. The range for this field is from 0 to 25.5 seconds in units of 0.1 seconds. 8. Navigate to the Triggers tab, or click Save and Close to return to the Hardware pane. apC Door Triggers Tab You can create Triggers for apC Doors using the apC Doors Triggers tab. A Trigger executes a specified Action when a particular predefined condition occurs. When a Trigger is defined, the Actions available depend on the property selected See the following for information on apC Triggers: ■ Triggers Tab for apC Devices on Page 369. ■ Defining a Trigger for an apC Device on Page 370. ■ Removing a Trigger on Page 272 You can click Save and Close after configuring apC Door triggers, or navigate to the Status tab. apC Door Status Tab The Door Status tab (see Figure 161 on Page 417) provides a read-only listing of critical information about the operational status of the selected Door including: ■ Alarm State - displays the values Normal, Forced, Held Open, or Unknown. ■ Admit Status - displays the values Admit, Reject Admit, Duress, Admit Visitor, Reject Visitor, Request To Exit, Reject No Escort, Reject No PIN, Reject Not Time, Reject Unknown, Reject Unknown PIN, or Reject Duress. ■ Open Status - displays the values Open, Closed, or Unknown. ■ Mode - displays the values Locked, Unlocked, No Access, or Unknown. 418 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226347 apC Door Editor Figure 161: apC Door Status Tab arm *owl 9medeemd &green; Dem,v, 9u0o Priam *Weft r 14.0.11cd• Gino* I tows I lap I %en I Goa SIvroeinawwIsrreosI Downs Sou Mode Stelt IUMenem Open Stens [Ulm., Mode 'Locked ■ Navigate to the State Images tab or click Save and Close. apC Door State Images Tab The State Images tab on the Inputs Board (shown in Figure 162 on Page 418) provides a means to change the default images used to indicate controller states. To Change an Image 1. Double-click the existing image. A Wmdows Open dialog box appears allowing you to browse for a folder in which you have placed replacement images. 2. When you locate the replacement image, select it to add it to the image listing. 3. To restore the default image, right-click the new image and select Restore Default. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 417 EFTA01226348 apC Door Editor Figure 162: apC Door State Images Tab Sast ard Case Sa.< and Wen ke ex, COMIPbei• lagnierg Day\ ado :J Pricks Men Wee r Salenswoo Mc* Getwid %abet I Tim, I Tryon I Grad I saw I Us PoIrod Fedi Rae masa Age 'nape 4. Click Save and Close to return to the Hardware pane. apC Door Visitor Management Tab The apC Door Visitor Management tab lets you configure Doors with Visitor Management Actions, so that you can automatically Check-in and Check-out Visitors. For more information about Check-in and Check-out of Visitor via Visitor Management, see the C•CURE 9000 Visitor Management Guide. 418 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226349 apC Door Editor Figure 183: apC Door Visitor Management tab apC Door - coo door I a Svc crid Close Sove and Nett Mama COO dcci 1 Description r Maintenance Mode Time Zoom General I Readers I Irnrig I Trim's I Groups I Status I Use' Defined Fields Vintel MenageniEn I State images I ' Add Acton > Remove Acton Wiwi Management Action Ditection Scheckle Chat. Vcitcy, In In a/nays To Configure a Door Action for Check-In 1. In the C•CURE 9000 Admin Client, navigate to the Door you wish to configure. 2. Click the Visitor Management tab. 3. Click Add Action. 4. Chose the Visitor Management Action Check Visitors In. 5. Select the Direction for the action to take place. • Choose In for Visitors to Check-in using an inbound reader. • Choose Out for Visitors to Check-in using an outbound reader. • Choose In and Out for Visitors to Check-in using either the inbound or outbound reader. 6. Select a Schedule for the action to be active. 7. Click Save and Close To Configure a Door Action for Check-out 1. In the C•CURE 9000 Admin Client, navigate to the Door you wish to configure. 2. Click the Visitor Management tab. 3. Click Add Action. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 419 EFTA01226350 apC Door Editor 4. Chose the Visitor Management Action Check Visitors Out • Check Out Visitors and Return Badge. 5. Select the Direction for the action to take place. • Choose In for Visitors to Check-out using an inbound reader. • Choose Out for Visitors to Check-out using an outbound reader. • Choose In and Out for Visitors to Check-out using either the inbound or outbound reader. 6. Select a Schedule for the action to be active. 7. Click Save and Close a To Configure a Door Action for Check-out This presumes that a Badge Return mechanism is set up at the Check-out reader. 1. In the C•CURE 9000 Admin Client, navigate to the Door you wish to configure. 2. Click the Visitor Management tab. 3. Click Add Action. 4. Chose the Visitor Management Action Check Visitors Out • Check Out Visitors and Return Badge. 5. Select the Direction for the action to take place. • Choose In for Visitors to Check-out and Return the Badge using an inbound reader. • Choose Out for Visitors to Check-out and Return the Badge using an outbound reader. • Choose In and Out for Visitors to Check-out and Return the Badge using either the inbound or outbound reader. 6. Select a Schedule for the action to be active. 7. Click Save and Close 420 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226351 apC Door Definitions apC Door Definitions The definitions of the various fields and buttons on the apC Door editor are given in the following tables. apC Door General Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Name Use the Identification box to enter a name (up to 5O characters long) and brief description of the door you are ocinfiguring. Description A description of the door that you are configuring. Maintenance Click to put the apC door into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 2: Maintenance Mode for more information. Mode Partition The Partition label indicates to which partition the door belongs. Hardware Door Switch Click ri for the Door Switch Monitor. When you dick this button to select inputs to assign to the Door Switch Monitor. a Monitor browser opens presenting a list of inputs available for the controller. Click a Switch or other pre-configured Input to select it and add it to the entry field. Door Lock Click El for the Door Lock Relay. When you dick this button to select an output to assign to the Door Lock Relay, a browser Relay opens presenting a list of outputs ava liable for the controller. Click a Lock or other pre-configured Output to select it and add it to the entry field. Alternate Click ri for the Alternate Shunt Relay. When you dick this button to select an input to assign to the Alternate Shunt Relay. Shunt Relay a browser opens presenting a list of outputs available for the controller. Click an Output to select it and add it to the entry field. Shunt Click[] for the Shunt Expiration Relay. When you click this button to select an output to assign to the Shunt Expiration Expiration Relay. a browser opens presenting a list of outputs available for the controller. Click an Output to select it and add it to the entry Relay field. Request to Exit Request to Click --. I for the Request to Exit input. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the Request to Exit input. Exit Input a browser opens presenting a list of inputs available for the controller. Click an input to select it and add it to the entry field. Unlock Door Select the Unlock Door on RTE check box to unlock the door at a Request to Exit. on RTE Shunt DSM Select the Shunt DSM While RTE is Active CheCk box to Shunt Door Switch Monitor While Request to Exit is Active. while RTE is active apC Door Readers Tab Definitions Table 92: apC Door Readers Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Access Readers C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 421 EFTA01226352 apC Door Definitions apC Door Readers Tab Definitions (continued) FlekUBufton Description Inbound Access When you click in to select an Inbound Access Reader, a browser opens presenting a list of readers available for the panel. Reader Click a Reader to select it and add it to the entry field. Outbound When you dick[] to select an Outbound Access Reader, a browser opens presenting a list of readers available for the Access Reader panel. Click a Reader to select it and add it to the entry field. Readers are Select the Readers Are Continuously Active check box 4 you want readers to read and process cards even when the Continuously doors associated with them are unlocked or open because of another card access request. Active Bi-directional Readers Activation of the Click n to select an input for the apC Bi-directional Reader in the Activation of the Input Determines Inbound Movement Input entry field. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the inbound input, a browser opens presenting a list of Determines inputs available for the panel. Click an Input to select it and add it to the entry field. Inbound The selected input tests for inbound movement at the apC controlled door. When this input activates within the directional link Movement time, the system determines that the card is moving in the inbound direction. The apC panel uses this information for access controldecisions. The inbound input must be on the same apC as the bi-directional readers on this door. Must Activate If the door has an inbound input (termed in the Activation of This Input Determines Inbound Movement field, enter the time in Within tenths of seconds that the panel waits between card reads and input state changes to determine that the card is entering the area in the Must Activate Within entry field. The range for this field is from 0 to 99.99 seconds in units of 0.1 seconds. If the input changes state within the specified time, the pa nel determines that the card is moving into the inbound area. Activation of the Click El to select an input for the apC Bi-directional Reader in the Activation of the Input Determines Outbound Movement Input entry field. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the outbound input, a browser opens presenting a list of Determines inputs available for the panel. Chelan Input to select it and add it to the entry field. Outbound The selected input tests for outbound movement at the apC controlled door. When this input activateswithin thedirectionallink Movement time, the system determines that the card is moving in the outbound direction. The apC uses this information for accesscontrol. The outbound input must be on the same apC as the bi-directional readers on this door. Must Activate If the door has an outbound input defined in the Activation of This input Determines Outbound Movement field, enter Within the time in tenths of seconds that the pa nel wa its between card reads and input state changes to determine that the cards entering the area in the Must Activate Within entry field. The range for this field is from 0 to 99.99 seconds in units of 0.1 seconds. If the input changes state within the specified time, the panel determines that the card is moving into the outbound area. apC Door Timing Tab Definitions Table 93: apC Door Timing Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Timers 422 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226353 apC Door Definitions apC Door Timing Tab Definitions(continued) Fieldeutton Description Delay Relock Type the number of seconds to delaydoor rebck after the door isopened (after a request to exit, for example). The range in seconds is 0:0:0 to 0:16:39 (999 seconds); the default is 0:0:0. Shunt Time Shunt Time - type the number of seconds that the door can remain open before a door held open alert is generated within the range of 0:0:0 to 0:16:39 (999 seconds): the default is 0:0:10 (10 seconds). Unlock Time Unlock Time - type the number of seconds the Door remains unlocked after a valid card swipe, RTE activation, or momentary unlock within the range of 0:0:0 to 0:4:15 (255 seconds); the default is 0:0:5 (5 seconds). Alternate Alternate Shunt Time - type the number of hours, minutes, and seconds the Door can remain open before a door held open Shunt Time alert is generated after a valid card swipe by a cardholder with theAlternate Shunt flag set in their personnel record (This value is used onty if it is set to a greater time than the Shunt time value) within the range of defauttiminimum: 0:0:0; maximum:18:0:0 (18 hours). Shunt if set, the Shunt expiration relay fires regardless of the shunt time used. If set to 0 (the default), the Shunt expiration relay fires Expiration onty if the Alternate shunt time is used. The Shunt Expiration Warning has a range of 0:0:0 to 0:4:0 (4 minutes). Warning Time Door Close Specifies the time (in 1/10th of a second intervals) that the C•CURE 9000 ignores DSM inputs. to allow for bouncing doors. Debounce Setting this value to 0 indicates that there is no timer. The range for thisfield is from 0 to 25.5 seconds in unitsof 0.1 seconds. Time Door Open Specifies the time (in 1/10th of a second intervals) that the C•CURE 9000 waits for an RTE, card admit, or momentary unbck Grace Time signal after receiving the signal from the DSM. Setting this value to 0 indicates that there is no timer; as soon as the door opens, door forced open is reported. The range for thisfield is from 0 to 25.5 seconds in unitsof 0.1 seconds. apC Door Triggers Tab Definitions Table 94: apC Door Triggers Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Triggers Add Click Add in the Triggers tab to create a new trigger. Remove Click the row selector . . then click Remove to delete a trigger. Property Click within the Property column to display[. When you select this button, the Property browser opens presenting properties available for the controller. Click a Property to select it and add it to the column. Value Click within the Value oolumn to display a drop-down list of Values associated with the Property that you have selected. Clickon a Value that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 423 EFTA01226354 apC Door Definitions apC Door Triggers Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Action Click within the Action column to display a drop-down list of valid actions. Click on an Action that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column. When a Trigger is added, an Action must be configured in the Action column. This is the Action that willoccur when the object's selected Property receives the selected Value. As the Action is selected, the lower pane in the Triggers box will show a corresponding entry field, or group of entry fields. specific to the selected Action. Click n to select entries for these fields. Once the field (or group of fields) is completed, the Details column willshow information about how the Action has been configured. Details Displays data ils concerning the security objects that are associated with the selected Action. Schedule C lick within the Schedule column to display a drop-down list of pre-configured schedules. Click n to select a Schedule that you want to attariate with the trigger. Schedules are created in the Configuration Pane. See the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information. apC Door Trigger Properties Table 95: apC Door Trigger Properties Property Description Admit Status For anyone of the Admit Status values (see the Value column list) you can choose one of the following Actions to create a Trigger: Values are: AdmitReject Activate Event -When this status occurs and the Schedule isActive (you can choose anySchedule). Duress Activate Event Outside Schedule -An event is activated when this status occurs while the Schedule is inactive (choose any Schedule). Noticed Admit Activate Output -When this statusoccurs (only works with the Always Schedule). Noticed Only these three Actions are supported for Admit Status. Reject Alarm 1. Choose a value for the Property from the Values column. StateStatus 2. Select an Action from the Action drop-down list: Values are: Activate Event - Select an Event to activate when this status occurs. Forced Activate Event Outside Schedule- Select an Event to activate when this statusoccurs while the Schedule is innctrvc. Held Open Activate Output - Select an Output to activate when this statusoccurs. Must use the Always Schedule. 3. Select a Schedule by clicking in the Schedule column, then dick C] to select the Schedule that you want to associate with the trigger. For example. if you chose Forced as an Alarm State Status for which you want to define an action, you could then select Activate Event. In Details. select the Event you want to activate. Then select a Schedule to determine during what time periods you want the Forced Alarm State Status to activate an Event. 424 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226355 apC Door Definitions apC Door Groups Tab Definitions Table 96: apC Door Groups Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Groups E l 4 y ce For more information about the use of the Toolbar buttons, see Chapter 2, "Dynamic Views' in the C.CURE 9000 Z Data Views Guide Name T his column displays the name entered for the group when it was configured. The selected door is a member of any group(s) listed in thiscolumn. Description This column displays the description entered for the group when it was configured. apC Door Status Tab Definitions Table 97: apC Door apC Status Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Alarm Status Displays the values Normal, Forced, Held Open, or Unknown. Admit Status Displays the valuesAdmit, Reject Admit, Duress, Admit Visitor, Reject Visitor, Request To Exit, Reject No Escort, Reject No PIN, Reject Not Time. Reject Unknown, Reject Unknown PIN, or Reject Duress. Open Status Displays the values Open. Closed. or Unknown. Mode Displays the values Locked, Unlocked, No Access, or Unknown. apC Door State Images Tab Fields and Icons Table 98: apC Doo State Images Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Field/Button Description Unknown Locked El Forced Unlocked e L i-_I Held Open No Access al Li C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 425 EFTA01226356 apC Door Definitions apC Door State Images Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Field/Button Description Open Momentary Unlock [] 426 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226357 STAR Door Edrtor iSTAR Door Editor You use the iSTAR Door editor to configure iSTAR Doors. To configure a Door associated with an iSTAR controller, first you must: ■ Create an iSTAR cluster ■ Create the iSTAR controller in that cluster ■ Create the inputs, outputs and readers that are associated with the Door. For a brief explanation see Creating a Door on Page 405. For a more detailed explanation of configuring iSTAR controllers see Understanding C•CURE iSTAR Controllers on Page 118. The iSTAR Door Editor includes the following tabs: ■ iSTAR Door General Tab on Page 427 ■ iSTAR Door Timing Tab on Page 429 ■ iSTAR Door Areas & Zones Tab on Page 431 ■ iSTAR Door Double Swipe Tab on Page 432 ■ iSTAR Door Conditional Access Tab on Page 436 ■ iSTAR Door Triggers Tab on Page 438 ■ Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 28 ■ iSTAR Door Status Tab on Page 440 ■ iSTAR Door Monitoring Tab on Page 442 ■ iSTAR Door Visitor Management tab on Page 443 ■ iSTAR Door State Images Tab on Page 442 iSTAR Door General Tab Perform the following steps to configure a basic Door object for iSTAR Controller access control. The Door Reader buttons and entry fields on the Door dialog box General tab, shown in Figure 164 on Page 428, allow you to specify the card readers associated with this Door, and to configure door-specific settings for these readers. If the first Input, Output, or Reader you assign is a Shlage Wireless I/O component, a message box NOTE appears asking if you wish to auto-fill the remaining objects for the door. If you click Yes the remaining objects are selected automatically. This option only appears if all of the options are blank when you assign the first object. See iSTAR PIM-485 Reader I/O Tab on Page 261 for information about Schlage Wireless Reader I/O components. An iSTAR Aperio Door does not have the following tabs: Areas & Zones, Double Swipe, and Door NOTE Monitoring. Also, for Aperio Doors, some of the General tab settings are unavailable because these Inputs and Outputs are integral to the reader and not user-selectable. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 427 EFTA01226358 STAR Door Edda( To Configure the iSTAR Door General Tab 1. Use the Identification box to enter a Name and brief Description (optional) of the door that you are configuring. Figure 164: STAR Door General Tab Vt. IS I AR Dv5a Il ltra Door I LISarro and Ono ei ca..* red Deo [tame ['Aro Coy QrscrebOn Paaba Delat r Merdensce Mod Lev Zone GMT.0597) Eastern TmelVS sCavdal General I Tan; Heat a Zones I Date Sam I Nan I Gen I Status I Des Mo-tam I user Dead Fees I State neat I Loaeon Comas Iltral Dow Seittawlor Oos Loa Paex I Mimeo 5)unt Reiss I RIM Wanda Ras; I Neon Maenads: r Outsold ReetM I r Ramer.ES ResselTeEdleak r r ACC, :CC, r P- E: r r Same r sem rce-agmns SW Matte to the 'at The Controller that you have chosen to operate the door is listed in the Controller read-only field. 2. Click El for the Door Switch Monitor. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the Door Switch Monitor, a browser opens presenting a list of inputs available for the controller. Click an Input to select it and add it to the entry field (see Figure 164 on Page 428). 3. Click CI for the Door Lock Relay. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the Door Lock Relay, a browser opens presenting a list of outputs available for the controller. Click an Output to select it and add it to the entry field. 4. Click El for the Alternate Shunt Relay. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the Alternate Shunt Relay, a browser opens presenting a list of outputs available for the controller. Click an Output to select it and add it to the entry field. 428 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226359 STAR Door Editor 5. Click El for the Shunt Expiration Relay. When you click this button to select an output to assign to the Shunt Expiration Relay, a browser opens presenting a list of outputs available for the controller. Click an Output to select it and add it to the entry field. 6. Click El for the Entrance Reader. When you click this button to select a reader to assign to the Entrance Reader, a browser opens presenting a list of readers available for the controller. Click a Reader to select it and add it to the entry field. 7. Click El for the Exit Reader. When you click this button to select a reader to assign to the Exit Reader, a browser opens presenting a list of readers available for the controller. Click a Reader to select it and add it to the entry field. 8. Select the Readers are Continuously Active check box to enable continuous reader activity, enabling readers to read and process cards even when the doors associated with them are unlocked or open because of another card access request. This mode is typically used for turnstiles or other high traffic situations that would result in unacceptable delays if the reader went through its normal sequence of read-open-close for each cardholder. Example: Suppose a user swipes their card and unlocks a door. Before the door opens and closes, another person swipes his card. If this box is checked, the system treats the second swipe as an access request. If you leave this box unchecked, the system ignores the second swipe. This feature is useful at high volume doors where you don't want to wait for the door to close after every access. • "Ordinary" doors — multiple person access on each access cycle — select the Readers Are Continuously Active check box. • "Turnstiles" (or Mantraps) — one person access only on each access cycle — clear the Readers Are Continuously Active check box. Selecting this option for a Reader on an iSTAR Area Door permits the Area to be configured for Escorted Access in Companion mode. Leaving this option unselected causes Escorted Access to operate in Remote Escort (or Turnstile) mode. 9. Click El for the Request to Exit. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the Request to Exit, abrowser opens presenting a list of inputs available for the controller. Click an Input to select it and add it to the ntry field. 10. Select the Unlock Door on RTE check box to unlock the door at a Request to Exit 11. Select the Shunt DSM While RTE is Active check box to Shunt Door Switch Monitor While Request to Exit is Active. 12. Select the Send non-alarms input status to the host checkbox to instruct the system to send non-alarm input status to the host. Leaving the checkbox unselected (the default setting) instructs the system not to send non-alarm input status to the host. Doing this reduces network traffic demand when expecting large volumes of non-critical activity notifications. 13. Click Save and Close or navigate to the Timing tab. iSTAR Door Timing Tab Like the Door General tab, the layout of this tab depends upon the controller type. For an iSTAR-connected Door, Timings are configured using separate entry fields, as shown in Figure 165 on Page 430. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 429 EFTA01226360 STAR Door Editor Figure 165: STAR Door Timing Tab l game 'Ara Gay 1 QtroinP4C. Parebon Dalai r M,rterku-ce /144c Twner Zone 04105 CO) Eastern Tine NS 1Crada) Ginn Tyro I kn. Zones I Double Save I Tnflen I Cet0e I Status I boar Montomg I Use Oenlea Cc•Ws I Slat ewe' I Tenets Delay,Relodc (made) Stan Time (e•cOnde: 10 !hock Tore (maxis): IS Manes Stet Time oilman). I00 CO 00 SSA Eipritaos %Wag Tin (rein)' rn 0 Ce 02:c Owe Oletounce MI*0/10644: DOW OW fileCe TIMM° Dow Wt.:liana Tema/10sec): Otero Wawa use Shunt EagleOutput r Delay Relock *hie [Ica wen ater veiled access F Se rt Oar Shute Time J Setting iSTAR Door Timing The following timers and check boxes appear on the iSTAR Door Timing tab: 1. Delay Relock - Type the number of seconds to delay door Sock after the door is opened (after a request to exit, for example). The range in seconds is 0 to 999 seconds (0:16:39); the default is 0. 2. Shunt Time - Type the number of seconds that the door can remain open before a door held open alert is generated within the range of 0 to 999 seconds (0:16:39); the default is 10 seconds. 3. Unlock Time - Type the number of seconds the Door remains unlocked after a valid card swipe, RTE activation, or momentary unlock within the range of 0 to 255 seconds (0:4:15); the default is 5 seconds. A value of 0 actually represents a token unlock time (300 microseconds) that can be used, for NOTE example, to unlock a turnstile so that one person may pass, but tailgating is not possible. Also, a setting of 0 disables Momentary Unlock manual actions, so choose a non-zero Unlock Time if you need to use Momentary Unlock with this Door. 430 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226361 STAR Door Edrtor 4. Alternate Shunt Time - Type the number of hours, minutes, and seconds the Door can remain open before a door held open alert is generated after a valid card swipe by a cardholder with the Alternate Shunt flag set in their personnel record (see the C• CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide) within the range of default/minimum: 0:0:0; maximum:18:0:0 (18 hours). This value is used only if it is set to a greater time than the Shunt time value. 5. Shunt Expiration Warning Time - If set, the Shunt expiration relay is fired regardless of the shunt time used. If set to 0 (the default), the Shunt expiration relay will only be fired if the Alternate shunt time was used. The Shunt Expiration Warning has a range of 000 to 0:4:0 (4 minutes). 6. Door Close Debounce Time - Setting this value to 0 indicates that there is no timer. The range is from 0 to 255 seconds in units of 0.1 seconds. 7. Door Open Grace Time - Also known as Door Open Debounce Time. Setting this value to 0 indicates that there is no timer; as soon as the door opens, door forced open is reported. The range is from 0 to 255 seconds in units of 0.1 seconds. 8. Door Unlock Grace Time - Specifies the time that the system waits for a door open signal after the door unlock time has expired. This timing prevents a false door forced message in situations where signals are nearly simultaneous. The range is from 0 to 100 seconds in units of 0.1 seconds. 9. Always Use Shunt Expire Output - If this check box is selected, the Shunt expiration relay is fired regardless of the shunt time used. If the Shunt Expiration Warning Time is set to 0 (the default), the Shunt expiration relay shall only be fired if the Alternate shunt time was used. 10. Delay Relock While Door Open After Valid Access - If access is valid, delays the relock of the door until the door closes, if this check box is selected. This differs from standard Sock operations, where Sock occurs when the door opens and the Sock delay expires. If the door is open, the lock is energized. The C•CURE 9000 system sends an alarm when the shunt time expires. 11. Shunt Door for full Shunt Time - If this check box is selected, the door is shunted for the full shunt time. If selected with Delay Sock while door open for valid access, the lock is energized and the door unlocked for the full shunt time, regardless of whether the door is open or closed. iSTAR Door Areas & Zones Tab If this Door is assigned to an iSTAR Cluster Area and/or an iSTAR Intrusion Zone, the Areas & Zones tab displays read-only assignment information about the Door, as shown in Figure 166 on Page 432. If the Door is not assigned to either an iSTAR Cluster Area or Intrusion Zone, the relevant box is blank. The Dynamic View for iSTAR Doors allows you to add a column that identifies the Intrusion Zone to NOTE which the Doors belong. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 431 EFTA01226362 STAR Door Edrtor Figure 166: STAR Door Areas& Zones Tab these [Are Goy 1 ilea:mar Proem Oft r gentenarce Mode Tens Zone 3MT05-0% Eastern Tme 0./S &Credal Gerry I Tnwp Mega Zones I DoLbe Swot I Tet9e3 I Goa l Status I Dose Mcreeire I User Neve Sees I Ass rages Ames Entry Arert Ewen, I Inesece Zones senesce Zone I Iv* Onesece Dooley Him I I !le Areas & Zones tab has the read-only fields shown in iSTAR Door Definitions on Page 446. iSTAR Door Double Swipe Tab In addition to the typical, single-swipe use of a card at a door's card reader, the Double Swipe tab (see Figure 167 on Page 433) allows you to configure a door to enable its reader to interpret a double card swipe as a means to toggle the door's lock state for an indefinite amount of time. Configure the selected door for Double Swipe by setting a combination of privilege, personnel group, priority level, and schedule. As with other security objects in the system, events, manual actions or causes with higher priorities can override a cardholder's double swipe. The double swipe lock/unlock messages display in the journal and in the cause list. If the door being configured is assigned a Schlage Wireless Reader, the contents of this tab are disabled NOTE because the Schlage readers do not support double swipe. 432 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226363 STAR Door Edrtor Figure 167: 'STAR Door Double Swipe Tab The Double Swipe feature requires iSTAR firmware version 43 or later for Classic, Pro, or eX. NOTE Do not configure Double Swipe on a Door that is used with Antipassback, Escort, Conditional NOTE Access, Areas, or Intrusion Zone functionality. To Configure the iSTAR Door Double Swipe Tab Follow the steps to access the door editor in the Admin application, as described in Creating a Door on Page 405. The selections below appear on the Door Configuration dialog box - Double Swipe tab (see Figure 167 on Page 433). Make the Double Swipe door configuration selections from these options. 1. Permission to Cardholders area: C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 433 EFTA01226364 iSTAR Door Editor a. None - If None is selected, Double Swipe is not enabled at the door. If Double Swipe is active at the door, you may turn off Double Swipe by selecting None on this tab. Normal card swipe access at the reader is still in effect, if so configured. b. With clearance - Selecting this option enables the door to require that cardholders who use Double Swipe at the reader must have a clearance for access to this particular door configured for them in the Personnel screen, Clearances tab. c. With clearance and in personnel group - Selecting this option will require that cardholders who use Double Swipe at the reader must have a clearance for access to this door configured for them in the Personnel screen, Clearances tab, and they also must be in the personnel group whose members have access to this door. d. Personnel Group - Click El to select a personnel group. If a group is selected for Double Swipe, each cardholder who uses Double Swipe at the reader must be a member of the selected Personnel Group. The personnel group may be configured in the Configuration pane, Group dialog box. 2. Options area: a. Priority (0 - 200)- Select a Priority for Double Swipe requests at the door. The default is 75. In the case of a manual action with higher priority than the priority configured for the door, the manual action takes precedence. If the door's priority is higher, the double swipe takes precedence. For two actions with the same priority, the most recent one takes precedence. If you change the Priority setting on the Double Swipe tab while a double swipe cause is active for the NOTE door, that cause will be removed from the cause list, and any the double swipe action is canceled. b. Double Swipe Cancellation Schedule - Click GJ to select a schedule. The cancelling schedule will delete any existing double swipe causes on the door at the start of the schedule. Any double swipe actions currently in effect will be canceled. 3. Click Save and Close to save the settings and close the window, or click Save and New to save the settings and configure a new door. A Double Swipe to Lock or Unlock a door also may be configured to trigger an Event. This is configured on the Triggers tab (see Using Double Swipe to Trigger an Event on Page 439). For the Monitoring Station's Activity Viewer to display Double Swipe lock/unlock messages, the Application Layout must have an Activity Viewer pane configured to display Double Swipe messages. The Activity Viewer pane may be added, if needed, as described below. To Edit the Application Layout for Double Swipe 1. In the Admin application, select the Data Views pane. 2. At the top of the pane, select Application Layout from the drop-down menu, and click the green arrow. In the right-hand pane, a new tab displays with a list of application layouts. 3. Select a layout to edit for Double Swipe messages, right click, and select Edit. The application layout screen opens. 4. To add an Activity Viewer pane, click Add Pane, and a new pane displays. a. Click and drag the Activity Viewer icon from the left side of the application layout screen to the new pane. The Activity Viewer dialog box displays. 434 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226365 STAR Door Editor b. Select the Double Swipe check box to display Double Swipe messages at the Monitoring Station. If the box is unchecked, messages will not display at the Monitoring Station. By default, the Activity Viewer displays all these Message Types. c. Click Save and Close . 5. To edit an existing Activity Viewer pane to display Double Swipe messages at the Monitoring Station, click the Activity Viewer tab on the pane, right click and select Properties. The Activity Viewer dialog box displays. a. Select the Double Swipe check box to display Double Swipe messages at the Monitoring Station. If the box is unchecked, messages will not display at the Monitoring Station. By default, the Activity Viewer displays all these Message Types. b. Click Save and Close . Using Double Swipe at the Door To Use Double Swipe at a Card Reader: Double Swipe is enabled by: ■ the cardholder(s) having a clearance to the specific door - or - • the cardholder(s) having a clearance to the specific door and being a member of the personnel group, if the "With clearance and in personnel group" option is selected on the Double Swipe tab. The following steps describe how a double swipe at the card reader toggles the door lock, to lock or unlock the door. To Unlock a Door if the Current State is Lock: Cardholder swipes the card twice at the reader, within the shunt time. If the cardholder has the correct clearance set for access to the door or has the correct clearance and is in the correct personnel group, the door toggles to Unlock. The card reader displays the state of the door, and the door remains unlocked until it is locked again by another double swipe, or by other causes such as manual action, scheduled events, and so forth. If the cardholder swipes only once, a Momentary Unlock occurs for an authorized cardholder. To Lock a Door lithe Current State Is Unlock: Cardholder swipes the card twice at the reader, within the shunt time. If the cardholder has the correct clearance set for access to the door or has the correct clearance and is in the correct personnel group, the door toggles to Lock. The card reader displays the state of the door, and the door remains locked until it is unlocked by another double swipe, or by other causes such as manual action, scheduled events, and so forth. For continuous card reader activity, make sure that the Readers are Continuously Active check box is selected in the Readers area of the General tab. To associate Double Swipe with a trigger to cause an event, refer to Using Double Swipe to Trigger an Event on Page 439. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 435 EFTA01226366 STAR Door Editor iSTAR Door Conditional Access Tab The Conditional Access tab (see Figure 168 on Page 437) allows you to configure a door so that appropriately authorized Personnel can grant access to Personnel without Clearance for that Door. (This tab is available on the iSTAR Doors Editor only if the Include Personnel Without Clearance in Personnel Downloads option in the Conditional Access box is selected on the General tab of the door's iSTAR controller editor.) The Conditional Access process can only be started by Personnel Credentials rejected for having no NOTE Clearance at the door. Rejections for Lost, Stolen, Not Active, Expired, or Unknown Card or for Antipassback, Occupancy, Lockout, or PIN cause immediate rejection. This feature is usually used on doors into iSTAR Areas where a person inside can grant entry to the Area to personnel lacking clearance, after validating their identities. (In the latter situation, it can also be used in conjunction with Dynamic Area Manager. See the Areas chapter in the C• CURE 9000 Areas and Zones Guide.) Example: A bank has a secure area that it uses for counting cash. Two authorized employees with clearance for the entry door (Susan and Tom) have already entered the room and are working. A third employee without clearance (Martin) needs to confer with them and swipes his card at the door. Since the door is configured for Conditional Access, a Conditional Access event is activated and triggers an output inside the room, such as a flashing light or bell, to announce that someone wants to enter. Through the glass pane in the door, Susan sees that it is Martin waiting there. She pushes the button on the wall, activating a 'Conditional Access Response' event whose action opens the door. Martin enters the room. (The iSTAR Area Status tab would show that there were currently a total of three people in the area and that one of them had been admitted conditionally.) The iSTAR Area Status tab keeps track of the number of Personnel currently in the area who were admitted via Conditional Access. See the Areas chapter in the C• CURE 9000 Areas and Zones Guide. The iSTAR Door Status tab indicates whether or not Conditional Access is configured for an iSTAR door. See iSTAR Door Status Tab on Page 440. This feature could also be used on any door to allow a guard at a Monitoring Station, with video capability to validate a person's identity, to activate the 'Conditional Access Response' event and let that person through the door. ■ Conditional Access is only supported on doors on iSTAR Pro, eX, Edge, and Ultra Controllers. NOTE ■ The controller must also have the Include Personnel Without Clearance in Personnel Downloads option in the Conditional Access box selected on the General tab. (Normally credentials for personnel without clearance for any doors on the controller are not downloaded to the controller.) ■ Conditional Access should not be configured on a door that is used with Escort or Double Swipe functionality. 436 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226367 STAR Door Edrtor Figure 168: STAR Door Conditional AccessTab t1Sa.e expose i,,Sre tiane I lib Oca I Er-cob:11 1 E Mesmence Mode IrroZa. IGMTt5.001Eaem Toe (US 6Canedal GereSI Tyro Ikea; tart Dade Swve Colchor4 Ames l 1'mad Gscum i StSus I Doc( WrongI Wee Definediti C ontxrol Axe:: jcMde Ccndecnel ACCCII LYent Cont.crol Accen Re:perco I me In :ttor,d: 10 • 1$0t 10 See iSTAR Door Conditional Access Tab Definitions on Page 449 for definitions of the fields on the Conditional Access tab. Configuring Conditional Access To Configure Conditional Access for this iSTAR Door 1. Follow the steps to create/edit the iSTAR Pro, eX, Edge, or Ultra controller that this door will be on, as described in Creating an iSTAR Controller on Page 124 and in Editing an iSTAR Controller on Page 126. 2. On the General tab of the iSTAR Controller editor, select the Include Personnel Without Clearance in Personnel Downloads option in the Conditional Access box, as described in To Configure the iSTAR Controller General Tab on Page 143. 3. Configure the Events needed for the feature: a. Configure a panel event for this door's controller that will act as the Conditional Access Event on the iSTAR Door Conditional Access tab—and initiate the 'Conditional Access' process. This event should trigger an C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 437 EFTA01226368 'STAR Door Editor output, such as a buzzer or flashing light, that notifies appropriate personnel that someone without the requisite clearance wants to go through this door. b. Configure a host or panel event with the action Allow Conditional Access Cycle to be activated to open the door conditionally. For information, see the Events Chapter in the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide. 4. Follow the steps to access the iSTAR Door editor in the Administration application, as described in Creating a Door on Page 405, and then open the Conditional Access tab. 5. Click 0 for Conditional Access Schedule to select the schedule during which Conditional Access is enabled for this door. 6. Click 0 for Conditional Access Event to select the event that requests Conditional Access at this door for a person without Clearance. (Only panel events within this controller's cluster are available for selection.) 7. In the Conditional Access Response Time field, enter the number of seconds that the door will wait for the 'Allow Conditional Access Cycle' event action to open the door after the Conditional Access event entered in the preceding field has been activated. (The range is 1 -150 seconds with a default of 10 seconds.) 8. Click Save and Close to save the settings and close the window, or click Save and New to save the settings and configure a new door. iSTAR Door Triggers Tab You can create Triggers for iSTAR Doors using the iSTAR Door Triggers tab. A Trigger executes a specified Action when a particular predefined condition occurs. When a Trigger is defined, the Actions available depend on the property selected. The Door Triggers tab is shown in Figure 169 on Page 439. See the following for information on iSTAR Triggers: ■ Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 270. ■ Defining a Trigger for an iSTAR Device on Page 271. ■ Removing a Trigger on Page 272 438 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226369 STAR Door Edrtor Figure 169: STAR Door TriggersTab Oole bj Sa..e ercir Wore I Ultra Corr 1 INOCCIPbCA Annan NSA r Meontentnce lAxie Time Ur* CMT0500)Eadten The (US IC:rola) Canna I Teary I Mew & ate Doa Att• TKOSS 'Gavel Sas I Door Wotan; I Us Dinedkit I Sae r•9••I Tn99.1 "Add Raton Peoparty Time Zoe r I (OW-05 lei Fast I Using Double Swipe to Trigger an Event You can create a trigger to associate Double Swipe activity with the ability to activate an event on a schedule when the door's reader receives a double-swipe to Lock or Unlock. To Create the Trigger for an Event 1. Navigate to the Triggers tab, as shown in Figure 169 on Page 439. 2. Click Add on the Triggers tab to create a new trigger. 3. Click within the Property column to display the browse button C. A window opens, presenting the list of properties for the door. a. Select the Double Swipe Property to add it to the column. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 439 EFTA01226370 'STAR Door Editor 4. Click in the Value column to display the list of Values associated with the Double Swipe Property. Select either Locked or Unlocked as the value for the trigger and add it to the column. Do not select "Unknown" as a value because it is not a valid option and would be ignored. 5. Click in the Action column to display a drop-down list of actions. Select Activate Event as the action for the trigger and add it to the column. The other actions in the list are not valid for the double swipe trigger and will be ignored. The lower pane on the Triggers tab will display an event entry field that is specific to the selected Action. For the combination of Double Swipe Property and Locked or Unlocked Value, Activate Event is currently the only action supported. 6. In the Event field, click Ei to display a list of pre-configured Events. Click on an event in the list to add it to the field. This Event will occur when the conditions of the trigger are met. Events may be created from the Configuration pane and "Event" in the drop-down menu on the Administration application. See the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information. 7. Click in the Schedule column, then click [J to select a Schedule to associate with the trigger. Notice that when you click in the Schedule column, the details of the Event you selected display in the Details column. If the event has no description entered, the Details cell will remain empty. Schedules may be created from the Configuration pane and "Schedule" in the drop-down menu on the Administration application. 8. Navigate to another tab or click Save and Close to save the trigger, or click Save and New to open a new door editor. iSTAR Door Status Tab The Door Status tab (see Figure 170 on Page 441) provides a read-only listing of critical information about the operational status of the selected Door including: ■ Alarm State - displays the values Normal, Forced, Held Open, or Unknown. ■ Open Status - displays the values Open, Closed, or Unknown. ■ Mode - displays the values Locked, Unlocked, No Access, or Unknown. ■ Double Swipe Lock Status - displays the values Locked, Unlocked, or Unknown. ■ Conditional Access Mode - displays the values True, False, or Unknown. (This field displays only if Conditional Access has been enabled by selecting the Include Personnel Without Clearance in Personnel Downloads option in the Conditional Access box on the General tab of the iSTAR Controller editor.) 440 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226371 STAR Door Edrtor Figure 170: iSTAR Door Status Tab MAR bee . Iteglead Sere _m C" a She and Clot k!snred Nes bre btrr ocrlotke berocrace Priem Wait &Jekeence Mk* Uwe Odred AMY I Moor Marammm I State .a Goma, imp I MaoLbw %Mg &me I CcoMmelkoma IISImni I Goa Orr.: gem Urn Stet (Kneen °pie MMA Urkre, Mole lkimm Oade Siam Lock gam Urknown Cmdmnal Access Mode Urkremn Navigate to the State Images tab or click Save and Close. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 441 EFTA01226372 STAR Door NIonnoring Tab iSTAR Door Monitoring Tab The iSTAR Door Monitoring tab lets you configure Doors with additional monitoring inputs and lock sensing equipment. You can use this tab to integrate with third-party lock release inputs, such as fire and crash bar devices, that control emergency exit from C•CURE 9000 doors. For more information about Door Monitoring, see Understanding Advanced Door Monitoring on Page 458. Figure 171: Door Monitoring Tab 2S1 S. in, k !St.* en:11 ire Coy 1 Nation os.s r gam:ere-co Mode T.me Zor• 4/4T-05 00) Eastern Tme (US 4 Cavdal Grata I Mind ken Zones I Co-as Svc< I Tann I Gaps I Slaw. Nce IUserDeewF<tIArera;eaI e ra;e: ' .t4cl Mpa Ty* p Times cptah ay Chart, Timallil0 Wont) I E•tatl senor Charge Tern (1110 1000.0 f Lech ear Cheer Time (MO 5CS) Can, Setup C hove lime (M0 scant) CsSm 5.ie A Charge Time (110 pecceds) 0531 So% e Chance Tone (V10 scat) I . RTE Chanpa Time MO seconds) I See Advanced Door Monitoring Definitions on Page 461 for definitions of the fields on the Door Monitoring tab. iSTAR Door State Images Tab The State Images tab (shown in Figure 172 on Page 443) provides a means to change the default images used to indicate controller states. AIM To Change an Image I. Double-click the existing image. 442 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226373 STAR Door NIonnoring Tab A Windows Open dialog box appears allowing you to browse for a folder in which you have placed replacement images. 2. When you locate the replacement image, select it to add it to the image listing. 3. To restore the default image, right-click the new image and select Restore Default. Figure 172: STAR Door State Images Tab x ka Cede And Oare k's Sot ind pnvox I MCA*, Dna Itormnarce MS. Irmo Zane 411TC/501i Eaton Tree pLIS Knew Grint I him I Mailer I Cbaks Sr.. I Taxa I Gee I &a.. I Ow 0girdel Asa Stesona. 4. Click Save and Close o return to the Hardware pane. iSTAR Door Visitor Management tab The iSTAR Door Visitor Management tab lets you configure Doors with Visitor Management Actions, so that you can automatically Check-in and Check-out Visitors. For more information about Check-in and Check-out of Visitor via Visitor Management, see the C•CURE 9000 Visitor Management Guide. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 443 EFTA01226374 STAR Door Monitoring Tab Figure 173: STAR Door Visitor Management tab OSTAR Door - door for visits MUD caw. snel Eire, A ft-A Now Rama d:oi to, vt:IS aecapbon F Ran:memo Mode General I Timing I Ames & Zones I Dottie Swpe I Tigris' Groups I Slalus I Doot Monlonno I Uset Defined Fields Vista Management I Siete images I Add Action >Remove Action VititOlMansgemere Actin, Dvecton Sched.le To Configure a Door Action for Check-In 1. In the C•CURE 9000 Admin Client, navigate to the Door you wish to configure. 2. Click the Visitor Management tab. 3. Click Add Action. 4. Chose the Visitor Management Action Check Visitors In. 5. Select the Direction for the action to take place. • Choose In for Visitors to Check-in using an inbound reader. • Choose Out for Visitors to Check-in using an outbound reader. • Choose In and Out for Visitors to Check-in using either the inbound or outbound reader. 6. Select a Schedule for the action to be active. 7. Click Save and Close -GM To Configure a Door Action for Check-out 1. In the C•CURE 9000 Admin Client, navigate to the Door you wish to configure. 2. Click the Visitor Management tab. 444 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226375 STAR Door Monitoring Tab 3. Click Add Action. 4. Chose the Visitor Management Action Check Visitors Out. • Check Out Visitors and Return Badge. 5. Select the Direction for the action to take place. • Choose In for Visitors to Check-out using an inbound reader. • Choose Out for Visitors to Check-out using an outbound reader. • Choose In and Out for Visitors to Check-out using either the inbound or outbound reader. 6. Select a Schedule for the action to be active. 7. Click Save and Close To Configure a Door Action for Check-out This presumes that a Badge Return mechanism is set up at the Check-out reader. 1. In the C•CURE 9000 Admin Client, navigate to the Door you wish to configure. 2. dick the Visitor Management tab. 3. dick Add Action. 4. Chose the Visitor Management Action Check Visitors Out. • Check Out Visitors and Return Badge. 5. Select the Direction for the action to take place. • Choose In for Visitors to Check-out and Return the Badge using an inbound reader. • Choose Out for Visitors to Check-out and Return the Badge using an outbound reader. • Choose In and Out for Visitors to Check-out and Return the Badge using either the inbound or outbound reader. 6. Select a Schedule for the action to be active. 7. dick Save and Close C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 445 EFTA01226376 STAR Door Definitions iSTAR Door Definitions The definitions of the various fields and buttons on the Door dialog box for iSTAR doors are given in the tables below. Table 99: STAR Door General Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Name Use the Identification box to enter a name (up to 100 characters long) and brief description of the door you are configuring. Description Adescription of the door that you are configuring. Maintenance Click to put the iSTAR door into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 2: Maintenance Mode for more information. Mode Location Controller This read-onty field displays the STAR Controller that is connected to the Door. Hardware Door Switch Clickri for the Door Switch Monitor. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the Door Switch Monitor, a Monitor browser opens presenting a list of inputs available for the controller. Click an Input to select it and add it to the entry field. Door Lock Click 0 for the Door Lock Relay. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the Door Lock Relay, a browser Relay opens presenting a list of outputs available for the controller. Click an Output to select it and add it to the entry field. Alternate Click in for the Alternate Shunt Relay. When you click this button to select an output to assign to the Alternate Shunt Shunt Relay Relay. a browser opens presenting a list of outputsavailable for the controller. Click an Output to select it and add it to the entry field. Timing for thisoutput is set on the STAR Door Timing Tab on Page 429. Cardholderswith the Atternate Shunt ADA setting enabled on the Personnel General tab (See the C•CURE 9000 PersonnelConfiguration Guide) are granted the additional Atternate Shunt time before a door held alarm is generated. Shunt Clicks for the Shunt Expiration Relay. When you click this button to select an output to assign to the Shunt Expiration Expiration Relay. a browser opens presenting a list of outputs available for the controller. Click an Output to select it and add it to the entry Relay field. Readers Entrance Click 0 for the Entrance Reader. When you click this button to select a reader to assign to the Entrance Reader. a browser Reader opens presenting a list of readers available for the controller. Click a Reader to select it and add it to the entry field. Exit Reader Click In for the Exit Reader. When you click this button to select a reader to assign to the Exit Reader. a browser opens presenting a list of readers available for the controller. Click a Reader to select it and add it to the entry field. Readers are Select the Readers are Continuously Active check box to enablecontinuousreader activity. Continuously Selecting this option for a Reader on an STAR Area Door permits the Area to be oonfigured for Companion mode Escorted Active Access. Leaving thisoption unselected causes Escorted Access to operate in Remote Escort (or Turnstile) mode. Request to Exit Request to Clickri for the Request to Exit. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the Request to Exit. a browser Exit opens presenting a list of inputs available for the controller. Click an input to select it and add it to the entry field. 446 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226377 STAR Door Definitions Table 99: STAR Door General Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Unlock Door Select the Unlock Door on RTE check box to unlock the door at a Request to Exit. on RTE Shunt DSM Select the Shunt DSM While RTE is Active check box to Shunt Door Switch Monitor While Request to Exit is Active. While RTE is Active iSTAR Door Timing Tab Definitions Table 100: STAR Door Timing Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Timers Delay Retook Type the number of seconds to delay door rebck after the door is opened (after a request to exit, for example). The range in seconds is 0:0:0 to 0:16:39 (999 seconds); the default is 0:0:0. Shunt Time Shunt Time- type the number of seconds that the door can remain open before a door held open alert is generated within the range of 0:0:0 to 0:16:39 (999 seconds); the default is 0:0:10 (10 seconds). Unlock Time Unlock Time- type the number of seconds the Door remains unlocked after a valid card swipe. RTE activation, or momentary unlock within the range of 0:0:0 to 0:4:15 (255 seconds); the default is 0:0:5 (5 seconds). Alternate Alternate Shunt Time- type the number of hours, minutes. and seconds the Door can remain open before a door held open Shunt Time alert isgenerated after a valid card swipe by a cardholder with theAlternate Shunt flag set in their personnel record (Thisvalue is used onty if it is set to a greater time than the Shunt time value) within the range of defauttiminimum: 0:0:0; maximum:18:0:0 (18 hours). Shunt if set. the Shunt expiration relay fires regardless of the shunt time used. If set to 0 (the default). the Shunt expiration relay fires Expiration onty if the Alternate shunt time is used. The Shunt Expiration Warning has a range of 0:0:0 to 0:4:0(4 minutes). Warning Time Door Close Specifies the time (in 1/10th of a second intervals) that the C•CURE 9000 ignores DSM inputs, to allow for bouncing doors. Debounce Setting thisvalue to 0 indicates that there is no timer. The range is 0 - 25.5 seconds. Time Door Open Specifies the time (in 1/10th of a second intervals) that the C•CURE 9000 waits for an RTE. card admit or momentary unlock Grace Time signal after receiving the signal from the DSM. Setting thisvalue to 0 indicates that there is no timer; as soon as the door opens. door forced open is reported. The range SO - 25.5 seconds. Door Unlock Specifies the time (in 1/10th of a second intervals) that the C•CURE 9000 waits for a door open signal after the door unlock time Grace Time has expired. This timing prevents a falsedoor forced message in situations where signals are neatly simuttaneous. The range is 0 -100 seconds. Options Always Use if this option is selected, the Shunt expiration relay is fired regardless of the shunt time used. If the Shunt Expiration Warning Shunt Expire Time is set to 0 (the defautt), the Shunt expiration relay shall onty be fired if the Alternate shunt time was used. Output C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 447 EFTA01226378 STAR Door Definitions Table 100: STAR Door Timing Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Delay Relock If access is vabd, delays the relock of the door until the door closes, if this check box is selected. While Door This differs from standard rebck operations, where rebck occurs when the door opens and the relock delay expires Open After Valid Access If the door is open, the lock is energized. The C•CURE 9000 sends an alarm when the shunt time expires. Shunt Door If this option is selected, the door is shunted for the full shunt time. If selected with Delay rebck while door open for valid access, for full Shunt the lock is energized and the door unlocked for the full shunt time, regardless of whether the door is open or closed. Time iSTAR Door Areas and ZonesTab Definitions Table 101: STAR Door Areas 8. Zones Tab Fields Box/Fields Description Areas Entry Area Name of Area to which this Door is an Access In' Door. Exit Area Name of Area to which this Door is an 'Access Out' Door. Intrusion Zones Intrusion Zone Name of STAR Intrusion Zone this Door is assigned to Zone Direction I n indicates that this Door is assigned as an Entrance Door for the Intrusion Zone. Out indicates that this Door is assigned as an Exit Door for the Intrusion Zone. Display Name Displays the name you entered for this Door on the STAR Intrusion Zones Editor General tab. iSTAR Door Double Swipe Tab Definitions Table 102: STAR Door Double Swipe tabdefinitions Field/Button Description Permission to Cardholders None If this option is selected, Double Swipe isnot enabled at the door. If Double Swipe is active at the door, you may turn off Double Swipe by selecting None on this tab. Normalcard swipe access at the reader is still in effect, if so configured. With clearance Selecting this option will enable the door to require that a cardholder who uses Double Swipe also has Double Swipe clearance configured for them in the Personnel screen. Clearances tab. 448 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226379 STAR Door Definitions Table 102: STAR Door Double Swipe tab definitions (continued) Field/Button Description With clearance Selecting this option will require that a cardholder who uses Double Swipe at the reader have a Double Swipe clearance set and in and also be in the personnel group that may be selected in the next fields personnel group Personnel Click[] to select a personnel group whose members may be admitted on Double Swipe as long as each member has the group proper clearance set for them in the Personnel screen. Clearances tab. Options Priority Select a priority (from 0 - 200) for Double Swipe requests at the door. In the case of a manual action with higher priority than the priority configured for the door, the manual action takes precedence. If the door's priority is higher, the double swipe takes precedence. For two actions with the same priority, the most recent one takes precedence. Double Swipe Clickin to select a schedule. The cancelling schedule will delete any existing double swipe causes on the door at the start of Cancellation the time spec. Any double swipe actions currently in effect will be cancelled. Schedule iSTAR Door Conditional Access Tab Definitions Table 103: STAR ConditionalAccess Tab Definitions Field/Button Description ConditionalAccess Click ... I to select the schedule during which the door is 'ConditionalAccess-enabled'. Thiscan be any schedule in the Schedule same time zone as the controller. The !STAR Door Status tab will indicate whether ConditionalAccess is enabled or not. ConditionalAccess Click n to select the event that requests 'Conditional Access' at this door for a person without Clearance. Event Only panel events within this controller's cluster are available for selection. This event cannot be the same one that targets thisdoor with the Allow ConditionalAccess Cycle' action—lets the person through the door. ConditionalAccess Specifies the time (in seconds) that the door waits for an Allow Conditional Access Cycle' event action in response to Response Time the activation of the ConditionalAccess event. The range is 1 - 150 seconds with a default of 10 seconds. NOTE: You can choose to display columns on the !STAR Door Dynamic View that indicate for a given door: • Whether or not ConditionalAccess isenabled. • The selected ConditionalAccess schedule, event, and response (delay) time. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Con figuration Guide Chapter 10 449 EFTA01226380 STAR Door Definitions iSTAR Door Triggers Tab Definitions Table 104: STAR Door Triggers Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Triggers Add Click Add in the Triggers tab to create a new trigger. Remove Click the row selector . , then click Remove to delete a trigger. Property Click within the Property column to display(, When you select this button, the Property browser opens presenting properties available for the controller. Click a Property to select it and add it to the column. Value C lick within the Value column to display a drop-down list of Values associated with the Property that you have selected. Click on a Value that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column. Action Click within the Action column to display a drop-down list of valid actions. Click on an Action that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column. When a Trigger is added, an Action must be configured in the Action column. This is the Action that will occur when the object's selected Property receives the selected Value. As the Action is selected, the lower pane in the Triggers box will show a corresponding entry field, or group of entry fields, specific to the selected Action.Click ri to select entries for these fields. Once the field tor group of fields) is completed, the Details column will show information about how the Action has been configured. Details Displays details concerning the security objects that are associated with the selected Action. Schedule Click within the Schedule oolumn, then click[] to select a Schedule that you want to atcnciate with the trigger. Schedules are created in the Configuration Pane. See the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information. 450 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226381 STAR Door Definitions iSTAR Triggers Properties Table 105: STAR Triggers Properties Property Description Admit Status For any one of theAdmit Status. Mode Status. or Open Status values(see the Value column drop-down list) you Admit can choose one of the following Actions to create a Trigger: Admit Visitor Activate Event -When this status occurs and the Schedule is Active (you can choose any Schedule). You must seta Minimum Activation Time in the Event or the actions in the Event wdi not activate. Reject Visitor Activate Event Outside Schedule -An event is activated when this status occurs while the Schedule is inactive Reject (choose any Schedule). Duress Activate Output -Activate an Output when this status occurs (onty works with the Always Schedule). Noticed Admit Noticed Reject Pre-Admit status is a special case used to activate a panel Event on a card swipe before the door is opened. It is used Pre-Admit with the Activate Event action to activate an Event that can, for example, change the state of an output on the iSTAR panel. Mode Status Unlocked Locked No Access Momentary Unlock Open Status Open Closed Double Swipe Status For anyone of the Double-Swipe Status values(see the Value column drop-down list) you can choose one of the Locked following Actions to create a Trigger: Unlocked Activate Event -When this status occurs and the Schedule isActive (you can choose any Schedule). You must seta Minimum Activation Time in the Event or the actions in the Event will not activate. Activate Event Outside Schedule -An event is activated when this statusoccurswhile the Schedule is inactive (choose any Schedule). Alarm State Status 1. Choose a value for the Property from the Valuescolumn. Normal 2. Select an Action from the Action drop-down list. Forced See iSTAR Trigger Actions in Table 106 on Page 452. Held Open 3. Select a Schedule by clicking in the Schedule column, then click to select the Schedule that you want to associate with the trigger. For example. if you chose Forced as an Alarm State Status for which you want to define an action, you could then select CCTV Action if you wanted to send a command to a CCTV Switch, then in Details, select the Switch and the Command (such as Cali Up Camera) that you wanted to activate when a Forced status occurred. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 451 EFTA01226382 STAR Door Definitions iSTAR Triggers Actions Table 106: STAR TriggersActions Action Description Activate Select an Event to activate when this statusoccurs Event Activate Select an Event to activate when this status occurs while the Schedule is inactive. Event Outside Schedule Activate Select an Output to activate when this status occurs. Must use the Always Schedule. Output Arm Event Select an Event to arm. An armed Event can be activated: a disarmed Event cannot be activated. Arm Input Select an Input to arm. An armed Input can be activated. Adis.armed Input cannot be activated. CCTV Action Select a CCTV Action to perform by choosing a CCTV Switch and Command from the Details area. and filling in one or more Values for the Command's parameters. Control Select an Elevator Button which you want the Action to set for controlled access, turning on security restrictions on the use of this Access button. Deactivate Select an Event to be deactivated. If the Event is Active when this action occurs. the action deactivates the Event. Event Deactivate Select an Output to be deactivated. If the Output isActive when thisaction occurs. the action deactivates the Output. Output Disable Disable Keypad Commands on the iSTAR Reader you select in Details. Keypad Commands Disable PIN Set the Reader you select to no longer require that a cardholder perform a card swipe, then enter a PIN to be granted access. Disarm Select an Event to disarm. A disarmed Event cannot be activated; an Event must be armed to be activated. Event Disarm Input Select an Input to disarm. A disarmed Input cannot be activated; an Input must be armed to be activated. Enable Set the Reader you select to accept Keypad Comma nds on the reader. Keypad Commands Enable PIN Set the Reader you select to require that a cardholder perform a card swipe, then enter a PIN to be granted access. Lock Door Select a Door to Lock from the Door field in the Details area. 452 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226383 STAR Door Definitions Table 106: STAR TriggersActions (continued) Action Description Momentary Select a Door to Momentarily Unlock from the Door field in the Details area. Unlock Door Pulse Output Select an Output to activate for theduration specified in the Outputs Pulse Duration Feld. Secure Door Select a Door that you want to secure. A secure Door cannot be unlocked: this action disarms the reader associated with the Door. Send Email Send an email message to the email address specified in the Details area Recipient Email Address field. You can designate an Event to activate if the email attempt fails. You can click the Message tab to type the text of the message and optionaltychoose to send the date. time. and name of the Event triggered. For Send Email to work. you must configure the Email Server and the Sender Email Address in Options & Tools>System Variables in the Customer Support area. Uncontrol Select an Elevator Button which you want the Action to set for uncontrolled access. turning off security restrictions on the use of Access this button. Unlock Door Select a Door to unlock from the Door field in the Details area. Video Select a Video Camera Action to perform by choosing a Video Server and Camera from the Details area Camera tab, and Camera choosing one of the following Action Types. Action • Record Camera lets you set a Pre Alarm Time and Post Alarm Time for retrieving recorded video. • Camera Preset Command allows you to designate a Camera Preset to activate when this action is triggered. • Camera Pattern Command lets you designate a Camera Pattern to activate when this action is triggered. iSTAR Door Groups Tab Definitions Table 107: STAR Door GroupsTab Definitions Field/Button Description Groups z D Q51 y ce For more information about the use of the Toolbar buttons. see Chapter 2. "Dynamic Views' in the C• CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Name This oolumn displays the name entered for the group when it was configured. The selected door is a member of any group(s) listed in this column. Description Thiscolumn displays the description entered for the group when it was configured. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Con figuration Guide Chapter 10 453 EFTA01226384 STAR Door Definitions iSTAR Door Status Tab Definitions: Table 108: STAR Door Status Tab Definrbons Field/Button Description Alarm State Displays the values Normal. Forced. Held Open. or Unknown. Open Status Displays the values Open. Closed, or Unknown. Mode Displays the values Locked. Unlocked, No Access. or Unknown. Double Swipe Lock Status Indicates the current statusof a door configured for Double Swipe access: Locked. Unlocked, or Unknown. If the door is not configured for double swipe access. the field displays Unknown. CondMona lAccess Mode Displaysthe valuesTrue. False. or Unknown. iSTAR Door State Images Tab Definitions: Table 109: STAR Door S ate Images Tab Definrbons Field/Button Description Field/Button Description Unknown Locked Forced . Unlocked Illsal Held Open No Access Ul Open Momentary Unlock ■ 454 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226385 STAR Aperio Door Editor iSTAR Aperio Door Editor You use the iSTAR Aperio Door editor to configure iSTAR Aperio Doors. iSTAR Aperio Doors are created automatically when you configure and enable an iSTAR Aperio Reader (see iSTAR Aperio Reader Editor on Page 264). You cannot manually create an iSTAR Aperio Door. If you delete an iSTAR Aperio Door, the iSTAR Aperio Reader associated with the door is also deleted. iSTAR Aperio Doors do not support manual actions for Lock, Unlock, and Momentary Unlock. NOTE You cannot create Door Groups that combine iSTAR Aperio Doors with other types of iSTAR Doors. The iSTAR Aperio Door Editor includes the following tabs: ■ iSTAR Door General Tab on Page 427 ■ iSTAR Door Timing Tab on Page 429 ■ iSTAR Door Triggers Tab on Page 438 ■ Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 28 ■ iSTAR Door Status Tab on Page 440 ■ iSTAR Door Visitor Management tab on Page 443 ■ iSTAR Door State Images Tab on Page 442 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 455 EFTA01226386 STAR Ardor() Door Edrtor 456 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226387 11 Configuring Advanced Door Monitoring This chapter explains the concepts of Advanced Door monitoring, and also includes the procedures that are used to create various types of monitored doors. In this chapter Understanding Advanced Door Monitoring 458 Hardware Requirements 460 Advanced Door Monitoring Definitions 461 Advanced Door Monitoring Components 463 Advanced Door Monitoring Configurations 467 Configuration Overview 473 Configuring an Advanced Door 474 Understanding Timing 481 Monitoring Door Activity 486 Understanding Door Alarms 487 Advanced Door Monitoring Details 495 Door Monitoring Screen 496 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter H 457 EFTA01226388 Understanding Advanced Door Monitoring Understanding Advanced Door Monitoring Advanced Doors are C•CURE 9000 doors that provide increased security for sites with complex requirements, like airports or hospitals. Standard Doors use the Door State Monitor (DSM) to monitor for Admit Used, Admit Unused, Door Forced and Door Held. Advanced Doors support additional monitoring inputs and lock sensing equipment. Advanced Doors also integrate with third-party lock release inputs, such as fire and crash bar devices, that control emergency exit from C•CURE 9000 doors. Features Use Advanced Door Monitoring to configure: ■ Multiple inputs - Advanced Doors provide up to 16 inputs, 14 more than on a standard door configuration. ■ More complex door configurations - including single- and double-leaf doors with multiple DSM or Request To Exit (RTE) inputs. ■ Lock sensing devices - to monitor locking on magnetic bonds, bolts, and cams. ■ Integrated lock releases - to integrate door unlocking with fire, crash bar, power fail, and key switch inputs. ■ Special events and actions - to create keypad commands that lock, unlock, and secure doors for a specific time period. ■ Alarm Suppression and RTE control on a per door basis. ■ Enhanced Shunt control. ■ Grace and change timing options - to fine tune C•CURE 9000 timing to avoid the effects of 'door bounce' and to correct other door timing situations at the site. ■ Journal reports and Monitor Station activities - to manage the system and monitor door activity. ■ Additional Event Actions related to Advanced Doors. 458 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226389 Understanding Advanced Door Monitoring Example: Figure 174 on Page 459 shows a double-leaf Advanced Door, configured into A and B sides. Each side contains a maglock, bond sensor, and DSM input that connects to RM4 modules in a nearby junction box. Access on the public side of the door is controlled using the public-side read head. This read head is also configured to accept keypad commands that allow personnel to lock and unlock the door for specific time intervals. Exit from the secure side of the door is controlled by the secure-side read head. Locks can be released for fire alarm, crash bar, power failure, or manual key switch. Inputs from the fire pull and key switch over-ride are shown connected to an 1/8 board in the local junction box. Figure 174: Typical Advanced Door Configuration Junction Box IN -41 To ISTAR ACM PM Bus RS -485 RD RDR • RM4 1 UT DSM DSM Bond MAG Lock MAG Lock Bond Sensor Sensor Key Override Fire B Side A Side Pull OM • 1•• • u • Reader Reader Secure Side Public Side C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 459 EFTA01226390 Hardware Requirements Hardware Requirements The following guidelines apply to Advanced Doors: • Advanced Door monitoring is available only on iSTAR configurations. • Advanced Door inputs can be any mix of lock sensors, lock releases, or DSM or RTE connections. • Each Advanced Door supports up to 16 input connections. However, the number of available inputs per door is limited by the number of doors in the configuration and the input capacity of the fully loaded iSTAR controller. • All Door components, Readers, Inputs, and Outputs, must reside on the same Controller. The table below shows that some controllers may not have enough Inputs for the maximum configuration. In actual practice, these limits will rarely, if ever, be reached., Table 110: Maximum Inputs per STAR Controller Max Max Max Inputs Result Doors Advanced on Controller Door Inputs iSTAR Ultra 16 16 x 16 =256 336 Adequatelnputs STAR Pro 16 16 x 16 =256 192 -64 Inputs iSTAR eX8 Door 8 8 x 16 = 128 96 - 32 Inputs iSTAR eX4 Door 4 4 x 16 =64 88 Adequatelnputs STAR Edge 4 Door 4 4 x 16 =64 64 Adequate Inputs STAR Edge 2 Door 2 2x16=32 32 Adequatelnputs STAR Edge 1 Door 1 1x16=16 4 -12 Inputs • Advanced Doors support the same number and types of outputs as standard doors —which are as follows: • Door Latch Relay (1) • Alternate Shunt (ADA) Relay (1) • Shunt Expiration warning Relay (1) 480 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226391 Advanced Door Monitoring Definitions Advanced Door Monitoring Definitions New Definitions, Acronyms, and Abbreviations ■ Lock Sensor - An input that monitors the state of the lock on a door. This is not the same as the Door Switch Monitor (DSM) that monitors whether the door is physically open or closed. • Bond Sensor - A type of lock sensor input that monitors the condition of a magnetic lock on door. A normal bond sensor input will be active when the door is unlocked (meaning that the door latch relay is active), regardless of whether the door is open or closed, but will also be active when the door is open, regardless of whether the door is unlocked or not unlocked. In other words, it should be active when the door is unlocked and/or when the door is open. The bond sensor should not be active when the door is closed and locked. • Cam Detector - A type of lock sensor input that monitors the condition of the cam on an electric strike on a door. A normal cam detector input will be active when the door is unlocked. The Cam detector should not be active when the door is locked. • Latch Bolt Detector - A type of lock sensor input that monitors the condition of a latch bolt on an electric strike on a door. A normal latch bolt will be active or inactive while the door is unlocked, and will be active when the door is open. The latch bolt should not be active when the door is closed and locked. ■ Lock Release Device - A external device that may unlock a door that is also controlled by the access control system. Indication that the lock release device is active will be supplied through an input. • Fire Alarm Lock Release - An input that indicates that the fire alarm system has unlocked the door. • Crash Bar Lock Release - An input that indicates that the door has been unlocked by local crash bar / panic hardware. • Key Switch Lock Release - An input that indicates that the door has been unlocked by local key switch override. • Power Fail Lock Release - An input that indicates that the door has been unlocked by a lock release device because of power fail. Lock Sensor States Table 111 on Page 461 indicates operational differences in the Lock Sensors. 0 = False or Not Active 1 = True or Active Table 111: Lock Sensor States Door and Lock State DSM Bond Cam Latch Bolt Sensor Detector Detector 1. Door Closed and Locked 0 0 0 0 2. Door Closed and Unlocked 0 1 1 1 3. Door Open and Unlocked 1 1 1 1 4. Door Open and Locked 1 1 0 1 1. When the door is Closed and Locked, none of the sensors are active. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 481 EFTA01226392 Advanced Door Monitoring Definitions 2. When the door is Closed and Unlocked, all of the sensors are active except for the DSM because the Door is still closed. 3. When the door is Open and Unlocked, all of the sensors are active including the DSM because the Door is now open. 4. When the door is Open and Locked, all of the sensors are active except for the Cam Detector because the Door is Locked. In this case, the Latch Bolt Detector is active because the door is Locked. When the Latch Bolt Detector is active, along with the door being open, there is a possibility of damaging the door frame. The Latch Bolt lock is like a dead bolt in that the bolt is extended when the door is locked. 482 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226393 Advanced Door Monitoring Components Advanced Door Monitoring Components In addition to standard door components, Advanced Doors support: ■ Lock sensor devices ■ Lock release devices ■ Alarms based on lock sensor, lock release, and multiple DSM inputs to the C•CURE 9000 ■ Expanded Door Triggers ■ Expanded Event Actions Lock Sensor Devices A lock sensing device monitors the state of a door lock. Table 112 on Page 463 shows the types of lock sensing devices that can be configured on an Advanced Door. Table 112: LockSensing Devices Lock Sensing Device Function Bond sensor klon dors the condition of a magnetic lock on a door. Cam detector Monitors the condition of the cam on an electric strike on a door. Latch bolt detector Monitors the condition of a latch bolt on an electric strike on a door. Lock Release Devices A lock release device is a third-party device that controls door unlock activities. Lock release devices operate independently from C•CURE 9000 and function even if the C•CURE system is not running. To inter-operate, the lock release device has an output, called a lock release input, that is input to the C•CURE 9000. The C•CURE 9000 uses the lock release input to: ■ Monitor the lock release activities on a door ■ Monitor lock sensor activity ■ Decide if an open door is reported as door forced open, door open, or door open by one of the lock release inputs. Table 113 on Page 463 and Figure 175 on Page 464 show the types of lock release devices that can be configured on an Advanced Door. Table 113: Locic Release Devices Lock Release Device Function Crash bar lock release Input to C•CURE 9000 from crash bar or panic hardware C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 483 EFTA01226394 Advanced Door Monitoring Components Lock Release Devices (continued) Lock Release Device Function Key override switch lock Input toC•CURE9000from a key override switch release Power failure lock release Input toC•CURE 9000 from power faihardware General Lock Release Input toC•CURE 9000 from a Fire Alarm System or iSTAR. Fire alarm lock release Input to C•CURE 9000 from a FifeAlarm System FInure 175: Lock Release Devices in the Door Monitoring Tab General I Timing I Areas & Zones Double Swipe I Triggers Groups I Status Door Monitoring I State images o Add Input = ; Remove Input Input • 1 I Type iSTAR Input 10-iSTAR Ultra ACM1-gcm_new_cont_10009c Crash bar lock release .. I iSTAR Input 11-iSTAR Ultra ACM1-gcm_new_cont_10009c Key ovenide switch lock release zi iSTAR Input 12-iSTAR Ultra ACM1-gcm_new_cont_10009c Powerfailure lock release . 1 iSTAR Input 13-iSTAR 'Ara ACM1-gcm_new_cont_10009c General lock release . 1 ► i STAR Input 1NSTAR Ultra ACM1-gcm_new_cont_l 0009c Are alarm lock release Expanded Door Inputs In addition to the Lock Sensors, there are also additional inputs for multiple DSMs and RTES as shown in Figure 176 on Page 464. Figure 176: Expanded Door Inputs in the Door Monitoring Tab General I Timing I Areas & Zones I Double Swipe I Triggers I Groups I Status Door Monitoring I State images I '2? Add Input = ; Remove Input ■ I Input Type iSTAR Input10-iSTAR Ultra ACM1-gcm_new_cont_10009c Bond Sensor iSTAR Input11-iSTAR Ultra ACM1-gcm_new_cont_10009c Latch bolt detector iSTAR Input12-iSTAR Ultra ACM1-gcm_new_cont_10009c Cam detection iSTAR Input13-iSTAR Ultra ACM1-gcm_new_cont_10009c Door switch monitor (side A) iSTAR Input 14-iSTAR Ultra ACM1-gcm_new_cont_10D09c Door switch monitor (side B) iSTAR Input 15-iSTAR Ultra ACM1-gcm_new_cont_10009c RTE2 464 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226395 Advanced Door Monrtoring Components Advanced Door Alarms Fable 114 on Page 465 and Figure 177 on Page 465 show the alarm operations available for Advanced Doors. Each alarm reports the name of the input (lock sensor, lock release device, DSM) that caused the alarm. Table 114: Advanced Door Alarms Alarm Description Door Open Door opens without valid card or RTE. and one of the lock release devices is active. Loci< Unsecured A lock sensor activateswhen it should be inactive. Indicates that the hardware failed to return to the locked position after a valid lock release. Lock Tamper A lock sensor is inactive when it should be active. Indicates lock tampering while the door is open, or faiure of lock hardware. DSM Tamper For doors with multiple DSM devices on a single side. Indicates that one DSM ctianged state, and that the corresponding change did not occur to other DSMs devices on the same side of the door. Expanded Door Triggers There are four additional Door Triggers for Advanced Doors Alarms in the triggers Tab. Figure 177: Additional Door Triggers I iming I Areas s Cones I pout* Svope I n991a I Groups I Status' D0Cf Monitoring I State Imes I !XS iSTAR. Door A d = :.Re Drag columns to Group ID', here F'r Property Description IT Click here to filter data a. FAithit Status The current icitit status of this door. Mann State status The current alarm state of this door. Door Open Alarm Status Open Alarm Status Double Swipe Status Double Swipe Status. DSM Tamper Status DSM Tamper Status -re Lock Tamper Status Lock Tamper Status -ree Lock Unsecured Status Lock Unsecured Status .40 Mode Status The current mode status of this door. Open Status The current open state of this door. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 465 EFTA01226396 Advanced Door Monitoring Components Expanded Event Actions In addition to the Triggers on the Door, there are seven pairs of actions that toggle the allowance of the various alarms, including Door Held, Door Forced, and RTE Functions. Associate an iSTAR door with each entry. Door Groups are not supported. Figure 178: Expanded Event Actions 17— General AeknoMedgemern I Overdue I Messages Act Assess Configuration I Predefined LOCI Messages I Groups I Stee nage I ^? Add FI:*Rermve Athal Details Resetlable Disable Dec( Faced Alarms doorl r Disable Door Held Alarms r Disable Door Open Alarms r Disable DSM Tamper Alarms r Disable Lock Tamper Alarms r 0 Disable Lock Unsecured Alarms . r Disable RTE Functions r Enable Door Forced Alarms r Enable Door Held Alarms docr2 r Enable Door Open Alarms r Enable DSM Tamper Alarms r Enable Lock Tamper Maims r Enable Lock Unsecured Alarms r Enable RTE Functions r iSTAR Door doot2 I I 466 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226397 Advanced Door Monrtoring Configurations Advanced Door Monitoring Configurations Advanced Doors support configurations that include multiple RTE and DSM inputs. These are described in the following sections. Multiple RTE Configurations Multiple RTE devices are typically configured to: • Provide tight security screens • Increase coverage over wide areas Configuration Guidelines You must specify the first RTE in the Request to Exit field of the Configure Door dialog box. This activates other request to exit options on the Configure Door dialog box. Specify additional RTEs by adding them on the Configure Advanced Door Monitoring dialog box. To Display the Configure Door Dialog Box • Select I lardware Pane >Cluster>iSTAR>Doors>Door Name To Display the Configure Advanced Door Monitoring Dialog Box • Select Hardware Pane >Cluster>iSTAR>Doors>Door Name>Door Monitoring If a door has multiple RTEs and is configured to shunt the DSM while RTE is active, the C•CURE NOTE 9000 will shunt the DSM when any RTE on the door is active. Figure 179: Door Editor - Door Monitoring Tab General I ;ming 1 Areas 8 Zones I Double SwOe i Triflers I. Groups I Status (Doce Montomg) Slate rages " Add Imo >Remove Input Input Type !STAR ha.t4 Bind Sensor 2 Bond Sensor iSTAR Inpat7-ed cacti bond 'armor Bond Sensor I. iSTAR Irourled conu RTE2 ISTAR krixt3Oaah bar C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 467 EFTA01226398 Advanced Door Monitoring Configurations Figure 180: Door Editor General Tab General Timing I Areas & Zones I Double Swipe I Triggers I Groups I Status I Door Monitoring I State images Location Controller: led cont_l —Hardware Door Switch Monitor: IiSTAR Input2-DSM Door Lock Relay: lOutput2-DLR_door_22 Alternate Shunt Relay: Shunt Expiration Relay: Readers Inbound Reader: OMliSTAR Readerl-Front Outbound Reader: ✓ Readers are continuously active —Request To Exit Request To Exit Input: CiSTAR Input8-ed_cont_l F; Unlock Door on RTE P. Shunt DSM while RTE is active /14 (—Settings -- l=r; Send non-alarms input status to the host Multiple DSM Configurations Multiple DSM configurations are used for double-leaf doors (side by side), and also to provide a tighter security screen (top and bottom). The following sections describe typical multiple DSM configurations. Single-leaf Doors (DSM top and bottom) Figure 181 on Page 469 shows a single-leaf door with a DSM at the top and bottom. C•CURE 9000 uses the following to determine door state: ■ If the door is closed, with both DSMs inactive, and then a DSM activates, the door state is open. ■ If the door is open, with both DSMs active, and then a DSM de-activates, the door state is closed. All DSMs on a single side must activate and deactivate together. If the DSMs do not activate together, C•CURE 9000 issues a DSM Tamper alarm and identifies the DSM that did not change state. 488 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226399 Advanced Door Monaoring Configurations Figure 181: Single-leaf Door with DSM Top and Bottom r MA Bus RS. 485 Junction Box To 'STAR ACM 1/8 RDR IN RM4-1 OUT DSM MAG Lock Bond Sensor MISS ••• INN Reader Public Side DSM Double- Leaf Doors (DSM each side) Figure 182 on Page 470 shows a double-leaf door with a DSM on side A and another on side B. C•CURE 9000 uses the following to determine door state: • If either DSM is active, the door state is open • If both DSMs are inactive, the door state is closed. Because double-leaf door configurations with one DSM per side are designed to operate with one leaf open and the other leaf closed, C•CURE 9000 does not issue DSM tamper alarms for this configuration. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 489 EFTA01226400 Advanced Door Monitoring Configurations Figure 182: Double-leaf Door with DSM on Each Side Junction Box RPA Bus RS • 485 RDR IN IN RM4 2 RM4-1 DSM DSM Bond MAG Lock MAG Lock Bond Sensor Sensor B Side A Side Secure Side _1 Reader Pubic Side Double-leaf Doors (DSM top and bottom) Figure 183 on Page 471 shows a double-leaf door with a DSM at the top and bottom of both side A and side B. C•CURE 9000 uses the following to determine door state: ■ If the side is closed, and a DSM activates, the side is open ■ If the side is open, and a DSM de-activates, the side is closed ■ If either side is open, the door is open ■ If both sides are closed, the door is closed MI DSMs on a single side must activate and deactivate together. If the DSMs do not activate together, the C•CURE 9000 issues a DSM Tamper alarm and identifies the DSM that did not change state. 470 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226401 Advanced Door Monitoring Configurations Figure 183: Double-leaf Door with DSM Top and Bottom of Each Side function Box IN Vs To ISTAR ACM RM Bus RS •486 ROR ii ROR N RM4•2 RM4-1 OUT DSM DSM Bond MAG Lock MAG Lock Bond Sensor Sensor B Side A Side ••• ••• u• Reader Reeder Secure Side Public Side DSM DSM DSM Configuration Guidelines You can configure DSM inputs in the Door Switch Monitor field on the Configure Door dialog box, or by adding them on the configure Door Monitoring dialog box. If you specify a DSM in the Door Switch Monitor field of the Configure Door dialog box, C•CURE 9000 uses that input as the DSM for side A of the door. DSM inputs that are added using the configure Door Monitoring dialog box can be either A or B side. Unlike multiple RTEs, you do not have to use the General Tab for DSM 1. Although the examples show two DSMs and two RTEs, it is possible to have more than two of each. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 471 EFTA01226402 Advanced Door Monitoring Configurations Figure 184: Multiple DSM Configuration ( Genera Owing I Areas & Zoned Do.ble Swipe' Trippers I Gabs I Status I Dow Montatv I Slate images Lemke Controller: led cont_l —Ha amore ( Door Switch Monitor: iSTAR Irtpu2-DSI4 Door Lock Relay: lOutpit2-DLR_doce 22 Alternate Shunt Relay: Shunt Expiration Relay: ^Readers Inbound Reader: CONII,STAR Readerl-Front Outbound Reader. ✓ Readers are continuously active Request To Bit Request To Ecit Input STAR IncktBed_cort_l =IJ P . Unlock Door co RTE P Shunt DSM while RTE wave Setongs F Sand nonsalanns input status to the host Genesal I Trnng I Areas b Zones I Double Smpe I Toppers I Groups I State Loot Prcntonng ) State Images I • Add Input Reno.** :rout Type ► 'ST tstd-bond_Sensor_2 Bone z,nr.or :STAR hpdad_cont l _bond_sensor Bond Sensor (STAR Inptiledsort_t RTE2 :STAR Faxt3Craah bar Crash bar bit nines zi :STAR Iroutexed_cont_1 Door switch motor (side 8) 472 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226403 Configuration Overview Configuration Overview Although Advanced Door configuration procedures vary based on site requirements, most configurations involve the tasks and activities described in Table 115. Table 115: General Configuration Procedure Task Configuration Dialog Box Description Additional Information 1. Configure Hardware Pane > Cluster > Configure inputs. readers, and outputs See Configuring RM4-1 and Monitoring Controller> Boards > 1st on the STAR controller using standard RM4-2 Reader, Inputs. and Inputs, ACM/2nd ACM procedures and dialog boxes. Output on Page 474 Readers, and Outputs. 2. Configure Hardware Pane > Cluster > Configure lock release oomponentson See Configuring Lock Lock Releases Controller > Boards > 1st the STAR controller using standard Releases on the II8 on Page ACM/2nd ACM controller configuration procedures 477 and dialog boxes. See Annunciating Lock Specify how C•CURE 9000 Releases inputson Page 477 annunciates the lock release inputs. 3. Configure Hardware Pane > Cluster > Configure the first RTE and the door See Configuring the the Advanced Controller> Doors > Door Name Latch relay using the standard Door Advanced Door on Page 478 Door dialog box (required). You can also use the Door dialog box to configure the DSM for side A. Hardware Pane > Cluster > Controller> Doors > Door Name Add additionalcomponents using the > Door Monitoring Configure Advanced Door Monitoring dialog box. 4. Configure Hardware Pane > Cluster > Specify timing requirements for unlock See Understanding Timing on Grace and Controller> Doors > Door Name grace timers. Also specify the change Page 481 Change Time > Door Monitoring time options for individualdoor parameters components, and for door shunts. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 1/ 473 EFTA01226404 Configuring an Advanced Door Configuring an Advanced Door This section provides step-by-step configuration information for a sample Advanced Door configuration. Sample Door The configuration for this example, shown in Figure 185 on Page 474, is a double-leaf door with multiple read heads, lock sensors, DSMs, and lock release inputs. Figure 185: Door Configuration Example Junction Box ▪ ▪ To (STAR ACM RM Bus RS•NXI U R0R i N 1 RM4-2 RM4 I IN OUT Bond MAG Lock MAG Lock Bond Senso Sensor el% Hoy Override Fi re B Side A Side Pull lea;r Re der Sean Side Pubil Slde Configuring RM4-1 and RM4-2 Reader, Inputs, and Output Configuring RM4 inputs for the door in Figure 185 on Page 474 involves using standard controller configuration procedures to configure the monitoring inputs, door latch relays, and read heads for A and B sides of the door. This is detailed in the following procedure. 474 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226405 Cenlqur mg an Advanced Door To Configure RM4 (RS-485) Inputs for the Sample Configuration 1. From the main menu, select Hardware Pane > Cluster > Controller. From the iSTAR Controller Selection browser, select the name of the iSTAR that includes Advanced Door components, and select Edit. 2. Select the tab that includes the inputs to be configured. This will vary, depending on the iSTAR model. In some cases you will have to first select the ACMn board and a Port. The RM Readers are configured under the following Tabs: ■ iSTAR Ultra - Boards > ACM 1 or 2> RS-485 Port> Reader Port > Readers ■ iSTAR Pro - Boards > ACM 1 or 2> Readers ■ iSTAR Edge - COM1 or COM2 or COM3 > Readers ■ iSTAR eX - COM1 or COM2 > Readers To configure the inputs for side A in Figure 185 on Page 474 (on RM 1), create an RM Reader. Software House recommends that the Communication failure option be configured for all security NOTE devices that connect to the iSTAR. Select the I/O Tab from the Reader Editor, to configure this option. 3. In the General tab of the Reader Editor enter the following: • Name - the name of the reader • Enabled -activated 4. Go to the I/O Tab 5. In the Inputs box, select an input and configure it. Enter at least the following: ■ Name - the name of the input ■ Enabled - check box checked ■ Send State changes to Monitoring Station (and Journal) ■ Armed - check box checked. It's good practice to Ann Inputs, but if the Input is a door component, it will be automatically armed. To configure the inputs for the example in Figure 185 on Page 474, enter information for DSM side A and the Magnetic Bond Sensor. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 475 EFTA01226406 Configuring an Advanced Door Figure 186: STAR Input DSM side A Name DSIAA-Sde Quoit:ow A a Enabled I Partial: Default r Maintenance Mode Time Zone. (GM7.0560) Eaten Tine CUSS Canada) I I 6ansateggess Groups Sirs l User Oersted Rotel Ste rages I • Idertficabal Sattaler led_cort_l lord ICOalleSTAA Raeder Pubic A ;yr IGeneall Assigned* I Conacats Trot I Option Debccpce Threshold IMO eec): IO F Supr. 'cr. F Send stale changes to monitoring station F Send state cl:anoab to icAral r Ens. sane Acavais on Sugertsion Ent Watt SU* F Aimed 6. Click OK and Close. 7. Repeat step 5 to configure the Bond Sensor Input. For consistency, Advanced Doors that include more than one instance of the same input (two NOTE DSMs, for example) should use a naming convention that indicates the area of the door that the device monitors. Example: DSM-Lobby-sideA. 8. In the Outputs box, select an output and configure it. Enter at least the following: ■ Name - the name of the output 476 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226407 Configuring an Advanced Door • Enabled - check box checked • Normally energized - activated or de-activated, depending on site requirements. Magnetic Locks are usually Normally Energized. To configure the outputs for the example in Figure 185 on Page 474, enter information for the magnetic lock output. Figure 187: Reader 'Knob A rf717 CALA ASO= BM ST Resaceftede.A raWallIA r econ1 26 5 P Ensues 3 eed NDrOp¶Cl2 Peen 06/aA F wtv mese in an. GAIT.D5063 Eaten Tine PUS liCa3X4) 0•4 30 I (WWI 0 02An I Goa I 53•1431 Use Weed FAIN I Rae neAes I MOS Creme 2.3 trims raisin/psi bl _mitMISII• CalwA2 Nine Sperand I P Way Sonar' 2 P rnAsA.ade Twat P Twee -031116PAReeterittac Caranceen Fol P Cutos 4 Grab Al (Mata Nine MOAp..b Es Can-ors” 9. Click Save and Close until you return to the Controller editor. 10. Repeat steps 1 through 7 to configure the RM4-2 for the B side of the door. Configuring Lock Releases on the 118 Configuring lock releases for the door in Figure 185 on Page 474 involves using standard controller configuration procedures. You must also specify how C•CURE 9000 annunciates the lock release inputs. For configuration guidelines, see the next section. Annunciating Lock Releases Inputs If the lock release input is configured to annunciate, C•CURE 9000 reports input activation and de-activation. Annunciation of inputs has no impact on door actions or lock release operations. To reduce message traffic, most configurations will choose to annunciate lock release inputs to test or troubleshoot the system, but will not annunciate them for normal door operations. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 477 EFTA01226408 Configuring an Advanced Door To Configure Lock Releases for the Sample Configuration 1. From the main menu, select Hardware>Cluster>Controller. Right-click the iSTAR that includes lock release components and then Edit from the context menu. 2. Select the tab that includes the 1/8 to be configured. This will vary, depending on the iSTAR model. In some cases you will have to first select the ACM board and a Port. The 1/8 boards are configured under the following Tabs: ■ iSTAR Ultra - Boards > ACM 1 or 2> RS-485 Port> ACM Ext > 1/8 >Input ■ iSTAR Pro - Boards > ACM 1 or 2> ACM Ext > 1/8 >Input ■ iSTAR Edge - COM1 or COM2 or COM3 > 1/8 >Input ■ iSTAR eX - COM1 or COM2 > 1/8 >Input 3. On the 1/8 Editor, select an input and click Edit 4. On the Input Editor, enter at least the following: ■ Name - the name of the input ■ Enabled - check box checked ■ Armed - check box checked ■ Send state changes to monitoring station - activated (includes sending to the journal) or deactivated, according to the site requirements ■ Send state changes to journal - Read only. Will be activated if Send state changes to Monitoring station is true. 5. Click Save and Close. Repeat steps 3 to 5 to configure additional inputs. Figure 188: 1/8 Inputs for Sample Door 6. Click Save and Close until you return to the main menu. Configuring the Advanced Door Configuring the Advanced Door involves adding door components using both the standard Door editor and the Door Monitoring Tab editor. To Configure the Advanced Door in the Sample Configuration: 1. From the Hardware Pane, right click on iSTAR to Configure>Door and select New. Or select an existing door in the controller to edit. 2. On the iSTAR Door Editor, click the General Tab and enter at least the following: ■ Door has RTE - the name of RTE input (if required by the door) ■ Door switch monitor - the name of the side A DSM input ■ Door latch relay - the name of the door latch relay output 478 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226409 Configuring an Advanced Door ■ Optional - Send non-alarm input status to the host. Similar to input annunciation, this will increase traffic but it is a good mode to understand Advanced Doors. 3. Enter the Readers for the Inbound and Outbound reader fields. 4. Click Save and Close until you return to the main menu. To configure the door in Figure 189 on Page 479, enter the name of the side A DSM and the door latch relay. The sample door uses a read head instead of an RTE. However, doors that use one or more RTE devices must configure the first RTE on the Door Editor. Figure 189: Sample Door aU!1 a Save ore Ocee Samoan*. Nom Descnota Nonce Mut r genre*, we. rpm. roc, Gar <6 al Eaton Lee NS 6 Canada) Trap I key a /tees I Dad. s.o• I TIOnlas I Gays• I 9.0.a I Da° Ilentrat I ue Dered Wee I atm m09•0 Locate• Lavelle. 'STAR Edge el 'tweets* tow 5.1. Worst. IS TAR lip42.DSW J Oca lock Rein, ICkie424)1B.4.22 =LI I:Mama Shoe Roy =LI St.et Eneetal Relri =LI n and a s s 1:0111,STACI Flethicktiltit =L1 04 5„,d wick, 1:0111iSTAR Atodebease_e_sde r ate ccffir a:WY actYt [ftweatte es Res To Silos =LJ r Elf/06 nrr.. Of!FITE r 051, R- E P3 Adlet Sowl *maw boststilwe bile him 5. Select the Door Monitoring tab. 6. To add door components: a. Select Add Input and pick the appropriate input to add to the Input list. 7. To specify component type: a. In the Input list box, select an input. b. Click on the Type field and use the drop-down list to select the component's type. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 479 EFTA01226410 Configuring an Advanced Door To configure components and types in Figure 190 on Page 480, add inputs for the key override, fire pull, A and B side bond sensors, and B side DSM. Specify the component type for each of the corresponding inputs. This field is required. 8. Click Save and Close. Figure 190: Door Monitoring ASwenl0ose ord Men Partition OEM r Sinionne Mab Imam (211T450:11Eation Tire (US 4Endo) Gad I Niro I Ma $ Zinn I Dad* 90.• I %pm I Gap I anal Ika Mat"; Odnansie• I gang's I STAR STA To:1 cad_l_band WOW nabs STAR lat let arcl RTE2 STAR 29.00ooltiar Oath bat lock Seas STAR TEAKS owe 1 Net smch nonor STAR apt1 Surd %Key 0vonfe Key or.terde smith iod< Crash Eat Clans Tema (010 sAccals) gab Son. CAMAY Ur* (V101. 074 ) lath Boll Clitege Time (Ulthecords) Com Sees. Charge Time (Msexede) 0SM Sods A 0102* Time (010 sow& 09.1 Cturge Terre WM saxeds) RIE ENNA Tyro (1;10 wands) 480 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226411 Understanding Timing Understanding Timing Time Delays Use timing options to prevent false alerts caused by nearly simultaneous inputs to C•CURE 9000, and also to fine tune timing to meet specialized door and site requirements. In addition to the normal door de-bounce and grace times, on the Timing Tab, there are seven other timing tweaks that are used to avoid race conditions. The Timers default to zero but it is good practice to set them all at 0.2 or 03, and then adjust, as necessary. See Figure 191 on Page 481. Since input changes cannot occur simultaneously, and if almost simultaneous may be read by our hardware in any order, some input change time values are provided. This change time will be used whenever one of the inputs changes, to allow the system to wait and see if any of the normally accompanying inputs is also going to change. For example, every time the door is open (meaning the DSM input is active), the latch bolt or bond sensor input should also be active. Therefore, every time the door opens, if the input is not already active, a timer will be started with the value of the lock sensor change value. If the timer times out without the lock sensor input activating, then a Lock Tamper alarm will be reported. Then when the door closes and locks, this time value will be the time we allow the lock sensor input to change from active to secure before reporting Lock Unsecured. Use the Timers box on the Configure Advanced Door Monitoring dialog box to fine tune timing delays for Advanced Door components. To Display the Configure Advanced Door Monitoring Dialog Box • c‘t•Ityt Door>Door Monitoring tab. Figure 191: Timms TIMM Crash Bar Change Time (1/10 seconds): 3 Bend Sensor Change Time (MO seconds): 3 Latch Bolt Change Time (MO seconds): 3 Cam Sensor Chant Time (1/10 seconds) 3 DSM Side A Change Time (1/10seccnen) 3 OSM Side B Change Time (1/10 seconds): 3 RTE Change Time (MO seconds) 21 Kinds of Timing Options C•CURE 9000 includes timing options that provide: • Grace times - a wait period that prevents false alerts caused by door open, door unlock, and door bouncing inputs. • Change times - a wait period that defines the amount of time allowed for changes in input states. Change times are used with timing values from other door inputs to define how long C•CURE 9000 waits before issuing lock tamper or lock unsecure alarms. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 481 EFTA01226412 Understanding Timing • Shunt/Delay Relock times - a wait period that defines the number of seconds the door can remain open before relock or before an alert is sounded. Grace Time Options Table 116 on Page 482 describes grace time options. Table 116: Grace Timing Options ...ii , Option Description Example Unlock Grace Time Specifies the time that C•CURE 9000 waits fora Personnel who are granted card access delay door open signalafter the door unlock timer has opening a door unti unlock time is nearly expired, expired. thereby causing nearly simultaneous DSM and DI.R Preventsa false'door forced' message in unlock timer expiration inputs to C•CURE 9000. situations where the signals are nearly If configured. C•CURE 9000 waits the number of simultaneous. secondsyou specify fora door open input, thereby I ).-,‘.: preventing a false "door forced open" message. Door Open Grace Time Specifies the time that C•CURE 9000 waits for Personnel lean on a door release mechanism white an RTE. card admit, or momentary unlock signal pressing the RTE switch, causing nearly after receiving the signal from the DSM. simultaneousdoor open and RTE inputs to DSM Preventsa false "door forced open" message in C•CURE 9000. situations where signals are nearly If configured. C•CURE 9000 waits the number of simultaneous. secondsyou specify for the RTE. card admit. or RTE For additional information, see Special Timing momentary unlock signal, thereby preventing a Considerationson Page 484. false "door forced open' message. a- Door Close De-bounce Time Specifies the time that C•CURE 9000 ignores Unintended door movement (bouncing) can DSM inputs. to allow for bouncing doors. activate a DSM input to C•CURE 9000 and cause false "door forced open" messages. in I: If configured, the Door dose de-bounce time option I ignores DSM inputs for the time specified after the O,-.\: door doses toallow for bouncing doors. I I Illa I if -0. Change Time Options C•CURE 9000 determines change time based on the door components you have configured (DSM, RTE, lock releases, for example) and the door operation (card access, RTE access, door forced, for example). 482 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226413 Understanding Timing Change time is specified in units of 1/10 second. Enter 1 to specify 1/10 second, 5 to specify 5/10 NOTE (1/2) second and so forth. Software House recommends that you set all change times to at least 5/10 second and make adjustments only as necessary. Table 117 on Page 483 describes how change time options work for lock releases, lock sensors, and DSM and RTE devices. Table 117: Change Timing Options Option Function Associated Inputs Activation Criteria Crash bar Specifies the amount of time C•CURE C•CURE 9000 uses the crash bar Activated by the bond sensor, latch bolt. change time 9000 allows, after a crash bar state change time to determine changes to or cam sensor. change. for a lock sensor change corresponding: • Bond sensors • Latch bolts • Cam sensors Bond sensor Specifies the amount of time C•CURE C•CURE 9000 uses the greatest The bond sensor should be active if: change time 9000 allows for a bond sensor state value of the following: • Door isopen change. • Door open grace time • Door latch relay inactive C•CURE 9000 uses this time, and the • Door dose de-bounce time time of the other door inputs, to • Lock release input(s) are active determine the wait before issuing a • Crash bar change time The bond sensor should be inactive "lock tamper" or "lock unsecure" alarm. • Bond sensor change time when: • RTE change time • Latch relay is inactive, the door is dosed, and the lock release inputs are inactive Latch bolt Specifies the amount of time C•CURE C•CURE 9000 uses the greatest The latch bolt should be active if the change time 9000 allows for a latch bolt state value of the following: door isopen. change. • Door open grace time The latch bolt should be inactive if: C•CURE 9000 uses this time, along • Door dose de-bounce time • Door isdosed with the time of the other door inputs, to determine the wait before issuing a • Crash bar change time • Door latch relay isinactive "lock tamper" or "lock unsecure" alarm. • Latch bolt change time • Lock release inputs are inactive • RTE change time The latch bolt can be active or inactive if: • Door latch relay is active • Lock release input(s) are active Cam sensor Specifies the amount of time C•CURE C•CURE 9000 uses the greatest The cam sensor should be active if: change time 9000 allows for a cam sensor state value of the following: • Door latch relay is active change. • Crash bar change time • Lock release input(s) are active C•CURE 9000 uses this time, along • Cam sensor change time with the time of the other door inputs, to The cam sensor should be inactive if the determine the wait before issuing a • RTE change time door latch relay is inactive and all lock "lock tamper" or "led( unsecured" releases are inactive alarm. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 483 EFTA01226414 Understanding Timing Table 117: Change Timing Options (continued) Option Function Associated Inputs Activation Criteria DSM side A Specifies the amount of time C•CURE Additional DSM inputs on the same DSM change time Isaacs,* when the first change time 9000 allows fora DSM state change. door side DSM in a group changes state. (DSMs C•CURE 9000 uses Misvalue to must be located on the same side of the determine the wait period before door). DSM side B change time activating a DSM tamper for multiple DSM devices on one side of the door. RTE change Specifies the amount of time C•CURE C•CURE 9000 uses the RTE change Activated by the bond sensor. latch bolt. time 9000 allows. before or after an RTE time todetermine changes to or cam sensor. state change, for a lock sensor change. corresponding: For additional information, see See • Bond sensors 'Special Timing Considerations' on • Latch bolts page 484 • Cam sensors Shunt Time Options Table 118 on Page 484 describes options that control shunt time. Table 118: Shunt Time Options Option Description Delay relock while door open after valid access If access is valid. delays the tele& of the door until the door doses. This differs from standard relock operations where tele& occurs when the: • Door opens. • Door opensand the tele& delay expires. If the door isopen. the lock is energized. C•CURE 9000 sends an alarm when the shunt time expires. Shunt door for full shunt time Activates the shunt for the full time specified. If selected with Delay relock while door open after valid access, the lock is energized and the door unlocked for the full shunt time. regardlessof whether the door isopen or dosed. Special Timing Considerations Sites that use an RTE motion detector angled over a door can cause C•CURE 9000 to report a valid RTE that is caused by door motion, instead of a forced open alarm. This situation occurs because of a race condition in which the RTE caused by forced motion on the door reports to C•CURE 9000 before the DSM, thereby causing C•CURE 9000 to execute a valid exit instead of a door forced alarm. You can correct the situation by: • Repositioning door hardware - adjust the position of any RTE motion detectors angled over doors. You should also replace any slow DSM components that may be contributing to the problem. 484 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226415 Understanding Timing ■ Adjusting the timing of door components - use the RTE change time option to specify timing for incoming traffic and also to change the function of the Door open grace time option. The RTE change time option specifies the amount of time that C•CURE 9000 ignores RTE inputs after the door is closed. Use this value to prevent false door forced reports caused by door components (slow bolts or sensors, bouncing door, for example) for outgoing traffic. The RTE change time option also changes the function of the Door open grace time option. If you specify a value for RTE change time, the Door open grace time option now specifies the time C•CURE 9000 ignores RTE changes before the door open occurs. This prevents RTE signals from the motion detector that are caused by door mechanics rather than human access. If C•CURE 9000 sees an RTE on a closed door, and then sees the door open within the period you specify, it cancels the RTE and issues a door forced alarm. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 485 EFTA01226416 Monitoring Door Activity Monitoring Door Activity You can monitor Advanced Door activities using: ■ Door, alarm, and show cause features on the Monitoring Station ■ Journal reports from the Administration application Using Monitoring Station Commands To Display Information about Alarms, Alarm Causes, and Door Component Status 1. Select Doors from the Non-Hardware Pane on the Monitoring Station Explorer Bar. 2. Right click on a Door and select Door Monitoring. 3. Use Door Monitoring to Show Locked Causes and various Alarm States. 4. Door Monitor Inputs are also shown at the top of the Door Monitoring Editor. Right click on an input for further context menu options. Using Journal Reports To Display Journal Messages about Advanced Doors 1. From the Administration application, select Options & Tools. 2. Select Journal 3. Enter a range for Start date/time and End date/time. 4. Use the Journal Query Assistant to select: ■ Object Changed State Message Type ■ iSTAR Doors Object Type ■ Door Name(s) ■ You can also use Journal Triggers to get detailed information. 488 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226417 Understanding Door Alarms Understanding Door Alarms Alarms This section describes how C•CURE 9000 manages alarm traffic and contradictory component reports that can sometimes accompany Advanced Door configurations. Door Open Alarm - this alarm occurs whenever the door opens without benefit of card or request to exit access, and one of the lock release devices is active. This alarm indicates that some kind of emergency unlock is occurring. The alarm message includes the name of the lock release device as the reason for the door open alarm. In the case that none of the lock release devices is active, this is a normal door forced open alarm. Lock Unsecured Alarm - this alarm occurs whenever a lock sensor is active when it should be inactive. This indicates that the lock hardware failed to return to locked position after being unlocked by one of the lock release devices or by regular door control. The alarm message includes the name of the lock sensor input that caused the alarm. Lock Tamper Alarm - this alarm occurs whenever one of the lock sensors is inactive when it should be active. This is whenever one of the lock release devices is active or the door latch relay has been activated by the door or the DSM indicates that the door is open. This may indicate that someone is tampering with the lock sensor while the door is opening or that the lock hardware has failed. The alarm message includes the name of the lock sensor input that caused the alarm. DSM Tamper Alarm - this alarm is reported if multiple DSM inputs monitor the same door and one of them does not become active when it should. The alarm message includes the name of the input that is not active. New Activity / Journal Reports New door activity reports will be added: ■ Lock Tamper Alarm (reported with input name indicating which input caused the lock tamper alarm condition) ■ Lock Unsecured Alarm (reported with input name indicating which input caused the lock unsecured alarm condition) ■ Door Open Alarm (reported with input name indicating which input caused the door open alarm condition) ■ DSM Tamper Alarm (reported with input name indicating which input caused the DSM tamper alarm condition) Managing Message Traffic To reduce the redundant door open, lock tamper, DSM tamper, and lock unsecured alarms generated by multiple inputs on Advanced Doors, C•CURE 9000 reports Monitoring Station and journal activity only when the alarm changes from an inactive to an active state. Additional inputs to the same alarm are not reported. C•CURE 9000 also clears the alarm only when all inputs deactivate. The example in Figure 192 on Page 489 shows the General Activity Monitor for a simplified door that includes two bond sensor inputs and a DSM. The following actions occurred: 1. Door closed (no inputs inactive). 2. Card admitted, door open (DSM activates, bond sensor 1 activates as expected, bond sensor 2 does not activate). C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 487 EFTA01226418 Understanding Door Alarms 3. Door Lock unsecured reported (bond sensor 1). 4. Bond sensor 1 deactivates while the door is open, causing a second input to the lock tamper alarm. C•CURE 9000 does not display an additional alarm report for bond sensor 2 on the General Activity window. 5. Door closed (DSM deactivates). 488 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226419 Understanding Door Alarms Figure 192: GeneralActivityAlarm Reports Example C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 489 EFTA01226420 Understanding Door Alarms I ■ 0 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226421 Understanding Door Alarms Figure 193 on Page 491 shows the Monitoring Status for the example door activities. C•CURE 9000 reports the first lock tamper (bond sensor 2) and does not clear the alarm. The second lock tamper (bond sensor 1) on the same door does not display on the General Activity Monitor. Figure 193: General Activity Alarms Reports Example 3/32014 .0.47:4 AM tSTAR Doe 1100f 2Z IS deer13fCed c 3/52014 '0:47r4 N4 iSTAR Docr doer lock tamper WAR tp44-Eccid_Sonecc2ASTAR hret3-Bccd_Sterce_1'. c 3/5/20141:4721 AM doorlodc tamper »erei on IUAR Door 'cixe_22'. c 3/51201444724 N4 'STAR Doer docc27 Isdoor dosed 11:1 3/52014'0.4724 AM 'STAR Do, doct_22 door lock Li-seared atien1STAR Irp441.0oniSensce2 STAR input 1-Bcnc Sento.. 1' c 3/52014 .448:33 N4 doorlocic Lrisecuncl alarm clewed m ISTPR Dor 'cisce_27. Clearing Alarms Advanced Door alarms may occasionally appear "stuck" because C•CURE 9000 waits for the input to change state before clearing the alarm. This is to reduce unnecessary alarm traffic. If all inputs are functioning properly, you can clear all door and input alarms by performing a normal door access cycle (opening and closing the door). Door Triggers In addition to the usual five Door Triggers: • Admit Status - Admit, Reject, Noticed Admit, Noticed Reject, Duress • Double Swipe Status - Locked, Unlocked • Mode Status - Unlocked, Locked, No Access • Open Status - Open, Closed • Alarm State Status - Normal, Forced, Held Open There are four additional Advanced Door Triggers shown in Figure 194 on Page 492. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 491 EFTA01226422 Understanding Door Alarms Figure 194: Advanced Door Triggers Gem-all Thing I:VMS 1 Zoies I Double SAD( -092en Dews r Status I Dco• sAxtrtmg I &ate rrages I - Woos ?'Pali Fa,b Remy! (1 Don 0pm Alan St:us • Gereti I Tama I Acs tames I Cou:t .c.ne rlifAt 5 I Gram Yeas I her Montro I Sta:e nacres i Inggare Add aaascve Value Pai -C g 11 nrk I In:enured .kr-eui Sec:um awe I Tired kw 47mes I Wilk kw Naas 'Amens Sam I Derr Nertienr I We inagee Trigg= '4, AID el. Reinke VW* I Ada, I ink Wade trr Lock - aroer Setus Scat - Triggers "at. Ark ,74 Rerrove &Liu Defiler SdexIde DSM Tat imp Skin 'cure Privilege Modifications iSTAR Door Permission list • Enable Door forced alarms • Disable Door forced alarms • Enable Door held alarms • Disable Door held alarms • Enable RTE functions • Disable RTE functions 492 Chapter 11 CCURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226423 Understanding Door Alarms ■ Enable Lock Tamper alarms ■ Disable Lock Tamper alarms ■ Enable Lock Unsecured alarms ■ Disable Lock Unsecured alarms ■ Enable Door Open Tamper alarms ■ Disable Door Open Tamper alarms ■ Enable DSM Tamper alarms ■ Disable DSM Tamper alarms ■ Door Monitoring Details Reports A standard iSTAR Door Report can be used to list all of the Advanced Door components. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 493 EFTA01226424 Understanding Door Alarms Figure 195: STAR Door Report rt—s_rae • ent " V V V • • . , report door mon I STAR DOOR Advanced Door Monitoring Inputs Input Name Link Type iSTAR Input4-iSTAR Ultra Bond Sensor ACM1-gcm_new_cont_10009c iSTAR Input5-iSTAR Ultra Bond Sensor ACM1-gcm_new_cont_10009c iSTAR Input1-iSTAR Ultra Latch bolt detector ACM1-gcm_new_cont_10009c Advanced Door Monitoring Inputs Input Name Link Type iSTAR Input8-iSTAR Ultra Cam detection ACM1-gcm_new_cont_10009c iSTAR Input9-iSTAR Ultra RTE2 ACM1-gcm_new_cont_10009c iSTAR Input18-iSTAR Ultra General lock release ACM1-gcm_new_cont_10009c iSTAR Input17-iSTAR Ultra Fire alarm lock release ACM1-gcm_new_cont_10009c Advanced Door Monitoring Inputs Input Name Link Type iSTAR Input3-Crash_bar Crash bar lock release iSTAR Input4-Bond_Sensor_2 Bond Sensor iSTAR Input7-ed_cont_1 Bond Sensor 494 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226425 Advanced Door hilonrtoring Details Advanced Door Monitoring Details If you have Advanced Door Monitoring, additional selections are displayed on the Door context menu from a Dynamic View or a Monitoring Station Status List of Doors. Each of these selections let you initiate a Manual Action to enable or disable the selected function. See Viewing a List of Doors on Page 408 for more information about the context menu for Doors. Advanced Door Monitoring has 7 Cause List type states, and 14 possible manual actions that may be associated with these: ■ RTE enable/disable, ■ door forced alarm enable/disable, ■ door held open alarm enable/disable, ■ door open alarm enable/disable, ■ lock tamper alarm enable/disable, ■ lock unsecured alarm enable/disable, ■ DSM tamper alarm enable/disable. Enter the Door Monitoring Status screen for iSTAR doors by right clicking on the Door and selecting Door Monitoring from the context menu. You can also execute the Manual Actions listed above, from this context menu. Figure 196: DoorContext Menu Find in Audit Log... Find in Journal... Lock... Unlock... Momentary Unlock Show Locked Causes Enable RTE functions... Disable RTE Functions... Enable Door Forced Alarms ... Disable Door Forced Alarms... Enable Door Held Open Alarms... Disable Door Held Open Alarms ... Enable Lock Tamper Alarms ... Disable Lock Tamper Alarms ... Enable Lock Unsecured Alarms... Disable Lock Unsecured Alarms... • Door Monitoring See Door Monitoring Screen on Page 496 for more information about the Door Monitoring screen. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 495 EFTA01226426 Door Adlonrlonng Screen Door Monitoring Screen The Door Monitoring screen shows all inputs monitored by a door, their state, and any door alarm condition derived from them as well as the Cause Lists. The upper dynamic view displays Door Monitoring Inputs status. The bottom part displays cause lists and all 'cause list' standard functionality is available (right mouse click on selected row will activate "Details/Cancel" context menu). Figure 197 on Page 496 shows an example of the Door Monitoring Screen. Table 119 on Page 497 provides definitions for the fields and selections on the screen. Also see Table 114 on Page 465 for an explanation of the Alarms. Figure 197: Door Monkodng Screen Ig Doors Flo/storing screen for dom_.12 ▪ Refresh Al 'el H ews - Fiter ktrrDiti(GYVtla i Count: 6 Drag column to group by here Name I bout Type I al Anasdaras I Aortae Salm 'STAR Input3Crish bar Crash bar lock release Mood Active 'STAR bps44-BcoO Satsce2 Bond Sensor Mood Inactive MAR Ingstill- Bond Sensor Armed Pave ed_ccon_l_bood_senaor iSTAR Input&ed_cooLl Door *Mich nada fide 0) Mead Inactive 'STAR Inputl,d con° RTE2 Mood Inactive STAR Instal- Boardl Key Cmanide Key override math too release Paned Inactive PEN Enabled RTE Swoons Door Forced sin DSM Tamer Alarm Dar Held Norms LodiTamper Maros Caw lock unsecured sans I Prixty seoure_22 Door ODe, Ames 75 Lock srOde_22 Unbck Door 3/1020141200A1 PM 75 I:ck_22 Lack Door 3/10/ 01411:50ZAM 75 mood Iblock Door 3/10201411:58:51MI 75 Cefaii sae Locked The availability of manual actions depends on input assignments. The rules to show/hide manual action on the Door Monitoring Ccieen and show/hide executors on iSTAR Door Dynamic Views are: • If there is an RTE input then show Enable/Disable RTE; • If there is a DSM input then show Enable/Disable Door Forced Alarms, Enable/Disable Door Held alarms, if there is also any DSM side A inputs, then Enable/Disable DSM Tamper • If there is a Bond Sensor input then show Enable/Disable Lock Tamper alarms, Enable/Disable Lock unsecured alarms; 498 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226427 Door Monitoring Screen • If there is a Latch Bolt Detector input then show Enable/Disable Lock Tamper alarms, Enable/Disable Lock unsecured alarms; • If there is a CAM detection input then show Enable/Disable Lock Tamper alarms, Enable/Disable Lock unsecured alarms; • If there is a DSM Side A input then show Enable/Disable Door Forced Alarms, Enable/Disable Door Held alarms, if there is also a main DSM, or another DSM side A, then Enable/Disable DSM Tamper; • If there is a DSM Side B input then show Enable/Disable Door Forced Alarms, Enable/Disable Door Held alarms, if there is more than one DSM side B, then Enable/Disable DSM Tamper; • If there is an R'1'E2 input then show Enable/Disable RTE. Table 119: Doors Monitoring Screen Definitions Field/Sutton Description Ara Click this button to refresh the values of all Inputs on the screen. R., Refresh AM .ry , tij, This toolbar lets you perform Dynamic View functions on the list of Door Inputs. such as tittering. printing. and Views • dil switching to Card View. Name Thisoolumn displays the name of the Input. Input type Thisoolumn displays the function that the Input serves in Door Monitoring. Armed Status This column displays the Armed Statusof the Input. Inputs associated with Doors are automaticallyArmed and are reported as unknown. Active Status This column displays the Active Status of the Input. Cause Selection Thisdrop-down list lets you choose the Cause type to display in the Status Information and Cause List section of the screen. Status Information T his read-onty field displays the current state of the selected Input. Cause This read-on ty field displays the Cause State for the Input. Action This read-onty field displays the Lock and Unlock actions that are in effect on the door. DateTime This read-onty field displays the Date and Time the ca use occurred. Priority This read-onty field displays the Event Priority of the cause. Lock Click this button to initiate a manual action to lock the Door. Unlock Click this button to initiate a manual action to unlock the Door for a defined period. Momentary Unlock Click this button to momentarity unlock the Door for the Door Unlock period (usualty 5 seconds). Enable The Enable button changes to match the selected Cause Selection in the drop-down list. Click this button to enable the selected Cause type. Example: If the Cause Selection is Door Forced Alarms. then the button reads Enable Door Forced Alarms. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 497 EFTA01226428 Door Monitoring Screen Table 119: Doors Monitoring Screen Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Disable The Disable button changes to match the selected Cause Selection in the drop-down list. Clickthis button to disable the selected Cause type. Example: If the Cause Selection is Door Forced Alarms, then the button reads Disable Door Forced Alarms. 498 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226429 12 Configuring Elevators This chapter explains how to configure elevators in C•CURE 9000. In this chapter Elevator Configuration Overview 500 Elevator Tasks 501 iSTAR Elevators 505 apC Elevators 519 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 499 EFTA01226430 Elevator Configuration Overview Elevator Configuration Overview Access to floors is managed through Elevator control. Elevators are similar to doors, but have many exit points which are determined by the floor objects. Floors are created independently from controllers, and are integrated into Elevators through the definition of elevator buttons (see Creating a Floor on Page 399). Elevator control requires readers, inputs, outputs, and Personnel Clearances. A reader is used to control access to the elevator by authenticating cardholders. A cardholder is given access to an elevator by assigning a Personnel Clearance that includes the Elevator to the cardholder. Outputs are used to control the elevator buttons. When the Output is energized, the button for a floor in the Elevator becomes available for use. Inputs can be configured to determine at which floor the cardholder exited. When the Elevator door opens at a Floor, an Input state change indicates that the door has opened. Elevators or elevator groups are configured through the use of buttons that represent floors with inputs and outputs. You can then add elevators to clearances that are used to control which cardholders can access the elevators and floors and at what times. You can configure Elevators for iSTAR and apC controllers. ■ iSTAR Elevators on Page 505 ■ apC Elevators on Page 519 Elevators are associated with the time zone that is used by the elevator's inputs, outputs, and readers. NOTE Elevator controls and Clearances for Elevators have not been evaluated by UL, and cannot be used in NOTE UL Listed applications. 500 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226431 Elevator Tasks Elevator Tasks You can perform the following general tasks to configure iSTAR and apC Elevators. ■ Creating an Elevator on Page 501 ■ Creating an Elevator Template on Page 501 ■ Deleting an Elevator on Page 502 ■ Modifying an Elevator on Page 502 ■ Viewing a List of Elevators on Page 502 ■ Using Set Property for Elevators on Page 503 ■ Adding Elevators to a Group on Page 503 Creating an Elevator You can create a new Elevator. To Create an Elevator L In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select Elevator from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Right-click the Elevator folder and select New to create a new Elevator. The Elevator Editor opens and you can configure the Elevator. 4. Type an identification for the Elevator in the Name and Description entry fields. 5. To save your new Elevator, click Save and Close. Alternatively, if you want to save the Elevator and then create a new one, click Save and New. The current Elevator is saved and closed, but the Elevator Editor remains open to allow you to create a new Elevator. Creating an Elevator Template You can create a new template for an Elevator. An Elevator template saves you time because you specify some of the Elevator configuration settings in the Template. When you use the Template to create new Elevators, you do not have to enter those configuration settings again. To Create an Elevator Template 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select Elevator from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click the drop-down arrow next to New and select New Template. 4. The Elevator Template opens and you can configure the Elevator template. 5. To save your new Elevator Template, click Save and Close. The new Elevator template appears under —Templates in the New Template drop-down list. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 501 EFTA01226432 Elevator Tasks To Create an Elevator from an Elevator Template 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select Elevator from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click the drop-down arrow next to New and click a Template name from the list under —Templates. The Elevator editor opens. 4. Configure the Elevator. 5. To save your new Elevator, click Save and Close. Deleting an Elevator You can delete an existing Elevator. To Delete an Elevator 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select Elevator from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click gai to open a Dynamic View showing all Elevator objects. 4. Right-click the Elevator in the list that you want to delete and select Delete from the context menu. 5. Click Yes on the "Are you sure you want to delete the selected Elevator?" message box. Modifying an Elevator You can edit an Elevator to modify its buttons (Floors and Outputs) and state images. To Edit an Elevator 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select Elevator from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click gai to open a Dynamic View showing all Elevator objects. 4. Double-click the Elevator in the list that you want to modify, or right-click and select Edit from the context menu. The Elevator Editor opens. Viewing a List of Elevators You u;111 ;I open Dynamic View listing your Elevators. To View a List of Elevators 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select Elevator from the Hardware pane drop-down list. SO2 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226433 Elevator Tasks 3. Click P .4 j to open a Dynamic View showing all Elevator objects. You can right-click the column header to add columns —Enabled, Controller, Comm Status, and so NOTE forth. If you right-click a row in the Elevator Dynamic View, a context menu is displayed. This menu contains a number of standard selections, as well as selections that are specific for elevators. See Using the Object List Context Menu in the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide for more information about the object context menu. Using Set Property for Elevators You can use Set Property to set properties for Elevators to quickly set a property for an Elevator without opening an Elevator. You can select multiple Elevators in a Dynamic View list, and right-click to use Set Property to set a specific property for all of them. Example: To change the setting for Send to Monitoring Station for 10 specific Elevators, display a Dynamic View of Elevators (see Viewing a List of Elevators on Page 502), the use multiple selection (typically SHIFT+LEFT-CLICK to select a range or CTRL+LEFT-CLICK to select multiple items) to select the 10 Elevators, then right-click to display the context menu. Choose Set Property from the context menu, then click 0 to see a list of Elevator properties. Select Send to Monitoring Station, then select O or El for the Value setting. When you click OK the property will be set for these elevators. To Set a Property for an Elevator 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select Elevator from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click a 1 to open a Dynamic View showing all Elevator objects. 4. Right-click the Elevator in the list that you want to set the property for and select Set Property from the context menu. 5. Specify the property for the Elevator. Click 0 to choose from a list of properties. 6. Enter the Value for the property and click OK. Adding Elevators to a Group You c.m use Add To Group for Elevators to add one or more Elevators to a group. To Add Elevators To Group 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Select Elevator from the Hardware pane drop-down list. 3. Click i lk to open a Dynamic View showing all Elevator objects. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 503 EFTA01226434 Elevator Tasks 4. Right-click the Elevator in the list that you want to add to the group and select Add To Group from the context menu. 5. Select a Group from the list that appears. 6. Click OK to confirm that the Elevators were added to the Group. Alternatively, you can click: • Print to print the message. • Email to send the message to the email address you have configured in the Customer Support section of the C•CURE 9000 System Variables. 504 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226435 STAR Elevators iSTAR Elevators A cluster of iSTAR controllers can be used to manage elevator access. A cluster consists of a system of one or more iSTAR controllers which determine communications between individual controllers. Each cluster is configured for either iSTAR Classic/Pro or iSTAR eX controllers. For more information see Configuring iSTAR Clusters on Page 87. Elevator controls have not been evaluated by UL. NOTE After configuring the parent objects, iSTAR Clusters and Controllers, iSTAR Elevators require floors, iSTAR Readers, Inputs, Outputs and Doors. The iSTAR Inputs are used to determine at which floor the cardholder exited and the iSTAR Outputs are used to control the elevator buttons, which are set in the Buttons tab. These dependent objects must be set up before you can configure an iSTAR Elevator. For more information, see the references listed below. 1. Cluster and Controller - for more information see: • iSTAR Cluster Editor on Page 91 • iSTAR Controller Editor on Page 137 2. Floor - for more information see: • Floors Overview on Page 396 • Configuring a Floor for an iSTAR Elevator on Page 505 3. Boards with Readers, Inputs, Outputs - for more information see: • iSTAR Controller Boards Tab (iSTAR Classic/Pro) on Page 156 • iSTAR eX and iSTAR Edge Configuration Summary on Page 121 Once these parent and dependent objects are created, you can continue the elevator configuration process: 1. Elevator name (for more information see iSTAR Elevator General Tab on Page 506). 2. Elevator Buttons (for more information see iSTAR Elevator Buttons Tab on Page 510). 3. Elevator Triggers (see iSTAR Elevator Triggers Tab on Page 512 4. Groups tab (see Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 28). Configuring a Floor for an iSTAR Elevator You may create new floors or configure existing floors using the Floor folder displayed in the Hardware tree. After you create the iSTAR cluster and controller(s), you can configure inputs, outputs, readers, elevators, and buttons and associate the these objects with specific floors or elevators for access by authorized cardholders. For more information see Using the Hardware Pane on Page 20. When you add a floor to a group, the Groups tab will be displayed with the Floor - General tab. Configuring a Floor for an iSTAR Elevator 1. From the default Floor directory of the Hardware tree, create a new floor, or edit the name or description of an existing floor. 2. Highlight the floor folder, right-click, and select New. A Floor dialog box opens. 3. Enter a Name and Description for the new floor and click the Enabled box if you want to set the floor online. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 505 EFTA01226436 STAR Ebvators Figure 198: Floor Dialog Box - General Tab 4. Click Save and Close. The new floor name displays below the Floors folder in the Hardware tree. Continue this creation process until your facility's floors, which you want to access via an elevator, have been assigned to a C•CURE 9000 Floor object. The next task that must be completed before you can configure an iSTAR Elevator is to complete the configuration of an iSTAR Cluster, Controller(s), Readers, Inputs, Outputs and Doors. For more information, see the references listed above. iSTAR Elevator General Tab You can access the Elevator editor from a configured iSTAR Elevator object in the C•CURE 9000 Hardware pane. See iSTAR Elevator General Tab Definitions on Page 514 for descriptions of the fields on this tab. To Access the iSTAR Elevator Editor 1. In the C• CURE 9000 Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. dick the iSTAR Controller drop-down list and select Elevator. 3. Right-click the Elevator listing and click New or New Template. 508 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226437 'STAR Elevators 4. If you have configured Elevators, double-click the Elevator listing for the selected controller to open a Dynamic View showing all existing Elevator objects (see Figure 199 on Page 507). 5. Double-click the Elevator in the list that you want to edit, and the Elevator - General tab opens, shown in Figure 200 on Page 508. Figure 199: Hardware Pane Elevator Selection troscenue I .404 •••••7,3‘40, y (NM I NIL Way • 4; ••• tuire4V0 re.C.••••• NO. -e # 0.01t6/Al o._. YIN gs •IM •OlteSTM ha. An•Deres. Welt • it twitIat • 41* Yes SaNSW.14, OAP% • kn.,. teen fa, as 41•.n ▪ In s 41ift ti.onkt.ii MAP* Anon freers M. ••••• Cornsamr. ra ODA ••••14.04i4tiA lanatiM •w./PI CAI Pio • .1 ilitu40104 row tremigAMOIA b t Y G. MIA bra aim AMP l.. •••••••••••••• t• Moira fis. Arms. To Configure Elevators 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Right-click the Elevators folder in the Hardware tree and select New to create a new Elevator. The Elevator - General tab, shown in Figure 200 on Page 508 opens. 3. Enter a Name and description (for example, its location or function) for the elevator. 4. Select Enabled to put the Elevator online once you click Save and Close. The iSTAR Controller is displayed within the Location box. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 507 EFTA01226438 STAR Elevators Figure 200: STAR Elevator General Tab- Reader Selection aLJ x w. as ow r. erw P &maw Nina Iv..• Sawrent WA* Terrier* CMOS 00 Gas* 'no ICirefal OW" I ban I as I %Wm I G0.01 PAM UMW ;Wilton.« I Leuin• Certeiler Br,* I Ilxs Silence Mar OtrenlSOKW Sow "s" h....n..3 ' 4 I X 01 f - D.ao tou-, fr ;u: •• lea kt.r.. 'es ena Cick M•. IS Ye. U. COW4STARROS3 Dee. I COMM. Nakitt NW' 5. Click 0 to select a Reader in the Location area. The Reader list shown in the Reader browser is restricted to unassigned readers on the parent Controller. 6. Choose an Elevator Floor Selection Mode for the elevator from the listed options. The possible choices include: • No Input • Single Input • Multiple Inputs 7. If you choose the Single Input option, click the browse 0 button to select an Input from the Input browser (see Figure 201 on Page 509). 508 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226439 STAR Elevators Figure 201: STAR Elevator General Tab- Input Selection t_..0••• Eista Cl••••••• v(._ ti e O..& Iasi OROS blot Soo 044Crail and ken I vas thionl oval Rearms Me I faila/MI lab f".••• PPM Spat &OW t,....: c.•...: Its Skailesteala r maws r Sowieser 0.00.10.•• Tv* ObeaSes iteglinty'relsna. 0.04.1 us.Is In , Pn' .1.1.0•••LOI.S. 8. Enter a Button Activation Time in seconds. Figure 202: STAR Elevator General Tab - Completed Savt Ind Oat k' Sive we rie. Wpm Ida f2K.vscr iltwesce A Enthlftl Plifletei Walt r Setteance Med@ Tara Zone alt4710:1been 11•01.15 Cavat.) Great I San I Suss I Town I Geuris I Us Undo WS' Sitemoo I lataiOn coned', ISAR Sipe al ander ICOMISTAR PeaclaMTAR €6. ,e '21 IDe. — I • I rime Selimbon Mode r gaepd 6- sr" eat STAR tmes.ITAR Edger 1 10tie,A1 I • I r SMOGKg. Sao Avivilks line kart Act.ma- Time (non*, wads) Ig 05 A 9. Navigate to the Buttons tab or click Save and Close. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 509 EFTA01226440 STAR Ebvators iSTAR Elevator Buttons Tab Elevator Buttonscan be created in the Elevator Buttons tab to specify which floors, inputs, and outputs are connected to elevator buttons. See iSTAR Elevator Buttons Tab Definitions on Page 515 for more definitions of the Buttons tab. To Configure Elevator Buttons for Floor Access 1. From the Elevator dialog box, click the Buttons tab. The Elevator dialog box - Buttons tab opens, shown in Figure 203 on Page 510. 2. Click Add to create a row under the Floors and Outputs columns. 3. Click within the floors column to display the browse 0 button and select a floor from the Floor browser, shown in Figure 203 on Page 510, that you want to associate with the iSTAR Elevator. Figure 203: iSTAR Elevator Buttons Tab- Floor Selection SS.....erb. tire l'un e.g.> DACtOta P bvbea Pryer, yew r swnetence Male Tme Zee CW105 CO Easton ins (1.6 I Canada) Orwell eatonttitvd Imo, I Cowo. I Deine0400. I Sttle new I Div*, &Or Canaceets -• • Aal .u.ro, Om; Catena...a Group by hen Cid ...rebuke eau a. Id AlFleas GK. 1144i Usk all ken pro* nor amid pry 4. Click within the Outputs column to display 0 and select an Output from the Outputs browser, shown in Figure 204 on Page 511, that you want to associate with the iSTAR Elevator. 510 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226441 STAR Elevators F igure 204: STAR Elevator Buttons Tab- Output Selection sae and cu..• &be and iv,. Hors 'vs, revs°, Qescrceon IV Enable/ Parbbo, Lows r 16.mccance Mode im Zoo& CIATOSOX Eason Tone (US 6 Caedel Gene" Ekinons I 9as I Tana+I Gnxen I Waled Fob I Sese maces I Begnor axon Caroceents Ackl 9. Rerove Casck hereb6M dab g, :/t °twos Grew Debt Debt all cuvis grow Outwit-iSTAR Edge OefegA 5. Continue to add Floors and Outputs until you have finished creating Elevator Buttons for each floor that you want to manage with the iSTAR Elevator. 6. Navigate to the Status tab or click Save and Close. iSTAR Elevator Status Tab The Elevator Status tab (see Figure 205 on Page 512) provides a read-only listing of critical information about the operational status of the selected Elevator including: • Communication Status - displays the values Normal or Comm Fail. • Tamper Status - displays the values True or False. • Admit Status - displays the values Admit or Reject. See iSTAR Elevator Status Tab Definitions on Page 516 for descriptions of the fields on this tab. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 511 EFTA01226442 STAR Elevators Figure 205: STAR Elevator Status Tab Sa,<a•a oot< e.w.earerin. tWel Man et,scf 000:reete A P Evils Pinbcr 0484 r Maranono. Ito& Tonan 61.105 00)Eser Tme Ca-acb) Gas I Ban I Aau inset I Gromas I w D*S Fdth I As, mwe Teresa " X °•<Rero,< ktcn Otot* Sche:u* Tare Zov LI I 1%3MT-0500 , E. I Navigate to the Triggers tab or click Save and Close. iSTAR Elevator Triggers Tab You can create Triggers for iSTAR Elevators using the iSTAR Elevators Triggers tab. A Trigger executes a specified Action when a particular predefined condition occurs. When a Trigger is defined, the Actions available depend on the property selected (see Figure 206 on Page 513). See Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 270 for information on creating Triggers for an iSTAR device. See iSTAR Elevator Triggers Tab Definitions on Page 516 for descriptions of the fields on this tab. 512 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226443 STAR Elevators Figure 206: STAR Elevator TriggersTab- Completed hems 'Man Be.=, Dos:Taco £Hied Pone*, Delta r Matranono. Web Tont Zone (.,10'05 Onesen Imo NS IL Caw's) Gcr Ban I 4.4tus T•92Ta I woe I Ns Decal F.MTI SW mg, * I Add • •ReTrove hare Value /kW Dews &MOW i fleas (GATT-OMO) Ea iSTAR Elevator State Images Tab The iSTAR Elevator State Images tab provides a means to change the default images used to indicate controller states (see Figure 207 on Page 514). These images appear on the Monitoring Station and change according to the state of the object that they represent. To Change an Elevator State Image 1. Double-click the existing image. A Wmdows Open dialog box appears allowing you to browse for a folder in which you have placed replacement images. 2. When you locate the replacement image, select it to add it to the image listing. 3. To restore the default image, right-click on the new image and select Restore Default. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 513 EFTA01226444 STAR Elevators Figure 207: ISTARElevator State Images Tab ALLJ .?J A 3‘,C ted ox< sz.e.ra re. tiara MY, Et. s." Iltscnown J ENOS P•10O, 000v r Metronome Web Lepel:re 610'45 CO Essen Tme NS IL Ce:43) Genoa, I San I Status I Noes I Gwas I up Dens Fais Sin rnmes I Sia• r„es• Conn ‘ai rce-"er 0 4. Click Save and Close to finish the iSTAR Elevator configuration and etum to the Hardware Pane. iSTAR Elevator Definitions The tables in the following sections provide definitions for the iSTAR Elevator editor tabs. ■ iSTAR Elevator General Tab Definitions on Page 514 ■ iSTAR Elevator Buttons Tab Definitions on Page 515 ■ iSTAR Elevator Status Tab Definitions on Page 516 ■ iSTAR Elevator Triggers Tab Definitions on Page 516 ■ iSTAR Elevator Triggers Properties on Page 517 ■ iSTAR Elevator Triggers Actions on Page 517 ■ iSTAR Elevator State Images Definitions on Page 517 iSTAR Elevator General Tab Definitions STAR Elevator General Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Identification 514 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226445 STAR Elevators STAR Elevator General Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Elevator Name Enter a unique name for this elevator. Description Enter a brief description for this elevator. Maintenance Click to put the elevator into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 2: Maintenance Mode for more information. Mode Enabled Select this check box to put the elevator online. For an elevator to be put online, it must selected. Location Controller The parent controller is displayed in this read-only field. Reader Click ri to select a Reader from the Reader browser. Floor Selection Mode No Input Click on No Input to indicate that no inputs are connected to the elevator buttons. However. the system cannot tell if a person presses a floor button after being granted access. Single Input Clickon Single Input to indicate that one input is connected to all buttons on this elevator. Click ri and select an Input from the Input list that displays. When a person presses an elevator button, the system detects an elevator button has been pressed, but cannot determine which button. Multiple Inputs Clickon Multiple Inputs to indicate that multiple inputs are associated with this elevator. Each elevator button will be connected to a different input. Select the inputs by clicking Elevator Buttons to open the Elevator Buttonsdialog box. When a person presses an elevator button. the system determines which button the person pressed. Button Activation Time Button Enter the interval at which the Elevator button activates. Activation Time (seconds) iSTAR Elevator Buttons Tab Definitions Table 120: STAR Elevator Buttons Tab Definitions Field Description Elevator Button Components Add Falls are added to Elevator Button Components byclicking Add. which adds an empty row to the grid. Remove Click the row selector . . then click Remove to delete a trigger. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 515 EFTA01226446 STAR Elevators Table 120: STAR Elevator Buttons Tab Definitions (continued) Field Description Floors T his displays a list of available floors for the elevator. Use Add to add a floor to the list and clicks to display the Floor selection browser. Outputs T his d splays a list of available Outputs for the elevator. Click( ... I to select an Output from the Output selection browser. iSTAR Elevator Status Tab Definitions Table 121: STAR Elevator Status Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Communication Status Unknown. Normal. Comm Fail Tamper Status True, False Admit Status Unknown, Admit, Reject iSTAR Elevator Triggers Tab Definitions Table 122: STAR Elevator Triggers Tab Definitions Field Description Add Fields are added to Elevator Button Components by choking Add. which adds an empty row to the grid. Remove Click the row selector ' . then click Remove to delete a trigger. Property Clickwithin the Property column to display browse( i button. When you click this button. the Property browser opens. presenting properties available for the controller. Click a Property to select it and add it to the column. Value Clickwithin the Value column to display a drop-down list of Values associated with the Property that you have selected. Clickon a Value that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column. Action Clickwithin the Action column to display a drop-down list of valid actions. Click on an Action that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column. When a Trigger is added, an Action must be configured in the Action column. This is the Action that willoccur when the object's selected Property recess the selected Value. As the Action is selected, the lower pane in the Triggers box will show a corresponding entry field, or group of entry fields, specific to the selected Action. Click the browse Mg button to select entries for these fields. Once the field (or group of fields) is oomplated, the Details oolumn will show information about how the Action was configured. Details The Details column displays information about how the Action was configured. This field is read-only. Schedule Click within the Schedule column, then click® to select a Schedule that you want to associate with the trigger. Schedules are created in the Configuration Pane. 516 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226447 iSTAR Elevators 'STAR Elevator Triggers Properties Table 123: iSTAR Elevator Triggers Properties ...ii i Property Description Admit Status For anyone of the Admit Status values (see the Value column drop-down list) you can choose one of the following Actions to Values are: create a Trigger: - Admit Activate Event -When this statusoccurs and the Schedule isActive (you can choose anySchedule). - Reject Activate Event Outside Schedule-An event is activated when this status occurs while the Schedule is Inactive (choose any Schedule). - Duress Activate Output -When this statusoccurs (only workswith the Always Schedule). - Noticed Admit Only these three Actions are supported for Admit Status. - Noticed Reject Comm Status 1. Choose a value for the Property from the Value column. Values are: 2. Select an Action from the Action drop-down list: - Normal See Table 124 on Page 517. - Comm For example. if you chose Comm Fail as a Comm State Status for which you want to define an action, you could then select Fail Activate Event if you wanted to send a command to a CCTVSwitch, then in Details, select theEvent that you wanted to activate when a Comm Fall status occurs. Tamper Status Values are: iSTAR Elevator Triggers Actions Table 124: STAR Elevators TriggersActions Action Description Activate Event Select an Event to activate when this status occurs. Activate Event Outside Schedule Select an Event to activate when this statusoccurswhile the Schedule is inactive. Activate Output Select an Output to activate when this status occurs. Must use the Always Schedule. iSTAR Elevator State Images Definitions STAR Elevator State Images Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Unknown 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 517 EFTA01226448 STAR Elevators STAR Elevator State Images Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description &A du IP Co-mnf a Ea Tampered T .111f 518 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226449 apC Elevators apC Elevators This section illustrates the configuration process for the apC - controlled elevator. The advanced processing Controller (apC), apC/8X, and apC/L are access control field panels that coordinate communication between the C•CURE 9000 server and the system security hardware. Elevator controls have not been evaluated by UL. NOTE The apC and apC/L Controllers have not been evaluated by UL. The apC Elevator editor includes the following tabs: • General • Buttons • Groups (this tab appears once you have created an Elevator Group) • State Images The function of these tabs is covered in the description of configuring the apC Elevator in the following sections. To configure an elevator controlled by a reader on an apC panel, you must first create and configure the following objects: 1. Floor (for more information see Floors Overview on Page 396) 2. apC panel(s) (for more information see apC Panel Overview on Page 296) 3. Readers, Inputs, Outputs Once these parent and dependent objects are created, you can continue the elevator configuration process: 1. Elevator name (for more information see apC Elevator General Tab on Page 520) 2. Elevator Buttons (for more information see apC Elevator Buttons Tab on Page 522) 3. Personnel Clearance for cardholders who will use the Elevator (for more information see the C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide). 4. Groups tab (see Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 28). Configuring a Floor for an apC Elevator You may create new floors or configure existing floors using the Floor folder displayed in the hardware tree. After you create the apC panel, you can configure outputs, readers, elevators, and buttons and associate the these objects with specific floors or elevators for access by authorized cardholders. When you create a Floor group, a Group tab will appear with the Floor General tab. For more information see Floors Overview on Page 396. Configuring a Floor for an apC Elevator 1. From the default Floor directory of the Hardware tree, create a new floor, or edit the name or description of an existing floor. a. Highlight the Floor folder, right-click and select New. A Floor dialog box opens. b. Enter a Name and Description for the new floor and click the Enabled box if you want to set the floor online. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 519 EFTA01226450 apC Elevators Figure 208: Floor Editor General Tab M Floor - apC - Fbor 3 A Sae and Coe .Vi Saoe and Nen tlarro repC, Flea 3 DeStnotica IErgneeng Floc 3 Partition: Deiout r Madneonate Mode Generatrouod Accessed Eta. mord Bevator Name 2. Click Save and Close. The new floor name displays below the Floors folder in the Hardware tree. Continue this creation process until your facility's floors, which you want to access via an elevator, have been assigned to a C•CURE 9000 Floor object. apC Elevator General Tab You can access the Elevator editor from a configured apC Elevator object in the C•CURE 9000 Hardware pane. To Access the apC Elevator Editor 1. In the C•CURE 9000 Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Click the apC Controller drop-down list and select Elevator. 3. Right-click the Elevator listing and click New or New Template. 4. If you have configured Elevators, double-click the Elevator listing for the selected controller to open a Dynamic View showing all existing Elevator objects (see Figure 209 on Page 521). 5. Double-click the Elevator in the list that you want to edit, and the Elevator General tab opens, shown in Figure 210 on Page 522. 520 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226451 apC Elevators Figu re 209: Hardware Pane apC Elevator Selection Hardware • 4 Eager Haseloan FLkaisys Cowan Fka ISELea Pau Cleve/a ROSES • r. a Real LCD M age Set po E.:,.16 REG • al Caw& Hake (PaacinDelafik Al attC O:amPot; ta CC RE Ma* • Commtel Etb; 5 Dan Ekrt a M Tatylat• Qo Reaclaa eaC Catclee 2 Bkg 5 To Configure Elevators 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane. 2. Right-click the Elevators folder in the Hardware tree and select New to create a new Elevator. The Elevator - General tab, shown in Figure 210 on Page 522 opens. 3. Enter a Name and description (for example, its location or function) for the elevator. 4. Select Enabled to put the Elevator online once you click Save and Close. The apC panel name is displayed within the Location box. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 521 EFTA01226452 apC Elevators F Igure 210: apC Elevator General Tab Sive Ova b . Sa.e ara re. tin In D•ovscr c2. 1.3 aextotxn I Ek.sor :o 6-onetrrc fl:o 1 fratled PPY1409 Ihisa r Manuflonas M061 Gres I ben I %Mai rtes I Ow Wiwi Atka I Stse "c" I Locabon Cndla ICC2 Buds v.: F:1 _Ll F bar Solocio, Mode r N2IPA $ Se* Ircut de: "fi ve SC FE1 r mob* vat, am , Annaba+ trove !IOW Acireter nme (rnivies saon:is 5. Click El to select a Reader in the Location area. The Reader list shown in the Reader browser is restricted to unassigned readers on the parent Controller. 6. Choose an Elevator Floor Selection Mode for the elevator from the listed options. The possible choices include: • No Input • Single Input • Multiple Inputs 7. If you choose the Single Input option, click the browse GJ button to select an Input from the Input browser. 8. Enter a Button Activation Time in seconds. 9. Navigate to the Buttons tab or click Save and Close. apC Elevator Buttons Tab Elevator Buttons can be created in the Elevator Buttons tab to specify which floors, inputs, and outputs are connected to elevator buttons. -am To Configure Elevator Buttons for Floor Access 1. From the Elevator editor, click the Buttons tab. The Elevator Buttons tab opens, shown in Figure 211 on Page 523. 2. Click the Add button to create a row under the Floors and Outputs columns. 522 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226453 apC Elevators 3. Click within the Floors column to display 0 and select a Floor from the Floor browser, shown in Figure 211 on Page 523, that you want to associate with the apC Elevator. Figure 211: apC Elevator Buttons Tab Floor Selection SavoM Om Sam and am Ira lecC enact RE 1.3 &wean: Awl 3 p EMUS Pinitim Oat r SIMINICO Erma ailn I SOM %Pm I UmDas Res I stsome. Eleotor Boar Coromm ",* Nnitpur Nedir ton Dem Mins to Grow, by here CtliMs to gm MO IL :kat Gmol Dia Float 1 Oda Floor I. Raring once Flea 3 Oclaa Emmanna Flaal :of Fka 2 Oa& Deoloproal Floor 2 ref Floor 1 Dedolt Enamoina tor 1 4. Click within the Outputs column to display 0 and select an Output from the Outputs browser, shown in Figure 212 on Page 524, that you want to associate with the apC Elevator. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 523 EFTA01226454 apC Elevators Figure 212: apC Elevator Buttons Tab Output Selection renal* Enorgerg Poe 1.3 A Ogees Saixecn sew' Inn F.X.,`,1 Nr" bap coins to bum, bv 1,e,* CloCk het* 1041W deft itt. .41Gass Goo. Walt PASS ass vat • Checulgd AEI • OdpiNgMI 5. Continue to add Floors and Outputs until you have finished creating Elevator Buttons for each floor that you want to manage with the apC Elevator. 6. Navigate to the Status tab or click Save and Close. apC Elevator Status Tab The Elevator Status tab (see Figure 213 on Page 525) provides a read-only listing of critical information about the operational status of the selected Elevator including: ■ Communication Status - displays the values Normal or Comm Fail. ■ Tamper Status - displays the values True or False. ■ Admit Status - displays the values Admit or Reject. 524 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226455 apC Elevators Figure 213: apC Elevator Status Tab ea s.0 rt 2 Ova ki ..Sa.e and re. inskcor,scr I aesavign Ek..wor Eroneetv Az. 13 r. Enetled Partbes, WWI r Munsano. Woo. Genr4 l &Ere Stan I Tram I Ow Defiled AS, l Stete says I Orrrc ut CCOYNSOC1001 SUNS 11.1-broan :roc. Sam hike dint Status ILllocmr, Navigate to the Triggers tab or click Save and Close. apC Elevator Triggers Tab You can create [riggers for apC Elevators using the apC Elevators Triggers tab. A Trigger executes a specified Action when a particular predefined condition occurs. When a Trigger is defined, the Actions available depend on the property selected See the following for information on apC Triggers: • Triggers Tab for apC Devices on Page 369. • Defining a Trigger for an apC Device on Page 370. • Removing a Trigger on Page 272. You can click Save and Close after configuring apC Elevator triggers, or navigate to the Status tab. apC Elevator State Images Tab The apC Elevator State Images tab provides a means to change the default images used to indicate controller states (see Figure 214 on Page 526). These images appear on the Monitoring Station and change according to the state of the object that they represent. To Change an Image 1. Double-click the existing image. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 525 EFTA01226456 apC Elevators A Wmdows Open dialog box appears allowing you to browse for a folder in which you have placed replacement images. 2. When you locate the replacement image, select it to add it to the image listing. 3. To restore the default image, right-click on the new image and select Restore Default. Figure 214: apC Elevator • State Images Tab Sa‘e ard Ova AI'S:feral*. pee Ixt Bea IX 1.3 aestracn Ekvalce lo e&aae•V R1.1. 13 r. Dvitied Pella Mat r Ilanmee• rer Gosilken so, I Mow I UserDelned Rib I &sewage' I lanruficarea‘ we. lUrkran :wow Silas Irer !Sad Staab Ithkrein 4. Click Save and Close to finish the apC Elevator configuration and return to the Hardviare Pane. apC Elevator Definitions Table 125 on Page 526 through Table 129 on Page 528 provide details about the fields and buttons on the General tab, Buttons tab, Status tab, Triggers tab, and State Images tab of the apC Elevator dialog box. apC Elevator General Tab Definitions Table 125: apC Elevator General Tab Definitions FlekUButton Description Identification Elevator Name Enter a unique name for this elevator. Description Enter a brief description for this elevator. 526 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226457 apC Elevators apC Elevator General Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Enabled Select this check box to put the elevator online. For an elevator to be put online. it must selected. Maintenance Mode Click to put the apC Elevator into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 2: Maintenance Mode for more information. Partition T his read-onty label shows what partition the elevator is in. If the system isnot partitioned, the label indicates that the elevator is in the"Defautt" partition. Location Controller The parent controller isdisplayed in this read-onty field. Reader Click n to select a Reader from the Reader browser. Floor Selection Mode No Input Select this option when no inputs are needed for the apC Elevator. Single Input Click(] to select an Input from the Input browser. Multiple Inputs Select this option when more than one input is needed for the apC Elevator. Button Activation Time Button Activation Time Enter the interval at which the apC Elevator button activates. (seconds) apC Elevator Status Tab Definitions Table 126: apC Elevator Status Tab Definitions Elevator Status Property Values Communication Status Unknown. Normal, Comm Fail Tamper Status True, False Admit Status Unknown. Admit. Reject apC Elevator Triggers Definitions Table 127: apC Elevator Triggers Tab Definitions Field Description Add F fields are added to Elevator Button Components by clicking Add. which adds an empty row to the grid. Remove Click the row selector . . then click Remove to delete a trigger. C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 527 EFTA01226458 apC Elevators Table 127: apC Elevator Triggers Tab Definitions (continued) Field Description Property Clickwithin the Property column to display a — 1button. When you click this button, the Property browser opens. presenting properties available for the controller. Click a Property to select it and add it to the column. Value Click within the Value column to display a drop-down list of Values associated with the Property that you have selected. C lick on a Value that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column. Action Clickwithin the Action column to display a drop-down list of valid actions. Click on an Action that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column. When a Trigger is added, an Action must be configured in the Action column. This is the Action that will occur when the object's selected Property recess the selected Value. As the Action is selected, the lower pane in the Triggers box will show a corresponding entry field, or group of entry fields, specific to the selected Action. Click ES to select entries for these fields. Once the field (or group of fields) iscompleted, the Detailscolumn will show information about how the Action wasoonfigured. Details The Detailscolumn displays information about how the Action was configured. This field is read-onty. Schedule Clickwithin the Schedule column. then click the browse[ button to select a Schedule that you want to associate with the trigger. Schedules are created in the Configuration Pane. apC Elevator Triggers Properties Table 128: apC Elevator T riggers Properties Property Description Admit Status For anyone of the Admit Status values (see the Value column drop-down list) you can choose one of the following Actions to Values are: create a Trigger: Admit Activate Event - When this statusoccurs and the Schedule is Active (you can choose any Schedule). Reject Activate Event Outside Schedule - An event is activated when this status occurs while the Schedule is inactive (choose any Schedule). Admit Duress Activate Output - When this status occurs (only works with the Always Schedule). Reject Only these three Actions are supported for Admit Status. Duress Noticed Admit Noticed Reject apC Elevator State Images Definitions Table 129: apC Elevator State images Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Unknown II 528 Chapter12 OCHRE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226459 apC Elevators apC Elevator State Images Tab Defin- itions (continued) Field/Button Description Active El Comm Fail IM Tampered CI C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 529 EFTA01226460 apC Elevators 530 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Con figuration Guide EFTA01226461 Index apC Add-On Board 303 8 Editor 347 8 Port Hub 221 General Tab 347 A Input Boards Tab 348 AC Power Fail input 160 Output Boards Tab 349 AC Power Fail input on GCM, defined 156, 158, 163 Star Coupler Tab 354 Accessing apC Comm Port 310 IP-ACM editor 285 Editor 310 iSTAR Cluster Editor 91 Network Connection 312 iSTAR Input Board Editor 204 Redirect Serial Port 313 iSTAR Input Editor 233 Serial Port 312 iSTAR Output Board Editor 208 State Images Tab 316 iSTAR Output Editor 242 Status Tab 316 iSTAR Reader Editor 249 Triggers Tab 315 ACM 159 apC controller configuring Add-On Board Tab 324 inputs/outputs 184 Configuration Summary 308 inputs/outputs on first, second ACM 197 editor 318 defined 118, 156, 184, 197 General Tab 319 ACM EXT Tab, iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port 192 Holiday Groups Tab 327 Activity Inputs Tab 322 monitor Outputs Tab 323 door 486 Readers Tab 323 Adding State Images Tab 330 Controller to a Cluster 93 Status Tab 325 Doors to a Group 29, 409 Triggers Tab 326 Elevators to a Group 503 Triggers Tab Definitions 371 Floors to a Group 401 apC Door Advanced Definitions 421 door General tab 411 configuration 457 Readers tab 413 doors State Images tab 417 components 463 Status tab 416 Hardware requirements 460 Timing tab 415 understanding 458 Triggers tab 416 advanced processing Controller 296 apC Elevator Alarms 465 Buttons tab 522 understanding, door 487 Configuring a Floor 519 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Index 531 EFTA01226462 Index Definitions 526 apCTime Zone, Changing 303 General tab 520 Aperio Reader I/O tab 266 State Images tab 525 Aperio RS-485 Board Status tab 524 General Tab 220 Triggers tab 525 Input Tab 222 apC Firmware Update 306 Readers Tab 223 apC i32 Input Board Aperio RS-485 Board Editor 221 Editor 357 Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor 220 apC 132 Input Board B 1-16 Inputs Tab 358 Battery Low Input 163 17-32 Inputs Tab 360 Battery Low input, defined 158 General Tab 357 Battery Low, External 156 apC 18 Input Board Boards tab General Tab 362 iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller 156 apC Input iSTAR Ultra Controller 179 General Tab 332 State Images Tab 335 C Change apC Input Board timing Status Tab 334 options 482 Triggers 333 Cluster Communications Overview 80 apC Input Editor 332 Cluster Configuration and Distributed apC Output Management 80 Editor 336 Communications Fail Input 263, 268 General Tab 336 Components State Images Tab 338 advanced door 463 Status Tab 337 Configuration apC Panel DSM guidelines 471 Communications Tab 321 Configuration Overview for iSTAR Controllers 119 Overview 296 Configuration Protocol (DHCP) 144 apC Reader Configuration Summary, apC 308 Editor 340 Configuring General Tab 340 advanced doors 457 Input/Output Tab 341 Advanced Processing Controllers (apC) 295 Keypad Tab 342 apC Add-On Boards 325 State Images Tab 345 apC Door 410 Status Tab 344 apC Elevators 519 Triggers Tab 344 apC Inputs 322 apC Star Coupler Board Editor 365 apC Outputs 323, 336 apC Time Zone 300, 303 apC Reader 323 apC Time Zone Reports 303 apC Readers 340 apCFime Zone 320 532 Index C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226463 Index C•CURE iSTAR Clusters 79 Door 405 C•CURE iSTAR Controllers 117 Door Template 406 Floor 397 Elevator 124, 501 apC Elevator 519 Elevator Template 125, 501 iSTAR Elevator 505 Floor 399 Holiday Groups for an apC Panel 327 Floor Template 399 132 Input Board, apC 348 iSTAR Cluster 88 iSTAR Clusters 87 iSTAR Controller 124 iSTAR Doors 427 New Hardware Folder 32 iSTAR Input 235 New Object in the Hardware Tree 23 iSTAR Input Boards 205 Object from a Template 36 iSTAR Output 244 Template 34 iSTAR Output Boards 210 Creating and Using iSTAR Readers 250 iSTAR Cluster Template 89 multiple DSM 467 New Hardware Folder Template 32 multiple RTE 467 Customer Support Center 18 R48 Output Board, apC 349 Customizing State Images for an iSTAR Device 274 Reader LCD messages 389 Considerations D Defining a Trigger for an iSTAR Device 271, 370 special Deleting timing 484 Door 407 Context Menu Elevator 502 Controller Dynamic View 127 Floor 400 Controller 167, 173, 181, 197 iSTAR Controller 126 configuring Object in the Hardware Tree 24 Hardware MAC address 145 Template 38 naming 145, 313 Device overview of 119 lock time zone 145 release. See Lock 463 Dynamic View Context menu 127 Distributed Cluster Management 86 Controller dialog box Door ACM advanced configuration 457 defining security objects connected to 184,197 alarms ACM tabs understanding 487 ACM Inputs/Outputs, configuring 184,197 Area 448 ACMs, configuring 184,197 Edit 407 defining security objects 167, 173, 181, 184, 197 Modify 407 Controllers and Dependent Objects 31 monitor activity 486 Creating Overview 404 apC Controller 318 Template 406 Controller Template 125 Door tab, apC 411 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Index 533 EFTA01226464 Index Doors Firmware Update advanced iSTAR 130,132 components 463 Floor hardware requirements 460 Add to Group 401 understanding 458 Creating 399 double leaf 470 Deleting 400 Double leaf doors 470 Modifying 400 Double Swipe, Schlage Wireless Readers 432 Overview 396 Downloading Cardholder and Configuration Inform- Set Property 400 ation 84 Floor Template, Creating 399 DSM configuration guidelines 471 GCM E defined 118 Editing a Template 35 features 118 Editing an Elevator 126 General tab Editing an iSTAR Controller 126 iSTAR Elevator 506 Editing Doors 407 Grace Elevator 124-126 timing 482 Configuration Overview 500 Group Deleting 502 Add Floors 401 iSTAR 505 Adding Elevator 503 Modifying 502 Groups Tab Set Property 503 Hardware Devices 28 Tasks 501 Guidelines Elevators DSM configuration 471 Viewing a list of 502 Emergency Support Hours 18 H Hardware Encrypted Cluster 80 advanced door Encryption Setting 94 requirements 460 Establishing a Secondary Communications Path 85 Hardware Folders 31 Establishing Connections Via the Primary Com- Hardware MAC address, specifying for munications Path 83 controller 145 External Battery Low 156 Hardware Templates 34 External Battery Low Input 158 Hardware Tree 22 F Objects 22 FAI Key Supervision State 161,163 Tasks 23 FAI Modes 161 HUB Number 221 FM Relay Control 160,163 FM Supervision State 160,163 Index 1 -16 (iSTAR eX) 164 Features of apC Panels 296 Index 1 - 8 (iSTAR Edge) 164 534 Index C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226465 Index Input. Push Button 263 Miscellaneous Tab 101 Inputs and Mann Device States 299 Status Tab 114 Intrusion Zone, iSTAR Door 448 Triggers Tab 107 IP-ACM Editor 285 iSTAR Controller 152 1P-AGMs tab 282 Editor 137 iSTAR General Tab 141 context menu 127 State Images Tab 152 Controller Editor dialog box 137 Tasks 124 Groups Tab Definitions 29 iSTAR Controller Status Tab 149-150 Inputs iSTAR Door configuring 205 Areas & Zones Tab 431 State Images Tab Definitions 274 Double Swipe Tab 432 Triggers Tab Definitions 272 General tab 427 iSTAR ACM Board State Images tab 442 ACM Ext Tab 201 Status tab 440 Editor 184,197 Timing tab 429 Inputs Tab 198 Triggers tab 438 Outputs Tab 199 iSTAR Edge Readers Tab 200 COM tabs iSTAR ACM Board General Tab 197 configuring 167, 174, 176 iSTAR Aperio Reader COM1/COM2/COM3 Tabs 167 I/O tab 266 Inputs iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Board configuring 162, 165, 170 General Tab 220 Inputs tab Input Tab 222 AC power fail 160 Readers Tab 223 Low battery input 160 iSTAR Classic/Pro Reader Tab 169,171 AC power fail input, defined 158 Wiegand Tab 169 Boards Tab 156 iSTAR Elevator 505 Configuration Summary 119 Buttons tab 510 Low battery input, defined 158 Configuring a Floor 505 iSTAR Cluster Definitions 514 Area Tab 102 General tab 506 Cluster Tab 99 State Images tab 513 Communications Tab 95 Status tab 511 Editor 91 Triggers 512 Editor Tabs 91 iSTAR eX Encryption Tab 105 COM tabs General Tab 93 configuring 167, 174, 176 General Tab Definitions 94 COM1/COM2 Tabs 173 General Tab Tasks 93 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Index 535 EFTA01226466 Index Controller dialog box General Tab 226 COMM1 & COM2 tabs Input Tab 228 Inputs/Outputs, configuring 167 Readers Tab 229 Inputs iSTAR PIM-485 Reader configuring 162, 170, 172, 201, 210 Editor 260, 264 Inputs tab I/O tab 261 AC power fail 160 iSTAR Reader AC power fail input, defined 156 Editor 248 Low battery input 160 General Tab 250 Readers tab 171 I/O Tab 252 iSTAR eX Cluster Keypad Tab 253 State Images Tab 115 State Images Tab 258 iSTAR eX/Edge Status Tab 256 AC power fail input, defined 163 Triggers Tab 255 Inputs Tab 159 iSTAR Ultra Low battery input, defined 163 COM tabs Outputs Tab 164 configuring 182 Status Tab 150 COM1/COM2 Tabs 181 Triggers Tab 147 Controller dialog box iSTAR Firmware Update 130 COMM1 & COM2 tabs iSTAR Firmware Update (Dialup) 132 Inputs/Outputs, configuring 181 iSTAR Input iSTAR Ultra ACM Board RS-485 Tab 187 Editor 232 iSTAR Ultra Controller Status Tab 151 General Tab 236 iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Board RS-485 Tab 291 Intrusion Zone Tab 237 iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port ACM EXT Tab 192 State Images Tab 239 iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Readers Tab 190 Status Tab 239 Triggers Tab 239 L Language iSTAR Input Board changing for Reader LCD Messages 393 Editor 203 Lock General Tab 206 release device 463 iSTAR Output sensor device 463 Board General Tab 210 Lock Low Battery input, Aperio reader 268 Editor 241 Lock State Jammed 268 General Tab 245 Low battery input, defined 163 State Images Tab 246 Low battery input, iSTAR Edge 160 Status Tab 246 Low battery inputiSTAReX 160 iSTAR Output Board Low Battery input,wireless reader 263 Editor 208 iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor 226 536 Index C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226467 Index M O MAC address 119 Onboard Battery Low 160,163 obtaining Onboard Ethernet with Configuration Utility; from GCM Adapter field 144 label 145 IP Address 146 Main Board IP Address #1 145 ACM, configuring 159 Use DHCP 145-146 Inputs 158 Optional Boards 300 Battery Low input, configuring 158 Options Power Failure input, configuring 158 shunt timing 484 Tamper input, configuring 163,179 timing 481 Output 159 change 482 configuring Ouput Editor 241 Output on GCM 159 Outputs 299 Tamper input 160 Tamper input, configuring 158, 199, 292 P Partitions 21 Maintaining Communications 84 PCMCIA Ethernet Adapter Installed 146 Managing PCMCIA Ethernet IP Address 146 message traffic 487 Physical Key 263 Manual Lock Override 263 PIM-485 Board Editor 227 Master and Cluster Members 81 PIM-485 Board Editor, Input tab 228 Message PIM-485 Board Editor, Readers tab 229 managing traffic 487 PIM-485 Reader editor 260, 264 Mini Star Coupler 373 PIM-485 Reader I/O tab 261 Board Editor 373 PIM Number 228 Modifying a Door 400, 407 PIMType 227 Modifying an Elevator 502 Port Power RS 485 Port 1 Input 179 Monitor Primary Communications Path 84 door activity 486 Push Button, Schlage Locks 263 Motor Stall Input 263 Multilingual User Interface (MUI) Editor 393 R Multiple Reader LCD Message Set editor 383 DSM configuration 467 Reader LCD Messages RTE configurations 467 changing the language for 393 Editor 383 N accessing 383 Networked iSTAR Controllers (Clusters) 81 fields/buttons 384 Networks Editor buttons 384 GCM connections 118 Editor fields 384 Non-Encrypted Cluster 80 Message Details 385 Normal Support Hours 18 overview 382 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Index 537 EFTA01226468 Index selecting for an apC controller 320 Door 409 selecting for an iSTAR controller 143,145 Elevator 503 Set property 392 Floor 400 supported ASCII characters 382 Input 130 tasks 388 Output 130 configuring 389 Reader 130 creating 388 Reader LCD Messages 392 creating a template 388 Setting Up the Primary Communications Path 84 deleting 391 Shunt viewing 389 timing options 484 viewing Special context menu commands 390 timing considerations 484 Readers 299 Special Purpose Refreshing the Hardware Tree 30 Inputs Release Onboard Battery Low, configuring 164, 166, device 168-169, 171, 173, 177, 183, 186, 188, lock. See Lock 463 290-291 Removing a Controller from a Cluster 93 Star Coupler Removing a Trigger 272 Outputs Tab 367 Renaming a Hardware Folde 33 Readers Tab 366 Requirements Unsupervised Inputs Tab 367 advanced door STAR eX and iSTAR Edge Configuration Summary 121 hardware 460 State Images tab 152, 239, 246 Restore a Default State Image 275 iSTAR Devices 274 RM LCD Messages 382 iSTAR Elevator 513 RS-485 Readers, iSTAR Ultra 190 Status tab S iSTAR Classic & iSTAR Pro 239, 246 Schlage PIM-485 Board iSTAR Elevator 511 General Tab 226 Input Tab 228 T Tamper 158, 163, 179 iSTAR 226 Tamper inputs 160 Readers Tab 229 Telephone Technical Support 18 Schlage PIM-485 Reader Editor 260, 264 Template, deleting 38 Schlage Wireless PIM board 173 Templates, Hardware 34 Schlage Wireless PIMs Tab 153 Templates, Viewing a List of 39 Schlage Wireless Readers The Hardware Pane 19 configure 120,122 The Primary Communications Path 82 Do not support Double-Swipe 432 The Secondary Communications Path 85 Security objects, defining 167, 173, 181, 184, 197 Time Zone 145 Set Property entry field 143 Controller 130 538 Index C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226469 Index setting, changing controllers 145 Doors 408 Time Zone, apC 300 Elevators 502 Timing Floors 400 grace 482 Hardware Tree Objects 24 options 481 Templates 39 change 482 shunt Wake on Radio 228 options 484 Wieg,and Proximity Star Coupler Editor 376 special considerations 484 Wiegand/Proximity Star Coupler 356, 376 understanding 481 Wireless DSM 262 Triggers tab 147 Wireless REX 262 apC Devices 369 WPSC 356, 376 apC Elevators 525 iSTAR Devices 270 iSTAR Elevators 512 Triggers Tab Definitions apC 371 iSTAR 272 U Ultra ACM Board RS-485 Ports 187 Ultra IP-ACM Board RS-485 Ports 291 Unassigned Folder 86 Understanding advanced doors 458 door alarms 487 timing 481 Understanding C•CURE iSTAR Controllers 118 Update Firmware 131-132, 306 Use as Primary Ethernet Adapter 146 Use DHCP 146 User Defined Fields tab 151, 329 Using Drag and Drop in the Hardware Tree 27 Using Set Property for an iSTAR Controller 130 Using Templates for Inputs, Outputs, and Readers 37 Using the Hardware Pane 20 V Viewing a list Controllers 127 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Index 539 EFTA01226470 Index 540 Index C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide EFTA01226471